Professional Documents
Culture Documents
A Sanskrit Grammar For Beginners 1000213438
A Sanskrit Grammar For Beginners 1000213438
SANSKRIT
GRAMMAR
BEGINNERS,
FOR
IN
DEVANAGARl
AND
ROMAN
LETTERS
THROUGHOUT,
BY
F.
MtiLLER,
MAX
FOREIGN
MEMBER
OF
THE
FRENCH
M.A.,
INSTITTTTB,
ETC.
SECOND
EDITION,
REVISED
AND
ACCENTUATED.
LONDON:
LONGMANS,
GREEN,
1870.
AND
CO.
T.
COMBE,
M.A.,
E.
PRINTERS
B.
AND
GARDNER,-
TO
TH.E
UNIVERSITY.
E.
PICKARD
HALL,
PREFACE
TO
J.HE
FIRST
THE
which
present grammar,
believed
all the
contain
to
EDITION.
intended
chiefly
is
excluded, for it is
dialect should
be
and
or
his
All allusions
likewise
Gothic, have
useful
beginnerof
the
peculiarto
any
the
to
the
been
for the
been
Vedas
the
difficulties of that
one
who
such
firm grasp
have
has not
it
as
of the
entirely
ancient
fullymastered
fixed
was
by
Panini
in Greek, Latin,
however
apt
are
esting
inter-
deprive
to
grammaticalsystem
alone
India, which
study both
reading.
the
student, they
ancient
of Sanskrit
of his
years
cognate forms
to
advanced
language of
three
is
beginners,
student
suppressed,because,
solid foundation
or
ordinarySanskrit
successors.
and
that
approachedby
of the
the grammar
desirable
not
that
information
for
of Sanskrit
and
form
can
Comparative
of
Philology.
The
principal
objectswhich
two
have
this grammar,
correctness, the
regardto
hope, without
of Sanskrit
presumption,to
which
grammar
Benfey, Flecchia,
and
more
and
than
to
if
adapt
one
work.
difficult to be correct
to re-arrange,
them
follows
as
can
can
on
to
the
so
as
closely
The
is,in itself,most
will
readilyadmit
perfect;and
that
there
onlysay
elaborated
have
who
is
grammar
2
of Colebrooke's
point,if one
collected
current
the
by
vours
endea-
by Panini,
in
Europe,
system of native
of their technical
whole
those
in self-defence,that it
minute
Colebrooke,
no
Bopp
of the intricacies
high standard
grammatical system
grammaticalsystem
of
If I may
of Colebrooke.
every
With
the grammar
I have
posing
com-
cleared up by Bopp,
partially
hardly flatter myself to have
correctness, the
but
while
correctness.
a few
simplified
have
were
and
been
grammar
others, I
regardto
reached, with
has
view
kept in
clearness
chief model
regardto clearness, my
with
been
I have
native
tested
in any
nology.
termi-
grammarians
P"ninTs
work,
language
that
PEEFACE
iv
vie with
could
wonderful
the
of
beginners.While
of
mechanism
unrivalled
But
grammaticalrules.
THE
TO
of his
that
as
of P"nini
all to
not
the wants
materials
of the
and
of
system is,it is
Englishstudents,least of
availingmyselftherefore
eight books
the
as
in their works, in
order
with
I have
the
judgment
engaged
in
of which
may
onlywish
*
The
of those
who
be
counted
it to
view
of
be
understood
that where
made
the work
facilitating
the very
names
at first sound
may
Thus
by
indicates
name
somewhat
the
by
being
students
hundreds
left out
terminologyhave
of the learner.
called each
but
I have
in the usual
of
fortune
language
longerby tens,
no
as
trouble,
unnecessary
though the
leave
is not, I must
what
practicalteaching of
the
of much
and
and
grammar
solelywith
the ten
of the
memory
too
is essential in Sanskrit
the
student
to
overwhelm
to
not
instead of
f.
rules
made
been
numbering
the character
uncouth,they are
class ;
only
names
how difficult
it is to remember
or
Optative.
The
of
names
it
Aorists,
was
were
much
preferto
this distinction
because
the six
make
or
change in
forms
seven
Second
placeto
t
In
mere
the
Aorists
have
become
the established
latter
almost
to
be
more
Second,and
seemed
tell their
own
to
intelligible
Preterite.
If it
grammaticalnomenclature,I should
the First Aorist;the former
the Second
primary
proper
names,
and
and
simple tense.
will not
But
First
easilyyieldtheir
argument.
of Leipzig alone, as
University
Sanskrit,
previousto
Brockhaus
the
in order to
many
as
fiftypupilsattend
acquirea knowledge
every
year
of the elements
Professor
Curtius.
of
EDITION.
FIRST
contained
exceptions,
or
have
European, I
done
more
less
language. Thus,
rules
the
on
after mature
so
mention
to
two
or
should
like kim-vdn
vat
same
givingthe
be
have
preceded
instead of mat.
endingin
I did
so
because,
partly
m,
be easy to discover
it would
occur,
the
("187),I
mat
though the
m,
few bases
or
of the Sanskrit
when
cases,
employment
endingin
always take
but, at
complete,
of the anomalies
one
native
consideration,deliberately
more
if
whether
grammars,
completeto the
statement
bewildering
the
preferring
time,
in other
the
why here
clashingof two
true,
be
too
reason
was
no
said to
might
be
exceptionsmay
involve an
actual misrepresentation,
and that a pupil
kim-mdn
misled to form such words
and kim-yati.
as
But
this
the
student
be
avoided
is
likelyto
cannot
who
forms, will
consult
rules
of such
doubt
no
in
be
or
elementary grammar
an
with
in contact
come
advanced
sufficiently
and
the
such
to
be
and
dite
recon-
able to
of
explanations
his
commentators.
My
fear is that, in
own
erred rather in
therefore
such
in the
rules
grammar*,
whether
be
in
table
be
may
and
certain
to
give
elaborate
like those
safelyleft
I have
the
works
contained
Here
asterisk all
an
first course
and
from
foretaste of what
of Sanskrit
332
bases
reader
should
Panini, simply in
he
may
expect in
of reference
of the nominal
In the second
with
placesinformed the
or
passedover quickly,
introduced
are
of native
in
in
little. I have
givingtoo
marked
out
be
memory.
student
in
different
in
portionsmight
than
of contents
committed
to
carefully
" 103, a few extracts
order
the
as
much
givingtoo
I have
writingan elementarygrammar,
only.
in i and
The
somewhat
#, from
paragraphsare printedin
"
220
smaller
elaborate
to
" 226,
type.
PEEFACE
vi
became
TO
partlybecause
necessary,
in
THE
no
had
grammar
the different
TIS
the
examine
they should
intricate
succeed
better than
of
elements
native
European
of Sanskrit
which
trouble
the
have
weighed
to
and
to the great
obligations
marians
gramI
to
not
ungratefulwere
be
assistance
scholars.
which
the
works
of
and
Forster,
his
can
I have
derived
from
first acquaintancewith
My
gained from
was
judgment,if hereafter
the
done, in unravelling
scholars *.
acknowledgingmy
acknowledgeas fullythe
the works
will take
I have
India, it would
of
*t%^ra
lenient in their
most
argumentationsof
while
But
who
of evidence
mass
same
those
that
I know
say,
native
Bopp's grammar.
the
Those
of Colebrooke,
predecessors,
appreciatethe advance made
and in lighting
the difficulties,
explaining
up, if I
of the Sanskrit language.
say so, the dark lanes and alleys
may
I doubt
whether
Sanskrit scholarship
would
have flourished as
it has, if students had been obliged
from
to learn their grammar
Forster or Colebrooke,and I believe that to Bopp'slittle grammar
is due a great portionof that success
which has attended the study
of Sanskrit literature in Germany
Colebrooke, Carey,Wilkins,
and Forster worked
of each other.
Each
derived
independently
in
by Bopp
his information
to compose
Sanskrit
printedsheet
To
new
and
are
declension
this is corrected
On
the
same
the
same
commentators,
from
informs
be
two
of
nouns
in the
misprintswhich
in i and tt.
and
Corrigenda,
disturb
hopelessly
On
page
the
and
saving of
that
us
never
time
the
first
The
1795.
swerving argumentations
to be
informed
that in
136, 1. 7, read
rightreading is
or
page, 1. 13, insert "f after fa^IT,
grammars.
been the first
fire in
destroyedby
w^as
native
have
to
seems
there
chaspati
proper
have
and
for he
grammar,
of his work
those who
of Sanskrit
the
teachers
native
Among
from
^JNr^
instead of
found
on
the
^sffcl^
joinfanitrfl^tasnrK
FIRST
whole
however,
grammar,
Forster
time
mean
delivered
his MS.
in 1804.
But
Colebrooke's
EDITION.
In
1808.
had
to
it
publishedtill
not
was
vii
publishedtill 1810.
not
was
The
the
actually
William
first part of
No
who
grammar
was
grammar
grammarians
can
one
has not
such
as
few
scholars have
and
understand
the merits
appreciate
acquireda knowledgeof the
previously
so
valuable
many
of Wilson's
grammarians,and
*
of Colebrooke's
of the
Baft
interest.
have
and
other grammars
which
grammar
show
to Sanskrit
remained
There
that
he
matical
gram-
ship
scholar-
unfinished.
Bopp, but
also.
of this
I have
are
derived
some
consulted
tions
pornative
MS.,
givesto
class,which
possessedthe remainingportion
his list of verbs, with the exception
publishedby Colebrooke,
was
peculiar
Professor
useful task
Panini
should
work
owe
acquired
and
of Boiler in
of Flecchia
in Italian,each
both
to the
cause
found
elsewhere, and
proved useful
But
my
while
thus
See Wilson's
in
to the writer
of the
presentgrammar.
renderingfull justiceto
I am
predecessors,
and
Sanscrit
bound
and
to say, at
the
the
same
honest
labours of
first edition,preface,
EnglishDictionary,
p.
xlv.
viii
PEEFACE
doubtful
regard to
the
appealed to
as
as
is well known,
there
are
in
many
Sanskrit
ultimate
an
THE
or
of the
grammar
TO
of forms which
number
but
occur
if ever,
rarely,
literary
language. It is necessary, however, for the sake
to give these forms ; and if they are
to
systematic
completeness,
given at all,theymust be given on competent authority.Now
in the
of
be
it
might
hitherto
of the grammars,
of any
correctness
would
published,
never
other grammars,
discovered
soon
either that,with
strange
of
degreeof
in the
much
differ very
of Colebrooke
the
to
of my
any
and
Forster
materials
as
predecessors
Carey,
their
controlling
of
grammars
pointsof
Nothing
result,but
remained
to
they
native
The
almost
entirelyon
frequently
they go wildly
assistants,give
it would
seem,
power
any
frequent inaccuracies
Wilson
these
never
were
Sanskrit
in
be
perfect
accuracy, while
useful
of Professor
been
have
works
intended
as
the
pointed out
by
been
for
have
may
in
of
authorities
on
grammar.
fact,in order
of my
to
arrive at
grammar,
any
with
satisfactory
regard not
the
other
and
Wilkins
however
and
contested
and
with
by
authorities.
practical
purposes,
only to
an
and
but with
to appeal
impossible
authorityon doubtful points.
immediatelyafter,without,
wrong
others
them
difficultforms
the most
it would
evidently depend
who
suppliedto
their trustworthiness
"
FIRST
for rules that
and
might seem
a reference
predecessors,
This
I have
done, and
whole
on
of my
this work
been
in
differ from
to
P"nirii
to
those of any of
my
to other native authorities.
or
doing I
so
had
to
-write
re
nearlythe
bestowed
in vain.
authoritative references
where
even
EDITION.
onlyregret that
the whole
throughout
there cannot
be any
have
been
readers
I did not
of my
difference of
these
give
work*, because,
of my
trouble of
some
opinion,
have
pretend to
means
definite view
of the
meaning
grammaticalsystem of
which
and
his
else.
which
*wijdgri,
We
I shall
forms
The
successors.
have
may
the
rule
general
then we
exceptionsin the first book, and even
certain that exceptions
to these exceptions
may
somewhere
clear and
the
means
Here
of Panini
pointsat
that rules
grammariansis so peculiar,
scattered about in different
are
together,
group
partsof their manuals.
and
all
on
Hindu
should
we
arrived
give but
its Aorist
instance.
one
There
in the last,
are
by
not
is
no
occur
a
root
the
another
comes
Vriddhi
of final vowels
before
Againstthis change,however,
and this
secures
i) which prescribes
^ isham, i.e.v"uii(XM ajdgdrisham.
new
2,
rule is cited
(Pan.vn.
3,
85),
a special
exceptionfrom Vriddhi, and
"*W[jdgri
againas Wf^jdgar. As soon as the base has been
for
rule (Pan.vn.
2, 3),and
IJPTJjdgar,it fallsunder a new
is forced to take Vriddhi,until this rule is againnullifiedby Pan. vn.
changedto
2, 4, which
an
diate
Aorist that takes interme-
second
however,
exception,
edition.
PEEFACE
short
take
optionally
consonant, may
and
consonant
left,but
all not
to take
(Pan.vn.
short
(Pan.vn.
a,
7). This
beginning
no
option
2). However,
2,
is
vtin^jdgar
rule (P"n.vn.
special
base
Our
new
^r
2,
have
vtm^jagar,
^r, like
beginningand ending
a,
Vriddhi
are
this is not
even
ending in
^r
roots with
and
optionis afterwards restricted,
with
THE
TO
after
5)
2,
in the
couplet:
following
"r"r u
"
and
then
these,with
exception,
the
of ri into
change
to
wish
to
we
possess
of Panini, the
detract
from
the
who
Boehtlingk,
thirty
years
Panini.
ago, when
But
few
still less
publishedhis
of
us
text
Far be it from
editors,like
from
and
able to read
were
in
Siddhanta-Kaumudi,
of native
merits
semivowel
of critical accuracy
in the want
me
consists
difficulty
the
of
those
nearly
singleline of
notes
been made
in
of India.
The
commentary of Sayana
to the
Rig-veda has
shown
us
how
The
and
his commentators.
I believe,for
A
few
instances
of our ordinary
editions.
insecurity
as
well
^Mte
2,
39
Panini
as
the Sarasvati
n.
25, i,
The
40,
shows
that
(vm.3,92)is right
"
these
and how
forms
suffice to show
may
commentary
givesthe
criticaleditions of Panini
and
new
to Pan. vn.
Benedictive
yet
are
the
2,42,
Atmanepada
reference to Pan.
vil.
impossible.Again,if
wrong?
"
FIKST
EDITION.
agragdminiwith
using^ii'iifrfa
in
it is clear that he
with
dental
regardto
syllable,
the
in
extends
he
doingso
rightor
was
grammarian
every Hindu
in his Sutras,is eo ipso correct.
of faith with
Panini
in the last
prohibition
given in vm.
4, 34,
to other compounds. It is useless to
Upasargas,
whether
inquire
by
xi
Otherwise,the rules
identical with
compoundswith Upasargasare by no means
affecting
those that affect ordinarycompounds ; and thoughit may be right
to
from HJiifaPnpragdmini to tujinrnfnagragdmini,it
argue a fortiori
would not be right
to argue from mij^M
agraydna to inrR praydna,
But assuming^UMifHfH agrathis beingnecessarily
TRTCT praydna.
gdmini
be correct,it is
the
and
of Panini
of the
the MSS.
the
Prakriy4-Kaumudi,
who
my friend Professor Goldstticker,
KMk4
I consulted
-Vritti,and whom
of Vamana
to Pan.
which
vm.
of
men
say
on
was
these
avoid
carefully
faulty
examples
superior
knowledgeand
that I
escapedscot
pointout
not
am
free where
so
so
guine
san-
many
All I
so.
can
any mistakes
far forget
and I hope that I shall never
the
so
regarddue
to
truth
the declension
touching
attempt to representsimplecorrections,
as
to
of
nouns
far
of verbs,as matters
of opinion,
or
so
conjugation
such matters,
character of true scholarship
to appeal,
as
on
or
lower the
these
I need hardlyadd
explanations
to suppose
the trouble to
from
means
4, 13.
After these
as
he possesses,
though by no
source,
to
the
be traced back
the
the many.
friend Professor Btihler that he had
Hearingfrom my
Sanskrit Syntax,
based
grammarians,which will
portionof my grammar.
means
to the
opinionof
on
the works
soon
be
of Patnini and
finished
other native
I gladlyomitted
published,
that
by
of Krit,Unadi, and Taddhita suffixes,
do not properly
belong
If time and health permit,
sphereof an elementarygrammar.
The
rules
b2
on
the derivation of
nouns,
xii
PEEFACE
hope
the
publish hereafter,
to
Prakriya-Kaumudi
In
the
list
244-285,
the
Sarasvati.
in
certain
the
but
they
rules.
the
verbs
verbs
of
treatingtogether
those
that
those
take
the
pada,
that
lastly,those
that
the
I
verbs
have
selected
given
in
Sanskrit
of
grammar
hope
of
that
reference
have
the
My
kind
to
proper
friends
of the
them
to
those
which
interest
my
to
will
likewise
taking
each
Professor
Cowell
proof-sheets of
sincere
my
among
frequently
more
this
In
useful
as
verb
in
turn,
In
some
has
to
try
tenses
cases
he
practical
will
and
not
forms
exact
serve
moods,
manner
it will
the
to
points
some
purposes
by
references
find
to
by
particularform.
Professor
and
grammar,
MAX
have
Kielhorn
for which
thanks.
F.
PARIS,
visions,
subdi-
selection
student, in others
for each
warranty
and,
illustrate
to
illustrate
as
grammar.
the
best
as
occur
of its persons,
of this
Parasmai-
these
of
new
two
serve
voices,
Atmanepada,
student.
doubtful
when
guide
the
their
Anubhutisvarupacharya,
which
forms
rules
the
some
to
who,
and
Dhatupatha,
to
each
those
it will
exact
added
himself
express
the
to
been
revised
student,
those
to
making
Siddhanta-
the
of the
the
In
to
Appendix
verbs, but
for
account
peculiar
the
the
certain
exercise
preference
like
according
of
illustrate
to
serve
Panini's
arranged
Eamachandra
by
literature, and
only help
of
In
that
terminations
so
are
verb
in
voices.
both
rules.
grammatical
class
terminations
of
admit
Appendix,
an
and
that
given
the
of
Prakriya-Kaumudi
they adopt,
each
as
conjugate every
only
as
take
do
Nor
given
not
those
chapter
subject.
the
do
of the
treatise, the
have
grammars
order
group
this
on
but
EDITION.
separate
which
Dhatupatha,
grammatical
Kaumudi,
as
chieflyfollowed
These
the
FIEST
bearing
verbs
of
I have
pp.
occurs
THE
TO
MULLEE.
beg
to
|":
PREFACE
TO
JLHE
where
to
in
number
remove
in the
marks
of the
I had
corrected
and
been
greatest value
scholar
Panini
and
and
list of notes
whose
to
acquire
to
which
Pandits
the
of
these
rules
There
ancient
of the
invaluable
one
one
that
exist
system into
our
instance.
locative
rightin
gm^
except
and
it
and
has
^r
even
reason
physiological
that
#, in
been
be
doubt
no
to transfer
What
I shall
process
From
in
But
rule
still possess
that
exploringthe gigantic
have
we
the
our
own
is
spiteof
form
P"nini
the
Sanskrit
facts of
illustrate
to
as
Tpxpunsu
he is
locative
grammars
are
by
the
perfectly
pluralhas
we
first
maintained
for such
try
the
accidents
point of view,
his
for accordingto
objection,
general
*r
this
pumdn.
Anusvara, TJ*J
pumsu.
have
in
us
E^j^r4mas4strlobjectsto
pluralof
his
to
of
system
of
interpretation
can
system of grammar.
own
the
of the
European
intricate
in India
in
corrected.
which
have to contend
with,
we
difficulty
for them.
They keep true throughout to
which
not
school
Most
grammar.
and
does
old
all
grammar,
been
hopelessfor
the
able
having pointed
Rajaramasastri,
has
grammar
refinements
Sanskrit
is,however,
my
for
in
spiteof
been
Pandit
too
livingguides are
labyrinthof
all to
almost
seems
their
seem
may
of
in
of my
now
reviewers
familiaritywith
that
although some
Panini's
It
have
more
queries to
me.
also been
translation
of my
cases
German
gratefulto several
oversights,and most
these
I have
misprintswhich,
some
grammar
be useful, and
likelyto
overlooked
in the
Sanskrit
Panini, in all
to
of the accent.
references
of mistakes
taken, had
I feel most
edition of
my
new
authorityseemed
I had
care
of these
his
number
EDITION.
of additional
appeal to
an
introduction
the
SECOND
alterations
principal
consist
the
THE
that
change.
there
is
some
If then, after
kind
of
having
laid
PREFACE
xiv
down
this rule, we
blunder
avoid
to
dental
the ^5
to
ground
I believe there is no
; and
in these
In
appended
thus,
the
by
matical
gram-
except
committed.
In
of the
retention
of the
my
Panini's
loc.
in my
TJ*Jpumsu,
instead
termination
is
accordingto
pronunciation.
locative
the
mentioned
difficulties which
of g*j pumsu,
case
Anusvara.
an
reservation
same
for
generaltendency of
this
instance
one
the writer
of
have
would
be
the
ancient
written
is the
su
sounded
to
peculiar
contend
in
more
convince
I have
my
deviated
where
native
seem
from
to
the
have
placedmyself at
authorities, I have
weighed
the
of
not
advantages of
done
the
one
so
our
European
grammars,
OXFORD,
August, 1870.
of the
variance
with
without
having carefully
against those
F.
END,
may
Weber,
some
of the
system.
PARKS
the
that where
Professor
ordinaryrules
as
Sanskrit
the
has
grammar
fully
care-
fact remains
in order to show
Sanskrit
so
althoughthe
I have now,
by
in the general
plural,the
note
my
into ^ sh is
^s
and
authority,
thus the
though even
reallymeant
^ sh,
be
(Pan.vin.
from
seen
to P"nini's
of ip" punsu,
of the
Anusvara
be
change of
the
edition the
able to conform
I have
the
on
plur.is precededby
rule, been
and
(as may
grammar
rule
second
vowel
not
these simple
evidentlyoverlooked
less forward
in blaming Dr. Keller
been
instead of
example in writing^ punsu,
worded
therefore
had
have
to
sh after
Weber
would
33 pumsu.
or
not
grammar,
been
is radical,and would
the ^s
cases
having followed
with
Sanskrit
has
punsu,
changed into
he
rules, or
making
blunder
that
it, I wrote
59). Professor
*j su
simply commit
we
pumsu,
liable to be
for
EDITION.
n,
"c. ; but
3,
SECOND
yet write ^g
Colebrooke's,in which
order
THE
TO
MAX
MULLER.
other
TABLE
OF
CONTENTS.
PAGE
CHAPTER
I."
THE
ALPHABET.
The
Devanagari
The
Devandgari alphabet
Monophthongs
letters
and
Nasalized
vowels
Light
heavy
diphthongs
.12
.
"
i.
2.
3.
4.
Direction
How
of Sanskrit
write
to
the
alphabet
represented
5.
6.
The
the
by
Guna
De-
and
d, d
end
Signs
and
of nasals
No
Upadhma"niya
The
three
and
their
nasal
Consonants
1 1.
1 2.
Names
Vowel
and
beginning
without
words.
d,
vowels
same
followed
ing
correspond-
/, sh,
followed
and
by
Vowels
vowels
of consonants
17.
sign
8.
The
Virama
19^
The
signs
20.
The
for
used
for
as
stop-gap
List
of
of
Object
and
au,
by
The
occasioned
hiatus
final
and
.16
Sandhi
by
before
.16
and
.17
.
vowels
pound
com-
in d
.17
Sandhi
ending
e
or
or
prepositions
d, followed
by
.18
o
.
SANDHI.
OF
followed
The
Sandhi
of
ending
by
in
or
ri
of osJithah
Classification
.18
and
otah
Irregular compounds
The
Sandhi
of
vowels,
short, protracted
long,
final
"
18
.19
.
of indeclinable
words
indeclinable
words
Monosyllabic
Sandhi
A,
External
between
Internal
17
Pragrihya
or
Distinction
and
followed
RULES
use
any
.15
of
pronunciation
II."
by
Treatment
Prepositions
CHAPTER
vowels
Irregular
figures
.15
Unchangeable
consonants
Rules
similar
dis-
and
ai
Vowels
pause
Avagraha.
Numerical
by
o, followed
except
any
Combination
Vowels
and
.....
The
by
.14
followed
vowel
15.
d,
vowels
signs, initial,medial,
Consonants
followed
I,#, A,
of letters
Virama
by
.14
and
Vowels
s, h
13
vowels
diphthongs
before
14.
25.
the
and
.....
24.
of
meeting
Vowels
final
"23.
the
.13
different
semivowels
22.
at
hiatus
Vowels
tute
substi-
....
21.
vowels
Auusvara
.13
of
nasals
8.
6.
.13
Combination
letter It
Jihvamuliya
3.
Gunaof
Vowels
Vriddhi
of letters
7.
10.
circumflexed
.13
9.
.13
.
and
grave,
vowels
vowels
vandgari alphabet
Number
Acute,
letters
.
Sounds
and
12
.
of the
particled
19
19
.19
OF
TABLE
XVI
CONTENTS.
PAGE
"50. Particles
51. Protracted
unaffected
vowels
The
by Sandhi
unaffected
by
initial vowels
56
final consonants
eleven
ends in two
to their
cording
ac-
before
i.e.
quality,
approach,opening
JShoh
consonants
sonants
conunaspirated
59. Aspiratedand
eshah,syah
ending in
Nouns
Initial
Final
words
radical
medial
chh
chh
changeableto
"
ing
h,gh, dh, dh, bh,throwback
aspiration
their
sonant
initial
sah and
cording
ac-
to their
contact,
exceptions
place
5 7. Classificationof consonants,
and
Final
letter
sonant
Exceptionsin compound
consonants
Classificationof consonants,
58. Surd
radical
Pronouns
consonants
word
Final
.
53. Combination
55. No
itsmodifications
r, and
changed to
the combination
showing
of final with
54. The
Visarga,and
Visarga before
Sandhi
52. Table
on
initial g, d, d, b.
the
showing
Table
tion
combina-
60.
Changes
of
place,and
of
quality
....
Final
j,jh,n,
63. Final
64. Final
jtjh,n,
65. Final
t, th, d, dh,
of
Changes
68. Final
69.
(notsh)
quality
k, t, t,j" before
70. Final
t before
71. Final
may
73. Final
75. Final
Final
short vowel
in
into sh
Change
of
into sh in the
Change
of
duplicative
re-
....
from
Panini
Change
of
Change
of dh
into
on
tain
cer-
into sh
.
sh in
pounds
com-
firsts and
before s, sh, s
before
before
or
(notsh)
final
and
nants
conso-
kri,samskri
rdj,samrdj
final s
Verbal
Final
8.2. Visargaand
or
vowels.
d
and
No
SANDHI
hiatus
d, followed
by
....
before
Final
into dh
INTERNAL
OF
vowels
79. Final
before
RULES
Final
Sam
into
of
changes of
78. Mm
51.
pound
com-
Change
Extracts
prepositionni
....
and
77. Anusvara
Sam
....
74. Final
50.
in
syllable
k, t,t,p
the
before
or
after
seconds
76.
the
before I
72. Final n, n,
,./.
into
....
mdtra
""r
of
kshubhndti
Optionalchangesof n
before d, dh,n
into
Tripnotiand
Change
(notsh)
66.
of
before
into sh
into n,
Table.
before
and
of
change
or
Change
before
"
Nati,
placeaffectDentals,
of
Changes
changes
i,i, u, d, ri changed
y, v, r;
changed
Final
bases in d
to
iy,uvt ri, ir
ri, before
changed to ir
consonants,
or
fir
TABLE
XV111
OF
CONTENTS.
PAGE
169.
Usanas
.""
radical
ending in
B. bases
s ;
pindagras,supis,
sutus
.
Ahan
at the end
of
compounds
Ahan
at the end
of
compounds
Pdshan,
1.
Dis, dris,spris
2.
Nas
....
aryaman
Han
.....
Bases
.
3. Vis
in
in, dhanin
in
Participles
vas
in
Participles
ivas
in
Bases
.
tyas,gariyas
Miscellaneous
5. Dvish
7. Taksh
with
nouns
6. Prdchh
Maghavan
Dhrish
88
Svan, yuvan
4.
Ahan
Pipathis
compounds
....
in
Bases
Optional feminine
fevetavdh
8.
X/ihfguli
g.
Duh, ushnih
....
Anaduh
.
"\
'
'
10.
11.
Nah
Ap
.
Pums
175- Turdsdh
Div, dyu
I76-
Asan
*I77*
179-
with
bases ; A.
80.
181.
with
nouns
with
Nouns
Bases
The
in
184- The
three
.
and
at
bases,
and
nom.
Dyo
ace.
nasal in
duplicated
re-
2.
By
themselves
the end
compounds
189- Arvat
190.
Kiyat
191.
Bases
and
vat
1.
Honour
.
in an, man,
van;
rdjan,
Brahman,
divan
2.
nations
termi.
in I and
only,dhi,
bases
Polysyllabic
193-
Feminines
of bases of
nouns
in i and
Compounds
man
Monosyllabicbases
192.
van,
fern.
.
vadhd
.
and
masc.
in t and d,
bases
Polysyllabic
IM
arvan
dhi, krt,M
d, being feminine
ndman
an,
of
Bhavat, Your
188.
and fern.
masc.
and
mat
$, being both
ft
in i and
The
.
being both
....
Mahat
187. Bases in
in i and
B. At
of
participles
Monosyllabicbases
A.
in the
in
1.
base
verbs
186.
Bases
au
adat
ant;
of neuters, and
feminine
in ai and
o
any vowel
Bases
Bases
nasal in the
dual
except d
ending in
Bases
pratyach
182.
II.
two
Prdch
B.
vowels,
changeable
bases, adat
1
in
subdivided
.
Nouns
2.
Metaplasta
ending
178. Prasdm
I.
....
other
and
II. Bases
Ukthasds
,"
.....
ending
feminine
in
and
d, subhrii
in
syllabic
mono-
bases
.
..;
in i
.
TABLE
OF
CONTENTS.
xix
PAGI
#"227. Compounds
syllabicfeminine
and
228.
poly
Strt
230.
Bases in iand M,
231.
Kati
232.
Sakhi
233.
Pad
234.
235.
Bases
fern.neut.
109
Possessive pronouns
Reflexive pronouns,
PRONOUNS.
Personal pronouns
Sah, sd,tat.
Atistrl
masc.
VI."
229.
CHAPTER
bases in i
d, bahuJreyast
.
in
ending
127
.128
.128
.128
svayam
129
Atman
129
....
.....
in
fern,
ri,masc.
naptri,pitri
^
*
236. Kroshfu
237. Nri
238. II.
239.
Bases
Bases
in
endingin
and
d,
d,
iyam,
idam
Enam,
endm,
enat
and
masc.
fern.,
.
Tdvat
131
131
.
modified
ak
by
pronouns,
131
.
tddris"c.
132
"c
132
.....
132
sarva,
adjectives,
ADJECTIVES.
visva,"c.
Declension
of
242.
Formation
of feminine
243.
244.
Pdchakah, pdchikd
245.
Feminines
adjectives
formed
by
Ubhau,
.247. Irregularfeminines
248. Formation
of
249.
Degreesof comparison
250.
Tara
251.
lyas
tama, how
CHAPTER
added
.
ishtha,how
added
.
252. Exceptionalcomparativesand
superlatives
Adverbial
"286.
.134
its
134
.
optional
.134
.
its optionalforms
135
declension
.135
.
and
CONJUGATION.
137
passive
verbs
Passive
V."
NUMERALS.
The
"253.
Cardinals
and
declension
eka
cardinals,
of
and
Significationof
255.
CHAPTER
Panchan, shash,ashtan
258. Construction
259.
Ordinals
260.
Numerical
of cardinals
VIII."
and
tenses
.
persons
THE
140
.
CLASSES.
TEK
general tenses, in
classes
.140
.
Specialor modified,generalor
....
adverbs
138
139
and
Numbers
.....
Tri, tisri
moods
moods
thirteen tenses
254. Dvi
138
138
CHAPTER
137
yam
Vn."
Active
.134
plural
Dvitiya and
stantives
sub-
and
nominative
.134
at
any
its optionalforms
and
Pratharva
feminine
Pilrva
.133
ubJie,ubke
Ubhayah, yi,
246. Exceptional
feminines in t
base
.
and
130
.
.....
IV."
and
...
Pronominal
"241.
.130
Ka^chit"LC
.....
CHAPTER
.129
Compound
adah
asau,
Pronouns
129
Ifdhd
240.
Ayam,
Asau,
129
pronouns,e*AaA,
visvapd
*
neut.,
eshd,etat
.....
2.
Demonstrative
.....
and
other
unmodified
derivatives
.
295.
Division
.140
tenses
of verbal
bases
141
.
OF
TABLE
XX
CONTENTS.
PAGE
PAGE
"296.
Div, Chur
297.
divisions
sub-
division,and
.142
299.
II
IX.
CHAPTEK
302.
rules of
304.
305.
Guttural
306.
Double
.145
.146
.
initials
by
Medial
and
e,
ai
ai,o
are
cated
redupli-
are
by
au
Irregular reduplication by
Samprasarana
initial
Short
313.
Initial
by
two
314.
Initial ri
315.
Short
.148
initial i and
Nij,vij,vish
318. Mdjhd
319.
Han,
321.
Terminations
#343.
of
long
desideratives
sives and
Paradigms
171
.
.172
172
.
reduplicated
of the
.172
perfect
148
X."
General
or
"344.
cond
se-
GENERAL
unmodified
.150
Two
terminations,
of
classes
strengtheningor
.149
Regular conjugation
AND
WEAKENING.
of first and
.
STRENGTHENING
XII."
.149
.
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
divisions
324.
.171
long t
....
hi,ji,chi
Terminations
"323.
of
148
320.
322.
....
Periphrasticperfectof inten-
.148
.
liable
perfect
Periphrastic
317.
170
.
never
Optional insertion
.168
of i
171
to Guna
342.
168
.
intermediate i
Insertion
167
of i
#338.
340.
perf.
diate
interme-
when
Necessary insertion
The
pers.
be omitted
Optional insertion
.148
showing
#337.
3t 341.
.148
i must
339.
sonants
con-
.167
.
cated
redupli-
for the
Specialrules
in
.165
perfect
^"335.
163
.
diate
interme-
omitted
be
tenses
Specialrules
162
.
the intermediate
the
i must
.147
147
followed
omitted,
^"333.
146
omitted,
be
be omitted
i must
#336.
reduplicated
be
be inserted
in which
146
312.
must
Verbs
certain
i.
INTERMEDIATE
#332.
.146
by i, o and
.161
"* 334-
reduplicative
syllableis short
.161
.
it must
of the
vowel
thongs,
diph-
i,i,ri,u, d, ri,
it may
.146
.
311.
it
when
tenuis
by
XI."
when
.146
initials
Final
changed
.146
310.
how
When
"331.
perfect,
.
Aspirated initials
309.
ending in
reduplication
^46
303.
The
145
the
verbs
in the Hu
and
changed
Bases
CHAPTER
145
in d
how
330.
TION,
REDUPLICA-
General
308.
reduplication
and
Augment a
in
Keduplication
and
143
classes
160
base
TERMINATIONS.
"300. Augment
328. Weakening of
ending
329. Bases
143
classes
AUGMENT,
"
AND
301.
Kri
Rudh
Ad, Hu,
116.
Su, Tan,
a.
160
.141
classes
II. Second
298.
tions
termina-
weak
and
"327. Strong
I. First
#345TENSES.
verbal
base
Specialforms
and
of
weakening
.175
.
strengthening
weakening
certain bases
177
159
tenses
.
Reduplicatedperfect
325. Verbs
which
may
form
perfect
326. The
the
.
perfect
periphrastic
duplicated
re-
.159
159
.
XIII."
CHAPTER
.159
"346.
First and
347.
Four
348.
Rules
forms
second
AORIST.
aorist
179
.
179
.
.180
.
OF
TABLE
CONTENTS.
xxi
PAGE
*"349-
Rules
sives,"fec.
350-
at
352.
*
*
*
Weakening
ath
diphthongs
in d and
355-
Weakening
.....
.....
359-
ram,
360.
Rules
which
form
364-
ending in
365-
Roots
with
d, e, i,ri; dris
370.
Reduplicatedsecond
373374-
Compensation
Verbs
with
378. Verbs
*379-
aorist
ending in
tenses
of
the
endingin
Aorist
of verbs
ending in
Aorist
of intensive
and
Their
200
200
.201
am
.
.201
dictive
bene.201
optionalforms
.201
passive
Aorist
ay
desi-
and
Future, conditional,
.200
bases
ending in
.201
.
intransitive
passiveof
verbs
203
....
different
aorists
Aorist
Paradigm
....
199
The
Verbs
vowels
199
.200
consonants
Irregularreduplicatedaorist
the
passive
passive
Irregularforms
ending
and
Paradigm
aorist
derative
base
between
beginningwith
380. When
198
.198
of base.
penultimateri,ri
Paradigm
198
The
.
6vi,dhe
of reduplicative
syllable190
double
passive
be shortened
beginning
with
*377-
bases
Weakening
syllable
reduplicative
Verbs
198
PASSIVE.
of
....
375- Vowels
376.
bases
that cannot
and
terminations
Specialtenses
second
verbs
ay
XV."
General
The
Bases
Atmanepada
CHAPTER
187
only
369-
Shortening of
.197
the second
take
372.
fish
tensive
Causative, denominative, in-
Sam-
187
....
which
Verbs
the
take
....
Atmanepada
take
.196
SampraszU
197
prasarana
penultimatenasal
which
which
verbs
Benedictive
Roots
aorist
.196
197
Sds changed to
aorist
196
.196
rana
take
Other
363-
ri,rt
ending in d
361. Stish
*3""7- Verbs
ending in
in t, u,
195
.
.195
366. Irregularforms
of base before y
ending
Verbs
nam
Pa-
Atmanepada
Verbs
Yam,
.195
.
Verbs
Verbs
li
Mi, mi,
in ay
benedictive
Gam
Yam
.195
in benedictive
Han
Rules
.194
in
rasmaipada,strengthening
....
ending
354-
*358.
Bases
.193
Intermediate
357-
Benedictive
form
*35"5.
or
future
Periphrastic
beginningwith
Terminations
Roots
"
Rules
Conditional
intendesideratives,
for
forms
of
Optional forms
203
used
are
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
XIV."
PERIPHRASTIC
FUTURE, CONDITIONAL,
FUTURE,
AND
AND
BENEDICTIVE.
.
"381.
Future
XVI.
PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,
INFINITIVE.
Participlepresent
pada.
415.
"
Parasmai.
future Parasmaipada
Participle
203
204
TABLE
XX11
OF
CONTENTS.
PAGE
PAGE
of reduplicated
"416. Participle
fect
per-
Parasmaipada
#417.
^"447. Gerund
.204
Ghu
#"448.
of reduplicated
Participle
fect
perwith
449.
Verbs
of reduplicated
418. Participle
fect
per-
450.
Verbs
Atmanepada
451.
205
.205
.
211
hd,
of causatives
so, take
ending
final d
211
in nasals
211
ending in
Ve,jyd,vye
ri
211
211
'
419.
Participle
present Atmanepada
205
420.
Participlefuture
206
421.
Participlepresent and
passive
Atmanepada
future
participlepassive
Past
423.
XVII."
Verbal
.'
"
VERBAL
ADJECTIVES.
adjectives,
Kritya
in ta vya
Adjectives
in cmiya,
Adjectives
in ya
456. Adjectives
.206
.
terminations
I. The
Penultimate
with
.207
optional
Guna
.
.207
intermediate
with
Tvd
212
lost before
^430.
Final
nasal
and
^431.
Final
^432.
Roots
#433.
Final
^434.
Do,
tvd
n
so,
i.
before
tah
dropt
vowel
435-
rchh,and
changing v
to
changed
:fc 437.
#438.
Verbs
rana
take
208
or
441.
Intensive
442.
in
Participles
jfc 443.
444.
445.
Gerund
446. Gerund
formed
.215
Passive
of causative
215
217
219
verbs
of the
tenses
passive
219
219
XIX.
VERBS.
DESIDERATIVE
"
Desiderative
bases,how
469.
470.
participles
Desiderative
210
in ya
210
in tya
210
bases, with
Strengtheningof
or
intermediate
base
.220
220
#472.
Desiderative
or
weakening.
Bhu
220
.
as
verbs.
.221
.
desiderative
222
bases
Bases
bases,treated
473. Reduplication of
209
210
Exceptional strengthening
209
nah
jugated
con-
^"471.
209
verbs
220
220
without
209
bases,how formed
209
verbs
to
or
penultimate
verbs
added
VERBS.
Vriddhi
468. Desiderative
.208
Samprasa-
Adjectivalparticiples
Vat
.214
CAUSATIVE
bases,how
Guna
208
....
Desiderative
Causal
CHAPTER
"467.
nasal
439.
am
208
lose
440.
.214
or
.....
Causal
XVIII."
466. General
208
rv
208
take
which
208
to d
462.
465.
which
in
adverbs
#"436. Exceptionalforms
Verbs
of causative verbs
464. Conjugation
ened
length-
"*
andj
.214
*II.
207
; final chh,v,
chho
ch
207
/So and
and
tah
intermediate
dropt and
ai
"461.
207
terminations
tvd,without
th,ph; vanch,
....
II. The
214
tya
Infinitive in turn
CHAPTER
lunch
^429.
.207
.
Nasal
i and
Guna
without
.212
adjectives
changing final
460. Verbal
and
into k and
459.
.
^428.
458. Verbs
i and
Guna
^427.
intermediate
with
Tvd
in ya
.207
.
#426.
Exceptional verbal
^457.
and
tah
#424.
211
.
212
455.
.
211
454.
....
in tvd
Gerund
"453-
and
206
gerund
Mi, mi,
452.
CHAPTER
206
....
422.
di, li
....
in
and
dv
^t
474.
"*
476.
#477.
Internal
av
reduplication
Exceptionalforms
222
222
.222
.222
TABLE
OF
CONTENTS.
x\in
TABLE
XXIV
OF
CONTENTS.
PAGE
PAGE
Adverbial
IV.
"529.
compounds
Tan
242
Class
Class)
VIII
(Tanvadi,
272
Exceptional
530.
compounds
and
Parasmaipada
243
Atmanepada
Modifications
#531.
of
the
final
Verbs
letters
272
.
of
adverbial
compounds
Kri
243
Class
IX
(Kryadi,
Class)
.273
.
I.
Parasmaipada
Atmanepada
and
Verbs
.273
.
II.
Verbs
Parasmaipada
.274
.
APPENDIX
I.
III.
Verbs
Atmanepada
.274
.
PAGE
Ad
LIST
VERBS
OF
Class
(Adadi,
244-285
Class)
II
275
.
...
I.
Bhft
Class
Class)
(Bhvadi,
245
Verbs
Parasmaipada
.275
.
II.
I.
Verbs
Parasmaipada
245
Verbs
Atmanepada
.279
.
III.
Atmanepada
II.
Verbs
and
Parasmaipada
260
Atmanepada
Verbs
III.
and
Parasmaipada
Class)
VI
(Tudadi,
Class
and
Parasmaipada
.281
.
III.
Verbs
Atmanepada
.282
"
Atmanepada
and
Parasmaipada
Verbs
266
.
Itmanepada
Verbs
Parasmaipada
Verbs
Parasmaipada
III.
I.
II.
.265
.
281
.
Atmanepada
Class)
III
(Juhotyadi,
Verbs
II.
Class
265
.
I.
Hu
.263
Verbs
Tud
.280
Atmanepada
Verbs
283
.
.267
Rudh
Class
Class)
VII
(Rudhadi,
284
.
(Divadi,
Class
Div
Class)
IV
267
.
I.
and
Parasmaipada
Atmanepada
Verbs
Parasmaipada
I.
Verbs
.267
.284
,
II.
Verbs
Atmanepada
II.
.269
Verbs
Parasmaipada
.284
.
III.
Parasmaipada
and
III.
Atmanepada
Atmanepada
Verbs
.285
.
Verbs
269
....
(Churadi,
Class
Chur
Class)
270
.
Verbs
Parasmaipada
only
APPENDIX
.270
II.
Su
Class
(Svadi,
Class)
270
.
I.
Parasmaipada
and
ON
Atmanepada
Verbs
Parasmaipada
ACCENT
THE
IN
SANSKRIT
286-292
.
270
....
"II.
PAGE
INDEX
OF
NOUNS
293-297
.
Verbs
.271
.
III.
Itmanepada
Verbs
.271
.
INDEX
OF
VERBS
297-300
.
LETTEKS.
DEVANiGARI
THE
CONSONANTS.
VOWELS.
Initial.
Medial
nitial.
Medial.
Equivalent.
kh
ph
g
bh
f
m
n
(or k)
ch
chh(orM)
j (or 9)
jh
ri
(or ri)
n(orri)
(or t)
th
(or s)
(or th)
sh
(or d)
dh
(or dh)
(or
n}
TT
(or m)
(or m)
vfil
ai
th
(or h)
dh
(Jihvamuliya),
(Upadhmamya),
au
Sometimes
represented
in
the
Veda
by
Sometimes
represented
in
the
Veda
by
x
"
CHAPTER
I.
THE
"
SANSKRIT
i.
is
for
Note
employed, is
in cities.
(Pan.
the
employment
from
Sanskrit
not
mentioned,
Sanskrit
called
iv.
from
of the word
into
in
Malva.
Mason's
Memoirs
been
the
from
Aramaic
which
changes
branch
since
the
in
inscriptions
But
while
proved
the
with
to
scientific
of Tibet
Semitic
and
which
It is
old
explain
of
the
has
invented, in
usual
sense
traces
discoveries
and
of the
may
through
growth
still
it the
bring
modern
of
to
an
real
yet
ad
Thomas,
of
that
the
or
one
is the
I.
most
The
alphabet.
ancient
into
Indian
Indian
word.
ancient
this
that
Indian
in
back
34^-350.)
pp.
be
about
Asoka,
or
is found
in the
the Arianian
of
coins,
closelyconnected
Aramaic
with
ever,
letters,how-
experiencedfurther
of
and
have
must
we
the
Phenician
links
Indian
alphabet can
be
which
is
in
the
alphabets,as
n.
p.
42.)
it is to
which
with
well
to
To
gradually, and
ideographic,stages.
by
found
of
as
any
admit,
impossible. Alphabets_were
formed
were
soil ; and
connected
The
manner
satisfactory
vol.
is
alphabet
They
Indian
alphabets.
(See
Could
Kapurdigirialphabet.
alphabet,
traced
been
coins
of all other
source
Nicaea.
or
Kapurdigiri,and
of
Hebrew
types
may
alphabet
rise of Buddhism.
that
as
origin,and
alphabet
intermediate
Devanagari,
Ancient
of the most
more
alphabetwhich
same
of the
on
of
Nagara
Caucasum
the
to
The
earlier,syllabic
or
to
is
Beghrami?
anterior*
letters
native
for
Devandgart
(See History
vol.
Antiquitiesby Thomas,
of
the
the
alphabet
light
given,
of
name
Alexandria
as
the
second
as
phonetic alphabetlfalways
point back
such
of
author
Buddha, translated
Palmyrenian inscriptions,have
(Prinsep'sIndian
the
native
Phenician
Semitic
not
alphabet.
Semitic
for
is the
is
Ndgarl,
first practised
as
ancient
any
life of
(a
alphabets
alphabets.
of the
some
and
writing
from
called
been
more
is the language
1'Inde, p. 298.)
is the
the
or
have
Hindi
where
India
clearlyof
model
which
Burmah,
prototype.
nth
in the main
precision, the
and
in
Semitic
the
as
transition
inscriptionof Girnar,
those
and
primitive types
order
Deva
different
Egyptian
served
more
the
such
writingare
in two
the
from
they
gods)
with
adduced
Lalita-vistara
list of
equivalent of
an
met
of
to left.
of
know
we
to
recourse
right
the
sur
Greeks,
as
been
of Kapurdigiri,
inscription
is written
the
written
are
of the
meant
specimens
These
B.C.
by
the
commonly
the Brahmans.
the art of
mean
Prinsep's Antiquities,ed.
inscriptionshave
authentic
alphabet should
Albiruni, in the
by
in
have
Devanagari
250
intended
(Reinaud, Memoire
earliest
be
the
might
In
D.), where
A.
(bhagdrdma, abode
Beghram
No
76
it
unless
transactions
Devandgari.
Chinese
common
Why
city,it
alphabets are
in all
nagara,
No
128.)
2,
Indian
but
respectiveprovinces.
of the
Hindus
Devanagari alphabet;
the
modern
in their
Ndgart
by
Literature, p. 518.)
current
other
simply Ndgarf.
If derived
is unknown.
as
the
means
current
and
writing Sanskrit
Devandgarf
"
with
properly written
ALPHABET.
one
the
be
There
hoped
alphabet
of the
purely
are
that
of
leading
no
new-
Girnar,
Semitic
ALPHABET.
THE
$ 3.
Note
Sanskrit is written
because
so
with
the
all these
called
are
idiom
who
man
Vedas,
the
has
Hence
the
prdkrita.
This
has
acquainted
what
was
is rendered
The
acts, the
local
spoken
vulgar,but
originally
mean
type,'this
or
samskdras;
or
language.
not
source
who
meant
called
a sacrificial victim
purified,
alone
did
became
rites
initiatory
all the
the sacred
or
source
type
or
sacred language.
or
Samskrita
language which
derived,secondary,
second-rate,literallywhat
(prakriti)
being the Samskrita
Europeans
vessel that is
passed through
the
of
general name
first
called Samskrita,
was
fit or
all languages.
sacred.
purified,
samskrita.
of the
dialects received
perfectof
hence
that is properlydressed,a
ancient
still less,because
or
it the most
purposes
right.
is rendered
means
Brahmans,
it,considered
left to
(u**jjd) what
Samskrita
"
from
Cowell,p. xvii.)
sense
of
it
the
interpolates
The
If
prdkritahad
has
as
mean,
p.
former
to be
been
taken
in the
shown
well
of
sense
by
D'Alwis
Ixxxix),the originallanguage,and
'
idea
samskrita
then
to
have
of
of continuation.
called would
Kachchayana'sGrammar,
to be taken
in the
sense
of
opposed
of those
view
view, however,
framed
who
the
of the
meaning of
and
names,
these two
is rendered
names,
is
impossibleby the
..
" 3.
In
writingthe Devanagarialphabet,the
letter is written
Ex.
then
first,
and
perpendicular,
the
k; "?,
Beginnerswill
they know
j 4.
them
The
i\g;
find it useful
well,and
to trace
write
can
the sounds
are
following
distinctive
portion of
lastlythe
horizontal
,
the letters
which
line.
"c.
*, n,
them
each
on
transparent paper,
till
and correctly.
fluently
representedin
are
the
Devanagari
alphabet:
Hard
Soft and
and
Hard,
Gutturals,
2.
Palatals,
3.Linguals,
4. Dentals, Jft
-Hth
35
by
In
I and
Unmodified
Nasal
Unmodified
Sibilant
the
Veda
335
lh.
"5 d
and
"?
The
or
Anusvara,
or
called Dento-labial.
signsfor
gutturaland
the two
dots : h.
Diphthongs.
US
Visarga,
soft
is sometimes
the
Vowels.
Short, Long.
bh
dh, if between
but
a liquid,
"% h is not properly
H/
Mdh
5. Labials,
Liquids. Sibilants.
two
or
m.
h.
vowels,
are
breathing.
become
obsolete,and
are
replaced
-"
8.
THE
Students
be cautioned
Devanagariwhen
the
be
should
been
made
in
5. There
and
consonants
The
safelyand
thirteen
and
with
in
letters instead
in
of
paradigms should
indistinct.
and
grammar
fiftyletters
are
learn Sanskrit.
unsettled
masteringthe
be used
alphabetmay
Roman
againstusing the
beginning to
the memory
impressedon
ALPHABET.
After
some
their
progress
readingSanskrit,the
Roman
advantage.
Devanagari alphabet,thirtyseven
the
sound
vowels, representing
every
of the
Sanskrit
language.
$ 6.
never
One
occurs
f 7.
Two
distinctive
spoken language.
labial
guttural and
the
sounds,
in
representatives
been
by
represented
signsX
the
are
sibilants,
the
near
labial sibilant.
base
They
without
now
Devanagarialphabet. They
the
formed
Jihvdmdliya,the tongue-root sibilant,
and
it
called
are
of the
tongue
said to have
are
the
thunderbolt)and
called
half
Ardha-visarga,
writingthese
two
-Visarga,is
signsare
used
sign of
the
Visargais
in the Tantrabhidhana
vol.
i.
p.
as
there
in the middle
five
originally
were
or
Visarga.
like the
Katantra
th's.
(SeePrinsep,Indian
by
p,
distinct
nasals
of words, these
as
Anusvara.
"H
Thus
rii
f"j
signsfor
followed
are
nasals,^
The
figureS
4 ;
Antiquities,
is
*r n, iff n,
n,
"jn,
When,
by
consonants
by
/, th, d, dh
dot, which
the
five
writing,
replacedby
nasal
like two
unmodified
in the
are
described
common
two
the
in
75.)
8. There
m,
*Tx
as
the
replacedby
now
But
both.
for
of
of their
;
more
properlythe sign of
the
own
by t, th,
expeditious
unmodified
find
we
instead
of
^f^dl ankitd.
instead
of
fWrtI1anchitd.
"N \
""" V * I
instead
of
^fertlkunditd.
instead
of
H^dl
nanditd.
instead of cfffujril
4fljrfT
kampitd.
The
must
The
pronunciationremains
be
pronounced as
same
if it
appliesto
unaffected
were
final IT
written
m
at
by
this
styleof writing.
^f"*HI
ankitd, "c.
^HfffrU
the
end
of
sentence.
This
too,
THE
written
though frequently
be
pronounced as
to
in M.
Hitopades'a,
Note
cf.
M/s
Handbooks
the Kaumaras
for the
final *T
in
followers
of
Kumara,
Colebrooke, Sanskrit
mistake
and
$ 9.
of this
the followers
Besides
12
reputed
of
author
and
grammar,
of the
Kalapa
nasalized
final *T w,
represent a
the
by
letters,the
Thus
of "if*rrfTT
tarn
instead
of w
in
The
Kaumaras
Kalapa
or
the
are
(See
grammar.
made
is sometimes
the
between
ydti we
we
write
I, v, which
we
write
may
modified
are
used
are
and
7^ /,^v,
still
to
modified
(Pan.vm.
4, 59-)
Tf^rifTf
toy ydti;
write
may
as
there
pronunciation,
initial T{y,
may
sound
nasal
tal labhate
TlWHff
tav
Tflhrfa
vahati.
or
^N^frTsamvahati
But
never
nor
if the
T
if the
^
^TR"T
" 10.
semivowel
sam
^^f?
in the
represents an
dran, changed to
The
or
stands
sayydnam;
^l%3tf
sallabdham;
^CTR
or
^c53f \amlabdham
only consonants
Sl^^, ^ sh, ^
the
composition,
^TJlrf
samydnam
*W
Anusvara
pronouncedas
semivowels.
(SeePreface
aham.
II
^, 77, "4,y,
an
tarn labhate
cjvnr
^*
Katantra
labial
or
by
these three
instead
to
grammar.
r|,^,
if followed
of
pronunciation
letters,
expressingthe
IT,
line,is
the
13.
be
may
distinction
dental, and
by guttural,
palatal,
lingual,
three
pausd
the
Grammar,
the author
as
Kaumaras
the
above
and
1829*,pp.
TOTWig^ntfr*RflT 33.
^IWI%
dot
the
pronounced ^r*w
ed. Bombay,
Sarasvati-Prakriya,
T I
9-
printedwith
'snr, I, is to be
m.
Accordingto
"
and
ALPHABET.
s,
h.
which
final
savvahati.
body
of
word,
such
vowel, e.
original
^Tt'T
have
sam
no
g.
as
cfiruj: kdmyah ;
Rig-veda x.
132, 3.
varan.
correspondingnasals
before
3^ m, therefore,
by
only be represented
of these
any
the neutral
are
r,
letters at
or
fied
unmodi-
nasal,the Anusvara.
tarn
t^"fir
IT
Or
rakshati.
^UjPrfsamrakshati.
composition,
in
samsrinoti.
^nrftflT
if SHlfrflT
tarn srinoti.
W
if^tfrrtarn sarati.
TOT^firsamsarati.
M$*Sfisamharati.
J1
*
samshthivati.
^J/l^rrf
tarn shaMram.
^RTT
In
This
the
body
edition,which
of
has
word
the
only letters
contains
latelybeen reprinted,
which
the text
can
be
precededby
"
that may
J^hrrt
Mahidasabhatta
and
to
or
be
"
and
in MS.
commentary.
Bodl. 382.
is said to have
the Lord.
pleaseIs'a,
in
commentary printed
i.e. IT^Rft.
tl^nft,
written
The
The
the Sarasvata
date given is
In MS.
the
Bombay editions is
Bodl. 382.Mahidhara
or
-$
l6.
Anusvara
yatdmti,
9^,^*A,^s, ^A.Thus^r. amfah, vffidhanumshi, ijjriftr
are
Before
ftff
: simhafy.
of
word, is
Taitt.-Brahm.
Sanskrit
in
is called ^raRTC:
" 13.
they follow
d,
"
a,
is
'"
'i
a,
t,
by
horses
instead
; in7!
short
or
any
of
other
OR
If the
is not
their
""
letters
sounds.
Thus
'"
ai"
""
"
'
OM-
the
gavdgra
of the
Tft^jj
goagra,
word, the
adj.preceded
ift^rtgoa"vam, cows
it
r,
PH^fHlnirritify.
body
in the
Ex.
consonant
Ex.
it.
over
hiatus
'NliJ
"
"
aw;
o,
followingsigns
ri follows
an
az,
the
*
'
is written
tolerate
yoke ;
all
(burring),
and
fdri^J^7"w, sieve.
if written
pronounced k, but
if followed
be followed
is supposed to
by itself,
by
Ara ; ^
vowel
any
y, but
not
except
a,
ya.
is
by
But
"|
pronounced
Thus
a.
earliest forms
written
over
incliningto
of
and
J 15.
^.
If
Indian
the
consonant,
the
right.
the
short
Afterwards
before
apparentlywritten
from
arose
the
across
is
This
it is sounded.
these
so
top-line,
the
and
t's
short
the
incliningto
to
become
consonant
Thus
ak must
is to be
pronounced without
followed
by Virdma,
be
written
J 1 6.
If
or
three
fti and
or
four
or
five
or
more
vowel
are
another
written
p.
after
40.)
it,the
is marked
consonant,
in
of
sake
ik, ^.
immediatelyby
consonants
long
instead
sift,
vol. n.
i. e. stoppage, which
^TC^; kar, w^
is followed
consonant
any
both
were
for the
sonant
con-
in the
left,the
top-marks were,
as
the
fact that
ed. Thomas,
(SeePrinsep'sIndian Antiquities,
is said to be
consonant
ft
that short
the
drawn
distinctness,
two
vowel
ifts?I
go 3gra or
consonant,
after which
by
Vcj/^
is
only peculiarity
the inherent
with
written
the
tf, e,
/i, (/Q, w,
"""
t"
consonant,
Thus
a.
without
of
'padante/but
kakdrah, "c.
cv"
e"
Repha
(making) to
v*"
prauga,
J 14. Every
The
namrah,
"ro
(after-sound),
Visarga: "
'"
is written
vowel
cows,
^FT
body
written,
which
words
kdra
"**K:
they are
exception.
one
certain
second
ka,
r, H, H,
e,
"9R
consonant,
T
"
There
by adding
akdrah
a),and
p. 23
in.
are
vowels, if initial,
The
a,
if
ate
stands
in the
m,
(tongue-root
Upadhletter),
upon),Anusvara
breathed
X ""(tobe
named
a
43, 4, "c.)the
i.
ifJirb
gamy
Thus
exceptionof JihvdmiiUyaX
the
see
(emission,
$nft:bamyoh (Rv.
In
With
J 2.
mdniya
are
into Anusvara.
v, the
^ /,^
y, t r,
in
semivowels
the
changed
never
*ry: amlah.
not
ALPHABET.
THE
one
the
group
(samyoga). Thus
"*|f^.
written
These
the
of the
one
^j ktva ;
c(r+
$17.
stroke
Wx+ T\
The
T:
"*
r^+^=^or
The
before
consonant
^""
!f +
r* tva ;
kta; c(T+
*R
is written
consonant
letter; as
+ ^="35
~$dra; T{+^
+ ^
Tr +
it is to be
sounded.
Thus
sign for
is
^r
letter.
same
*"
^kra;
transverse
J^+T
3T$r#/
^+
^rifi
arka
=
-31;
^nijarkam
rightof any
the
to
top of the
the
placed at
placed
Ex.
short
'g shtra.
+ T.=
by
This
by
or
is written
of the
top
o^+
consonant
which
varshma.
at the
marks
tra; ^ + ^
precedinga
^r
"^+?T
of the
foot
the
at
followinga
Kpta;
generallydropt in
are
?%nda
by
ktya.
^+-n
lines
learnt
in their formation.
generallaws
some
+ ^
ft
be
must
17-
kdrtsnya is
^T3T ;
consonants
horizontal
^M0;
^chya;
+ -Q =
discover
perpendicularand
letters: ^r + ^R
-"skha;
compound
however, to
is written
alpa
^Trfi ;
or
groups
practice. It is easy,
Thus
is written
atka
"
ALPHABET.
THE
^fer
arkena
^+
other
^FJ
arkendu.
followed
c^k
by
*^jfollowed by
T^jh is
^
*T
^ d followed
by
by
Sf
is written
written
sometimes
followed
sh is written
*t
^jna.
v^jh.
ti is written
and
g"
and
"gi it
sign of Virdma
The
consonant, shows
after
$ 19.
The
At
end
the
of
$ 20.
mark
end
or
or
of
of which
of
the
the elision of
for Ft ^Tft so
api,i.e.
a, after
initial W
an
^rfosas
TO
List
at the
in
ends
one
group,
it
placed
end
of
sentence,
consonant.
is used
; at the
sign n.
final wfr
foot of
*r.
ipjfyunkte.
The
in
the sign I
half-verse,
longersentence,
of
Virama, however, is
or
the
placed at
stopped,is sometimes,when
instead
Tp^fi
thus
sentence,
is
if
three consonants
verse,
of the
use
proper
portionof
or
short
(orto print)two
of the consonants
one
which
(stoppage),
is difficult to write
^ rd.
^ ru,
is written
in combination with
^^, particularly
Vl6ra.
Ex. ^J"M; i^tol;
J 1 8.
ksha.
or
in
used
^
or
e.
^fq
editions
most
Ex.
te
to
sftsfxrso 'pi
api.
Consonants.
of Compound
\
^
k-ka,
cRj
k-kha,
SRI
k-cha,
"^
k-ta, ^
kh-ya, ^
kh-ra
gh-ma,
gh-ya,
"oy
"
HT
TJ
g-ya,
gh-ra ;
"
"SR
^{
TJ g-ra,
k-ya, JR
k-sh-ma,
v% g-r-ya
^" n-ka, ^
k-t-ra, ^gf-k-t-r-ya,
k-t-ya,^
^
or
^r
;
"
k-ra, ^f
k-sh-ya,^
H
^=pjk-r-ya,
or
gh-na,
k-sh-va
"
"
gh-n-ya,
n-k-t-ya9^"J n-k-yat
n-k-ta, "j"Jf
10
Thus
^ stands
for TJ
^ stands
stands
The
eM,
8 stands
for ^T ch of ^r^THS
for
of
German
Memoire
vol.
Workshop,
n.
p.
in
Indiens,*
vol.
Antiquitiesby Thomas,
Prinsep'sIndian
i ;
used
as
Chiffres
des
Propagation
la
sur
numerals
letters and
the
by comparing
'
vi
serie,tome
Asiatique,
Chips from
chatvdrah, four.
Tfarpancha, five.
evident
more
one.
trayah,three.
M stands
^p
22-
cfocm,two.
"r of ^TJ
See Woepcke,
inscriptions.
Journal
p. 705
of f"Rl
for ^
becomes
similarity
ancient
in
ALPHABET.
THE
n.
289.
Pronunciation.
$ 2,2,.
The
Sanskrit
transcription
given
observed
vowels
should
however,
The
2,.
be
pronounced like
rather
in
'
topheavy /
madhouse
inkhorn
guttural^
The
in
5. The
former
the
in
dh
like
loghousef
This,
in
it is well
of ng in
sound
like
in
dh
doubt,
no
ph
is
learningSanskrit
unaspiratedletters
the
unmistakable
emphasis.
king/
the
have
kh
India,to
in
ifiph
Hobhouse/
an
*fj
Thus
distinctly.
pothouse /
aspiratedfrom
with
and
a,
sound
of ch in 'church'
and
'join/
surface
said
are
of the tongue
fact the
pronounced by bringingthe
roof
of the
ordinarypronunciationof t, d,
call
it is essential to
and
lingual,
front-teeth.
In
represent the
dentals ;
be
to
againstthe
by bringingthe tip of
6. The
'
in
gh
sound
ch
lingualletters
would
th like th in
has
palatalletters
j
in
short ^
America/
'
learnt Sanskrit
have
but
exaggerateddescription,
by pronouncing the
3. The
be heard
who
like bh
bh
English a
should
like
gh
TI
from
distinguish
to
of
be
to
are
The
in Italian.
the vowels
of the
the consonants
like kh in
somewhat
4.
sound
the
almost
'
has
of
aspiration
is
the
with
accordance
in
The
4.
page
pronounced
be
The
i.
letters should
e.
the tongue
g.
dentals
by
English is
in
words
their
linguals,not
fiX*^ Direktar,Jimi*U!dGavarnment,
Visarga,Jihvdmuliya and
Upadhmdniya
are
"c.
not
dentals
of the upper
natives
the
Hindus
what
edge
very
of
matter
Sanskrit
the
distinguish
againstthe
transcribingEnglish
English
As
palate.
lower
naturally
their
by
own
articulated
now
audibly.
7. The
the
dental
^r
sounds
palatal^f
Biihler,Madras
of the Hindvi
" like
like
ss
in
s
'
in
'
sh like sh in
shun/
session/
Journal,February,1864. RajendralalMitra,
Literary
Language,' Journal
'
of the Asiatic
'
On
the Origin
-$
RULES
24.
real Anusvara
The
is sounded
as
as
SANDHI.
11
slightnasal,like
very
graphicsign in placeof
CHAPTER
RULES
$ 23.
of
SANDHI
OF
Sanskrit every
In
the
interpunction,
with
As
be
cannot
modified
or
pronounced
either
accordingto which
the rules
As
of
stopswhich
LETTERS.
to
chain
should
mark
by
coalesce
with
the
we
coalescence
of final and
with
consonants
unbroken
one
made
are
initial
and
consonants,
incompatiblewith
are
the
to facilitate their
one
both
or
generalrule
letters
in other
the words
of Sandhi
absence
mere
""TMi H^Ht
there
it
of
each
other, i.e.
have
other,they
to
pronunciation.The
rules,
modified, are
thus
are
be
called
Sandhi.
accordingto
the
together,
word
immediatelyafter
one
in order
assimilated
five nasals
called Sandhi.
Sanskrit
letters in
certain
as
stop, which
This
vowels, of
is
vowels,)
with
is
there
followingword.
letters,
(of vowels
bon.*
it represents*.
OP
is considered
consonants
COMBINATION
sentence
where
syllables.Except
the other
'
IT.
THE
OR
in French
be
must, of course,
OP
languageshave
in
sentence
is in many
by stops.
astvagnimdhdtmyam,indrastu
bte'the greatness of
nevertheless
Agni;
be
glued
sufficient to mark
cases
to be marked
thus
must
devdndm
Indra
Ex.
the
mahattamah,
Let
greatest of the
is the
gods.
Distinction
" 24.
It is
in
essential,
the rules
of Sandhi
of words
(pada),and
which
by
order
the
The
i.e.
shortness3
Accordingto
five nasals
by
real Anusvara
sake
or
are
Internal
nominal
suffixes.
sometimes
is therefore
pronounced by their
own
and
ndsikya,nasal;
organ
of
speech,and
C
the
the
initial letters
which
apply to
when
(prdtipadikd)
bases
Though
both
are
based
on
the
is
their application
identical,
it will be best to
respectiveorgans
final and
rules of Sandhi
other
Sandhi.
between
confusion, to distinguish
changes of
and
(dhdtu)
certain terminations
different. For
the
those
roots
and
phoneticprinciples
same
and
avoid
to
determine
between
External
between
nose.
apply the
is
pronouncedin
Siddh.-Kaum.
five nasals
uttered
of External
name
are
through
the
the
to
only,
nose
Pan.
i.
i, 9.
anunasika, nasalized,
nose.
12
RULES
Sandhi
final and
the
of
bhydm,
("ri
and
conjugation,
from
the
from
the
than
exceptionswhich
of Sandhi.
head
the
which ^ +
d is
the
J^h+
changed into ^ + TT dh
the vowel
lengthened:
vowel, under
the
are
be
Latin
to be
rules
no
dhah
as
while
=parivrid
remember
in
+ dhah
grammars
participle
passive
the rules
^ d
accordingto
dh, and
"j(V^+
"%d + dh;
T +
IT: parivrih+
short ;
broughttogetherin
the
affecting
and the
one
tah
parivrih+
In
parivridhah.
tafy,
=
Greek
If
they
grammars,
the rules
their
with
rules
are
distinct from
kept perfectly
of words
the
that
circumstances,remains
same
t,3
-f
body
declension,
of
Sanskrit
in
to remember
1 are
dropt and
complicated
It is easier to learn
y.
grammaticalparadigms
the
generallydetailed
are
except ^
heads
the
or
dictionary,
acquire the
to
consonants
it is far easier to
cases
lowed
fol-
any
under
many
of
In
grammar,
numerous
under
derivation.
ready-made
words
the
treated
pounds,
com-
incompatibleletters in the
of
contact
properly be
should
word
the
changes produced by
The
parts of
when
(prdtipadika)
bases
suffixes beginningwith
by secondary(taddhita)
or
(pada)apply,with
initialletters of words
changes
elements.
by
meeting of
to the
Sandhi
to
exceptions,
formative
radical and
the
placeat
take
that of Internal
final and
applyto
" 25-
SANDHI.
changes which
the
to
meeting of
rules which
The
EXTERNAL
produced by
few
Sandhi
Pada
or
OP
initialletters
final and
sentence.
same
Classification
of Vowels.
" 25.
Vowels
vowels.
(pluta)
Short
vowels
protracted
the time
of
divided
are
short
Short
vowels
2.
Long
vowels
^rr
a,
3,
" 26.
3 ;
Vowels
are
are
^ iy T
27.)
2,
ri,c"
u, ^
indicated
3" ^TC 3
ou
3.
by
likewise divided
is said
consonant
to
last half
2.
Diphthongs (sandhyakshara)
: ^
are
liable to be
^ ai, ^ft 0, ^
figure3
of
3 ; ^r$
3, ^T 3 d 3, ^ 3 i 3,
find ^r $ ^,
we
au.
3,
au
3 i,instead of
3.
into
Monophthongs (samdndkshara)
: "*
All vowels
e,
Sometimes
1.
" 27.
li.
the
3 ^, d 3 u, instead
^n
or
(Pan.i.
3. Protracted vowels
^ 3) ^ 3
have
vowel.
1.
^3
vowels
three.
and protracted
(hrasva),
long (dirgha),
one
measure
long vowels two,
(mdtrd),
into short
e,
a, ^?T
d,\it^^u^H^
^ ai, ^
or
nasalized,
o,
ri,^ri, o"
li.
*$hau.
to become
anundsika
d.
^fa,^f
-$ 33-
BULBS
J 28.
Vowels
OP
EXTERNAL
again divided
are
into
Lightvowels
1.
vowels
Heavy
2.
*?
are
Vowels
with
(Pan.i.
tone.
2,
by
vowels
with
Accents
29-32.)
of
means
Guna
is the
ri to
ri and
By
of
repetition
formed, viz. ^
ai instead
1.
Simplevowels
2.
Guna
au
(Pan.i.
an
even
i to ^ e, ?
i,
and
to wt o,
2.)
Vriddhi
vowels
(increase)
are
of ^T
ar,
grammarians
say,
^T
and
^n
unchanged
do
take
Guna,
taking Guna.
Thus
after
*di
not
Vriddhi
^T^jaffhana,
Combination
J 32.
As
For
the
ri"^ "
which
Callingthe
The
M.,
ends
are
not,
^r
jaghdna, I
and
allows
placein
the
order to
explainingthe
no
forms
with
killed.
have
beginningof
of
han
words.
hiatus
in
(vivritti)
word
begins with
next
this hiatus.
remove
combination
of
vowels, they
liquid*,
calls them
Pratis'akhya
p. xxiii.
take
Vriddhi,^i?
sing,of the
liable to be
"
former
vowel, and
other
as
or,
or
"niT"T
at the end
classes
also the
are
in
of
purpose
into two
which
Those
of Vowels
modifications
be divided
Those
word
vowel, certain
$ 33.
with
or
If
sentence.
ed. M.
with
i.)
i,
Guna
the
requiresGuna
2.
pronounced
are
literature only.
z, 3" M, g; u,
(Pan.i.
which
reduplicated
perfect,
1.
(udatta),
vowels:
J 31,
may
instead
again into
vowels
acute
3. Vriddhi vowels
remain
"^i,
process
of F et ^n
divided
thus
are
same
of ^Tc5 al.
^n?^
Vowels
the
any
Vriddhi.
al.
at/, and
inVedic
raises ^ i and
ar, "" li to
dl instead
and
a, which
w"
and
of
strengthening
preceding^w
o,
consonant.
consonant.
one
marked
are
Guna
J 30.
than
more
at, wt
*, *
The
circumflexed(svarita).
$ i,T" A, ^ r*,*
a,
divided accordingto
lastly,
are,
and
(anudatta),
grave
i,Tw,^
a, ^
vowel, if followed
short
J 29.
are
13
SANDHI.
the
gi
w,
d.
latter hard
ndmin, for
vowels, we
different reason
see
may
say
If the
Rig-veda-pratis'akhja
14
RULES
vowel
same
result
OF
(longor short)occurs
is the
long
^sr
^rr +
or
^+
or
end
at the
(Pan.vi.
vowel.
^n
^= ^ ? -{-"
3[or
^Ttpraflf
"3W
^IM-M^rd
having spoken
he
uktvd
oJuNrkartri
Or
in
compounds, *T^t4- ^t
$ 34.
udeti
but
kintudeti,
*T^$rimahi
(Pan.vi.
87.)
I,
^T
^5:
^ftw
^fe:
*TT
rf^
Or
in
compounds,
f^lT+ ^M^i:
next
Ex.
If hard
beginswith
if^ H3
i^(
The
for T
cTfJ^Klanubandhah,
t Some
brahma
ri
of
*\
(du).
(Pan.i.
ar.
i, 5
")
letter /z.
"*l*-Mfy:kdmya-[-ishtih kdmyeshtih,
upadesah
hitopadesah,good
(longor short)occur
at
the end
^T
or
^rr H- ^
^T
or
^TT +
tava
5j $
=
eva
an
d.
(Pan.vi.
word,
i,
and
the
88.) Thus
di.
di.
no
Vriddhi.
as
she
saikshishta,
saw.
It is
practical
utility.
Thus
treated
like
^ ri,only
li-\-anubandhah becomes
"^-J-W*J"5Ni
letter.
indicatory
the
Sandhi
of
with
ri
optional,but
WSTT-f^jfabrahmd-\-rishik==?mfa
Ex.
rishih,Brahma,
it is of
and
having
d-{- di
+ aikshishta
in Guna
of
advice.
out, because
i. e.
long
tavalkdrah,thy
result is Vriddhi.
Guna
"
^%J
grammarians consider
shortening of the
diphthong,the
substitutingc^I
the
A^a
f^7ftaRf5K
and
certain boon.
vowels
a
"*1WJ +
of the earth.
indrafy
d +
^=
or
^"v" + likdrah
ri^^Kt
oSoRT^: =
sd + riddhih
offeringfor
^ 35.
mahisah, lord
"
"gjm^ft a
or
sd + uktvd
^f%t
^3TT +
or
KT5;: tava
^TT ^W1^
^TT +
or
^T
cf^
Uah
rises.
he
Thus
".
Ex.
river.
liquidvowel.
the
nadidrisi,such
vowels
If hard
begins with
next
right.
kartriju,
doing (neuter)
"
kintu
apagachchhati uktvdpagachchhati,
idrisi =
riju
d.
"
away.
goes
ft nadi
=
CL
z.
"
"
Ex.
the
Thus
beginningof words,
and
101.)
i,
wr
or
" 34-
SANDHI.
EXTERNAL
Rishi.
Irahmarshih
or
W5f
-"37-
RULES
*TT
Or
compounds,
*rfafT
+
WH"J
the
change of
rdma
she desirous.
sautfukyavatt,
aisvaryam ramaibvaryam,
=
Rama.
*X\A\m*l8itd+ aupamyam
with
sitaupamyam, similarity
wife of Rama.
(longor
with
begins
next
into
liquidvowel
the
tl^R
15
8ANDHI.
autsukyavail
simple liquidvowel
and
-f
^R
TJ*T -f
Sita,the
J 36. If
oshthah
lordshipof
the
EXTERNAL
*flrW*Hcf1
sd
TOT7W4"H"fl=
in
word,
tava
mrro:
r: =
OP
"
or
^n
or
^=
TTT
or
or
"31=
or
*j =
SM
or
TOT
TOT
!T or
or
'H
or
^="ftcor ift
-31=
e,
ai
TO^ ^
o,
au
\t
ri
or
or
sn
Ex.
or
TOT
or
or
TH
"f"U*4jnadi
In
compounds, t^
of
Note
Sandhi,
chakrf
atra
" 37.
with
is
any
native
may
If
be
vn.
dadhyatra, milk
ve, vai.
van.
vo,
here.
aidasya
"
nadyaidasya,the
artham
river of A Ida.
nadyartham9
case
or
vowel
or
end
diphthong (excepta),the
semivowel.
diphthong;
see
If
compounds,
a
long
^if^i^T^ chakri
at the
occurs
in
final vowel
that
^-sfcJWchakryatra
Guna-
vowel
the
va.
L o, au
tTirSnadi
changed into
placein
^f"
ro, ran.
for the
sake
river.
Some
"
but
ri
+ iva
madhu
e, ai
atra
kartri + uta
re, rat.
au
or
dadhi
yo9 yau.
or
^"= ^
or
^T
or
f%
Thus
L o,
or
or
is
i=ri.'
or
TOT~^
or
result
yai.
ye,
e9 ai
fftor
77.)
i,
of
TJ
or
(Pan.vi.
[ or
or
end
or
the
at
diphthong,the
or
semivowel.
or
vowel
any
*T
short)occurs
$ 41. (Pan.vi.
word,
and
last element
is
i,
=
Ex.
of
this
^ft """
the next
begins
of the Guna-vowel
elided,and
78.) Thus
omission
atra.
of
follows,a
the
be shortened.
no
change takes
16
KULES
Ex. *rif-^MNsd.
sakhe
*U?miJ|"ad.
sakhe
" 38-
SANDHI.
sakhayiha,Friend, here
=prabhavehi, Lord,
ehi
llVRfav prabho
dgachchha
iha
TW%f^prabho
EXTERNAL
OF
near
come
Lord,
aushadham=prabhavaushadham,
medicine.
In
go + Uah
exceptionsin compounds
J 38.
If
begins with
vowel
any
semivowel.
fafl ^r":
tau
^frf 'rfTrMfrf
=
next
into
changed
sriydyarthah.
sriydyrite.
astamite
ravdvastamite,after
sunset.
tdviti.
"TR^
(dv).
w^
ravau
iti
composition,tfr
+ ^T^
In
is
the
^TH^ (ay),
sriyaiarthah
friyairite
and
word,
78.) Thus
i,
rwwS:
of
various
are
("41.)
gava.
last element
diphthong, the
% (ai)
+ any vowel
^T (au)+ any vowel
Ex.
*re
as
end
the
at
occurs
or
(Pan.vi.
iftgo is treated
where
Vriddhi-vowel
gavisafy.There
+ artham
nau
ndvartham,
for
the
of
sake
ships.
" 39.
1.
The
These
final
be
TO
sakhe
sakhe
and
dgachchha,not
into
*K"WI-ed
TOf
IWt
H*ft ^W
2.
The
prabha
WW
final
of
^y
into ^?T
TW%fi|
prabhavehi,but
into
into
not
^5 sakha
iha.
itf^prabhaehi.
into iw
TpT^rNv prabhavaushadham,
but
into
aushadham.
stands
which
*%r*{dy,
it is usual to
vowels, and
into
sakhay dgachchha,but
prabho aushadham,
TW
rule for
accordingto
dgachchha.
into
iha,not
printededitions change
MSS.
Thus
stand
modifications
(except
a, $ 41); not, however,
most
sakha
WT35
liable to certain
all vowels
dropt before
composition.
'-HNI^
are
^v of^tnay, ^r^av,which
and
i^y
^fto, may
?? e,
in
rules,however,
two
fo**l^T": sriyaiarthah, is
drop
it in
for
our
^ di, may
editions.
all
Thus
usuallywritten foRT ^:
more
dropt before
be
6riyd arthah
instead
ftsnrnr^t
Sriydyarthah
of
3. The
final ^
^ ^fir
tau
iti is
more
are
any
reason
that
dropt,while
generally
consistent either
in
au, may
be
editions.
our
dropt
before
always to
final
the final
retain
^y
^v of
the
of Guna
Vriddhi
\y
not
and
\v
and Vriddhi
is
vowels,but
HT
is
and
^TT id
is
Pan.
or
vi.
iti.
obligatory.
the final
retained.
generally
final semivowels
all
Thus
and
tdviti,
usuallywritten rilfcPri
more
It is without
Guna
^rr^dv, for ^
usuallyretained
more
Note"
of
It would
78;
vm.
^u
3, 19.
of
be
See
18
EULES
OF
EXTEENAL
" 43-
SANDHI.
IrregularSandhi.
" 43.
be
The
are
following
stated.
When
beginningwith
^
^ft0,
or
Ex.
jf
^Wff
TO
TOfir
TJViT
" 44.
in ^?
vi.
^iftafTTupa
oshati
verb
the vowels
is
94.)
I,
the
verbs
two
=parekhati.
uposhati.
=parohati.
and
to grow,
TT^ec?A,
to go, if raised
3[",
by Guna
"^Vff upa-\-edhate
=
upaidhate.
and
nouns,
beginning with
If
root
beginningwith
vowels
^j ri is
coalesce
TT
^ffr
e or
or
o,
preceded by
into WHC
ur
final
preposition
ending
instead
of
(Pan.
ar.
91.)
"SHr +
^TTRtflf apa
^"ed.frf
-f-richchhati
^ft +
ava
^Ullfff vS^|iSlfri
+ rindti
+ ^prff =
IT
tm
^qfff TO^fa
In verbs
in^rwpra
=
derived from
In certain
+ rishati
j9"m
avdrndti.
"
=pardrshati.
and
nouns
vi.
i,
H + ^$18
rindrnam,debt
contracted
^CJ
^fUMW
^Wt
affected by
^n^l'^t
soka-{-ritah-=sGkdrta.h,
rina+rinam
forms
carrying,
plur.of
ace.
with
Vriddhi
^FT
of
92.)
if preceded by ^aj
apdrchchhati.
rijate"prdrjate.
the preposition
is optional. (Pan.
Guna
+ ohati
prepositionis optional.
or
i,
Ex.
ekhati
of the
of
coalescence
by
89.)
i,
=
is followed
eshayati"pr eshayati*.
before
requireto
upeshate.
TJTJsrflT
para
derived from
In verbs
a
+ eshate
upa
case
^TT
or
which
ejate=prejate.
^f^frT ^T^flTpara
^r
of the
(Pan. vi.
(Pan. vi.
^TT
result
au.
^"WrT
"3T +
or
^r
or
^T
o, the
iNlfifpra
TO
Ex.
ai
T^Nw
^^rfrr
e.
or
JHT^ pra
U +
^T
to ^
not
-f-1T3TTT =
^TT +
Sandhi
irregular
of
cases
preposition
ending in
Tj
few
Likewise
sorrow.
preceding^
in
fmyi^:
visvavdh, is
fqiyqT^
debt ;
another
liquidate
to
instead
uh,
"3!^
the
^ftW+
f%^T-f
(Pan. vi.
visvauhah.
^JW
substitute
Thus
compound.
of
i,
89,
vart.)
If the initial
" 45.
by
or
^fto
in
may
coalesce
Wtg*otuh, cat, is
into
^5n
au
or
preceded
^fto.
in
(Pan. vi.
pound
com-
i, 94,
vart.)
=
+ ^fVffl
}Ex. ^WC
viMOst adhara+
'^IMClSt
or
oshthah
=.adharaushtJiah
or
adharoshthah,
In
nouns
^rVfft
=
W^T?n
derived
praisJiya, messenger.
a
from
IR
or
sthula-\-otuh
t^^lrft
=
U^ ^res^,the
presha,
rule
is
sthulautuh
optional.
Ex.
ITp-a
or
sthulotuh,a big
cat.
ifa?or 9*51preshya
and
^["A.
or
-"
RULES
51.
If
they
Ex.
*iW
*T*T +
WlJ o/a
and
oshtha
follow the
OP
EXTERNAL
preceded by
are
19
8ANDHI.
^JT
or
in the
middle
of
sentence,
generalrule.
^ffat
THTOJ
+ oshthaJi
mama
are
compounds the following
" 46. As irregular
"Satsvairam, wilfulness,and
mentioned
native
by
from
self-willed,
Jflfi^roairtfi,
"2f"fliy"UT
a complete
akshauhini,
army,
: praudhah, from
hah, my lip.
mumau8ht
IT 4- TO?
from
^ftlf4-
grammarians :
^f +
aksha
^tfigil
ma+ira.
-\-uhini.
pra+ddhah, full-grown.
j^
from
investigation,
HT?[:prauhati,
ifa praishah,a
praishyah,a
uW.
IT +
"31^:pr
-\-uhah.
messenger.
" 47. The final ^fto of indeclinable words is not liableto the rules of Sandhi.
Ex.
"SHft
^nrf^aho apehi,Halloo,go
of
" 48. Indeclinables consisting
not liable to the rules of Sandhi.
Ex.
^TT ^^"a
"
before
Is it
evam,
If ^TT"2
49.
Indra
indra,Oh
i.
"3H^| u
Vf
(" 49),arc
14.)
i,
Oh
umesa,
lord of Uma
indeed ?
verbs,or
so
(Pan.
away
(Pan. 1. 1,15.)
in the
nouns
of
sense
far as'
so
dh) is used
as
preposition
or
or
exclusively)
(inclusively
^\
ekadesdt
^||f^a
n
Id\ P"l
ri d dlochitam
d ushnam
^TT
^l^
*f"
If ^TT d is used
Ex. ^TT
d ihi =
as
an
ehi,come
kila
" 51.
to stand
Ex.
indra. Oh
^ei^rU $ I
certain
place.
little warm.
here.
tat,Ah,
"
unaffected
liable to
I
now
recollect,it is justso.
"
by Sandhi.
Indra.
protractedvowel
at the end of
dlochitam,regardeda little.
it is not
interjection,
^ ^" he
oshnam,
remain
" 50. Certain particles
Ex.
aikadesdt,to
remains
sentence.
^f^ devadattd
unaffected
(Pan. vi.
by Sandhi, because
125
i,
ehi, Devadatta,come
viu.
2,
here !
82.)
it is always
supposed
20
SANDHI.
EXTERNAL
""
tfr
48
"
5*1*
UTS-
S
tr*
fcr"
"
tr
T.
"c
S-
5s;
s;
'C-
"
"C. 'C.
"C
f
"*"
,l"
T!S
rfip*
p
1C"
$1
I
I
ri
"
**'
t**
IW'
ur
tvf
ft
*
r
-$54-
EXTERNAL
Combination
$ 53.
Here,
of words
consonants
to
in the
as
of words
of nominal
other
bases
rules.
But
the
are
best
the
changes
the
terminations
regulatedby
of
dictionaryin
nominal
of
In
order
it is
consonants,
There
1.
of
The
their
the
and
other
ready-made
ending
in
state
other
acquiredin
while
before
consonants,
conjugationand
same
suffixes
suffixes,are
learningby
heart
the
of
final
verbs.
rules
concerning the
at the
stand
changes
that eleven
outset
in Sanskrit
at
the end
of the
only out
of
word
; viz.
"
m.
givingtwenty-five.In
thus
if
classes
final
compound.
according to
^t, is^n,j^t,
"^n,^/?,i{m, "^/, : h,
five
are
are
state
ever
the
suffixes
secondary(taddhita)
means
best
simplifythe
can
in
of these
bases
and
and
nouns
importantto
n,
by
verbal
laws, and
to
consonants
thirty-five
"^k, ^
and
declension
different
equallyapplicable
are
other
treated
are
from
principal
paradigms of
J 54.
i^ y,
formed
the
sentence
before
derivatives
learnt
apply to
but
consonant
any
in
rules which
followingeach
beginningwith
Initial Consonants.
and
of vowels, the
case
each
following
final consonants
Final
of
21
SANDHI.
every
one
aspirates,
their
correspondingunaspiratedletters: ^M
by ^ k / -^gh by IT g ; ^ chh, however, not by ^ ch, but by 7 /,"c.
Ex. f^ y PC* chitralikh,painter;voc.
This reduces
fad fc"5
"^ cldtralik.
^
final,are
the
letters
twenty-five
In every
2.
replacedby
3. No
ten
to
instead
the
5. "^ h cannot
Some
voc.
In
be
the
Final
roots
*{n does
the
not
hnd,
k f.
This
occur.
'^T^vdch,
reduces
*^/is replaced by
final
responding
cor-
*.
ten
corresponding
guttural^
r,
is
into the
is the
eightto
changed into ^t
onlyexceptionsare
"^ /,\v3)^l
but
final,
grammarians
few
final; hence
Ex.
TT", "c.
the fifteen to
their
the
lingual
guttural.
of words.
generallychange them
ending in
"^T^vdk.
eight.
of
the
c^Ar;^d by
reduces
be
ever
semivowels,(TI
y,
the end
t The
This
^cA, is replacedby
speech;
letters; i\^gby
can
replacedby
are
^ir hrit.
nom.
palatal^ch
the
4. Of
heart ;
to fifteen.
or
sonant
letters
hard
corresponding
technical
terms
such
as
that is found
only one
nine
at
letters.
sometimes
but
final,
into ^ k
the
MSS.
vowel
and
or
K^t.
editions
letters.
as
"3^ acfc,a
-*"in;ajantah,
22
EXTERNAL
6. Of
the
fe"Tvit.
Final
The
be
cannot
^s
In
radical
few
words
some
"S
replacedby
sh is
"
changed into
cir k.
f^^visbecomes
k. ("174.)
Thus
t.
fg^dvish
Thus
" 1.
changed into
is
the nine
that
to
and
stand
ever
can
ten
final
affecting
rules of Sandhi
the
replacedby
cF
Visarga.
as
is
is
final
final ^rs
raises
Visarga,therefore,
Hence
words
but
final,
is treated
but
final,
is Visarga.
of words
at the end
that is found
be
In
fgz^dvit.
" 55-
SANDHI.
at
the Anusvara, to
of real words.
the end
consonants
eleven
reallyreduced
are
to
eleven heads.
$ 55.
It is
than
more
But
cjf", 7tf,i^t,T^p.
word
no
in Sanskrit
T
an
ends
ever
in
precedesa
Thus
^fsfH^abibhar
abibhar,3. p. sing.impf.of
bhri,to carry.
^rfe*n:abibhar
abibhar,2.
sing.impf.of
bhri,to carry.
^p"^ suvalg+
that
the
consonant,
one
If =
observe
important to
nom.
urk, strength,
"3fi(r
sing,well jumping.
suval,nom.
sing,of
p.
^f^urj.
avarivart,3. p. sing.
impf.intens. of ^ffvrit'OT ^^vridh.
amdrt, from
The
not
?n^ mrij.
(Pan.vin.
2,
24.)
is f%"sh chikih,because
sing,of fqpjft*(chikfrsh
nom.
followed
by
the
here
is
tenuis.
Classification
of Consonants.
i.
The
placeand
By
the
qualityof
called the
are
between
contact
teeth,
"
Labial
3. In
the
changes of
Sandhi,
final and
have
we
initial consonants,
is meant
explainwhat
to
consonants,
nose
the
organs
tongue
are
formed
nasals
of the
consonants
from
placesor
and
of the letters.
the four
and
guttural,
palatal,
lingual,
forming the
the
pharynx
Anundsika, i. e. co-nasal
4. The
the
and
the roof of the palate,
the teeth, the lips,
throat,the palate,
nose
a.
examine
can
accordingto
by
we
real Anusvara
by
is withdrawn
or
is formed
"
consonants
between
five classes
*.
(See $ 4.)
roof,
places, throat,palate,
dental
contact
the
the
the
lips.
veil which
Hence
these
formed.
are
separates the
letters
are
called
nasalized.
in the
nose
only,and
is called
Ndsikya,i.e.
nasal.
5. The
Visargais
said to be
Lectures
on
the
pronounced in
the chest
(urasya);
respective
places.
Science of Language, Second
Series,p. 145.
the three
or
$ 59-
referred to these
semivowels,too, are
6. The
l"iv*
"*
ly"
be nasalized,and
can
v.)
^, or 4, "*,^,y, /*,
$ 57. Accordingto
1.
Letters
formed
their
Cshmans, which
rendered
4. Vowels
" 58.
1.
letters
Surd
^T
2.
They
letters
Sonant
$*
an(i
called
are
that the
X,
shy
to read
*"
be
may
X X"
is
glottis
the
m,
*n,*n9
all vowels.
and
called Ghoshavat.
are
0;
h;
the
Visarga :
dh9
and
rest.
change of ^ch
into
^J
call this
the utterance
^i*sn";
is
the vowels
p.
10.
is
requiredfor
either
change of quality
;
change of
while in the
dbhyantarahprayatnah,mode
M"4"7t.
close of the
differ in their
into ^ k is
of the
utterance
of the
"M*I;
of articulation
rdhyah
HM"^;
sound, which
produces
as
explainedin " 58, 59.
unaspirated,
ought
They
s,
imperfectcontact,
duhsprishta,
slightnon-contact, or fshadvivrita,
slightopening ;
I.
the Anusvara
change of ^ch
and
surd, sonant, aspirated,
Some
vol.
^^" ^8^
X"
the
grammarians
Kaum.
liquid.
or
of articulation at the
of
qualities
theyrequirefor
that
therefore,
grammarians
prayatnah,mode
the organs.
semivowel
m.
preparatoryto
t Some
Sparsasand
It will be seen,
Sanskrit
(not^ h).
non-sonant.
T5/,"3V,
: all the
Unaspirated(alpaprdna)
/,^
into,
divided,accordingto quality,
are
",
and
place,
"*
*r,
In their formation
is closed.
glottis
the
bh;
Anusvara
the
T^r,
2.
nasals,would
by completeopening (vivrita)^.
Aghosha,
:
Aspirated(mahdprdna)
are
in Sanskrit,
which
(flatus)
Visarga: h.
^ h, ny,
J 59. Lastly,consonants
T*ph,
Cshman
Vffh,^/, T(jh,
^d^dh,
JT#,
In their formation
1.
called
", ^ kh, ^ch, -^chhy zt, *th, *", Vth, vp, TXph;
^, W sh9 Its,
open.
division,
is,
accordingto quality,
^R
the
*r
flatus.
or
said to be formed
second
freelytranslated by
called
are
sibilant
by
are
comprehend
i.e.intermediate between
(fern.),
been
has
These
(f"}
^ h.
"*k, wM,
These
bh, urn.
into,
T"" *dh,
*/, 7#,
:
X
by slightopening (ishadvivrita)
formed
3. Letters
the organs:
(ishat
sprishta):
^y,
contact
by slight
called A ntahsthd
are
b,
*
TJ/?, iR/?A,
divided
correspondto
These
in Sanskrit.
of
(sjmshta)
them,
(3,"$,
called Anundsika.
Letters formed
three of
letters are
quality(prayatna*,effort)
Spar"a in Sanskrit,and,
2.
places,and
be nasalized
by complete contact
five
then
are
cannot
*r
23
SANDHI.
EXTERNAL
the
to
or
ishadasprishta,
semivowels,
or
vivrita,
completeopening ; while
non-contact.
vivrita,
completeopening,or asprishta,
xin.
Rig-veda-pratis'.
3.
instead
eke 'sprishtam
^fiS^JI?
In
the
of ^"5
of
Atharva-veda-pratisakhyai.
FJT?eke sprishtam.
Siddh.33.
we
24
transition of ^
ch into TT g,
placeand
of
quality.
" 60.
changeswhich
of
The
take
initial vowels
letters with
TT^into
of
or
IT
have
should
we
n,
final
into
therefore
be divided
may
change both
of the eleven
the combination
placeby
consonants
or
" 60-
SANDHI.
EXTEENAL
two
classes.
Final
letters
their
regardto
with
changed,I
are
the
only final
The
and
the letter
by
and
into
cha
TFrT +
f^Rf%
TTfT +
W^sniflPd'
tat +
SJJUlfri
rTcT+
^rnT^1
1TW
ri(W'H(Vftat +
is
tat +
d-nJUH
changed into ^
composition,"T"r?T +
final consonants
of Dentals,
case
Anusvara, and
changes of place.
tachcha,and this.
7^t
In
tat +
"fTW +
in the
changes of
placeof
the
possibleto
as
letters.
these
*T n,
3)is changed
palatals
(^ ch, "^ chh, *(j,T"Jh,
SIN
4, 40.)
t before
palatal.(Pan. vm.
Ex.
Final
much
All other
these
the
Dentals,being incompatible
The
as
followed.
they are
Visarga,being superaddedto
$ 62.
with
palataland lingualbefore
Visargaadapt themselves
which
liable to
are
Visarga.
are
which
Linguals,become
Palatals and
Anusvara
2.
organs,
Changes of Place.
consonants
Dentals,the Anusvara,
with
placesor
quality.
i.
" 61.
their
regardto
chhinatti
srinoti
jayate
ch and
he
tachsrinoti,
then
into ^
this.
cuts
this *.
hears
is born.
The
j accordingto
$ 66.
this
tajjdyate,
final
of
WTWifT
WlfT=
tachchhinatti,he
the world.
The
change would
same
initial "r n,
" 63.
i^t might
Final
become
before
"T n
Note
"
hereafter.
Rules
the
on
TTif +
T*Tff
and
3^
is
changed
he
tdnjayati,
changes
of
final "f"
7#,
before
palatal"^n.
to
(Pan.
them.
conquers
and "S^swill
^cA, TS^chh,
th, T d, ^ dh, w
lingual.(Pan.vm.
tat +dayate
TT!"qTT
into T t and
ffff +
composition,
then
^^1
into
=
1^^1
t etat +
an
be given
changed into
Ex.
before
T(jh; and
40.)
4,
In
*{j,T^jh,*{n,
vin.
initial
an
either
tan +jayati
+ "nrfir rtiy^frf
Trif^
Ex.
is
place before
take
4,
=
(not\sh,
accordingto
tikd
thakkurah
vm.
4,
43)
41.)
taddayate.
tat +
Pan.
The
final
T{t is changed
"J66.
a glosson
tattikd,
the
etatthakkurah,
this.
idol of him.
tachchhrinoti.
ri^lififri
26'
before
kakup
base
atra
"nK
^T3TJ:
ajo +
^M*K
ap
ghatah
ah
^r:
*rft^Wsarit
before
mahat
^W?T
Note
which
+
"
6A^
into T d:
TRT:
found
in
Thus
dictionaries.
of
unchanged before
same
the
is not
vala
vidyutvat,possessed
"ft
f"4
H^tejovin
changed.
lightning.
Final
J 67. Additional
" 84.3.
see
4,
nasals,chiefly
^
and
these
final sonants
initial nasals,and
Ex.
f^oF+
a
"TPT:
may
be further
may
be written
f^nn:
n9
f^ni:
or
Pri1^
'aifi
1(fyotis-}-mat=jyotishma
ip?)
and
they requirethe change of o^k, ^ t, Ji^t,
but
initial
ca^
remains
f^T"T=IMftjlt^"c/as+rtn=tejasvin,
TT"f^+
I.
Tt^maf,
fa^i*i
\vidyut+
represents Visarga,
too, which
+ HW
WlTn*^
instead of
suffixes
possessive
the
them.
derivatives
to Taddhita
+ ^^=
fq^rt^
Ex.
s
confined
Tt^tbefore
Thus
Taddhitas.
of the river.
final
instead of
by
$ 62
see
3c5
^i(vat, fV"Ttfw,
followed
$62:
sarijjalam,water
etat + ddmarah,
^rf|THT:t
are
largebow.
linguals,
changed
=
of the world.
mahaddhanuh,
sonant
There
are
dhanuh
'STF?
*rfci^-f
t before
sonant
=
II
atra
mahat
"ff/
palatalsand
sonant
river there.
saridatra,the
^3
before
d, except
"*
plur.
when
linguals"
"R1T
kakubbhih, instrum.
into
changed
("69.)
ammayah, watery.
bhih
before sonants,
abghatah, a water-jar.
kakubatra, a regionthere,(inflectional
'3ftt^kakubh.)
=
^HT
" 67-
SANDHI.
EXTERNAL
final surds
into JT g,
"q jo
infected
n,
n,
the nasal
by
d, ^ d, and
^ ^";
of the
character
45.)
4,
dihndgah,
dignagafyor
"
are
being sonant,
(Pan.viu.
*{m.
ndgah
dik +
nasals
The
m.
^ k, 7 t, T{t,
^p
world-elephant.
or
'Tvf^+ 7Tff7Tnvfej|fif
H^f^rt^
madhulit
lidnardati
or
madhulinnardati,the
:
ndthah,lord
of the world.
*%"$
or
-f-H^:
TTT^^:
khah, facingthe
or
your
jagat +
madhu-
hums.
^jagadndthah,or jagan-
ndthah
ap + nadi
prdk
m^TO:
abnadi
mukhah
or
amnadi, water-river.
=prdgmukhah
or
prdnmu-
east.
or
vanmatam,
^NTVJ:
or
bee
+ nardati
^^
opinion.
bhavat+matam
bhavadmatam
or
-"
EXTERNAL
72.
Note
then
If
"
would
should
T^/would
final
word
become
begin with
change
its
or
guttural,palatal,
lingualn (^
placeor
at the
organ
There
or
^n.
"^/i,*^fl,
27
8ANDHI.
are,
time
same
however, no
",
or
*^ff,
that it became
words
in
common
It
nasal.
beginning
use
^T^T +
Ex.
*HI
+ *n^
*Ojf"$^
Note
vm.
mdtra
4,
wfrt"i"iidmadhulit+mdtram
tat-}-mdtram
CT*HI^
tinah,Fie
is not
mntlhulinmdtram,merelya bee.
the
on
-f ^1H
Mflliqfrt
shadnavati.
contact
(Pan.
the sonant
vm.
4,
^fCsfT^Tft ^iVctrsFn!parivrdt-j-hut ah
^T^-f-^""i(
or
^i
final ^ Jt (*ty),
^(
(\"f)t
aspirateof
the
62.)
elephants!
or
"3"u
^parivrddhaiah
jjari-
or
is killed.
"?iT =
with
changed into
necessarily,
not
the nasal
fvrirfttnfl
ftl'^tW'iJ
or
or
dhik-\-hastinah=dhighastinah
dhiggha$-
fVcf + ^(Vsrit
=
"QHC3T7
change into
tanmdtram, element.
initial ^
the
45, vart.)
"
Ex.
before HTO
"HI -f-TTpT
and
maya
(Pan.
obligatory.
but
optional,
vi"H"u
or
ap+haranam
abharanam
abbharanam,
or
water-
fetching.
J 70.
Ex.
before
if ^
Wf^4-75W
J 71.
Final
through the
in this
Ex.
J 72.
by
any
Ex.
and
nose,
Final
^rr^"
toward
words
as
tT n,
dhdvan
this
dot
4,
6O.)1
Idbhah
3,
asvah
mahdl
a
It is usual
it.
Ardha-chandra.
Idbhah, largegain.
vowel
short
and
followed
32.)
dhdvannaSvah,a running horse.
=.
dste
head.
large fore-
c^/is pronounced
over
half-moon,called
preceded by
"^/.(Pan.vm.
brihallaldtam,a
the Anusvara
(Pan.vm.
gnWT^ sugan
If ^ n, T^ n, and
Ex.
into
sits
pratyahhdste,he
turned
the west.
*J*TW4- ^mir
vowel, no
+ laldtam
pratyah +
HW^I^d
d, but
the Anusvara
"n^*Sf:
"*
is written with
doubled.
vre^-f ^ng:
+
is
n, ur n, and
mahdn
Hgl|fl*T:
vowel, are
U7TT
labdham
T^TIbefore "^/
HTH:
H^l^+
changed into
^d'cftl? brihat
to write
case
not
^"^ +
TTWW
c3c3T?
^T^+
c^"is
+ dste
precededby
are
sits
he
suganndste,
long vowel
and
countingwell *.
followed
by
any
^SThT + ^idgma
Technical terms
like
kavin +
dhvayasva,call
^tUlty
unddi,a
from
the
poets.
this rule.
E
also
un,
or
filTW tihanta,
"30.
28
J 73.
Final
Final
before
initial cp
tT
before
Before
before
7^ n
of
unchanged.
of 5^s.
"^sh.
intercession
^n^+^flRTC^^^aRTR
Ex.
IT p,
is
original
^w
sibilants the
inserted
these
k, ^kh,
of
(Pan.
^s.
7.)
3,
vin.
and
T"ph,remains
"^n
" 73-
SANDHI.
EXTERNAL
hasan
chakdra
Anusvara.
changed to
hasam$chakdra,
did
he
it
laughing.
'$Tn:
*Tre"^+
dhdvan
vrf^gNH
chhdgah
dhdvamschhdgah, a
ning
run-
goat.
chalan
frfjvr: ^cfffefpr:
tq^TT
chalamshtittibhah,
"
tittibha-bird.
moving
HgR
tittibhah
Tips
H^i"a":mahdn
thakkurah
mahdmshthakkurafi,a great
idol.
"^1^+
Note
"
representationof
take
Ex.
Final ^
and
/5fl.
T$F
to
optional
3,
by
add
becomes
nsa
nksha;
(Pan.vin.
^T
without
n
and
nksa
^r
becomes
ws^a
k after the ^
OF
becomes
w^a
initial "5{s,^shy^s
"^r
nksa;
K?TR
ntsha;
becomes
ws#
28.)
^W^Trr^^W or
TTTT +
not
7.)
be followed
it is
but
3,
may
ntsa
Ex.
^n
Thus
HT n.
becomes
W5^a
"^n,beingthe
"^ch, ^chh, 7f, ^th,T^t,^th to
"firrr
(Pan. vin.
prasdmschinoti.
J 74.
nom.
original
*^w, is not allowed before
=prasdnchinoti;
*K^H*t + fW"iTfif H^lTi%*ltrfT
prasdn -\-chinoti
an
sibilant.
tree.
falling
+ taruh, =patamstaruh} a
HAW^:patan
IT^t =
Wl^iJM(or Mli^ri)prdn
sete=prdnsete
or
prdnksete(orprdnkchhete).
*pni#*rcfr
sugan
or
$ 75.
before
The
same
\sh, where
into palatal^ n*
nchchh
s"5
or
be
rTHT -f "^7
final
appliesto
it remains
(^63);
changed
and
into
ifT^M? /a/z +
ns
or
To
grammar,
allow
sdrddldn
before
.
shat
rfincci*
or
be
3,
or
and has
to remain
long been
unchanged
corrected
by
before
that
changed
was
scholar.
s, but
not
to
355^nchs,
unchanged,
30.)
tdnchsdrduldn
^s
remain
rti""aLic*"i"
those tigers.(Pan.vni.3,
tdnchhwrddldn,
"^w
six.
tdnshat,those
tdn"drduldn
s^ ^ and
'^nts. (Pan.vin.
sugansaratior
3^ s it is first changed
Before
again
may
Before
or
tan +
7^w
unchanged.
-^(ns may
Ex.
rule
sarati
mere
or
or
ni""tirti^f
tdnchchhdrduldn
31.)
misprint in Benfey'slarge
-$
EXTERNAL
77-
he
bears
hims,
(The base f^9[
enemies.
Ex.
or
tdnttahate,
at
the
-f ^ra
kim
hintsu, among
or
*Jsu
unchanged,and
and
of words
end
the
be inserted.
ift may
saritafy shatsaritah
Final
remains
shatjsa-
or
29.)
4, 42 ; 3,
Anusvdra
/a//*w
55.
shat
M^rHiXd:
$77. i^m
before
remain
must
*finr. MZ"fCff:or
TO
^ f before ^a
J 53,
See
Pada.)
as
final
tdnsahate
H$rr"Ain (hints)
+ *M
or
J 76. A
sahate
them.
+ *J
f^g
f^ (fi[^)
treated
tan
HlfH^rt
or
29
8ANDHI.
i^m.
if followed
unchanged
by
any
initial vowel.
f^T
Ex.
Before
consonants
vm.
23.)
3,
4"
simply optional(Pan.vm.
exceptionsare
The
(Pan.
Before
changed into ^
Before
7/,
Before
Before
it follows
Hence
and
consonants,
T{y9
7^1,^v,
that
changeof
be
final Anusvara
compound
avoid
the
sonant
written
into
ambiguityas
to the
dentals.
riiy^fri
tan jayati,it
damayati
tarn
damayati,he
alwayschanged
Ex.
into
may
^T
be
may
tames
f%
changed
All this
kill
jahi),
writing and
be
class-nasals
m^qPn
^*iMfntan
tan
when
is at
uncertainty
once
thou
initial
by
her, is
conquers
same
manner
them,
if final
or
TITT
is
\m
followingword.
kirk
karoshi
(or
+jahi
'
them,
conquers
removed
+ karoshi
should
we
followed
tames
of the
optional
spared a number
jayati. In the
damayati, he
fa^OfM) kim
of the
printing; and
5RJ ^ff?(or^Tf^%)satrum
the enemy.
should then
ohOfM (or
before all
si s,
if 1R
Thus
for
doest
in
of these
either UTT
What
karoshi),
4-
both
into
her.
Anusvara
into
avail themselves
never
We
H^n, "^n,*TN?n.
be taken
be
Anusvara, whatever
fcwv+oM"fa
kin
n,
J 56. 6.
See
changed
would
originalnature
^n.
to urn.
no
troublesome
and
palatals,
linguals,
tan
have
^", ^
are
be
^n.
so
which
letters which
may
Tffw.
to
be
may
desirable if scholars
most
to
^y, ^T,1(v.
to
final J^m
be
must
Anusvara
or
n.
Before
Before
of
be changed to Anusvara.
exception,
without
it may,
is there ?
generalrule.
is the
This
+ atra
satrumjahi (orsatrun
30
EXTERNAL
nadim
:"T^fIRflf(orr^^Tfncfif)
"
he
tarati),
+
frl
H H
(orgurun
fa
phalam),What
31HdH
kiih
(or
phalam
kirn
use
mimdmsate),he
(orsdstram
mimdmsate
namati
sdstram
(or ^n^Ffhrni'ff)
STT^1*rfafaffi
=
+ *ftafaff
bdstram
Before
is the
(or
tarati
-\-namati-gurum
kirn + phalam
(or PcM-Mie^)
W5
nadiih
the river.
crosses
namati),he
Tfic5 =
-f tarati
"T*rfifr
(or *T^wrfir)
gurum
g%
far* +
" 78-
SANDHI.
+ mimdmsate
studies
the book.
i^y, e^/,^v.1
satvaram
TTTfrf TR?rt TTfcf(or ^RT^iiffr)
^H^CH
+ydti
he
(orsatvaray ydti),
c5HW
walks
frot cW^
ydti
satvaram
quickly.
labhate
vidydm
la-
he acquireswisdom.
(orvidydl labhate),
$^
TO
veda
(or tav
veda
tarn
"
veda),I
him.
know
Before
Or^fd
flR^T]r^+
piteously.
karunam
"R^T!JXtf^fw
roditi
he
roditi,
karunam
cries
lies
on
the couch.
4- ^%1T
*fft^r
ir^H moksham
iftet
cultivate
+ 5eve/a
seveta, let
moksham
man
freedom.
spiritual
TVT^+^rfw
Tgt '^ufifmadhuram
hasati
hasati, he
madhuram
laughssweetly.
$ 78. Jf^m at
is
sake
of
not
as
Anusvara.
the
simple dot
end
m,
with
brevity,
pronounced as
in this grammar.
$ 79.
Final
may
(Pan.vin.
does
f^
be
^ h,
($8, note),and
end
of
it is
written
so
or
f^; -3:
or
if it
foh^:^m
by ^n9 *^w,
immediately followed by these
were
A/iw^e =
A:z/^hnute
or
kim
or
kimhmalayati,What
does
Hm
changed to
Anusvara.
hnute,What
Am
hyah
"
hyah
yesterday\
preceded by
TO
out
through-
immediatelyfollowed
be
kim +
fofi^ff
If ^ Ari is
Ex.
for the
J 80.
and
sentence,
written,however,
f^TH + ^Tc^rfif
f% ^TH^firT
kim + hmalayati=
=
fch'i^rM^fir
or
or
thus, (orT"ft^evam.)
if^h
as
at the
be
It may
*r=r evam,
treated
f$ ^W
pausd, i. e.
he hide ?
+ ^r:
about
before
3, 26;
foiw + Fff=
Ex.
Ex.
^m
word
of
the
cpn:
Tlff:
5am
he
(Pan.VT.
=
hmalayati
^T
preposition
the
kritah
move
kim
i, 137;
vin.
an
sam,
3,
^[s is inserted,
2"5.)
samskritah, hallowed.
-J 83.
$ 81.
In
(Pan.vin.
samrdj,
WTr^
nom.
be borne
1.
The
phoneticchanges
That
in mind
there
Final
That
Visarga is
followed
mr.
only
the
signsfor
the
replacedby
were
Visargaonly,i.e.
to the
which
it
letter,
surd
^TC
and
letter
h,
by
that the
is the
into the
changed
that the
gutturaland
If
Visarga.
sibilant of that
is
sibilant.
labial sibilants
also be used
sign may
same
instead
MJ"^":purnah
is
pausd
belongs,providedthere
(originally
tata%kdmah), hence
+ ^:
^jS:
corresponding
proper
are
of any
sibilant.
Hif: ^FTC
final in
be
can
observed,however,
by
that their
r.
by
sibilant,if followed
Ex.
obsolete,and
properlybelong to
surd
following
the
be
written
not
Visargaare surd,and
only sibilant
It should
It should
the
sibilant.
is the ^
class to which
now
(:)which
considered
are
simple rules.
very
became
labial sibilants
dots
sonant
few
^r.
which
sibilants,
of final
to
and
^s
reallyfive sibilants,and
are
unmodified
2.
changed.
never
gutturaland
the two
reduced
be
difficult,
may
most
is
25.)
3,
Visarga and
$ 82.
31
8ANDHI.
EXTERNAL
love.
chandrah
tatah kdmah
purnaS
the
chandrah,
full
moon.
riOw*n
taroh +
chhdyd
taros
chhdyd, the
shade
of
the tree.
T. -f
talati =
bhitashtalati,the
frightened
is disturbed.
man
T^t:
broken
r: -f
bhagnah +
HH"^:
thakkurah
the
bhagnashthakkurah,
idol.
"nrrefttnadydfy+ tiram
fftt
=
nadydsttram,the
border
of the
river.
tnt=TOT:
par
am
Visargabefore
H 4-
TOTX^ni) nadydh+pdram
(originally
the oppositeshore of
nadyd "f"pdram),
(originally
sibilants
f^:
mt
(Pan.vin.
child
t
or
sargah
or
prathamah
"isuh
sleeps.
or
shodasah,a
bhdgaJj,
or
inw:
nadydk
river.
36):
or
suptah +
*prf35TST:
grr: f^rsj:
suptah bisuh,the
shoda"ah
3,
sixteenth
*ni:
part.
prathamafy
supta"
tiiuh
or
32
EXTERNAL
Note
If
"
but remains
"FJ +
Note
by
if followed
initial
an
?f(ts, it
W^J
"K
If,on
"
the
t^TC +
^ej
^Tt ^r
is followed
contrary,Visarga
(Pan. vm.
^^T
or
by
a wicked
tsarati,
^s,
sibilant with
cheats.
man
is the handle
sword ?
of the
the
letter,
surd
36, vart.)
3,
devdh-\-stha=.devdh stka
"W
dental
35.)
3,
sathah
changed into
is not
tsaruh,Which
kah
kah-\-tsaruh=
W^J
droptin MSS.
frequently
Visarga is
Ex.
is followed
Visarga,as
^HK +
Ex.
Visarga
" 84-
SANDHI.
devd
or
stha, you
gods;
are
(also"^IH?i|devds stha.)
^ftt4-^fCfw ^fct^firflT1[fT"*jj"Jn
harih+
=
or
sphurati,Hari
Note
If
"
by
words
be
substituted
ending
nouns
beginning with
he drinks
" 84.
but
thou
generalrule
"T^ws,like ^f%thavih
or
tf(ph,and
off", ^(kh,^p,
(Pan.
water.
If final
If the
^"s
V"JJdhanuh,
or
are
of the
Visarga
is
udakam,
tvam
let the
ghee
44.)
3,
followed
is that it be
followed
are
*U"jf"iH^Tir
^TPtftfs"iFnsarpishpibati
or
or
sarpihpibati,
vui.
Visargais
hari
sphuratior
sphurati.)
^It ftr"r
tishthatu sarpih,
j^H^^T
piba
flH?jJ
admits,however,
1.
in
haris
(also?Tpr^Wjn
ghee ;
stand,drink
the
appears
sphurati=harih
by
changed into
consonant
letter,
sonant
(See,however, $
^r.
or
vowel,
86.) This
rule
:
followingexceptions
preceded by
^rr
and
a,
followed
by
sonant
letter
If the
the
Visargais precededby
Visargais
3. If the
the
Visargais dropt,and
Examples
be elided.
of the
The
generalrule
kavih
ohfaiji
except ^
sonant
by
^r
a, the
Visarga is
the initial
Avagraha.
am
udeti
+jayati
gaur
ti^lv: pafofi+
bandhah,
sun
rises.
the
gachchhati,
ox
jayati,Vishnu
vishnur
walks.
is victorious.
cattle.
91* "*"SI*
^TRJ
muhuh
oltl*
4- ^Tfw
%f^fTT
ni h +
fVf"rf:
:=
5: + THfr:
+ muhuh
vdyuh,+
^T^frrff
vdti
dhanah
nitih
gradually.
muhurmuhuh,
vayur
"isuh + hasati
duh +
JiuTPri:
vdti,the
wind
blows.
nirdhanah, without
durnttih,of bad
laughs.
wealth.
manners.
instrum.
aiftflT:
+ ftr: vffffiffiljyotifr
+ bhih =jyotirbhify,
=
a,
consonant,
which,accordingto "41,
sign of
+ ay
ravih
^Pri1 ift'^fri
by
followed
and
^r a,
n^33fifgauh + gachchhati
: +
any vowel
changed to ^fto.
changed
must
^1 a
the ^T
followed
and
^r a,
Visarga is preceded by
dropt,^
by
dropt.
Visarga is preceded by
4. If the
followed
and
^r a,
plur.
the
34
EXTERNAL
follows
if
2, 3, 4 ; i.e.
punah
g"Rftr
n -f ^T=
$ 86.
final
No
Tcr
can
+
TnOtSprdtah
eva
"TfT^ bhrdtah
"Tlf: +
T^f
to
TT^ bhrdtah
*m
generalrules
the
followingrules refer to
The
$ 87.
^TET
esha
end
of
Ex.
The
before
^ifff
TO +
"JW^fT
TO
JJIT:
*c ^
indrah
sa
The
before
Ex.
The
appears
^q:
rajate, the
shines.
moon
raksha, Brother,protect!
of final
Visarga,^
and
r.
eshah, this,become
^m
before
short
^r a
*f
and
sa
and
at
the
132.)
daddti
=
daddti,he gives.
sa
sa
^TR
*Tfc+
^Ti:
'bhavat,he
50
"
for
place,particularly
The
two
vowels
was.
(Pan.
i,
the
rule
vi.
same
all sonant
of
compound
the
in poetry. (Pan
optionally
bho
derivative
are
words.
and
best
A
lord!
Oh
devdh, Oh
H*ft:bhagoh
interjections
which
exceptions,
here be mentioned.
person.
134.)
Udna,
bho
God,
v(TFR(bhagavat,
and
metre
f$n"Tbhoh + Udna
^i: bhoh + devdfr
appliesto
of the
sake
of
Ht
Ht
the
ffasaisha,he, this
occasionally
vocative
irregular
$ 89. Numerous
may
Sandhi
vowels, except
syah,he, follows
and
vocatives
irregular
occur
preceding vowel
cases.
exceptional
sendrafy.
^hj:
Ht: bhoh, an
H^: 4-
in
takes
as
all vowels
same
bhrdtd
"
safy and
indraft
becomes
esha
pronoun
$ 88.
vidhd
initial ^ r,
by
sah} he is dead.
Sandhi
sa
r, if followed
its
14). Hence
3,
mritah
Sometimes
(Pan.vin.
liable to Sandhi.
not
are
^5: sah
^[
i,
^Tflfsafy+
*C
^5:
^r:
Thus
(Pan.vi.
dropt, and
the
few
and
consonants
is
early.
dehi,Brother, give!
or
rdjate
on
*c:
pronouns
sentence.
*:
But
two
^r,
are
another
again,
very
bhrdtar
+ raksha
by
vidhuh
f^"Wri
dehi
etymologicaUy^
by " 84 changed
lengthened. (Pan.vi. 3, 1 1 1 .)
+ UlTH
"fag:
vowel
letter,
sonant
any
even
=prdtareva,
be followed
ever
Visarga,whether
Ex.
by
api =punarapi,
therefore
and
followed
a, and
the
is retained.
"tr
+ ^rfa
"jrf:
Ex.
preceded by
consonant, the
or
$ 86-
SANDHI.
gods !
and
sinner.
^SWRJ^aghavat,
learnt
few
from
of the
the
more
dictionary
importanl
-jj89.
EXTERNAL
I. Nouns
1.
Before
in
^Bft^as,
^is, ^^
derivatives of
tfkri,to
us,
forming
Ex.
^W
-\-
^Hi:
There
several words
are
which
Ex.
4~ ^J
^nn
of the
Visarga is
the
kind
same
changed
+ "an::=
Hi:
2.
in
Nouns
with
TT"T
WJJ! +
Note
son
"^(us,such
?fr4t +
Ex.
and
^"s
cRTHt
and
as
^f^lhavih, V^t
nephew,
^TTJ^JWibhrdtushputrah,
"
47.)
the foot.
^sh. (Pan.vm.
beginning
3, 45.)
sarpih-\-pdnam=^sarpishpdnam,
ghee-drinking.
dyuh+kdmah
^TTJKRTlTt
in
dictionary
"c.
bhdskarah,sun,
^TiM'mT
dyushkdmah1 fond
is used instead of
of life.
WTjJJ
J^I bhrdtuh putrah,the
of the brother.
II. Words
1.
bhdh+karah
*TCRT.
3,
the
lord of speech.
vdchaspatih,
vdchah+patih =
qi'qt^nJ
(Pan.
from
vm.
lord of heaven.
divaspatih,
divah+patih
H- ^rt
learnt
adhaspadam, below
"
best
are
adhah+padam
vnitMtj
aya8kumbhah, iron-pot.
which
"
karhsa,goblet,^"?kumbha, jar,
muFfkarnt,
ear,
ahaskaraht sun.
ayah+kumbhah
*tM*"jiH:
sreyaskarah,
making happy.
^n^T^iC ahah-\-karah=
of a Compound.
46.)
3,
^T^fJ 4- "WS
the first
part
kdma), before WH
counter, board,
TfT"pdtra,vessel,gi^iiJttt^,
in
35
do (e.g.IRkara, ITT
to
SANDHI.
words
The
rHTt namah,
Ex.
"KRt
in
^SH^as,
^is, T^us,
treated
as
Prepositions.
if compounded prepositionally
with ifkri,
purah, ftRttirak,
"JTJ
^Ts.
(Pan.vm.
3,
40.)
namah-\-kdrah =
n"i"5hiO
namaskdrah, adoration;
(but
"W
^HT
namah
frR*?hlOtirah-\-kdri=
tirah
tiraskdri,
despising. In f?TTJ
is considered
2.
with
words
beginning with
(Pan. vm.
Ex.
3,
oFRt
f%t +
"^Rc^I=
cF
"T p
^ fcA,
Ar,
ftT^fiTTt
nih+kdmah
nishkdmah, loveless.
P^Ufcc^:
nih+phalah
fruitless.
nishphalah,
dvih+kritam
^IIT" ^if"i"*fljiii
=
or
J^fffduh+kritam
dvishkritam,made
III. Nouns
Ex.
^5
in
^PR[as,
^is, T^us, beforecertain
suffixes ^mat,
manifest.
square.
Taddhita
Suffixes.
the final
or
W*T: 4-
f^
: 4- TrT=
t 4- W(9
of final Visarga.
chatuh+konam-=chatushkonam,
as
instead
41.)
f^TJ+
r.
change
3, 42.)
f^f
\ nih,Jtduh,"^f^t
vahih, ^iPMJ a"z^,Tttglprddufi,
^TJtchatuh, if compounded
words
The
optional.(Pan.vm.
the
H "f Pf*f
"^tejah+vin=
with splendour.
tejasvin,
Pel
a*ft
"" AJyotih
+ mat =jyotishmat,with light.
"="H"M
a buffalo.
=
rajasrala,
rajafr+vala
^s
appears
36
EXTEBNAL
Before Taddhita
2.
into
Ex.
\sh,
suffixes
vtpqt+ ?t=
+
^Wt
3. Before
TnT
the
the
7^t
becomes
viPqgarcMh-\-tvam
Taddhita
it into
^Tni?
TT*n +
"K
n +
cni^Pn
V"J*+
V"J*+
$ 90.
^R^T
as
in
s,
pay ask
composition with
while
in
nouns
the
and
^^is
alpam
milk.
little milk.
a
j
yasaskah,glorious.
1^T*5hi*"|f7f
yasah+kdmyati=:yasaskdmyati, he
four.
39.)
3,
=payaspdsam, bad
k alpam
p ay ah -\-
yasah+kah
M^lt^ti*.
is ambitious.
(M""" I ^r sarpih+pdsam
bad ghee.
sarpishpdsam,
tiPM^snttH
sarpik+kalpam
sarpishkalpam,a little ghee.
^n^T=
l+
^w, is changed
or
archishtvam,brightness.
payah+pd"am
H*|t*h"34
K +
n +
i ^r
TfMW
+ cR^I=
JTOi
^s, preceded by ^i
suffixes tTT^f
pdsa, "K^T kalpa, cfika, and
nouns
~^^us change
the
^IJBflchatuh-\-tayam=chatushtayam,the aggregate of
"^i**(^nkdmyati, in ^T^
verb
Ex.
beginningwith \t,
after which
$ 90
SANDHI.
tf
dhanuh+kah
dhanushkah,belonging to the bow.
^^"x=n;
fn dhanuh+kdmyati=dhanushkdmyati,he
"*!*"" fn
V"Jl*am*'H
"RJ =
ending in
Nouns
and
the loc. plur.,
in
("85) retain
radical *.r
compositionbefore
nouns
the ^r
desires
before
the
bow.
su
of
though beginningwith
even
surds.
Ex.
^T" vdr
3T^ + *J
su
vdrshu,in
the waters.
+ ilftf: llMfff:
gir -\-patih
=girpatih, lord
fh^:
of
In
speech.
the optional
use
compounds,however, like inQfii:girpatih,
(Pan.vm.
treated
with
base of
^":
ahahsu;
svahpatih and
^Rfin svarpatih,lord of
vt^lfat
ahah-\-bhih
4l^ilc|t
ahah+rdtrah
=
hence ^IffJ + f*Tt
^?^t + -CTsft=
of the
day.
its final
because
^I^"^ahan, day,is further irregular,
and
the Pada-terminations,
likens before
tioned
Visargais sanc-
dhuhJftrprfjn
gihpatih,vttjfTT:
with
meet
we
^:"qfir:
ahahpatifyand ^qfrf: aharpatih,lord
v"^".
and
vart.),
^fir:dhurpatifr;^fqfin
patih, and
heaven
3, 70,
of
in
ahobhih
"
^T^J + ^
is
r
"""
beginning
^n?^J ahah+su
2,
68, vart.)
$ 91.
after the
Ex.
^chh
^TT
particles
1T^ +
*H +
^T
After any
"5THT
In the
Ex.
after
beginning of
d and
ITT md,
tava
TPf ^3TRT
*n fsa^H
f^lTN=
"gT^TflTm
=
other
body
is
word,
chhdyd
"
md
long vowels,
this
final short
vowel,
chchhdyd,thy
shade.
not
dchchhddayati,he
long and
word,
the
cut.
covers.
change is optional.
cj^O'Q"mi
badarichhdydor badarichchhdyd,shade
of
and
^55 chchh.
tava
Tn a + chhddayati=
Wl^
after
changed to
chhidat
ma
or
both
the
at
change
of
t$ chh
into ^5 chchh
of Badaris,
is necessary
short vowels.
ichchhati,he
S^arfir
i, 73-7^.)
wishes,
fra: mlechchhafy,a
barbarian.
(Pan.vi.
_$
EXTERNAL
93.
f
into
Initial
92.
if
chh,
*5
^T^
(Pan.
5ITT
followed
not
letter
final
the
(for ^rc).
Ex.
6,
$T
vm.
by
of
the
hard
consonant,
word
preceding
be
may
is
hard
changed
consonant
or
63.)
4,
TTOfnr
37
8ANDHI.
vdk
TO"[W
or
Mam
vdktatam
vdkchhatam,
or
"
hundred
speeches.
i|(Xfll^ fft
or
parivrdf
H^^r^3
mahach
or
chhakafam,
rf-^t^H
great
^a/
mahat
H^^^"s
or
"ete
parivrd(
tete
6aka(am
mahach
fakatam
car.
that
by
tachchhlokena,
blokena
parivrdf
down.
lies
beggar
the
chhete,
nfldl"("^
or
verse.
"
VT3R+
^nn
dhdvan
^HJ
93.
otherwise,
/i,
IT^,
of
^"/,
initial
the
C?M^,
visvagudh,
wise,
,
\^dh,
^ d,
or
consonants
milker,
dhdvan
sasafy
or
ap
babdah
ap
babdah
or
apchhabdah,
water.
^dh,
i{gh,
sasafy
hare.
^^"^;
or
dhdvan
VN^ft^lt
running
^u^|""":
sound
with
begins
Ex.
If
or
chhasah,
$1^!
the
VN^f^K
becomes
all
becomes
v^bh
or
stand
lose
and
^",
^c?,
T^,
"p|r
attracting,
dhuk.
becomes
at
the
their
^ c?,
end
of
aspiration
or
^"
are
syllable
as
changed
which
final
or
into
EXTERNAL
I 94-
SANDHI.
"
33
.'1
33
*
"3
Sfe;
I**
2
" S
ll
'"
"i
,0
0
-6
"*"*
^S
U|
3'
3*3.
"I
33
33
3'
"i
1R
Eh.s"
*l
41
" 94-
EXTERNAL
8ANDHI.
"
""
II
~
.2
"
"2
"%
I?
S3
(fT
.f
tr
If
I
.'*'
IF
nr fr
"
": .2
II
-2
00
"T
ir*
*"
K"
I* I*
41
11?
17
vo
CO
p"
jj
P^P
"3.
K*
If
If
15
is
"
lu-
11
S}
I i
-2
2
"
"
"
z
^
03
40
EXTERNAL
SANDHI.
ir
94-
tov
|u/
**
tr
/w
fl^
a*
IB"
"
:a
ra
ra
ra
|rr
fir
1C
1C
IT
"IS
MS
17
*"
,"*
PS
[1
tr
lr
ar
Jr
IB- Ur
5
"r
I
IS5
"
t-
r"C3
^3
CHANGE
f 97.
The
iftnd,the sign of
verbs
of
r^w
OF
the Kri
$97-
INTO
Su
conjugation,and
not
the
are
conjugation,
But
the
of
^n
in the
two
shakes.
Tf^trnfrf
pushndti,he nourishes.
kshubhdna, imper.shake.
Table
(whetherit belongsto
remember.
is likewise
But
in the
occurs
of the
one
tT
part of
second
letters
suffix
^ri} ^rt,
depend
employment
the
of the
are
termination,)
liable to
^r,
or
rules
the
dictionaryrather
dental
be
and
are
much
on
lingualnasals.
or
first
\sh,
than
the
simplewords,
importantto
most
changed
the
of
middle
part
contains
of which
certain
after
particularly
uncertain,and
more
the
for the
grammar
followingrules
The
it
TQ^n when
into
we
right
are
the
important:
most
i.
on
in the
tTw
compound
prepositions.Here, however,
must
or
into wn.
Changes of^n
the
showing
The
change of ^n
the compound
of
Hence
into T^n
"^nff bdrdhri, a
goat with
long ears
so
leathern
as
to
thong,+
of
name
place unless
take
not
combined
are
if it is the
bdrdhrinasah,
of
does
rpa nasa,
certain animal
Pan.
members
singleconception.
nose,
gives ^nffaran
accordingto Wilson,
accordingto others,of
ed. Aufrecht,s.
(Unadi-Sutras,
express
the two
rhinoceros,or
3.)
bird.
But
charman,
w^
gives^HHlf"^: charmandsikah, if it means
v.
vin.
4,
leather,
+ HlfUcM ndsikd,nose,
An importantexceptionis ^%rnw"T sarvandman,
havinga leathern nose.
a
technical term
which
Panini
Other proper
*
"
t
name.
In the Veda
The
we
himself
names
find
not
employs
(^% sarva
with
the
list,)
^n only. (Pan.i. i, 27.)
being the
dental
first in their
the general
rule,are
following
Rv.
"iTOgf^
tripnuhi,
n.
16, 6
ITW^t
Rv.
tripnavah,
Sarasvati says
Hence
for pronouns,
in.
42,
2,
Trinayanah is
-$ 98-
CHANGE
svarbhdnuh,
^f'Anj:
Words
of
name
be remembered
to
INTO
^n
43
l^n.
Siva; ig "{{"!:
raghunandanah,
of
three-eyed,name
OF
Rahu,
of
name
Rama;
"c.
from
\l agranih,
first,
principal,
\lgrdmanih,head
borough, from
lead.
front,and ?ftn/, to
HTJ agra,
fftn1t
multitude,and
?JTR grama,
to lead.
Indra, killer
vritraghnah,
of Vritra ; but
(Pan.vm.
-itrahan.
jrpardhnam, afternoon,from
and the
distinctions,
according to
which,
for
kamsah
it must
10.)
In
the
same
only be
can
affected
mdsha-vdpena
mtHTUtll
of
belonging to Indra,
4,
Ex.
Or
than
more
by
fa: +
T^t
4,
4. In
in
in"T
+
live
dental
milk,
on
IT
words
two
hay-
the
as
dental
t^n
the
"T
of any
one
immediatelypreceding.Hence
the word
but ^r^'W^ri^mdsha-kumbha-
bean-jar.(Pan.viu.
change of
into
^n
4,
does
TFT n
38.)
take
not
placeif the
first
g.
rik + ayanam
^'I4H
^
a
if it ends
Ex.
in
ends
^cjr + W*r4
Some
the
compound
word
drinking
8.)
bv sowing: beans
vessel for
tribe who
"""'"/
3. In
instance, "/Uni"i
ordinarycompounds, such
in
while
vehicle
of
compound consisting
word
(Pan.vm.4, 7.)
pronounced with
be
name
ahan,
"*vNl^iU darbhavdhanam,
manner
unchanged. (Pan.viu.
remains
a
if it is the
lingual^n;
$"m^"i indravdhanam,
In
kshirapdnah,
may
T^rc)
; but
or
cart, is speltwith
2.
drinkingof milk, or
all,and W^
pronounced HfkMUli:kshirapdnah,milk-drinking.(Pan.vm.
be
4, 9 and
the
^RfT
*R a.
(^
and
over,
ends in
means
n
lingual
para,
the firstword
whole
whenever
kshirapdnamif it
or
TTTT
*r% sarva,
same
minute
are
22.)
day, from
^%T^o: sarvdhnafy,the
There
of
ace.
mountain-stream.
Pj|Puu"{l
girinadior girinadi,
or
day ;
12
4,
^nptfvritrahanam,
\sh,
and
the next
rigayanam.
to
proper
is formed
(Pan.vm.
names.
by
4, 3,
5.)
"
MNH
yajushpdvanam. (Pan.vm.
35-)
compounds
the
if followed
"^w of
by
nouns
endingin
hivdpinah; but
or
or
'
also
and the *T n
always liable
vowel, are
pflP^Trfi*"T
vrihivdpin,
rice-sowing,may
\
tf w,
form
to
the
of case-terminations,
change.
genitivedlP^lPmn:
WlP^mPm: vrihivdpinah.
'^f^ninf'Tvrihivopdni
or
vrihivapdni,nom.
plur.neut.
instrum. sing,
"at^iiR trihivdpena
or
vrihivdpena,
o
IT/-
44
CHANGE
Likewise
feminines
such
OF
INTO
TO
" 98.
or
or
'atf^mPmifl'
cflngmPijffl
vrihivdpini
vrihivdpim.
as
(Kas'.-Vritti
vin.
4, n.)
Note
The
"
"T
secondarysuffixes,attached
of
fit to be
possessedby
descendant
mother, from
TOxw. Thus
to
becomes
to the
end
the
TTrWT'fi'TOrt
mdtribhoginah,
Kharapa.
vffrTC
bhogah,enjoyment,with
and
mdtri,mother,
TTtT
compounds, is,under
kharapah (i.e.donkey-keeper)
"3".Mt
of
of
ordinarycompound, TWff^
T^HTt gargabhagah,the
from
enjoyingthe
suffix
of
is
Ex.
after
which
singlewords
followed
by
obligatory.(Pan.vin.
part of
second
though the
even
7. Likewise
part be
affixes,such
a
4,
in these
optionalafter
and
4,
prakopanam
(not
^T
a)
causative
M^IIMHf
or
and
is necessary
is
and
an
r, the
^T
"T
in, Tf
of
3.)
primary
(ifpreceded
na
certain restrictions.
prdpyamdnam.
urmHW
4,
30),and
vowel
any
but
^T
in other
^iiR
hence
U"if*r?T
pra
THfitTO or
beginningwith
verbs, not
U
by nasalization,the
bases
-f
+
^r^
TPTW
kampanam
ning
begin-
(Pan.vin.
beginning in
verbs
Again, after
is said to be
after verbs
strengtheningtheir
92.)
to
with
consonants
prakopanam.
but
4,
harikdmena;
sing.^fxcfiT^
3,
contain
(Pan.vin.
verbs
; it is forbidden
^ n,
^Nhjjft
but
it
pronounced obligatory,
is
of
sing,of 3rE5Rjfta*r
sushkagomaya;
changed
change
ending in
31);hence
change
dung.)
HH|Tii
pramdnam
the
cases
general
29.)
iHM"!Jpravapanam
While
new
sing.^li.ij'Jii
kshirapena.
ana,
vowel),and mftmdna,
(Pan.vin.
Ex.
vritrahanah
; instrum.
^R
as
the
monosyllabic.(Pan.vin.
not
prepositionswhich
after
the
plur.neut. ^"imf\!r
surdpdni.
sushkagomayena,instrum.
by
4d^"u:
^njirrfafrr
agragdmini. (Pan.vin.
take
terminational
or
; instrum.
of
vowel,
contains
compound
compounded
therefore follow
then
monosyllabic,
; nom.
ksMrapah, drinkingmilk
6. If the second
been
7.)
4,
surdpah, drinkingsura
derived
was
vart.)
4, u,
is
it
12.)
4,
dirghdhni. (Pan.vin.
Ex.
they have
"^1^
lingual*JTw,if
suffix
adjectival
ini,
^r^in, fern. ^"ft
the
terminational
the
(samdnapada), and
Kas'.-Vrittivm.
4, 3.
have
with
5. If the second
final ^
Garga,
of
Words
Garga.
share
in fact like
treated
are
rule of
share
gargabhagintwould
pra
=
H-
"7f
vowel
change
vowels,
inganam
prakampanam.
CHANGE
Lastly,there
OF
several roots
are
INTO'w.
1"
which
T"T vep
T^c/am, *n\pytiyt
prabhdnam ; 1T%*R pravepanam,
^pd, Wfton,
1THTCT
never
containingan
prepositions
8. After
and
"qftjoflri,
IT
/?ra, and
^r,
after
45
such
hence
prabhdnam "c.,
m"(
lOTTO
never
pravepanam.
f^wtr,qn/wa,
wwraw/ar,
as
jt */Mr,the change
of ^
into
w^n takes
place:
In most
i.
HUJHfrt
/"ra
IT -f-HHfri=
jj +
"rnrcK
liable to this
are
Jtt^n. Thus
simply in order
few
viz.
(Pan.vm.
3. In
in the
blame
few roots
5. In the
to
liability
beginning
qp^nam,
as
change.
by
followed
or
nftii^H
TTPH^Hpranindanam
the initial ^
resists all
tT ny
?TTT
rejoice.
to
nardy
to howl.
nakk,
to
Krit
affixes,
pranimsitavyam.
pranikshanam.
pranindanam.
these roots
are
entered
65, vart.)
I,
down, (Chur*.)
faU
ndt, to
or
(Pan.vi.
viz.
ndth,
to
ask.
nddh,
to
beg.
f|nri,to
destroy.
or
or
change,and
beginningwith
as
nand,
lead.
Mfc"i"Hparinandanani.
into ?ffw
to destroy,
changes *T n
ffSl^naS,
its 31
only when
"
is
+ na"yate=pranasyate ; but
changed to t^sh.IT -f Tr^nr
Tmpttpra
-f nashtah =pranashtah,destroyed.
(Pan.vm. 4, 36.)
TO
TFW.pra
=
root
mftllfrf
pra
part
to
breathe, the
the
tjn by more
prdniti, he
^rfcm,
separatedfrom
aniti
+
=
aniti
Hllill
^prdninat; the desiderative
nishati.
It is not
(Pan.vm.
4, 19,
Siddh.-Kaum.
"T/i
is
than
changed to i^n
breathes
vol.
n.
p. 41,
with
but
if the
Thus
letter.
one
The
paryaniti (Patanjali).
M I
long a.
its
entered
"^nam
in
IT +
grammarians,as
or
UUllttJlli
yfHH|^i
pranikshanam
Dhatupatha
root
not
of native
entered
are
33.)
iircHHHparinartanam
4. The
of their initial *^ n
nrit,to dance.
Ex.
leader.
nfiuftiffttj
uf"jfa ri*4pranimsitavyam
or
frSTWniksh, to kiss
nid, to
ftjf^
is
change
4,
QllfHnis,to kiss
change
leads in.
antarnayati^he
to indicate
thus
this
roots
should
we
nayati
list of roots
Dhatupatha, the
he bows.
ndyakah =prandyaka/i,a
^?ra +
HIIIIM^:
which
roots
In
-f
14.)
4,
=pranamatit
nudati
antah
"l^flT "iri^Mfrt
-f
with
a.
namati
w:
the
j"ard+
j^fri M^KM^fri
-qtr +
The
t^n. (Pan.vin.
beginningwith
roots
Tr
IT 4-
xrft4- ^fnfH
reduplicatedaorist
f^jpard
is not
forms
is wftrftr^fifpardni-
21.)
"17
note.
nert
of the
Chur
class,and
hence
written
with
4:6
CHANGE
OF
be
" 99-
TST^.
"
4,
24);
Also H^Otf
kill.
but
is
he
prahanyate,
(Pan.vin.
TT -f
vin.
"jHlT SHlftf
pra
prahanvah
U^Fi
tT
f^n is followed
TJ^ftwprahanmi
Tnrfar or
by
*rw
or
prahanmi
or
M^*4!
and
of the Kri
of tfT raa
or
conjugationis changed
(Pan.
^v.
prahativah.
or
of the Su
of fjWM
-eici^JLHd1
antarhanyate
ghnanti=praghnanti, they
prahananam, killing.
Thus
23.)
4,
down
struck
change is optionalagainwhere
7. The
to
root
hanyate
to
INTO
6. In the
The
ft
4,
15.)
TT^rq^fw
praminanti.
prahinvanti; IFfiwfTT
Ex.
in the imperative
is changeable.(Pan.
T^raof the termination ^fif^dni
TW^lftr pra + bhavdni "prabhavdni.
IT + *^Tftf
vin.
4, 1 6.) Thus
8. The
9. The
*T
is
of
the
into
changed
kill,ITT ya,
to go,
to
eat, "^vap,
^T
to
or
sow
^vah,
weave,
to speak,
17) i\^gad9
change
same
(Pan.vin.
f"Tni after
all other
TTf^q^ffrf
or
in
(Pan.vin.
8),in
the
when
even
intervenes.
augment
verbs
except
is
which
those
follow
n^
gad9
the
of
change
optional.
Mriiimfripranipachati or pranipachati.
Except again
4,
to
wm"\"(i{pranyanadat.
"c.,
iffcpari,
if pra,
sleep,wr psd, to
to
or
vart.)
4, 17,
pranyagadat
ilimJI^TT
In
place
takes
flee
to
anoint.
fa cAi, to collect,fij^
dih, to
(c?w),
" 99.
4,
ifopari,"c.,
pra,
called ^ghu,
to go, the verbs
to fall,Tf^pad,
?,to shout, tfKjpat,
to measure,
ma,
*T^me, to change, ^ so, to destroy,^ A"w, to
The
(Pan.vm.
T^n
beginning with
verbs
which
the
*T
cR
ka
ending in ^
unchanged.
kha,
or
of fa ni remains
or
sh
Where
it seemed
likelyto
be
diacriticalletters (anubandhas),but
the roots
which
according to
mimtte,he
in
this
the
the
and
measures,
the
letters
grammarians.
after
the
transcribed
TKpra, "Oftpari,
the
of that
not
roots,the
two
which
^^me(n),
form
of
looked
ftff
ni, mentions
enumerating
which
m"md(n},
its
differs from
diacritical
Thus
in
their
forms
T"i*i1n
certain verbs
in brackets.
sdmayate.
forms
as
upon
class to which
class
root
root
given with
Panini
form.
Devanagari
been
have
roots
See.,into
always be
may
Sometimes
first verb
root
their
only in
commentaries, includes
grammar
additional
adding
change f^ni
Sanskrit
useful, the
sam
the
Devanagari original,
marks
belong
employed by
has
(div)means
been
native
indicated
sdmyati,or
by
sam
-$
CHANGE
100.
OP
Change O/T^S
J 100.
any
vowel
by
in^T
of
(chiefly
^*
except
^Tf a,
v,
^tn} i^y,or
^v
likewise
if preceded
terminations*),
and
be
certain
by
47
into
suffixes
or
linguali^sh,provided it
into the
^n9
dental
^th.
INTO
^8
Taddhita
suffixes,
T|Ara,VW
kalpa,
pd6a, "c.
If
inserted
an
vowel
and
Anusvaraf
the
the ^s,
the
or
into
change
butter
; instrum.
between
the
*ff"^Tsarpishd;
clarified
sing.neut.
nom.
intervenes)
sarpihshu (here the
; loc. plur. *rf":i{
Anusvara
the
intervenes
sarpis,inflectional
*rfxN^
Ex.
Visarga or ^sh
or
Visarga intervenes),
"P"ujsarpishshu(herethe \sh intervenes).
speech.
"ZF^vdch,
sarvafak
*cf$T*J
F)+ ^
su
sarvasakshu, omnipotent.
chitralikh (k)+
"fa^rfo'BJ
su
chitralikshu,painter.
gir, speech.
jfiggirshu,loc. plur.of frf^
+
"F*T^ kamal
*J
and
the
"K
q; +
TO
The
do not
other
H- Trl
changed
into 3^,
change
(here
sarpishtarah
;
$ 89, III.
in
as
2.)
the
of
penultimate
If the
takes
^5
must
+ mat
frffar^sarpih
not
final
Anusvara
ig^jwm,it does
be
^s;
must
not
radical
^s;
59.)
Yet
3,
be
have
to write
if
*jftnsupisau,because
VHlfyM:dsishah,from
we
write
who
do
not
limit
if
is the
the
we
vin.
3,
to
right form.
to
not
ip^tim*,
the
preserve
The
rules
55.)
58.) According
Anusvara
wish
^* belongs to
the
it must
call nuro,
'Qftpumsu,loc. plur. of
^pumshu,or,
purhsu
According to Panini, however, TfjJ
3,
clarified butter.
JIT^Afc. l"he
root
(Pan. vin.
grammarians
^pumshu. (Pan.
become
either
sarpishmat, having
hence
Sanskrit
what
even
hence
European grammarians,
should
ka,
butter.
long, no
base
we
be
by
I01-)
apply to
t The
a
is
adj. formed
sarpishkah ;
(Pan.vin.
f*PR(pis.
the root
tarah
vowel
to
having clarified
3.
changed
^ k.)
: +
1T^:
is
of
pokshyati, fut. of
into
dhrokshyati,fut.
cfik,
su
to
represent
man,
Bopp
Pada
and
inserted Anusvara,
the
^s, TJ^Tjmnjii.
Sarasvati
prescribes
48
CHANGE
Table
" 101.
The
"
^ sh.
INTO
^s
Changes of ^
the
showing
into
IOI-
sh.
of ^
rule
same
OF
into
in
sh
roots
ftrfMrHfrtsishitsati.
sidh, Des.
slept, ftr^
have
This
rule
is liable
to
exceptions.
j 102.
Again, many
beginning with
roots
requiringsuch
prepositions
which
Ex.
abhyashtautthe praised.
^HTCCTf^
the
case
is
Some
^rg
after,
anu9
abhi
-3ifa"ifrf
after
^sh
out, Tfftjoari,round,
+ stauti
reallypreceded by
verbs,after
same
been
in
^rfw
^rf* +
Ex.
has
added,
it into
l^s change
these
^r
an
prepositions,
the
Ex.
:
ftr^sich, to sprinkle;
"^sh in the reduplicatedperfect
^srfafttefw abhishinchati,he
^rfafa^fa abhishishecha, he
has
sprinkles
;
keep
sich
3,
abhishishikshati.
changed, ^r5rftfoT5ffr
from
"
the
In
103.
order
grammarians,
subject according
by
not
by
grammarians
vowel
by
or
been
have
views
of
the
they write
This
cover,
is not
to
burden
an
all
enumerate
their
with
memory
these
(likewisefW*
is not
^s
They
give
the
W^mp,
to go,
changed
into
general rule
where
(Pan.
^p^m)',
t(sh under
is
learnt
vi.
i,
any
by
down, the
lowing
folthe
hardlybe
added
that
rules,though
if
native
exhaust
smile,
to
glance
grammar.
s, and
followed
ft?^svid,to
beginning
with
sweat,
"^ sh.
64.)
to cover,
off,^c["^s"r",
to
show
that
W^stri,
to
their initial
circumstances.
this initial
to spit,and
fe\shthiv,
shtyai,Sar.,)unless
means
no
beginning with
smi,
to let
go, V
that
laid
are
collected
as
It need
grammarians.
verbs
monosyllabic
consonant,
rules
subjoined,though they by
ST
done
hence
be
must
rules
these
rule ;
desiderative
cases
of the
in which
native
giving them
dental
minuteness
complicated manner
attempt
be useful
may
Native
the
to
112); but in
Many other
this
Panini.
idea of the
an
Panini
from
beginnersshould
give
to
of the
and
extracts
at them
from
or
dictionary
follow
does, not
^sh
is to
""{*%sJivashk,to
be
go,
changed inters,in
(and according to
all
some
50
CHANGE
OF
fa vi,*jftpari,^srfaabhi, f"Tm',
may
"f"^syand
except when
appliedto living
beings, (vm.
fa vi, ta^^.
skand
(vm.
Tf ta
(vm.
7. After
3,
prep.
in the
not
in
past participle
past participle
in the
(X"s"q
t parishkannah or pariskannah.
^!^sphur and
verbs
take
^sh.
76.)
3,
verb
^[
f^vi,^^skambh
must
as,
after
dropping
"^sh
3,
77.)
prepositionswhich
after
vowel
TK^prddur,if the ^sh is followed by \y
(vm. 3, 87). ^XfazfTi^abhishydt.
prdduhshanti.
injt^fir
W^?E(l^prdduhshydt.
f%
The verb CT{st?op,when
m",f"T^mY,
changed to ^^*"p, takes \sh, after *JSM,
"j^c?w
(vm. 3, 88). *[$*:sushuptah. JfJW*.
duhshuptah.
such
cause
10.
tak
72.)
"qfic
pari,throughout, even
f"Tw",
fefvi,
the
f*f^wz",
3,
^sA,though
take
may
74). ^fV^-sctor
the
(vm.
3, 73),but
." 104-
\sh.
INTO
^S
Exceptional
cases,
11.
The
12.
The
change, and
where
is
^s
after
used, and
followed
fa*{sich,
verb
or
by
the
verb
go
verb
not
\sh:
affix (vm. 3, 112). ^afn^ f" ^"rf abhisesi-
intensive
cJiyate.
13. The
14. The
verbs
(vm.
3,
sodh (vm. 3,
sah, if changed to ^iffc?
f^T^siv,
^ sah,
W^stambh,
in
15).
parisodhum.
yP"4ft'^
aorist (vm.
reduplicated
the
verb
15. The
tive
16. The
verbs
sad,
abhishasdda.
17. The
verb
in the
"^T^svanj,
perfect(vm.
reduplicated
116).
desidera-
the
^(WmiT^
118).
3,
3,
abhishasvaje.
'STPmifl'T
if precededby
TR^sad,optionally,
the augment
(vm.
3,
"HtO^
119).
or
nyasidat.
tmaftt^nyashidat
or
"
There
104.
to
if the
TB(sh,
in
battle,and
are
compounds
many
firstword
ends in
^RTt
of
name
sacrifice,
(here the
Indra, and
(excepta). Ex.
sushthu,well
samah,
final
^s
Change of Dental
of the
the aorist,and
perfect,
^ftt4shidhvam,
(Pan. vm.
Ex.
3,
in
follows
second
pers.
"^ftsST
sMdhvam
is
^ cAyw ;
Bened.
sister
vc"*J^6
achyodhvam.
p loshidhvam
ft n
metre
dh
into
3,
Lingual
is
changed
"i
beautiful,
vcfiTHi"iT
agni-
father's
^pitrishvasri,
sacrifice
3"4lfn"Wjyoti-
g"itn^ turdsdh,a
In
whenever
h becomes
T t;
56.)
"? dh.
changed
to
dh
reduplicated
in the
benedictive,providedthe
dh,
immediatelyan
Ml
^ft
(Pan. vm.
of the
^f|"chakridhve.
Aor.
trishtubh,
fag*T
changed to ^sh
plur.Atm.
78.)
kri; Perf.
g^dushthu,ill;^^"TTsushamd,
is dropt.)
Tt^^'^jyotis
?^s of
is
from jfvyudhi,
gfa^^yudhishthira,
^TP'"i8l*iJ
agnishtomah, a
similar compounds,
ace.
^l^IT^turdsdham.
j
'^\m^turdshdt
nom.
of
even
the initial^s
mother's
mdtrishvasri,
; *iin"mi
sister; TTVfft
goshthah, cow-stable
shtomah,
vowel
f^f^sthira,
firm; ^"
in which
or
the
^ftshi
but V, ^TT
a.
-$
INTERNAL
51
IIUjll^
yakshidhvam.
Bened.
Tf*{yqj;
If the
terminations
same
y,
^r, ^ /,^0, ^
Ex.
Perf.
"J/tt;
"5"5^^luluvidhve
^HTtftW
Aor.
or
abodhidhvam.
when
rules
phonetic
06. The
of Internal
brought
into immediate
letters of nominal
There
nominal
is another
these rules
with
verbal
the
rules
accordingto
Sandhi,or
do in Greek
which
they
suffixes,and
and
before
Some
^y.
or
are
in many
learn
the
or
of
cases
themselves
liable
words
Latin, than
formed
are
final letters of
But
it is far easier to
we
except ^y.
the
vowel
remembered.
grammaticalforms themselves, as
master
to be
final
Krit
the
to
before certain
consonant
or
(padas),
sentence, to the
to
applicable
suffixes,beginningwith
deserve
in
compounds, and
before
(dhdtu)
bases
exceptionsthat
numerous
other
Pada-terminations,and
phoneticrules
and
general,
into
before primary
conjugation,
Taddhita
are
formed
the
precedingparagraphs($32"94)
suffixes,beginningwith any
class of
and
secondaryor
with
contact
before
and
(prdtipadikd)
of declension
such
bases
Taddhita
secondaryor
in the
contained
final and
Sandhi.
been
has
apply,as
be preceded by
\%
optional.
Rules
1
the
or
"6""M
\i, and
or
"JJM;
But
change
is
intermediate
the
preceded by
are
h, the
luluvidhve.
(Jcjfaj
alavidhvam
Aor. ^fc5fa*4
alavidhvam.
^""fq^
rtf^Ml
f^fqMl*4lavishidhvam
Bened.
j lavishtdhvam.
"5/M;
to
8ANDHI.
**4 akshibdhvam.
Aor. V f\Sf
flSp^foAtp;
But
OP
BULBS
107-
to
or
try
supposed to
to
be
formed.
The
followingare
Internal Sandhi.
few
student
The
endeavouring,however,
learnt that %s
of the
dvish, to
hater,%^: dvishah, of
back
with
change
advantageto
of final
declensions
an"
paradigms as
accordingto
sh
the
dvi(su, among
hater, fg^4}
rules,more
he
n"J"i
or
endeavours
phoneticrules
hiatus
Final
as
called
without
is tolerated in the
going
if"jnpura-etd,
in
"
which
general,
of
construct
in the
will refer
he
haters,
he
! f|T7dvif,
regulatethe
learn
his
acquiring first
the
will
each
never
form
by itself,
paragraphs.
following
Vowels.
middle
fd'Hd titaii,
sieve,are
praiiga, fore-yoke,
such
less
to
laid down
i.
" 107, No
glanceat them,
into ^F k, 3 /,
are,
be
may
After he has
impress them on his memory.
dveshmi, I hate,^ftfdvekshi,thou
hate, forms irfor
^ d, "c. ; but
conjugationsproperly,if,instead
they
the
of what
to
he hates,^Z
hatest,ifffc
dveshti,
a
phonetic rules
of
Sanskrit
words.
Words
hiatus
such
in
as
pounds,
com-
which
front, HH^fth:
nama-ukiih,sayingof praise,
H
52
is
RULES
producedby
the elision of
Final
108.
"
treated of under
been
^s
108-
the
of External
head
final
"
SANDHI.
INTERNAL
OF
^TT
coalesce
^Tm
according to
following vowels
with
and
the
general
rules of Sandhi.
+
"if^
+ ^ tuda+i=ltfi
tude, I beat,Atm.
TJ""
+ 3[dana+*
"JT"T
+
t[T"T
If
the
admit
we
necessary
certain
Thus
'3F3vdch-am, it is
in
if
of the
am
down
put
Atm.,
we
pres.
down
of
forms
actual
can
omission
f$rt
to
at
of the
advesh-am
the final ^T
sets of
terminations, and
and
conjugationby
of declension
and
Again,
beginning with
of
dative
the
is
many
dropt,in
of these
in radical
other
so-called
of these
the
cases,
its
systems has
to learn the
the base
nouns,
Bha
and
to be
'^
in the
fk puna
-t-
^i,
changed to Ty,
v,
Ex.
no.
Hw
",
-\-anti
^fc
WT
"31u,
certain
a,
any
the
at
in this
of base
W[
questions as
to
the
form
to
san^l"s!**i
for this
dropt, to
(Pan. vi.
to
terminations
not
bases
d is
had
rules
4,
for
as
all the
140).
practicalplan is,no
most
lay
arrive
said
was
and
Each
doubt,
in which
manner
glued together.
or
specialrules
a, many
elided,or
changed
to
^z
have
or
to
to
be
J?
e.
Thus
yvfli!
punimah,
we
cleanse.
^$ri, if followed by
vowels
or
diphthongs,are
^.r.
JT"
"3u,
cases
Conjugation.
Final
"
weakest
is either
chapter
IpTT-j-IT: pund+mah=
ST
base,
the
on
to
sing.
to
arrive at the
to
phonetic
elided before
in which
defects,and
final ^TT
which
given
ipfT-h
were
p.
have
order
is
am
phoneticrules.
by admittingtwo
calls the
asking
i.
combination
^TT a, certain
combined
originally
verbal bases
regardto
rules will be
Bopp
without
heart
the terminations
observed, according to
which
advantages and
paradigms by
These
cases
if
we
student
ty"sr*Hl4- JJ sankhadhmd-\-e
weak
before the
"va
of the
but
mechanical
merely
is obtained
result
same
assigning the
and
that
before
sing.,as
ace.
manner,
as
f$R
same
enablingthe
number
of the
TIT^ dvishe;
ij^tuda
thus
a
dropt
Thus
vowels.
ending
of bases
declension
in the
be laid
and
tud(a)e.
^Tg^atud(a)-am and TJ^
giving two
In the
be
to
of
of final ^Ta
sivam.
and in short
consonants
general termination
arrive
regularly^s^
form
forms
the correct
grammar
order
the
as
enjoin the
rule,accordingto which
new
to
necessary
down
in
requiringfinal ^T
rules
some
*8R^am is put
termination
the
as
lay
to
sing.,in
ace.
down
ending
after bases
set of terminations
same
^T a, it becomes
vowels.
to the
mati+ai=matyai,
mind.
J
(Vf
J* /^-H$==/fey*" they have conquered.
*TT^t bhdnu+oh
"fi^Tpitri+d=pitrd, by
UbM+ati
"
splendours.
the father.
bibhyati,
they fear.
generally
-$
In
to
t"
and
^t
cases
some
RULES
13.
-f-Wlf
H- T:
53
*[*[+
and
"Hi* to
T"(t"p;^ri
+ ^
+ ^HTT
to
ftri;
*nT|:yuyu+uh
gone.
bhiyi,in fear.
brought
forth.
on
ftnin mri+ate=imriyatet
1T^+ 3[
either the
^fVpapri+
one
the
or
under
specialrules given
*ftbhf, but
swallows.
i =papuri, liberal.
other
be
place must
takes
the heads
of Declension
from ^
fnf"""
fnjihriyati
^Qrt,if followed
Final
he dies.
f^KPn gri+ati=girati, he
M
"m.
siJriyathuJtt
you (two) have
yu-\-anti=iyuvantit
^"ffif
theyjoin.
*|+ wflf =
from
"T
When
53
8ANDHI.
^iy;
to
(VPsH^tfiJri+athuJi
fafr bhi+i
tf + ^=
changed
are
INTERNAL
+ Wy
fyOftl
Ex.
OP
and
learnt from
paradigmsand from
Conjugation. See fw"rfkbibhyati
hrt.
by terminational consonants,
is
changed to
^Tfr;and
after
labials
*T
"^prt,to fill;Passive
Before the
final
of the
^y
^J ri changed
"
to
Part "^Ipurnah.
^npur-yate;
Passive, Intensive,and
final ^
ftrt,
f^ ir
to
ri
final ^i
Beneclictive,
112.
9 +
^Trf
X + ^
'M
^frf de+ate
+ JJ =
"H +
Roots
^Tt
changeit into
are
lengthened,
and
are
diphthongs,
generallychanged into
cow.
nau-\-ah=.ndvah,the ships.
TTre:
terminated
wealth.
to the
"3
dayate,he protects.
rai+e-=.rdye,to
ITT
and
or
by
diphthong(except ^vye
radical
in
of the so-called
redupl.perf.,Pan.
vi.
(Pan. vi.
tenses.
special
1,46)
i, 45.)
^ft+
^rfif 'c6I^Pdglai+ati=gldyati, he
=
2.
" 113.
the end
:
#,
The
of
77i, must
verbal
base
letter or
Thus
he will pare.
^TTTTTso+td=sdtd,
HT=
rules
word
likewise
becomes
which
restricted to
are
be
Consonants.
Final
accordingto
the
^ k, ^
observed
final,i.e.
is weary.
where
where
n,
which
consonants
^ /, ^
the
it is not
w,
can
occur
at
last letter of
followed
by
any
nominal
or
derivative
syllable.
the nominal
base
battle,would
ifijjudh,
in the vocative
singularbe
54
is
aspirate
tolerated
word
end
no
the "^dh
Here, however,
y^ yudh.
can
sing,would
in
^ d} because
no
palatalscan
into cF k, because
its ^ ch
change
($54.
soft consonant
and
into
changed
be
must
($54. i);
final
as
" 114-
SANDHL
INTERNAL
be
never
final
(#54-3).
back
becomes
aspiration,
"114.
Nominal
it would
because
+
have
^7
$ 115.
this
suvalg
suvalk
final
The
final nasal
final
UTcfr
k had
^K
as
the
remainingguttural,
remained.
Here, after
but
Here
^s, is,accordingto
its Pada
assumes
(J55).
can
Before
form
dropping
the
word
no
4}4c4 suval.
to
'srvVoFadoh
advet, he hated
adhok,
under
seen
killedst ;
ahan, thou
be
of
gutturalif the
is reduced
altogether,
sing.masc.
nom.
dropping
^"R"F
by
final consonants.
suval,well jumping.
With
the
suval
*jc(c^
end
changes
2.
Pada-
("53) ;
sing.impf.Par.
p.
; 3. p.
he milked
the heads
the
regard to
Terminations
beginningwith
of the nominal
Terminations
sing.impf.Par.
sing.impf.Par.
3. p.
of Declension
and
Conjugation.
of nominal
final consonants
of the
3. In this
verbal
or
general rule
nasals
are
letters,
requirea
sonant
verbal
or
beginningwith
of the nominal
sonant
letter at the
base.
surd
letters,
requirea
surd
base.
the terminations
beginning with
vowels, semivowels,
change in
no
the
final
sonant
con-
of the base.
1.
2.
in
verbal
end
advesh
Exceptionswill
termination
word
followed
and
suvalbhih.
plur.*jqf*H:
^T5*T ahan
^=
been
remain
*}T^
instrum.
eastern;
after the
of
losingits
sing.
nom.
the
againto TfT^prdn,
consonants,
hence
end
after
""? k.
in consonants
like other
vdk, speech;
would
s, there
terminations
or
*J^ suvalg+
^=
two
2.
at the
ght
TT
or
changed to
ending
treated
then
are
rule,reduced
same
bases
^h
remains
which
prank,
is further
prdnch + s=prdn,
=inT
1.
verbal
vdch
rai
and
or
of the base
consonants
g, which
of
aspiration
final
The
being tolerated
not
consonants
of
*T
of
consisting
terminations
two
^d ("118).
initial
the
on
the
adoh,
^rft|
of
In ^nftcfi
adhok, instead
T^-f fv
"^fHrvach
*[^4-ur
prich +
IJTJ^
fa
+ fir=
dhi
dhve
^rffcrad + si =
^rf% ad
ti =
vagdhi. Speak
=prigdhve,
you
2.
p.
mix
sing.imp. Par.
; 2. p.
atti,3.
p.
sing.pres.
he
plur.pres. Atm,
eatest.
eats.
Il8.
INTERNAL
marut
^far vach
"
?TW7T
Exceptionssuch
*T"T:
"Ao/ -f nah
+ i=
mi
vachmi, I speak.
fain "/"^
bhagnah^broken,
it is
fa^-f "n
as
55
SANDHI.
wo
bhinnah,divided,
learnt
be
must
arranged.
by practicerather
than
by rule.
1 1
if followed by
Aspirates,
6.
(exceptvowels
and
+ ti =
wri^mdmath,he
%^
ufr=
rundh
TJV+ ^
yudh
"5fy
lapsye,I
"
ndti
generalrule
that two
bh
receives
""c?
Ex.
W:
"u
fa runadh+ti
rundh
Wt
battle.
but
in
meet
ordinarySanskrit.
the
1(t and
^M
are
to the
^TJT^+ fff
cJ"T +
of
be desired.
never
foUowed
are
p.
kshubhndti,he agitates.
can
aspirates
aspiration.
(J54. i.)
shall take.
lobhyah,to
It is
2.
i=
letter
much.
runddhve,
their
any
shakes
dhve
beginning with
lose
nasals),
and
irRfw mdmath
intensive
%V
semivowels
terminations
TT =
"
vi"ri-s
=
*i
labdhah,taken.
runddhah
-\-thah-=.
^r?TJ
rundh
runaddhi, he obstructs.
+tah
abdnddham,
abandh+thah
2.
obstruct.
two
obstruct.
abdndh+tam
"R" iJ
p. dual
abanddhdh,
2.
i.
aor.
p.
sing.
Par. you
aor.
i.
two
bound.
Atm.
thou
boundest.
In
^TOT^ abdnddham,
p. dual
upon
changed into
*TH thdh
"
as
2.
1 1
final
back
8. If
upon
The
it is
i.
supposedto
be
absorbed
by
here
the termination
^gh, ^
being followed by
as
lose
syllable,
their
letters be
no
other
than
aspirationeither
their
aspiration
*T^, ^ d, ^d,
back
abanddhdh, though
appliesto ^f"i"it
same
is nojt thrown
aspiratedin itself.
was
or
V dham.
aor.
Inflective base
Instrum.
to
'^^budh,
know;
nom.
sing,y^bhut,knowing.
bhudbhih.
plur.^JHfft
Loc. plur.iJPJbhutsu.
Second
pers.
plur.aor. Atm.
Second
pers.
sing.pres. Intens.
^Hp|
abhuddhvam.
+ ftf
"T\"fl^
^jWlfrobobodh+si=bobhotsi,
W6.
56
INTERNAL
Desiderative of "^"Tdabh,
First pers.
sing. fut. of
wishes
he
dhipsati,
iHsfi
$ 119-
SANDHI.
hurt.
to
shall
bind.
^T^dhak,nom.
duh, to milk
^JTSEfadhugdhvam,
g^
burner.
sing,a
2.
p.
plur.impf. Atm.
but
2.
p.
sing.imp. Par.
jf*Vdugdhi.
Note
aspirationof
the
before TT t and
dadh + tah
dhatse
"
the
^V dadh,
"
^(th,where
^"^+
19.
final Vc?A
dhattah
If
reduplicatedbase
^*f
^T
+ *n
dadh
\fS
"
Ex.
Nominal
base
Verbal
But
base
"3^vach;
+ fv
loc.
sing.^T^T + ^=
=
cfT1*!
"
Ex.
^"5 +
vdch+ya
vdchya,to
and
fg\dvish;
fg\dvish;
3. p.
\ fg|dvesh+si
and
Before IT t
122.
"^M
or
VW
cfotta+
5e
termination
to
off k
beginning with
letter,
any
*T#.
or
'%favach+ti=vakti.
sing.imp. Join
spoken.
we
verbal
speak.
speak. (See also " 124.)
two
bases,if it becomes
the final of
word, is
verbal terminations
ftf"=.
VWt
"
a hater.
sing,fs^dvit,
nom.
*}\V#rApokshyati
(posh+syati),he
"
be
vachmah,
Before
121.
likewise
^jf^ vdch+i=vdchi.
t?acA-|-t?aA=vachvah,we
base
Verbal
p.
vach+mah
base
Nominal
by
^x^J
into "T t.
but
speech.
"^Tc"t?a",
^Tt
changed
dhatthah
changed
are
"^s^at
Ex.
nasals,they
1 20.
"
the lost
place,throws
dhaddhvam.
final,or followed
3. p.
?^^ yunj-\-dhi=yungdhi,2.
^VTfiT
dadhdmi,
"^T^vdch; voc.
^T
+ ft
or
dhd,
dacta + thah
TOT:
initial
have
+ dhvam
the
on
might
we
"^
back
of VT
it remains
hatest;
aor.
hated.
will nourish.
but changes J(t and ^th
unchanged itself,
into 3f
"$th.
Ex.
'%'^+KJ
^ffrN +
"%FJ dvish+tah
7R
*lfQ8W sarpish-\-tamam=sarpishtamam,the
of
^s,
^(n, and
Ex.
ft^+
fV
generalapplication,
namely, that
more
"Tw, and
changed into
is
4,
dental
^th, ^
T^f,
d,
l{dh,
the
41.)
fkf^ dvid+dhi=
every
best clarifiedbutter.
dviddhi,hate thou.
mrid+ndti=.mridndti.
1"?+ "rrffr *j'^illflf
=
^5-f-"ff ^
=
"?+
#e
ftfe, he
"^TT shat+ndm
praises.
shanndm, of six.
rri"shat+navatih
shannavatih,ninety-six.(Pan. vin.
vart.)
"
Ex.
123.
other
Before
l4
"fe1^+
consonantal
terminations
^sh is treated
dvish+dhvam-=dviddhvam,
fk^|'
c?"MA+"-"=
loc.
dvitsu,
2.
p.
plur.among
like
plur.imp.
haters.
Z^t.
Atm.
Hate
ye
4,
42,
58
(i) V^duli;
Ex.
Vffidhuk
nom.
plur.vfrn: dhugbhih;
instrum.
$ 129-
SANDHI.
INTERNAL
dugdhah.
"|7Vi
=*^"oJdrih+tah dridhak, fast,is
loc.
plur.WZdhukshu;
part.pass.
+
"^
TH
lih j
(2) fc5^
Ex.
fc57 Kf
nom.
lidbhih
plur. f"f^jt
instrum.
*'
exception.
an
loc.
plur.
vdh, ^TT^Jvdtsu).
c*te:74tf"a$and
In
^:
ruh+tah
^"t
rudhah,
The
and
*T^ sah
of
vowel
either
"3 gh
as
and
dhruk
IJali
"^Tc?Arwf(Pan.
final
d is
e.
g.
udhah.
2,
Tf =
i,
in
have
=
vrih-{-ta
3,
slipper;nom.
sing. "m
i *i
more
vridha.
112), unless
15.)
f^^snih)is
snuh,
the
compounds
or,
lengthened.
vowel
(Pan. vi.
('ttdruh,
muh, ^^
Jjfi
^ dh+dh,
the
^\
into
(Pan. vi.
updnah,
"grrnr^
?T +
to
dropt and
druh, to hate, we
^^
vin.
From
"^c?A.
or
changed
part.tKiSt
of certain roots
final WA
first
is
vaA
in the
as
Samprasaranais required,
the
changed
are
lengthenedis "^Jri ;
is not
which
only vowel
^+!{dh+t
then
treated
sing.
nom.
drudhah.
dh.
plur. ^m"if|ftupd-
instrum.
j^updnat ;
nadbhih.
"
or
The
131.
followed
fft=
"T^+
Declension.
see
the nominal
of
^5
bound.
"T^; nah+tah=naddhah,
bases
and ?5T^sra5,
tearing,if final
tm^dhvas,falling,
by Pada-terminations, and
the
of
"^
only,is changed
perf.Par.,before Pada-terminations
vas,
to
the
termination
2,
of the
part.
ever,
72). See, how-
" 173,204.
Ex.
$5R^dhvas, to fall;
VSffjgl
dhvadbhih.
nom.
plur.SERK
sing.V3R(^dhvat,
nom.
"
Verbal
132.
tenses
Ex.
ending
bases
in
it to
^s, change
T{t,before
terminations
beginningwith ^s,
^^
TT
^fW
vas+se
thou
vasse,
"=.
final
remains
^s
of the general
vatsydmi.
unchanged.
dwellest.
sassi,thou sleepest.
sas+si
^T^ + "ftf 'flfUf
+ %
fHw nims+se=nimsse,
thou kissest.
f"T^
=
HH"^ +
In certain verbs
ftf=
Tj^fsqpepes+si=pepeshshi,thou
final H
is
dropt before
TV dhi of the
sddhi.
chakds+dhi
In the
verbs final
^s, if
same
^(s,may
be
changed to 1{tor
^$TT^ + ^
^T^T
T^or
(Pan. vi.
4,
35.)
chakddhi.
termination
^s.
^n:
it
(" 100.)
imperative.
immediatelyfollowed- by the
remain
hurtest.
asds+s
alwaysbecomes
=
asdt.
asdt
or
asdh.
Tf t.
(Pan. vm.
2, 73,
74.)
of the second
person,
-$
INTERNAL
137.
^"
aveh,thou
or *ftl
by l(torby^*; *"l(avet
thou preventedst.(Pan. vm.
HH HI
Ex.
If
suhinsuy among
*jf?T^5
5^n
"
Pada-termination,
5^w. (Pan.
2,
vm.
VI*I"N
of
suhims.
*ffi^
"jjf"*J
to write
suhimshu.
from iP^ten.
'%*^han.n"i"^ tanvan, extending,
the semivowels
nominal
"5 la.
sunix
verbal
or
suffix follows,or
base, if no
beginning with
by personalterminations
or
"^ /.
and
am
r,
A;am.
^IW
Tf^/aw
^W
^y, ^
*T m
^u,
or
if followed
is
by
changed into
65.)
instrum.
H^nf^Tt
prasdnbhih,
sing.,and
and
went,
we
aganma,
J 137.
^i*i""r
aganva,
we
2,
plur.,U3li**jprasdnsu,
64.)
went, from
two
T^
+ T gam+ma,
gam-\-va.
only
be
used
as
With
the
precededby
a
or
giTr?r
compounds,
m,
If the
changedinto
"^n
a
class
in
writingthe
such
as
or
dot
can
be
may
to go.
*R-J-^H
the end
of
were
vm.
trembles.
kalpah,it
Pada, into
or
treated
sam
cheats.
utkamthate,he longs.
kampate, he
TTf^r: samkalpah
before
vamchayati, he
or
gamtum,
or
kampate
standingat
^cR^q: or
of each
fourths
of
dsamkate,he fears.
or
utkanthate
ifjgantum
or
body
he embraces.
^ifc^Jlfri'
or
dlimgati,
dlingati
^r*^
or
is that in the
($8.)
^^mfa vanchayati or
or
the
fifths,
though
own
dsankate
^i^jcfcri
or
or
their
generalsubstitute.
^n^TUTT
hence
base
plur.M^imt prasdmah.
nom.
final
han.
plur.,from H^Il'T^rasam,quieting.(Pan.vm.
+ ^
71*^
of
nom.
H$!Ri{prasdn,
loc.
In
from
from
sour,
at the end
" 136.^w
Ex.
not
semivowels.
unchanged before
tdmram, copper,
^^J amlak,
word
suhin, Pada
"j(V"^
should have
we
But
arvnah,
from ^5^"nt?.
prenvanam*,propelling,
M"-q"l
Ex.
W^Hn
or
Anusvara.
good strikers,from
Ex.
^1(arvnat
1P{kram.
unchanged before
"^nremains
verbal
or
from ^5T
kill,
to
step, from
changed to Anusvara,
were
134.
Ex.
will
nominal
changed to
PH jighdmsati,he wishes
^^Tn kramsyate,he
But
of
*Jsuof
before the
knewest;
75.)
2,
the end
*^wiat
59
8ANDHI.
the fifth
is
optionalto change
or
Anusvara, the
as
4, 2, vart.
I
second
"^ n would
have
to
be
60
J 138. In
hamsahj
Ex.
before
IT^+
1TW
"T=
"
Roots
^+
suffix beginningwith
and
^v
"llH
.changed to
Tf?s.
I ask
frequently.
is followed
before
terminations
ending in
final letters
y.
-\-vdn
fffiC^l^didiv
and
Wt? and
immediatelyby
terminational
(Pan. vm.
consonant.
"3"w,
2,
77.) See
turvdvak.
rT^tvar.
dtvyati,he plays.
play,cflsHPff
exert,
voice;
"^.gir,
are
similar
(Pan. vm.
old, *f\^\njiryati.
Nominal
lengthen^
Loc.
is
^fUra kurydsam.
turv+dvah
lengthenedin jj^-f^rnn ij^i^*
=
and
verbal
ending
bases
TT^-f ^=
" 145.
Bened.
sound.
79.)
2,
78.)
"
^leqm dw-ydsam.
girbhih,loc. plur.Tftftgirshu.
plur.iftf^t
instrum.
principle^T
2,
Bened.
JjrSt
gurnah.
exceptions.(Pan. vm.
"^^Mr, to
Ex.
is
turnah, killed.
^r
off their
throw
THU; turv+nah=.
div,to
f^1^
diphthongs
question.
"-,to
On
or
tjjnpuy-\-tah=putak, decaying.
Roots
^v or^r
There
"Tn
7K
" 143.
Ex.
or
goes.
HmlVi pdprachh+mi=pdprasmi,
ending in T^y
No. 92,
vowels
barbarian.
if
n.
142.
Ex.
to *T
born.
was
between
word
prachh+na=prasnak,
1*T=
HlH^ +
^fsir
jajne,he
'^^firrichchhati,he
go ;
Jra:mlechchhah,
Before
of
middle
*^jis changed
or
TTsjftra/m,
queen.
the
^f^ richh, to
Ex.
prayers.
be
must
in
^chh
140.
stand
can
t*"lTramhate, he goes.
goose,
that
f h.
immediatelyafter ^ch
following
"Tw
139.
Ex.
s, and
s^s9 ^ sh, ^
only nasal
is the
Anusvara
word,
^R
*r^n
"
of
body
sibilants
before the
Ex.
the
" 138-
SANDHI.
INTERNAL
and
in
final
or
bases
^fu when
ending
in
plur. ^^^ + ^
when
sing,voice.
before
final,and
nom.
Tw,
terminations
is
or
beginningwith
supis+su=supfyshuj
^rt!1J
nom.
*T bh
sing.
masc.
or
^s.
and
neut.
*|tfh
supth.
Nom.
sing.masc.
^HjpT+^T
^"n
sajus+s-=sajuh;
nom.
sing.neut.
*HT*
sajuh.
-$
148.
INTERNAL
Doubling of
" 146. According
another
preceded by ^lr or
objectis obtained
sibilants and
If
it is
practice,
h, is precededby ^r
m(i\brahman
may
be written
sibilant
$ 148. Some
useful
after
that
or
aspiration.Thus
Vriddhi
TO"T
or
used
grammatical
own
the
mark
Panini
by
sanctioned
besides
we
shown.
into
to
words
these
But
adopted by comparativegrammarians
terms
are
consonant.
(Prat.387), mirror.
native
by
by
by Native Grammarian*.
used
classical words
under
have
grammars
Terms
ready admittance
of any
absence
"U"$: ddarsah
terms
found
and
Guna
it is followed
doubled, unless
be
Grammatical
comprehended
Sanskrit
darsyateor darsfyate,it is
";^Mn
they have
terminology.
vowels
doubled, the
not
must
^"
of the technical
in the
Thus
vowel.
Amman.
"%*i"^6ra
has to be
Explanationof some
so
except the
consonant,
any
practical
varddhana, increase.
or
either "^Mff
write
frequentlywhere
no
it throughout.
it is
consonant
any
As
vowel.
aspiratedconsonant
an
likewise
precededby
"A, followed by
to discontinue
best,with Sftkalya,
"
or
doubled
be
themselves
place most
takes
except ^r and
consonant
vowel, may
being
letters
doubling
is
" 147.
may
this
^Ifa vardhana
Tims
by
editions
our
preceded by
A, these
Consonants.
grammarians any
some
and
consonant
In
to
61
8ANDHI.
the
and
others.
of
use
of
changes
exact
such
Most
terms
as
Taddhita, Unddi,
many
Panini
grammaticalterminologyof
same
time
some
of Panini'
All
adoptingthe
words
very
few
have
been
not
collected
mind,
have
any
HMU
from
and
from
attached
the
root
few
for his
of it without
own
the
at
remarks, however,
on
dhdtus.
or
with
grammarians
some
These
roots
the
Dhdtupdthas,root-recitals,
by
of pratyayas
means
all substantives
and
most
Words
to
Siddhanta-Kaumudi,
to
are
root
likewise
formed, but
thus
them,
Sf^Ym,
the
thinks, but
he
called
beget,we
ed. Taranatha,
or
suffixes,
and according
adjectives,
from
particles.Thus
Thus
the
tradition to Panini*.
not
adopt part
roots
derived
are
verbs,but
case-terminations
bases.
roots
all pronouns
even
think, we
of
or
by
contrived
was
according to
called
are
is ascribed
dhdtus
it
perfectthan
more
be useful.
may
derived
in what
which
as
be
can
of his system.
exception,or
exceptions,are
these
to some,
whole
grammaticalterms
without
importantof
From
but
it is difficult to
of grammar,
peculiarsystem
Nothing
more.
"R^
without
Prdtipadika,
have
vol.
m^
H.
the
p.
I.
man,
to
man-as,
as
yet
nominal
prdtipadikaor
62
GRAMMATICAL
nominal
base
^jan-a,
sing,becomes
nom.
Suffixes
Those
by
2.
Those
by
The
former
which
nouns
the
nouns
of two
kinds
direct from
from
other
Krit
the
*{r{janby
from
is derived
addition
suffixes
Krit
The
suffix
called,i.e.
Krit, properlyso
formed
by
from
with
roots
both
suffixes
which
figkm,
kshavathu, sneezing,from
davathu, vexation,from
2.
which
be
may
cR^kar,
to
Unddi, suffixes
3.
seemed
from
The
more
are
the
by
nouns
be
can
introduced
Sanskrit
base
sing.,
the
is
nom.
nom.
base
technical
to
meanings.
Thus
sneeze.
to burn.
vex,
JffoOT
elima,
if ya,
Thus
terminations.
to native
which
nouns
in form
from
and
ace.
ace.
These
Bopp
the
Before terminations
as
Thus
the
house.
feminine
suffixes
separate class.
Krit or Taddhita, is
whether
(pratyaya)9
becomes
real
and
a
(prdtipadika),
finally
case-termination (vibhakti).
a
by receiving
is attached
suffix which
the
purposes,
but
subdivided,
rians
gramma-
meaning.
or
however,
before
dual, and
plur.of
Anga
cases
the
terminations
nom.
plur.of
neuters.
The
togetherare
it,is
to
distinctions
new
grammarians,accordingto which,
the nominative.
calls them
regularly
suffix
regard to
For
by
treated
it is finished
Anga, body.
besides
swell.
verbal
of
further
no
dignityof
ace.
*"f\"ijanma,as
tremble,
either
irregular,
less
or
suffixes
(pada)when
and
f"Tfact.
suffix
"#S"*i
kartavya,Wtjtffa karaniya,CRT"kdrya,
in the formation
used
root, followed
word
inffarf
janina,
Taddhita
raised to
but
a;
is
man,
done, faciendum.
sometimes
are
(stripratyayd)
to
tavya, ^f"ftaaniya,
declinable
as
do, is formed
is to be
what
treated
g du,
rf^T
as
to
kshu9
TO
^jana,
grammarians form
Thus
less definite
or
Sanskrit
WJ athu,
SecondarySuffixes.
of declension.
classes
by
more
*"{jana
to
into three
certain
of the suffix
means
of the
Primary Suffixes,
the Taddhita
*ttjana by
apply
subdivided
are
sign
nouns
nominal
of the
roots
latter Taddhita.
Krit, the
root
man,
are
derived
are
the
by
man.
derived
prdtipadika would
name
1.
of
are
called
are
appropriatefor
The
nouns
which
from
derived
*F\\jan-a-h,a
1.
this
and
man,
" 148.
TERMS.
masc.
vocative
have
in certain
of the
and
called
been
sions,
declen-
nom.
fern,
and
nouns
generallyfollows
Strong Cases.
beginningwith
consonants
(likewisebefore
Taddhitas
"
148.
GRAMMATICAL
beginning
with
which,
term
same
in
main
the
Before
before
calls
three
same
Pada
The
was
to
of
words.
which
vowels
the
Pada
called
with
with
Middle
case-
called
is
Cases
(likewise
vowels
base
the
the
terminations
these
Weak
the
Pada,
noun,
before
^ y)
and
the
is
begin
together
calls
base
signify
end
cases
he
used
Sandhi
with
Bha
the
of
terminations
and
^ y)
rules
the
at
as
distinguish,
whether
numbers
with
middle
declined
called
fwf^i
and
and
Bha.
it
when
the
Bha
the
in
termination
well
as
and
active
and
moods
ten
vocative,
the
eight
through
A
cases.
passive voices,
with
tenses,
is called
fir^tin
verb,
conjugated
declined
are
pronouns,
case-
the
through
also,
as
include
we
or
personal
noun
adjectives, or
if
or,
1"{sup
voice
numbers.
seven
conjugated
are
through
three
substantives,
is called
Verbs
three
in
ending
some
and
persons
Owta
or
and
vibhakti.
a
is
vibhakti,
Pada.
Particles
All
particles
Particles
what
conjunctions,
the
called
same
the
called
with
Nipdta,
after
or
or
enter
the
sound
i.
falls
literallywhat
other
list
e.
interjections, collected
u
prat
before, i. e.
native
by
prepositions
^Oeffl urikritya,
e.
before
and,
cha,
words.
with
When
Gati.
into
assenting
The
name
close
produced
by
if pra
they
of
of
words
of
consisting
native
grammarians.
collected
prepositions
khdt
in
clearing
govern
joined
are
Gati
combination
^TI^
by
list
of
grammarians.
beginning
Karmapravachaniya.
which
i.
with
manner
Upasarga
adverbs
of
name
(avyaya).
adverbs,
beginning
When
place
indeclinable
are
beginning
in
its
takes
the
are,
Those
Those
under
comprehended
are
sentence,
khdt,
it.
beginning
to
termination
are
before,
saw
remaining
the
Nouns,
2.
except
Cases.
Weakest
1.
the
the
necessary
into
we
to
Taddhitas
Bopp
is
as
attached
termination
are
consonant
any
63
TERMS.
is
with
also
verbs.
to
substantive,
a
given
Ex.
ttlrjirflkhdtkritya,
the
throat.
root,
to
they
they
are
class
of
"astf uri
in
having
made
64
"
DECLENSION.
149-
III.
CHAPTER
DECLENSION.
$ 149.
Neuter
Sanskrit
Plural
and
numbers, Singular,Dual,
three
three
have
nouns
and
and
eight cases,
and
Note
There
"
are
few
which
nouns
Sanskrit:
in
indeclinable
are
era); ^tj
year, (ofVikramaditya's
^*m^ayds, fire; W33(^samvat,
Some
.
pluraliatantum, used
are
nouns
" 150.
^c^UHft
sudi
Radhakanta,*jf?f
to
Sanskrit
is used
pluralonly ; "f!TTJ
ddrdh,plur.masc.
^rtTSvarshdh,plur.fern,
nouns
in the
the
be
divided
into two
classes
Those
that have
bases
ending in
consonants.
2,.
Those
that have
bases
ending in
vowels.
Bases
ending
" Iji.
Nominal
bases
end
may
with
the
rains
in Consonants.
in all consonants
in contact
the
wife
may
i.
i. e.
rainyseason,
i.
of the
fortnight,
only.
sikatdh,plur.fern, sand
The
dark
or
5J^M^tsuklapakshahand ^snqsj: krishnapakshah,
abbreviations for
in the West
self; *l|f*f
saw*,
svayam,
half; *j$.bhur,atmosphere;
the usual
being either
of nouns,
are
terminations,
final
or
brought
subjectto
some
phoneticrules explainedabove.
" 152.
ending in
Bases
consonants
Terminations
for
receive
the
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
Norn.
l^au
Ace.
Instr.
^rra
Dat.
ire
am
Feminines.
and
Masculines
terminations
following
PLURAL.
fa: bhih
"
\vi\bhyah
J
...
Abl.
^:
ah
Gen.
^r:
ah
Loc.
Voc.
like
^TT
}^:o*
Neuters
Nom., except
have
no
bases
termination
in ^\n and
in the
"^s
au
dm
ISM
^r:
ah
cases).
They
They
take
take
\i
in the
^ i in the
consonant
dual
Voc.
(Bha cases).
plural,and
insert
nasal
nasal
is
DECLENSION.
"
155. Bases
bases
These
root
#,
^ffh.
rules.
special
requireno
fern. neut.
TRtsPBsarvaSdk, omnipotent,masc.
Base
and
ending in gutturals,
^ k, ^kh, ir
(from *f
all,
sarva,
""%" to be able.)
N.V.
*t
A.
sarvasdkam
^%5nfc
I.
**im"m,aOkd
MASC.
FEM.
MASC.
FEM.
MASC.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
FEM.
sarvasdkah
D.
sarvasdgbhyah
Ab.l
sarvasdkah
'
sarvasdkdm
,.
sarvasakoh
sarvasdksTiu
sarvasdki
L.
NEUTER.
N. A.V.
All
"h sarvasdk
'^5^1
in
^ A:,^
A;
may
of
sarvasdnki
sarvasdki
^^"h
ending
regular nouns
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
declined
be
model
after the
sarvasdk.
^rfsr^
(from f%^
painter,
" 156. Base ending in^M. faRffa(chitratikkf
to paint.)
and root f"^likh,
picture,
MASC.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
N.V.
cUtralik^
A.
chitralikham
I.
chitralikhd
MASC.
FEM.
MASC.
FEM.
FEM.
i-+
n
/,
chitralikhah
chitrahkhau
chitra,
"1
cUtraligbUh
D.
t chitralikhah
p.
chitralikham
.r^i^i.
\ f"^r"4^u
f^^fc^r/?r
chitralikhi
L.
T,
L-*
7-77.
chitrahkhoh
chitralikshu*
NEUTER.
be
"
In the
5fe
chitralikU
N. A.V.
Note
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
with
paradigmsof regularnouns
sufficient to remember
On
the
the
Nom.
Sing.,Nom.
change of *Jsu
t "R" instead of
T^kh,
see
unchangeable
consonantal
bases
"
chitralihkhi
113;
54.
"
I.
100.
it will
Norn.
~" 158.
Plur. Neut.
Ace. Gen.
The
The
Vocative
The
Plur.
is the
Loc. Sing.,Nom.
8.
NOM.
fftl(harit,
green
INSTR.
fVj^ ^(Vn.
f. n.
NOM.PL.M.F.
harit
haritah
LOC.
PL.
f. n.
g^
n.
f. n.
*"{gup,guardian
f. n.
m.
kakubh, region
"JT5pT
NEUT.
^(Xfn
haridbhih
haritsu
harinti
^"jf":
""P"i*iw lwi*"i"iPiq
suhritsu
ijl^
^VJ
^jfe*
^P5
7^
bhut
budhah
bhudbhfh
bhutsu
bundhi
^J*^
JPi;
5^*^
79
1Sf^
gup
gupah
gubbhih
gupsu
gumpi
"F^Tt
"*"^f"*Ttcf|c|H{
"4^f*T
kakubbhih
-kakumbhi
\\
kakubhah
ending in ^ ch change ^
termination beginningwith a
Bases
^^^Jalamuch,
ch into
cloud
masc.
N.V.
FEM.
MASC.
"]
""
"
A.
"io*i"*i
jalamucham
I.
^TOT^n
jalamuchd
D.
^^jalamuche
1
G.
L.
c^
"R
k, or
IT
followed
(water-dropping).
PLURAL.
DUAL.
vK"ttjalamuk
Ah.
Ab.
kakupsu
vowel.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
^^
suhridbhih
kakup
Base
*J37*J
suhridah
PL.
f fU4l
*J^t
i hr it
4^;^
f.
by
NOM.
PL.
suhrindi
si
^{budh,knowing
m.
Abl. Plur.,follow
friendly
^Q^suhrid,
m.f.
Loc. Dual,
^Wilt
^ifrwifagnimath, fire-kindling
vif*r|ti|i
VffjrWYj: %tf'1*1(5!
m.
Gen.
the Nominative.
as
same
Ace. Voc.
to be declined like
BASE.
m.
67
DECLENSION.
^c^H^T
FEM.
MASC.
FEM.
jalamuchau
"
ico^^iijalamuchah
~]
nc5^
TOWin
f*"" jalamugbhih
jalamugbhydm
jalamugb1iyaH
^^
J
t jalamuchah
W"$*1jalamuchdm
m.
^j,
.^
jalamuchoh
"i"*jni jalamuchi
NEUTER.
N. A.V.
5Tc51 "%jalamuk
Decline
skin ;
^th
*T
c^fl^ jo lamu
*i ""*{'*
cM
fern, speech;
fTc3$^jalamuch, ^n^ vdch,
like
^^ ruch,
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
"
fern,
W9
tvach, fern,
t See "66.
jalamufichi
113;
i.
54.
i.
Final
^5 dropt,"
55.
68
" 159-
DECLENSION.
bases
" 159. Special
in
^ch.
BASE.
NOM.S.
INSTR.PL.
curlew
krun
if it means
pran
vrisch
^^
"
f, cutting
60. Bases
ending
before consonants.
in *".chh
an
TffRZprdchh,
krunbhih
"f^* (Accent,Pan.
krunkshu
JtHlJ(Accent,Pan.
*{jbefore
BASK.
^T urj, strength
f^l
^f*
mit%
vridbhih
vritsu
vnschuh
into
change "^chh
Pan.
174.6:
vi.
4,
NOM.PL.
becomes
3^s,which
SING.
LOC.PL.
NOM.PL.
bases
+s;
Derived
to
or
Sanskrit
NOM.PL.
LOC.PL.
"31^tirk \\
*3"(\ urjah
drkshu
^Rfr^Jtirgbhih "3R3"
*^j, ^f^T^vanij,merchant;
m.
"
NEUT.
that
41
^"^om,/,
n.
^jTSTrukshu
runji
1!^ urji
bhishaj,
fiTO^
physician;
m.
blood.
NEUT.
Nom.
if^majj,
the root
"FA; are
f Derived
168)
d.
into 7 1
or
d when
consonants.
from
and
^s
PL.
"^ch,except
^^Tt rugbhih
beginningwith
in
nouns
INSTR.PL.
i,
final,and
NOM.
^ITt rujah
" 214.)
see
182)
vi.
7 t,when
^TofTruk
in
regularnouns
vj^^amj,
1,
19.)
INSTR.PL.
frcf
m.
priest;"5tsraj, f. garland;
"^ritvij,
of
vi.
vowels.
NOM.
ruj,disease
^i
(Accent,Pan.
^*
Other
182)
UTSfftt
W$f\prdsah
prddbhih m^prdtsu Tfif$[prdmsi
Tfl^prdt
asker
they preserve
i,
^7
SING.
vi.
krunchah
Ul^'fa:Tlh|
worship- TTT^
ping
NOM.PL.
"J^fa ^Q
LOC.PL.
from
^^krunch.The
dropt,see
the root
"
changed
J The
form
into Vt.
Sing,would
have
been
^pfi+ 1{krunk
114.
(inthe Dhatupatha,
'ZF^vrasch,
if final
Nom.
to cut.
^fld*^),
According
or
(not 'ffZvrat}is
^ftvrit
confirmed
by
Siddhanta-Kaumudi
(1863),vol.
i.
p. 182.
|| On
or
3OTn
the
final consonants,
two
ttmr/t*.At
The
latter
and
the
form
the
end
of
is confirmed
Prakriya-Kaumudi.
see
compounds
The
Nom.
Plur. Neut.
the optionalforms
by Colebrooke,
the
are
would
^if^ urji
Siddhanta-Kaumudi,
Prakriya-Kaumudi (p. 44 a)
The
" 55.
says
"^rf^urji
be
01(3*
urnji.
or
vol.
"3^
i.
p. 194,
^ft^gfrf
i (Pan.vn.
^WTT^ ^ft^w% i *rffst
i,
-" i"53Base
samrdj,masc.
sovereign.
MASC.
FEM.
N.V.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
rdjam
FEM.
samr*
I.
MASC.
FKM.
samrdjah
djan
samr
A.
69
DECLENSION.
: samrddbhih
samrdjd
D.
samrddbhydm
samrdje
Ab.
G.
samrdjah
Hyi^*K samrddbhyah
*fli"ii
samrdjdm
samrdjoh
,
L.
The
from
^J
words
which
derived,without
mostlynouns
to shine;
^fT3j),
not
6Artf/(j^THJ,
are
1"T mn;,
to
clean
any suffix,
T^yo;
Prf"^ritvij),
to shine, to rule; ^p^*n;',
to sacrifice; tT^rtf;,
to dismiss, to
not
blood,
wreath, and WJJ^asn;',
(^n^sro/,
roast ("T5T).
Also Tfft$K*{parivrdj
', mendicant.
derived from
are
(except
create,
to
^5^"n;)jHM^bkrajj,
SING.
NOM.
BASE.
NOM.
IN8TR.
PLUR.
LOC.
PLUR.
PLCB.
vibhrdj,resplen
f^TTS^
dent
mbhrdtf
of the
i%y worshipper
"^"3
gods
devet
creator
visvasrij,
R"
visvasrit
vibhrdtsu
devejah
devedbhih
devetsu
visvasrijah
visvasridbhih
visvasritsu
parivrdjah
parivrddbhih
parivrdtsu
f^^i.i'ii
fq^Ki^UTJ
rq*aKT^
visvardjah
visvdrddbhih
visvdrdtsu
bhrtjjah
bhridbhtTt
bhritsu
MPi^l^
^parivrdj,
a
vibhrdtlbhih
tqvjtii
of the universe
H
ah
vibhrdj
men-
dicant
parivrdt
universal monarch
visvdrdt
roasting
JJ5^bhrijj,
in
NOM.
^Tj.
NOM.
SING.
lame
'll",
Cf.
||The
a
another
vol.
J From
khdnjah
PLUR.
LOC.
PLUR.
J khanbhih
" 76.
t From
Kaum.
INSTR.
PLUR.
i.
p.
root,
be formed.
(Siddh.-
165.)
efefla,
god,
lengthening of
lingual.(Pan. vi.
3,
IT See Siddh.-Kaum.
and
^H^ yq;,
the ^T
in
to
f^I
contracted into
sacrifice,
takes
rt"?a
128.)
ed. Taranatha, vol.
i.
p.
165.
y.
^"5^
place whenever
is changed into
*^^'
70
" 164-
DECLENSION.
of
*RiRv{avaydj,
name
2.
and
all the
^RTRH
the
irregular,
being,againstthe
Norn.
Some
Sing.
same
rule of
grammarians, however,
allow
vtq*u^ avaydj.
and
avayas
PLURAL.
DUAL.
MASC.
MASC.FEM.
MASC.FEM.
TJ avaydh
A.
from
Sing.,too, is
SINGULAR.
N.
formed
(Pada cases)are
avayah.
if ^rezi: he
Base
the
bases.
two
consonants
Voc.
The
avayas.
these
has
priest,
Vedic
beginningwith
cases
base, ^ra^
I viq*(mi
FEM.
avaydjau
avaydjah
avaydjam
v"q*iin
I.
avaydjd
D.
avaydje
avayobhifr
avayobhydm 1
avayobhyah
"
Ab.
b. 1
avaydjah
"
}*i"i"nnlS
avayahsu
L.
.
""
V.
" 164.
Bases
ending in ^ r.
ending in ^ r are regular,
only ^
like Nom.
like Nom.
Bases
if the
lengthened,
^r
Loc.
avaydjdm
avaydjoh
is final
remains
^r
followed
or
i and
by
u,
precedingthe ""r,
(f144). In the
by "S sh. ("90.)
consonant
unchanged though
are
followed
frrr^r,fern, voice.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
FEM.
MASC.
N.V.
r
FEM.
MASC.
FEM.
fJTU girau
"
fiRt girah
A.
TftfH:
girbht'h
I.
D.
Tft^Tgirbhydm
\ Tft^lgirbhydh
k'}
Ab
G
"PTTT giram
fH^t gir6h
J-
L.
Base
neut.
water.
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
vdri
N.A.V.
I.
BASE.
f. town
f. n.
Accordingto
Pan.
according to Pan.vi.
Ace. Dual
i,
in the neuter
t Siddh.-Kaum.
vol.
vi.
i,
are
i.
not
aari
have
have
would
it
on
but
Tritiyadi,
p. 125.
PLUR.
dvdrshu
?TT"
k/h
168,
171, would
LOC.
j dvdrbhzh
Ctdvdrah
scattering
PLUR.
vdrbhih, "c.
purbhih
Jf"purah
f. door
c?t?ar,
m.
Arir,
:
INSTR.
PLUR.
NOM.
SING.
NOM.
vdrbhydm
^WT
the
are
the accent
second
on
while
the first,
because
syllable,
Asarvanamasthana.
the Nom.
and
-$
[65.
J 165.
in ^s.
Bases
formed
(A.) Bases
ending
Bases
in
as, if
and
changed
to
before
as
become
Besides
these
Nouns
1.
becomes
and
Nouns
by
and
(See
ush.
W(as
ah;
*r:
or
^: i#, T^MS/Jor
the
not
in
by
the
the
Nom.
in
beginning with
is and
7^
us
before ^ bh
"
and
7^
us
before
suffixes ^
or
is
g^
and
Sing. masc.
it in the
Nom.
should
V
be
observed
in the Nom.
Thus
or
fern.
us
Nom.
do
Sing.
Sing. m.
f.
From
JR:
Sing. m.
Nom.
f.
rtftPH:
jyotih,
from
vowel
^(isy""3(us,lengthen their
lengthen their
not
Hence
*J *w
(eifyzej/ifc)
; Voc. tJ*Hisumanah.
n.
nouns
are
Vocative.
from
sujyotify,
^TtflPff:
having good light,
3. Neuter
vowels
J 100.)
lengthentheir
the
unchanged.
wA.
T:
suffix ^^as
fern.,but
formed
vowel
terminations
($84. 3);
($82.)
generaleuphonic
remains
vowels
generalrules,the followingspecialrules
formed
masc.
or
beginningwith
^fto
becomes
bh
^ish
the
according to
^s
by
f^ish
become
f^us.
("83.)
ah.
w:
followed
us
before ^su
VT^as, ^w,
Thus
^and
^
the
terminations
by
is and
suffixes
change
^$
final,becomes
followed
as
the
by
explainedabove.
rules
71
DECLENSION.
manah, *HJfa
and
nasalize
mandmsi
from
chakshumshi.
**ftftt
jyotih,T"fl
tijfajyotimshi
; from
^T^t chakshuh, ^TSffa
Base
m^mdnas,
neut.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
FEM.
MASC.
sumdnasau
_
tpntt
FEM.
MASC.
FEM.
A.
su
mind.)
SINGULAR.
MASC.
(from ^
fern. neut.
HH^:
sumdnasah
sumdnasam
I.
D.
-^
'
sumdnasah
I
^
^HH^I
sumanasam
?*^""
sumanahsu
sumdnasoh
f ""i"l"'"l;
L.
"}"ini"
V.
'5*^*sumanah
sumanasi
^HH^I
sumanasau
^intil sumanasah
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
N. A.V.
The
5*Rt
DUAL.
sumanasi
4J*Htfl
sumanah
masc.
and
fern.
PLURAL.
sumdndmsi
^i"iirt"
and
72
" i66-
DECLENSION.
Base
sujyotis,
masc.
well-lighted,
?JTif)Prf^
fern. neut.
(from *j su
and
is,neut. light.)
SINGULAR.
MASC.
N.V.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
FEM.
MASC.
MASC.
FEM.
FEM.
sujy6tih
sujy6tishau
A.
sujydtishah
sujyotisham
I.
f sujyotishd
D.
sujy6tishe
sujydtirbhih
sujyrftirbhydm
sujy6tirbhyah
Ab.
I
sujy6tisJiah
sujydtishdm
sujy6tishoh
L.
sujytitihshu
sujy6tishi
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
N.A.V.
The
like the
rest
Decline
after
followingbases
the
of
f.
m.
n.
s. ^R:
N.
s.
very
of
N.
HjTi*^mahaujas,
nymph.
"y"^, n. iron.
pay as, N.
^^
yasa^,
^15: %wA,
s.
N.
s.
n.
life,age.
prachetdh,
s.
m.,
m.
TSC^K^apsaras, N.
s.
s.
H^"n: mahaujdh,
milk.
praise.
^rf$:archih, n. splendour.
^g^
vapus,
N.
s.
^j: vapuh,
body*.
old age, may
" 166. 'STTJJara,
There
is,however, another
Any
compound
of these
;
neuter
be declined
base
cases
throughout regularlyas
equallyfeminine
*K$(jaras,
the terminations
nouns
assume
may
qg^(V nashtahavih,Nom.
of which
masc.
sing.masc.
and
one
N.
n.
T^r: yasafy,
s.
N.
divaukdh,
f^cfir:
TIT?: payah, n.
^rNN^archis, N.
ffa:^flviA^n. oblation.
s.
s.
bird.
faginn vihdydh,m.
s.
UHrilt
s.
divaukas, N.
f^^ofi^
lawgiver,
chandramas,
^"S^1^
wise.
N.
"SFn^prachetas,
moon.
mighty. TT^
^rrg^ dyus, N.
sujyotisthe
and
*JT"T^ sumanas
sing.^VT* vedhdh, m.
m.
apsardh, f.
N.
n.
model
deity. f^R^v^%"5,
^3n*ro
fern.
^"^Tr:
chandramdh,
prop,
and
masc.
sujydtimslii
sujy6tisM
though oxytone,
dictionary,
it is
by
mistake
put down
t, and
begin
feminine.
equallyregular,except
with consonants.
fern, terminations
whose
oblation is
at the
end
of
destroyed.
feminine;
as
*"$(jaras,rightly
as
neuter.
in
74:
" 1 68-
DECLENSION.
DUAL.
DUAL.
r*f*f"^T
nirjarasau
N. A.V.
Uf"i"J
I. D. Ab.
fti"3
"jvqfnirjardbhydm
deest
f"i"K*iunirjarayohor
f"T^T^n*nirjarasoh
G. L.
nirjarauor
PLURAL.
PLURAL.
Pri^ltnirjardh
or
fa^HSt nirjarasah
A.
f^TT^ nirjardn
Pri^K.^nirjarasah
I.
f"T^T*nirjaraih
deest
f*l*n,*n
deest
N.V.
or
D.Ab.
nirjarebhyah
G.
f"T5fcU!!ff
nirjardndmor
fl*l"JRT
nirjarasdm
L.
PiTtO nirjareshu
deest
fMfTTnirjard,like
Fern.
oRTTTTX:a"^.
Sing.vin^T
?\ \
Sing.^T^^usanan
final
purudamsd,without
m.
I?
^^"^the
proper
name,
o^i"i" usanah
or
nirjarasi;Plur.
m.
time,'g^I^pMrwrfffm/as,
Voc.
m.
"QTfif^sumanas,
(fr|*f"^
nirjarasam)
;
Sing, deest
Neut.
like ^ifwkdntam.
fH*rtmV/aram,
Neut.
like
(f^R%J nirjarasaik,
masc.)
or
of
name
Visarga. The
? nirjardmsi.
"i "
Indra,form
other
Dual
cases
are
^i ni usand
and
the Norn.
regular,
anehah.
Sing, o
the Nom.
forms
(Sar.I.
T^Rusana.
9,
the Voc.
73.)
From
gras,
From
is formed,
fferf1{pinda-
lump-eater.
and
***" well,
compound
is
walking.
From
Tj^ #ws,
to
sound, and
^JSM, well,
compound
is
formed, *jjj"^
SM/MS,
well-
sounding.
2.
In
formingthe
to
in
Ex.
f.
Sing. m.
(and neuter),the
belong
^Sl^as,
^^is,"31!(us,
in ^K^as leave
j^"'sand "3^ us lengthenthe vowel, nouns
nouns
Nom.
3. In
Nom.
in which
Sing. m.
the Nom.
to
f. n.
Ace. Voc.
before with
simplyinverted.
regard
Nouns
it short.
"ftf^U!
pindagrah,^fh supih,^JJ sutuh.
Plur.
of neuters,
in
nouns
^(is, '^(us,nasalize
"ZR^as,
their
4.
Nom.
Nouns
in
fq^fffS
sutumsi.
supimsi,"fffffa
Jjf4(Vi
pindagramsi,
vowels
beginningwith
consonants.
Ex.
5. The
Instr. Plur.
suturbhih,*pj"3sutuhshu.
'gtrtfH:
supirbhih,
*pjf*l"
radical
of
^s
liable to be
nouns
ending in ?^w
and
100,
is not
DECLENSION.
eating
h*n\pindagra8,
Base
mouthful,maac.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
N.V.
PLURAL.
FEM.
pindagrafy
MASC.
I.
pindagrasd
FEM.
I ftji
indagrasau
pindagraaam
pindugrobhih
pindagrobhydm
pindagrase
fern. neut.
DUAL.
FEM.
A.
75
"
TTTnjr"n pindagrobhyah
Ab.
pindagratdm
L.
pindagrahsu
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
N. A.V.
DUAL.
: pindagrah
pindagrasi
SINGULAR.
pindagramsi
fern. neut.
masc.
well-sounding,
MASC.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
FEM.
MASC.
PLURAL.
FEM.
MASC.
FEM.
N.V.
sutusau
A.
sutusah
sutusam
suturbhih
I.
suturbhydm
D.
suturbhyah
Ab.
sutusdm
G.
sut
us
ok
L.
NEUTER.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
sutumsi
N.A.V.
fsM
derived from
MASC.
into
when
MASC.
FEM.
necessary.
fern. neut.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
N.
desiderativeverbs change H
FEM.
MASC.
FEM.
pipathih
pipathishah
rMHf"j*f
pipathisham
A.
pipathirbhih
D.
"
ft'^fT^Jpipathishah
["
G.
L.
pipathisham
fM
pipathirbhyah
pipathishoh
PM pipathishi
f"J
:^ pipathihshu
NEUTER.
N. A.V.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
t pipathih
Siddh.-Kaum.
(see" 172)
pipathishi
76
0 172-
DECLENSION.
used
List
sumandh1
id.
of
ous
of
or
f'JSiji'm* nh"?JW
"?I"^J
or
"*""*! w
chakdsah
chakdmsi
chakdbhih
chakdssu
domshi
dorbhih
d6shshu
^Tfani
^"^rnH*
^tflt-^^^"5
supisah4
supimsi
supirbhih
supishshuor supihshu
"fffiK
51^"
?^lf^*
?5^5
sutusah
sutumsi
suturbhih
sutushshu
ftr^frf^
fo^^ftf*!:
ftf^"ft^5
-^JJ
id.
sutuh
^"*Ti3J
or
chakdhsu
or
dohshu
or
or
or
^?:3
or
sutuhshu
or
pipathishahpipathishi5
pipathirbhihpipathishshuor-thihsh
m.f.n. pipathih
reading,
chikirshi^
chikirshah
chikih
m.f.n.
acting,
'p'frfff^"fr"*J
*"|oftTf"Tt
fiwftl
id.3f^Rf^^*
f^^"S^pipathis,^esiYous
-nahsu
or
^fofiTtH
id.3 ?jftnTJ
^["ff*
sounding,m.f.n.
sumanassu
^"^iT^Tt
supih
wellIffiHsutus,
sumanobhih
TOf^jnT
doshah
^l^"
going, m.f.n.
PL.
Loc.
pindagrasahpindagramsi pindagrobhihpindagrassuor-grahsu
chakdh
^^"T^
supis,well-
sumandmsi
"nT^T^tt
id.
^cfiTt
PL.
svjyotishahsujyotimshisujyotirbhihsujyotishshuoi-tihshu
lump-eating,m.f.n.pindagrah
did, m.f.n.
be
^s.
T*T"
^JWtfTfrfa
3{Wt fin
*JjSftfiret
sujyotih
ftfe?J!
f^'^T^'^fpindagras,
splen^T3!fflchakds,
are
NEUT.
sumanasah
-nah
id.
sujyotis, ^^ftflTt
Sjsftfrf^
m.f.n.
well-lighted,
companion,
INSTR.
MASC.FEM.
NEUT.
in
PL.
NOM.
MASC.FEM.
kind, m.f.n.
Bases
of different
SING.
NOM.
BASE.
and Voc.
Ace.
Nom.
in the
compounds*.
end of
at the
neuters
as
masc.
fTTf^pipathis,except
like
declined
nouns
chikirbhih
chikirshu
^TT^ft^or
^ftf^FHdsis,
3r W$ft*5
blessing,^T^*dsih id. ^Tlf^I'RJ^TT^n"P^ ^JTT^I^f*!*
(Voc.id.)
dsishah
H^J saju/iid.
""fMt
^*|f^
^^fHJ
^T5"
(Voc. id.)
sajushah
sajumshi
sajurbhih
sajushshuor sajuhshu
^T^H*
^nffa
^f^frHt
^'^^
suhimsah
suhimsi
suhinbhih
suhinsu6
f.
"^^, saJus"companion, m.
^f^^SM/tim5,onewho
^n^r^
strikes
well, m.
f. n.
suhin
grammarians do
Some
id.
not
allow
^^
sajumshi. (jTTTTfir
I X(T0
strict
lengtheningof
the
dsimshi
in
The
dsishshu
in
the vowels
1)
This
H4 W
be
may
Vocative
is
*}*Ri sumanah.
In
an
has
Ushman
long
dsi
dsihshu
and
JPOT1
1TO *ft
right according
or
dsimshi
^STT^flfft
^iJ^JJTlfiT
"* N
M f^
1
tf 'fli^THTWTi
dsirbhih
rule in
vowel
more
before
the
as
the
shi.
the
other
paradigms
it is the
same
Nominative.
2
be
"fft^c?os
may
declined
as
neuter.
declined
On
Siddh.-Kaum.
vol.
i.
Siddh.-Kaum.
vol.
i.
its
regularlythroughout
as
p. 197.
p. 194.
^s
not
See
" 75.
changed
But
masculine.
"
into
it is likewise
214.
^sh;
see
"
100, note.
} 174.
"
77
DECLENSION.
Tn"wfT parnadhvasau
N. A.V.
N.V. ^JBfaefif
parnadhvat
s"!)tt""I
parnadhvasah
N. A.
I. ^^isfylparnadhvadbhih
A.lfftVafQparnadhvasam
I.D.Ab.'WRVSnfflparnadhvadbhydm
I. T"SERTTparnadhvasd
Bases
endingin
with vowels.
treated either like
Bases
1.
Before
k.
derived from
BASE.
SING.
NOM.
NOM.PLUR.
PLUR.
NEUT.
are
SING.
N.
change their
NOM.
who
derived from
BASE.
NOM.
NOM.
PL.
NOM.
SING.
PL.
NOM.
PL.
dadhrishah
or
-nagbhih-natsu
INSTR.
NEUT.
SING.
NOM.
PL.
-nakshu
or
PL.
LOG.
PL.
"^k.
NEUT.
INSTR.
PL.
LOC.
PL.
dadhrigbhih dadhrikshu
NOM.
PL.
PL.
dadhrimshi
LOG.
SING.
dadhrik
BASE.
c^AT.
or
PL.
-nadbhih
NOM.
PLUR.
f^
fa^falvidbhih
f^vftf^llvtsahf^ffyvfmsi
enters
V^
LOG.
""T^5T:or0TrfirH:
"7T^Jor""rEJ
BASE.
7 t
INSTR.
N.PL.NEUT.
PL.
PLUR.
dikshu
f^fnudigbhih $%%"
into
to destroy,
change "S^s
TfS^nas,
NOM.
one
INSTR.
dim"
f^f^f
disah
f^^It
'oil
m.f .n
3 H $(jfvana6,
^TMH^or0^"7T5T: ""i%
life-destroying jtvanator -naA: -nasah -namsi
4. Bases
ning
begin-
c"k.
is,m.f. n.
all terminations
to see, UFS^sprtf,
to touch,change3^*
to show, ^S^dris,
f^ST
efts',
NOM.
Bases
WJ parnadhvatsu
(" 126.)
BASE.
2.
when
like
or
unchanged before
retain them
these consonants
derived from
into
L. TTO
Bases
" 174.
*riU"nffc
parnadhvasoh
G. L.
PL.
NEUT.
INSTR.
PL.
LOC.
PL.
chh into 7 t.
BASE.
NOM.
SING.
PL.
NOM.
PL.
NEUT.
INSTR.
PL.
LOC.
PL.
prdmsl
W^'prdsah TTtf^T
asking W^prdt
prddbhth
TfT3iprdchh,m.f.n.
riT^j*Tt
f
ksh into 7
7. Bases endingin T5Tksh change T3^
BASE.
NOM.
If
NOM.
SING,
.f.n.paring 17 tat*
forms
regularly
its Nom.
NOM.
tdkshah
rHSfJ
derived fn^ta"sA
differently
may
which
PL.
form
t.
PL.
NEUT.
ifffef
tdmkshi
its Nom.
INSTR.
PL.
Dual
Sing.7T3F tak.
to a
*nT7"7ora",
Sing.
may, according
desirous of
desirous
famsfipipakshau,
saying;
of
f^V"F
didhak,Nom.
Nom.
"4*"vivak,
maturing; f"J
Dual
PL.
If^fHJ
iffTE^goraksh,
herd,
cow-
different
LOC.
tadbhih
Dual
f^lHSJT
didhakshau,desirous
derivation,
Sofav^pipat,
f""
"f "T"
r/rar;tsAa",
of
burning.
78
" 175-
DECLENSION.
8. Most
bases
endingin ^
NOM.
BASE.
change ^
SING.
m.f.n. covering
On
9. Bases
derived from
BASE.
Bases
derived from
^f snuh,to
" 93.
see
NOM.
NOM.PL.
BASE.
NOM.
derived from
Bases
BASE.
INSTR.
h into
LOG.
^T k.
or
snih,to love,
'ORk.
LOC.
PL.
dhruglhih dhrutsu
or
PL.
V^dhukshu
f^
PL.
dhrudbhih
druihhi
druhah
dhrukshu
or
J{t.
INSTR.
NOM.PL.
SING.
NOM.
h into T t
N.PL.NEUT.
h into
PL.
dhugbhih
T*fr*\
|f^
dumhi
the final
NOM.PL.
SING.
INSTR.
NEUT.
PL.
change
may
dhrutordhruk
hating
ii.
the roots
spue,
LOC,PL.
lidbhih
fcV"Qlitsu
fc5^fat
ghudbhih "JT^ghutsu
"5^fa"
^T^gumhi
PL.
metre.
SING.
NOM.
INSTR.
roots
ushnih,
^fWi^
Likewise
NEUT.
fc^fir
limhi
^rw^aA
$r into "*T"^,
change of initialT
the
PL.
NOM.
fc5^"lihah
"jrMf ^1
"^
^ t.
NOM.PL.
h into
PL.
LOC.
PL.
updnahahvvwtklupdnadbh
f. ordure.
ft^cwA,
f. anger.
f. dropof water.
wishingto enter. "P^snih,loving.
f%1"3viprush,
TufalS^viviksh,
bee.
fi^tvish,f. splendour.'Q^fiS'^bahutv
tPffictf^madhuHh,
*rk^goduh, cow-milker.
stealer of gems.
f.
such.
idris, f.
"""^1
very splendid.T^J1^ ratnamush,
kidris, f. Which?
givingpain.
"fi'^J'3T
*\n^*fS(marmaspri^f
Decline
m.
fnm^l vipds,
f. the Beyah
river in the
n.
m.
" J75into
Punjab.
or
m.
of Indra,changes
name
^s
into
^sh whenever
^h
is
changed
turdsMt.
Sing.iJl!lHl"r
Norn.
n.
n.
l^T^Tfturdsdh,
T
m.
Norn.
Dual
"u"r^turdsdhau.
Instr. Plur.
TJTraT^fa:
turdsMdbUh.
m.
an
" 176."g^nTpwrorfa/,
*f^teTt
puroddh, and all the
base ^f\^^purodas.
The Voc.
cases
or
offering,
beginningwith
The
is irregular.
priest,
consonants
(Pada cases)are
grammarians
allow
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
1JCtTnpuroddh
g^
A.
j^Cl
sT^T puroddsam
I.
ifCtTT^n
puroddsd
^X^"5T^TT
puroddsau
gT^ThTT
purodobhydm
D.
^Tt5T%
puroddse
Ab.
puroddsah
"grtTT^Tt
G.
^Ct?T$npuroddsah
L.
IJ^Trf^I
^Mroc?"i""
V.
"g^TT:
"?t
puroddhor
3 1
^|Tpuroddsau
"yftftxti
purodobhydm
^ft^"npurodobhydm
-c?aA
Sing,is
formed
from
the Nom.
Sing.
^ ^tt'J*
he purodah.
N.
or
Norn.
PLURAL.
^CteTSTt
puroddsah
^ Cls I ^l!puroddsah
"$ftftf*K
purodobhih
purodobhyah
tpCtTteH
^Styftlpurodds'oh
^^f T^ft:
puroddsoh
purodobhyah
g^Tt"Tt
^^T^f puroddsam
3^"*Jpurodahsu
gOil^fi
puroddsau
^^T^TJpuroddsah
79
DECLENSION.
179.
a
word, 5"*^^||^ukthatids,
reciter of
is declined
hymns,
like
puroddt.
Ace.
J"+^^H'.ukthasdh.
Nom.
ending
in
^m
uktha$dsam.
^cr'q^iJukthasdh
or
or
Instr. Plur.
uklhasah.
retain *Tm
and
terminations
all other
311*1
in *Tm.
Sing. 9"r^^iit
Voc.
ukthasobhih.
Sing. ?"r*i
final,the
when
is
^m
beginningwith
changed into
Before
vowels.
"^n.
mild.
Jf$Ki{pra$dm,
Base
MASC.
i I:M.
MASC.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
1CA8C.
KI;M.
FKM.
TT^IW! prasdmah
IRRTr^praJdn
nywl
Ace.
TTSfTPT
prasdmam
H^H"I!
prasdmau
14311*0prasdmah
Instr.
U^TTTT prasdmd
H^n^Tf pratidnbhydm
H^I
Loc.
H^nr*ipra5^m"
w^n*fUprasdmoh
Nom.
Voc.
NOUNS
2.
J 179. Many
modify their
Nouns
nouns
base
with
A. Nouns
with
two
in Sanskrit
have
more
base
one
f*Htpras"nbhih
Bases.
than
rather
base, or
one
they
certain terminations.
rule before
bases, have
BASES.
CHANGEABLE
WITH
accordingto
two
prasdmau
for the
Nom.
Voc.
and
Ace.
Sing. 1
Nom.
Voc.
and
Ace.
Dual
Nom.
Voc
Nom.
Voc.
*-
I
and
second
The
base, and
The
The
the terminations
base
base, and
generalrule is that
base
*m^prdchbecomes
is
with
nouns
as^TO^rfaman,
are
feminine
the
at the end
in the
of neuter
nouns
the
strong
terminations.
and
base.
Bha
calls it
Bopp
Anga
Anga
changeablebases
calls it the
Bopp
cases
appears
Thus
cases.
^T^
form
their feminines
without
takingthe
in
Pada
and
Pada
and
Bha
The
adant
fy.
\i,and
in the
the
ufa prdnch.
adaty eating,becomes
compounds.
nouns
said to be feminine
of
masc.
Anga base.
strengthenedin
present participle
^^
Most
Plural
of
cases.
the terminations
cases,
Ace.
the weak
will be
Bha
the
and
second
the weak
(notAce.)Plural
former
"
some
Pada
in
base
the
of
Anga
occur
as
80
"
DECLENSION.
This
cases.
bases
two
the
gives us
followingsystem
of terminations
for words
80-
with
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
MASC.
NEUTER.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Ace.
80.
Certain
derived
words
from
to
move,
have
two, others
three bases.
Bha
and
has
bases,
two
base, and
is declined
called in Sanskrit
t Compounds
the
ending
prepositionsending
in
^"
^1^
or
Tw.
ach
retain
This
rule
with
weak
prdnchfor
its
Anga,
t.
accordingly
The
terminations.
tions
termina-
terminations.
Sarvandmasthdna
in
TTI^T
the
accent
does
not
on
the
preposition,
except after
apply to fa m
and
^Qfaddhi (Pan.
"*R3*(pdrdch,
^^l^dvach,TTR prach, ^^udach^ also 'Zf^nyach,
but TTT^ pratydch,^T?^ samydch,
^Hfl^ ddhyach ^TVR^sadhryach, f"t^ m'shvach
vi.
2,52-53).
Hence
"
anvdch.
stands
for
this
Trr^jprawfc;
the
to
in
is treated
as
if the accent
were
vi.
on
i, 222,
the
preposition.
by vi.
i,
170.
82
"
DECLENSION.
Tllft^rt
pratfahdm
Mril^t pratich6h
G.
Tnft^Jpratichdh
L.
182-
H7TZ[pratyakshu
NEUTER.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
pratfchi
N.A.
FEM.
SINGULAR.
N.
The
ANGA
si
cfl
"^1pratichi.
words,
following
OR
STRONG
derived from
PADA
BASE.
(Pan.vi. 2, 52)
samydnchyright(vi.2, 52)
have
to move,
OR
MIDDLE
BASE.
three
BHA
OR
bases
WEAK
BASE.
WF^pratyach
behind
samich
samyach
^p^sadhryach
following(vi.2, 52)
^"J^
vishvach
vishtich
ftf^[
vishvanch, all-pervading
,
tiryach
firSf^
Bases
i.
182.
n
of
Participles
the
3^\
udach
tortuous
tirydnch,
frTM^
and
in
andck
anvach
udich
frf^tirasch
^a^t
Present.
Participles
present have
two
^h^"m^ (Accent,Pan.
DUAL.
Pada
bases,the
vi.
i,
and
173.)
PLURAL.
Bha
base
-J
184.
83
DECLENSION.
NEUTER.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
^K^In addnti
N.A.
FEM.
SINGULAR.
^^n\adat{t
"c., like
N.
is
very difficultrule
onlybe fullyunderstood
by those
who
which
accordingto
of neuters, and
are
before
certain
the ten
with
acquainted
the
keep
participles
\t of the feminine.
the
This
classes of
rule
"^n
can
conjugations.
It is this,
I. Participles
of verbs followingthe Bhu, Div, and
II.
of verbs followingthe
Participles
III.
I.
Tud
Chur
class may
or
same
of the future in
appliesto all participles
verbs
of the Ad
class in ^T
of all other
Participles
not
may
preserve
the "^n.
the
"^n. The
preserve
^H^syat,and
to
of
the participles
the "Jn.
reject
verbs must
VRl(bhdvat.
classes must
Nom.
Neut.
*flhft
bhdvantl
dtvyanti.
chordyanti.
II.
tuddnti
^J^tuddt.
^f^T^
tudati.
iJ^Tft
or
or Hfa"nft bhavithyati.
bhavishydnti
(fut.).
ydt.
*ffi^
ydnti *ffift
ydtt.
or
III.
Nom.
Neut.
wrftadatf.
*"d$J\
juhvatt.
sunvatf.
rundhatt.
^^Jdl
Mndt.
The
feminine
base is
throughoutidentical
HTiftbhdvantt,being,fern.; ij";
n\ tuddntt
fern.
The
rule,which
of
strengthening
base
not
with
base in
to be mixed
Dual
Hence
Neut.
throughoutin
the
With
are
participles
therefore
\t.
precedingrule,prohibits
participles
present of reduplicated
up with the
the Nom.
eatin'g,
^n\tudantstriking,
fern.;^a"pftae?af/,
or
as
regularly
ought
the Anga
in form
Jcrinati.
insertion of *^n is
the
declined like
really
in
nouns
optional.
J(t with
unchangeablebases.
Base
giving,from
rjftf^dddat,
ddddmi,I give.
^T ddtto give,"J^Tfa
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
PLURAL.
MASC.
N.V.
"^TT dddat
A.
^ff
dddat
NEUT.
MASC.
"^m dddatau
dddati
^^ift
f-
"";nidddatah
^^Pndddati
am
I.
^fndddatd
D.
dddate
dddadbhih
j^lOf
dddadbhydm
dddadbkyah
Ab.
t dddatah
dddatdm
G.
J dddat oh
L.
dddati
^7^
*0r
dddanti.
M
dddatsu
84:
DECLENSION.
The
appliesto
rule
same
the
eating;
participlesvCB^jakshat,
worlcL forms
Nom.
of
participles
verbs
of the
Ad
deer, n.
drop of water,
are
declined like
class.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
MASC.
MASC.
MASC.
N.V.
A.
But
*\*\fa
jdganti,only.
Plur.
m.
" 185. ^ftjmkdt,great, ^f^pr^shat,
waking;
*W4i(jdgrat,
brihdntam
brihdntau
brihdntah
brihdntau
bnhatdh
NEUTER.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
N.A.
FEM.
SINGULAR.
brihati
'pift
N.
86.
forms
its
of
a
participle
if^mahat,great,likewise originally
Anga
Ad
class,
strong base in
or
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
MASC.
MASC.
MASC.
N.
mahantau
fifmahdntam
A.
the
I.
*T?nrTmahatd
D.
Hij.n mahat"
Ab.
1
rT?1T" mahatdh
G.
mahdntah
"
mahdntau
mahatdh
t maJiddbhih
mahddbhydm
t
mahddbhyah
JT^WT mahatdm
L.
*}lt"fiT
mahati
V.
T^"^ mdhan
mahatdh
mahdtsu
NEUTER.
mahati
"l^fll
N.A.V.
The
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
mahati
*i^rfl
N.
Bases
ending in
the
Suffixes
strong
Nom.
base
possessivesuffixes ifi^ma/
in
i^ mant
Sing.Masc.
These
forming
their
Anga
Bases
and
itc^mant
in
and
vaw#.
suffixes
are
and
v"#
form
their
vowel
frequentoccurrence.
Anga
in
or
the
188.
85
DECLENSION.
having fire.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
MA8C.
N.
agnimdn
A.
^ec
MA8C.
agnimantau
agnimantah
"i"/ni, nu
agnimatah
agnimantam
V.
PLURAL.
MA8C.
nt
nu
ft1*1*^ ayniman
NEUTER.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
V.
f*ri"iii agnimat
agnimatt
agnimanti
FEM.
SINGULAR.
N.
^M
is used
va/
P*"i*i iflagnimatt
i
after bases
in ^i
and
^J
having knowledge.
'^Fffl^jndnavat,
Ex.
vidydvat,having
N.
know-
ledge.
But
having jaws.
having fire, "^rn^hanumat,
wfi"\H\affnimat,
After
2.
bases
(Pan.viu.
d.
^n
or
if precededby
ending in nasals, semivowels, or sibilants,
2,
But
be
Ex.
There
"
any
other
^R^tf
voice.
vowel
consonants, by whatever
they may
preceded.
having lightning.
f^j^vidyutvaty
exceptionsto
are
ending in
10.)
Ex.
3. After bases
88.
the second
Your
Vffl^bhavat,
followed
person,
Native
by "%1(^vat.
distinct from
these
rules.
Honour, which
by
(Pan.vni.
is
grammarians
derive it from
2,
9-16.)
used
frequently
of the
HT
verb,
bhd,
with
in
the
is declined like
the suffix
present of *^bhu,to
being,the participle
*f33{bhavat,
f,Your
place of
pronoun
noun
and
"^1(vat,
be.
Honour.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
N.
^^l^bhavdn
A.
HTcf
V.
H^*^ bhavan
bhavantam
or
DUAL.
PLURAL.
MASC.
MASC.
bhavantau
bhavantah
bhavantau
bhavatah
bhok
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
N.A.V.
bhavatf
FEM.
SINGULAR.
N.
bhavatt
PLURAL.
HTfw
bhavanti
of
derived
keep
it
86
" 189-
DECLENSION.
bhavat, being,part,present.
H^Tif
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
MASC.
MASC.
MASC.
bhavan
N.
H^f^
A.
*r4lTbhavantam
H4lu
bhavantaw
WffJ
bhavantah
HTiu
bhavantau
VTO
bhavatah
V.
NEUTER.
Wffitbhavanti
H^rftbhavanti
"T"toa*
N.A.V.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
FEM.
SINGULAR.
bhavanti
^T^ift
N.
"
80. ^RH
Norn.
ar^af,
Sing.,where
word, and
" 190.
^Rf^araew
arra.
declined like
in ^lf vat,
nouns
in
noun
^R^awarvaw,
in
except in the
a
foe,is
Sing,^ftl anarvd;
Instr. Sing.^R^TT
Nom.
W^aw;
without
Dual
anarvand
^Tf
it has
_"".__
totallydifferent
Nom.
like
horse, is declined regularly
masc.
*r
How
f^Rl^%a?,
Their feminines
much
much,
so
^Ti^tyaf,
are
in
are
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
MASC.
MASC.
N.
f"hm"^
My an
fon*iffT
Myaniau
ftF^J kiyantah
A.
f"*4ri
Myantam
fonMiukfyantau
f%Tin kiyatah
I.
fawn ttya*4
f^rcirf
TciyadbJiydm
fmfel MyadbUh
V.
fenM^ My
an
NEUTER.
N. A.V.
Bases
Mark
Pqi^nlHya^
"fSFTi**yfl*
191. Words
in ^ir^an
in ^^an
their Bha
or
weakest
base *{n
bases
and
their
Anga
their Pada
or
strong
or
middle
base
base
is
^r a.
besides,
That
the Nom.
Sing. masc.
2.
That
the Nom.
Sing.neut.
3. That
the Voc.
4. That
fcfi^fn
kiyanti
(^5(an,ii^man,
three
have
1.
or
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
take
Sing.neut.
has
may
WT
^r a, not
be
^r"^an.
the
Nominative,
*{n.
words
their Bha
ending
in i"^man
and
the
man
keep iceman
^^van
bases,without dropping
immediatelybefore
concurrence
has
the
and
^r a,
when
v"ft.
as
there
This
and
is
^^van
a
is to
from
ifi^parvn
as
consonant
avoid
the
-$
or
"A^
from
dtmn
*m*
ending
in
i^
5. That
and
drops the
"nH
I.
"fiyi
D.
*TT%n/mne
Ab.
"TW
ndmnah
G.
f^t
ndmnah
L.
tiif^n^mni
or
takshnd
UWT
in
ending
words
simple
*JV^ murd/tan,
words
the
loss of the V
Ace. Voc.
thus
Dual
is
optionalin
The
of neuters.
the Loc.
Sing.,
feminine,however,
TTlftrdjnt.
ndmnd
consonant,
ndmnoh
ll^li
in which
such
as
the
ndmasu
suffixes H^wara
'3CT^ brahman,
f^^an;aw,n. joint,form
brahman,
brahman.
m.
creator.
namndm
"Tl*i^
man
or
Nouns
Bha, ^CJ^
words
to
HIH"^nd
V.
" 192.
forms
to
appliesonly
m.
nama
not
vaw,
rule
"c.
Nom.
^r
TTfl^ takshan
in all other
in the
and
This
dtman.
WTTR^
maw
Thus
an.
mdrdhnd,
frjr
87
DECLENSION.
m.
n.
their Bha
Anga, ^WT^
and
the
^vara
are
preceded by
base
brahman
in H^wara
;
Pada,
and
^w
m.
^va".
brahmd
88
" J93~
DECLENSION.
V.
brahman
^t51"r^
I.
brahmdnd
9(411111
D.
fls*"u
Ab.
"""nt
""fat brahmdbhih
brahmdbhydm
brahmdne
brahmdnah
brahmdbhydm
brahmdbhyah
brahmdbhydm
brahmdbhyah
0141ill!
brahmdndm
: brahmdnoh
G.
t brahmdnoh
brahmdni
NEUTER.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
brdhmant
N. A.
brdhma
V.
brahman
or
yajvan, sacrificer;
Decline
brdhmdni
self ;
dtman,
sudharman,
virtuous.
MfdR^
whenever
f^cftto ^t^,
the
Sing. Hfrff^i
pratidivd
;
l pratidivnah
before
in
Words
in
W^man,
if in the
Thus,
if
(See,however, Pan.
feminine,
their feminine
in
their feminine
in
in
Nom.
w.
Ace.
Plur.
^tf,
droppingthe
base
Nom.
Sing.
masc.
as
drop
and
but there is
the
^f^van, at
they can
7,vart.)
i,
an
feminines, or form
the ^T
fern.
end
feminines
sucharmd,
^pf*h
suparvdh.
Of
T$*(qsucharme,
Plur.
or,
bahurdjd,Dual
"|J"J"1T
4""MMT
2.
"^Jtnn bahurdjd,Dual
3.
Dual
"r^"T9^
bahurdjni,
^TT% bahurdje.
"J^l^ir
bahurdjnyau.
(Pan. iv.
i,
27),having
two
in
fy (Pan.
Nom.
Sing.
may
^n^aw,
iv.
i,
28).
Dual
fern.
^1T"T
su
kings,the
many
1.
dviddmni
"
Those
a.
leather,Nom.
having good
^^Tt sucharmdh
bahurdjan,having
1"S*^^M^
in ^TT
also take
Dual
compounds,
adjectival
of
*J-q*n"ul
sucharmdnau; ^^T^T
suparvd,^M 5 i"uT suparvdnau
sucharmd, Nom.
13.)
i, n;
forms
iv.
are
^i*n"i
ddmdnam;
(Pan. iv.
their masculine
Bha
by
Hfrff^H:pratidivdnah
;
fisherman, form
vT"l"^c?Mflaw,
Ace.
Sing. ^TTTe?ama,
use
Plur.
Nom.
immediatelyfollowed
fisherman.
Sing.^TRT ddmdm.
either
is
^w
("143).
^f^paw, like
dhfvart,wife of
Nom.
the
divyati,
lengthens
5^w; TT|ftra/w^
queen.
the
Words
in
sports,from
who
pratidivan,one
feminine
be,
may
bahurdjdnau.
ropes,
is
an
exception.
fisherman,
vffo*{dhivan,
a
at the end
of
compounds,or
90
" 197-
DECLENSION.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
V.
^Krr^T:
dirgMhdh
^iSl^tdfrghdhah
A.
Q I^!"U dirglidhdnam
"fl
N.
In
is substituted
for
(Pan. vi.
3,
" 199.
dog, 5^;
m.
the
For
bases.
(Accent,Pan.
m.
N.
'^rrW
they
rest,
vi.
i,
A.
mi"i
V.
^^^"
accordingto
forms
^TR
saya,
admitted;
are
^j"
e.g.
declined
are
of
like
regularly,
182.)
PLURAL.
W$svc[nau
N.
A.
is
"van
^ww^;
Tgpft
of g^
ywvaw,
the
Mighty, a
of
name
Indra,takes
HM^M
V.
T^^^wM^Aavaw
N. A. V.
maghdvd
"i^^i"iT maghdvdnau
maghdvdnam
may
W^t^maghon
as
its Bha
PLURAL.
DUAL.
A.
^f?K yuvatty;
grammarians, igftydni.
some
"m"n
word
sp( "un, ^
I.
N.
same
and
take
young,
"odnam
SINGULAR.
The
fa vi
DUAL.
W(3i{maghavant
200.
m.
yuvan,
N.A.V.
feminine
"
Sing, both
Loc.
the
SINGULAR.
The
"c.
^ 5 1 ^lfa:dirghdhobhih,
sA^^dvya
or'Sjfgdvyahni
or
days; Loc. Sing,'gfedvyahne
in two
$van,
brahman,
I.
10.)
their Bha
as
"0*njg;
dirgMhnah
7).
4,
in
but
^K^aAaw;
dvyahnah,produced
A.
compounds
derivative
PLURAL.
"{t5l"
HIM dirghdhdnau N.V. "0"l"H!i:
dirghdhdnah
N.A.V.
(Pan. vm.
Feminine, "0"l^dirghdhni
" 198.
Thus
is irregular.
maghdvdnak
N.
"iM^i"it
A.
#i*T\ni
maghtinah
I.
*iM"l("?J
maghdvabhih^
masculine
or
lff(mat;
(see^H P**\*"{agnimat.)
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
N.A.V.
PLURAL.
*i^i"JnT
maghdvantau
N.
*mqnt
maghdvantah
H^4rt maghdvantam
A.
HM^rit
maghdvatah
H"\ mdghavan
I.
*iM"i(st
maghdvadbhik
N.
nim\v{maghdvdn
A.
V.
*i M
The
feminine is
"
201.
'5^jJwsA^
their vowel
follow the
either H*fl"fl
maghtinior HV4il) maghavatt.
accordingly
^SnNr^
aryamdn, two
and
the
names
Nom.
of Vedic
declined like
nouns
^T"^an
(see
Pan.
vm.
2,
dtrghdhdas
69, vart.
Nom.
i;
Siddh.-Kaum.
Sing.
vol.
i.
p. 194;
but
pfahn
pdshan,ptisha,
aryama,
aryamn
The
202.
when
"^han,
root
the vowel
between
BASE.
J^ghn
INSTR.
PL.
PL.
NOM.
PL.
NEUT.
pUshd
pdshdnah
pdshndh
pUshdbhih
ptisUni
aryamd
aryamdnah
aryamndh
aryamdbhih
aryamani
to
kill,if used
and
SING.
as
NOM.
ACC.
t hanah
same
^gh.
INSTR.
PL.
NOM.PL.NEUT.
PL.
hdni
: hub hih
ghnah
brahmahdnah
brahmaha
follows the
noun,
PL.
(S"r.1. 9, 31.)
^f^pUfhi.
some,
is dropt,
^ h becomes
hd
^T
^h
NOM.
^ ha,
ACC.
PL.
"g"((Vr
pdshdni;or, accordingto
Loc. Sing.^(jfaf
pUshnf or
"
NOM.
SING.
NOM.
aryaman,
91
DECLENSION.
303.
brahmahani
brahmahdbhih
brahmayhndh
brahmahdni.
Sing.wwPH brahmaghnt or flw^fcj
Bases
J 203.
Words
in
1.
2.
They
^
form
Nom.
the
and
at the
^n
the Nom.
regular;it
almost
iftinare
end
in.
in ^
of the Pada
in
Ace. Plur.
neut.
in
that
base.
$i;
Sing.masc.
is to be observed
the
Nom.
Ace.
in
Sing. neut.
ini.
ffif
MASCULINE.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
N.
V"ftdhan(
A.
Vnf"T
I.
vf^HI
D.
%r"indhanine
dhantbhydm
Ab.
vP"i"i;
dhanfaah,
dhanfohydm
Vflli
dhantnoh
G.
dhaninam
dhantndu
t dhan(nah
dhanfnau
dhantnah
Vf"T"ridhanibhydm
dhantnd
dhaninah
: dhantthih
dhan(bhyah
dhantthyah
Vf^RT
dhanindm
L.
^fVrf"T
dhanini
V.
VfV|
Vf"T"fh
dhantnok
ctoonw
dhantshu
dhdninah
dhdninau
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
VftfH dhanfni
N.A.
V.
FEM.
SINGULAR.
N.
dhanint
Vni
Decline
^Vtf^medhdvin,wise
^rfy^ yaisasvin,
;
glorious
loquacious;oirrft^AranX
domg.
Note
the
"
These
analogy of
masc.
and
nouns
nouns
neut.,and
^tn,
in
in the Voc.
in the Nom.
which
is inserted in these
and
shortened
a
(etymologically
in
nouns
Sing, and
in the Nom.
cases
"TW^"""man)
Ace.
having unchangeablebases
form
of
in
Plur. neut.
;
for the
^*Jcn,) follow
the
Nom.
Sing.
They might be
lengtheningof
the
of the nasal
92
" 204-
DECLENSION.
in ^
Participles
"$04.
vdms
vas.
of the reduplicated
perfectin ^
Participles
the Anga,
as
^ ush as the Bha, and ^
three
have
vas
vas
as
the
bases
Pada
base.
Accordingto
Sanskrit
vas.
rurudvdms
Anga,
V.
rurudvan
"^^"f"r^
I.
rurudushd
rurudushe
D.
rurudvddbhih
rurudvddbhydm
:
rurudvddbhydm
Ab.
rurudushah
rurudvddbhydm
G.
rurudushah
rurudushoh
L.
rurudushi
rurudushoh
rurudvddbhyah
rurudvddbhyah
rurudushdm
rurudvdtsu
NEUTER.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
rurudvdmsi
rurudushi
FEM.
SINGULAR.
N.
rurudushi
in
f 205. Participles
root
and
changed
^v"5
the
termination,drop
into
T^wM.
pechivdn,from
very
word
common
an
between
termination
the
the ^ i whenever
the
reduplicated
^
#a$
is
Thus
tasthivdn,from
insert
which
5/M,
5^n
to
the fern.
stand, forms
f^pach9 to cook,
followingthis
forms
W^J^ttasthushi.
^^joecAw^.
the fern.
declension
is
vidvan,wise, (for
fVgrir^
vidushi.
vividvdn)
f^fsTSTT^
; fern,"fagtft
If the root
the contracted
ends
form
in ^ i
or
^ ^,this
of ^vas.
radical vowel
Hence
from
is
never
droptbefore -grtr^,
$ 207.
:
followingparticiples
the
Decline
I'ADA
93
DECLENSION.
NOM.
MASK.
SING.
jufruvas
NOM.
ACC.
PLUR.
PLUK.
IN8TR.
FLUE.
Jusruvdihsah
iusruvushah
sujruvadbhih
pechivas
pechivdn
pechivdmsah
pechushah
pechivadbhih
jagmivas
jagmivdn
jagmivdnisah
jagmushah
jagmivadbhih
jaganvas
jaganvdn
jaganvdmsah
jagmushah
jaganvadbhih
jaghnivas
jaghnivdn
jaghnivdmsah
jaghnushah
jaghnivadbhih
jaghanvdn
jaghanvdmsah
jaghnushah
jaghanvadbhih
Bases
Bases
206.
base
Anga
Pada
in
and
in
^^
ivas.
of
(termination
in
the
form
comparative)
their
^1^ iyd
?, heavier ;
base
Bha
Anga
base
MASCULINE.
SINGULAR.
N.
A.
IO
gdriydn
*4 1"\
*iO"*i"gdriydmsam
gdrfydmsau
gdriydmsah
gdriydrhsau
gdriyasah
V.
I.
"c.
gdriyobhlhy
gdriyobhydm
gdriyasd
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
N.
TJSNT:gdriyah
gdriydthsi
gdriyasi
FEM.
SINGULAR.
gdriyasi
N.
Miscellaneous
tj^ad
as
in
ending
Bha
Nouns
changeableConsonantal
Bases.
and
as
foot,retain ^T^^^c?
Anga
"m^tfc?,
Pada
base.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
supddau
N.V.
A.
with
supddam
tjHi^
supddau
^m changed
into
(Anga)
gtf^:supadah (Bha)
I.
supddah
supddbhih
^pllfk:
(Pada)
94:
DECLENSION.
The
feminine
of two
feet is called
208. "Words
"
or
supadi(Pan. iv.
*JM"{1
tjm'^swpad
PrfM^I
dvipadd.
is either
shorten it to
Final
The
ending
Bha
uh
"3fi|
as
h is
"35w
of
retain
vdh, carrying,
^TT^
^T^ vdh
in
base.
^t
fern, is
The
with
forms Vriddhi
uh
preceding ^
(Accent,Pan.
vi.
1,
128 ; 174,
or
^5TT a
N.V.
n*"a"u visvavdt
A.
visvavdham
ftrflBRT^
base,but
8.)
(4HI'41"
171.)
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
consisting
and Pada
Anga
as
metre
uU.
"^
8)j but
i,
J mfoauhdh
I.
"
209.
and Voc.
it in the Nom.
Instr.
(Sar.
i.
"
Sing.;e.g.
foetauhd
*%i\ls\
; Instr. Plur.
210.
It is
Bha
3. The
"
"f\
fa 3vetavobhfy,";c.;
Loc. Plur.^JCm^svetavahsu.
The
i.
Anga
of
in the Nom.
'Wisi^ anadvdh;
base
DUAL.
^SMil^T
anadvdhau
V.
w\s*{anadvan
I. D. Ab.
*f"is"i
A.
'sins
^ anadvdham
anadudbhydm
anaduhoh
vcnj^lt
G. L.
The
feminine
^ini^
In
Nom.
^TTTJ:
vi.
i,
forms
neuter
I.
^"isf": anadudbhih
L.
viH^rg anadutsu
"wi$\^anadvdmhi
"^1 anaduM
^nji^lanadvdhi
(Pan. vn.
i,
makes
with
The
good
its ^r
long
in the
bh.
the
is said to
;
Ace.
Nom.
Sarasvati
water.
apsu.
171.)
Ace.
^^
^TR
form
WF^svdp,
svdpam ;
svapah,;
Sing, ^f^svap;
Nom.
Instr. ^m
and
Sing.masc.
svapd,"c.
Nom.
Instr.
^fe:
svadbhili,"c.
Nom.
Plur.
^ffttsvampi
of Panini.
svdmpi, accordingto different interpretations
note.)
98,vart.)-
water
svdpafy;
^rro
vins^t anaduhah
PLURAL.
invariably
plural,and
is
composition^r^ap
fern.,having good
Plur.
or
anadvdhah
substitutes
anaduM
^r^ap} water,
:
iHHJ^.
A.
DUAL.
^InJ^ anadud
The
Plural
base
cart-
compound, it forms
SINGULAR.
" 2ii.
Pada
N. xinsi^t
I. "*in^l"T anaduhd
is
The
(i.e.a
PLURAL.
N. A.V.
N. A.V.
2.
ox,
Sing.
anadvdn
'^5HJI"^
cases
Sing.
N.
as
an
and Voc.
SINGULAR.
If used
fvetauh,in
besides
irregular
*yiiiF
^T^r^A is w\s^anaduh,
with
important compound
more
Nom.Voc.
likewise
9, 14),and
"y n
base in
ing
^(ras, and retaini^n"*\*svetavclh;
Ace. HI rH I" svetavdham
instead
tivetavdh,
5m"u^"
grammarians allow
Some
irregular,
forming its Pada
or
(Colebrooke,
p.
The
^fft
101,
-"
DECLENSION.
214.
"
base
"p^pwhs,man,
212.
ty^pums.
The
N"
^mpumdn
N.A.V.
V.
tjfr^
puman
I.D. Ab.
A..
pumdmsam
*jptt
G. L.
Pada
171.)
i,
pumdmsau
;jnitn
pumbhyim
y*lf
N.
y\\*\pumdmsah
A.
ipn pumsdh
tpffcjjumsrfA
I.
jg^uwwAw
not
"pumsu,
Panini (vin. 3,
not
svhinsu
"j(V"^j
place in
The
L.
gives ^Qpunkshu(1.9,70).
general,does
2.
PLURAL.
nuwsa
take
vi.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
I.
The
i.
(Accent, Pan.
base
Bha
Jjftpum;3. The
95
second,the Anusvara
In
^^puihsu.
and
represents
^*A,-
and
The
"^num
Sarasvatt
Anusvara
only, not
in
first,"^n is radical,
not inserted
the
Cf. Siddh.-Kaum.
original
*^m.
an
says that
58)
into
^s
or
vol.
p. 186
i.
not
in the
Mi"l("ir"i
In
As
is declined
compositionit
it is,Nona.
neuter
in the
same
Nom.
Sing.SjyTsupum,
if used
manner
in the
fern, gender.
or
masc.
4JJJ40
Dual
supumsi, Nom.
4J^Hif"H
Plur.
supumdmsi.
"
f^div
Base
f. sky,is declined
IJtfyu,
or
213.
flj^rfw,
l[dyu.
vi.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
J"ldyauh
N.A.V.
""$
dtiau
N.
%t
A.
ftfdfoam
I. D. Ab.
^"rfdydbhydm
A.
f^T.divdh
I.
f"Jdivd
G.L.
fffrldivfy
I.
D.
f^rftW
f^:
divdh
V.
ifttrfyaSA
*ft#o,
" 219.
Compounds
L.
Sift
c?yois
declined
as
(See Siddh.-Kaum.
like
In the neuter
having
gft^sttefaj,
they
sudivt; Plur.
Nom.
form
in
two
being deficient in
Nom.
paradigm
masc.
"c.
BASE
*2.
SHW^
dsan, n. face
datf m.
n.
water
No
grammarians
Sing,and
Voc. Ace.
(Pan. vi.
BASE
i,
63.)
THROUGHOUT
^np^osn;, n.
dsyayn.
^TT^T
"3^1 udaka,
accent
would
Dual
PI.
on
^rfdanta,m.
^TH datdh;
Vibhakti.
(Pan. vi.
i,
171.)
n.
call
one
Dual, Nom.
Thus
DECLINED
tooth; Ace.
Greek
what
^sran^asan,n. blood
udan,
are
Voc.
*i.
4.
follows the
declined in the
Sanskrit
Sarvanamasthana
the
DEFECTIVE
*3- f^
vowel, and
p.. 138.)
Ace. Voc.
of words
Voc. Plur.,and
i.
ending in
^5 dyushu
sudivi.
^f^r"c
number
214.
base
vol.
sudivam,
^flrtsudyauh, *jfq4
Hence
i^f divdm
G.
f^ftdM
base
divah
D.Ab.
L.
Another
183):
i, 171;
N.
Ab. G.
"
SINGULAR.
of
as
96
DECLENSION.
*5- "*^
doshan,(m.) n.
7.
8.
Tl^ac?,m.
foot; Ace. PL
f.
10.
TT^m^ms,
11.
TT^mas, m.
*I2.
meat^
n.
month
Ttff$pdda,m.
pritand,f.
ipBpritsu;
mdmsa,
||; TPHt
n.
m.
16.
pea-soup;
ordure;
n.
ridge;
n.
SWM,
n.
hriddh;
n.
An'c?,
(m.); Gen. Sing,
hridaya,n.
asrik only;
Sing.is ^TCpJ?
N.V. A.
N.V. A. Dual
is
Plur. is
N.V.
1 1.
f.
in
Hence
No.
P"i^||
msa,
m.
*I3" "^g"iyushan,
No. 4.
n.
"TTftl"!fT
ndsikd,f.
T^t paddh;
Loc. PL
f;
*p^.pr**"army
9.
I.
dos, m.
6.
No.
arm
315-
~"m"ilasrijionly;
amj
asrinji
vttjf"i
only ;
A. Dual
N.V.
Plur.
N. A.V.
N.V.
is
is
dantau
tflfr
only;
is TPHT
Dual
I.
mdsau
but
only;
fA.
only;
but
yushau only ;
doshant, Nom.
be
^[***{doshan
may
315.
the
exact
Neut., would
Dual
rule is restricted
on
used.
seem
to show
I.
2.
Bases
or
mdsdn
TT^rr"^
vol.
mdsena
mdsah.
TTOJ
Hlfll wwfoa.
or
*n"T**rf
mdsdbhydm or *rn*lima"%am.
Plur.
"^m*\ yushdn
^HI
or
"M
Sing.T^yws^e
rule
^{W* yushnah.
or
yushena
^Ul||yushnd.
Iyushdbhydmor "^*ri-shabhydm.
Sing.^W
in the
i.
or
^WT dadbhydm.
such
forms
and
Nom.
or0^U!J-s^am
"ft5t
"
as
Dual
Ace. Voc.
or
144.) By
the
some
base
the
ending in
vowels
ending in Vowels.
any
2.
Bases
ending in
derivative
on
J Siddh.-Kaum.
Vibhakti.
vol.
1,63.
i.
subdivided
vowels, except
(Pan.vi.
p. 141.
be
may
ending in
vi.
that
(See Siddh.-Kaum.
Bases
IF Pan.
^in"ri
dantdbhydm
to the Veda.
Bases
accent
tpTTrfa^.
meaning of Panini's
1.
No
or
[I.Du.
yusMh only;
differ
Sing.tpf"Tdantena
I. Sing.^TO"T
L.
Grammarians
"5H
I. Dual
or
A. Plur.
only;
wia5"fAonly ;
is
Plur. is
but
dantdn
I. Dual
Sing,is
N. A.V.
N.V.
"
dantdh only;
"fffTi
N .V. Plur. is
A. Plur. drlld
only;
Sing.isiran,0^Tj0^masaA,"
A. Dual
or
or^W^asabhydm.
asrigbhydm
Du.^tpttlT
N. A.V. Sing.ia^jn^^dantah,am, a,
N.V.
asdni.
asrinjior
i,
and
derivative
^TT
171.)
|)The
Sarasvati
classes
into two
^r a
and
^TT
d.
d.
t Siddh.-Kaum.
givesall
cases
vol.
of
I.
p. 131.
HT^mas (i.6,35).
98
DECLENSION.
ai,*K\ o,
If bases in J?
shorten
^
1* ai to
The
u.
au
to be declined
are
and
au
Ace. Voc.
surdyd; but
are
Sing. Dual
and
of
compounds, they
then
equallyallowed (ifthe
are
f^^div,
sky,but
differsfrom
*ft#o.It
like
it in all other
SINGULAR.
Instr.
Sing.neut.
and
4j(XlJJI
and Voc.
(" 213.)
cases.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
dydvah
N dyauh
N.
^"
is masculine)in all
base
Hence
Plural.
in
only tj*j"iuwmma.
at the end
neuters
as
to T u, and
forms, however,
the Nom.
^CHTT
or
*, and ^n
masculine
except
cases
surind
219-
vau
f dydm*
A.
I.
dydvd
D.
dydve
Abb. 1
dy6bhih
yrfbhydm
dy6bhyah
flffc
dydshu
L.
V.
Forms
of
dyauh
dyu which
in the
occur
Rig-veda:
I. divd(dtvd,
by day); D.dive*;
A.
dydvahz
dyun ;
I.
G.divdh,dy6"h;
dydvd.
dyubhih. Dual N.
vol.
i.
pp. 144,
having
as
"
of
sky, Dual
take
There
are
no
from
145); while
neuter, cannot
Note
as
good
end
at the
the
"R^cfo'p
tJ^Tq
^jP^cfl
sudivi
sudivi,Plur.
the optionalmasculine
real
ending in
nouns
adjective
was,
neuter
"TBR^
udyadeh, the rising
sun
^?T sudyu,
saw,
vol.
i.
p.
145).
Nom.
we
(Siddh.-Kaum.
cases
U e,
as
Dual
words
Plur.
udyadayah.
"9'CI^Mt
in
Bases
i.
(A.) By
"
220.
MonosyllabicBases
in^iand
Monosyllabicbases, derived
"31^ into
as
-31 ti.
and
Feminine.
themselves.
"aft
krt, buying,f5lu, cutting,take
remain
and
$t
^*{iyand
T^MU,
verbs without
from
the
like
any suffix,
terminations
same
as
consonantal
beginningwith consonants,
before vowels.
(Pan.
vi.
vftdM,thinking,
but
bases.
Th"
change final fy am
is the
same
compounds.
He
their Nominative.
(B.) At the
"
221.
These
end
of
compounds.
monosyllabicbases
rarelyoccur
vi.
except
i, 93.
at the end
of
99
DECLENSION.
221.
they may
\t and
either change
Iftiyand T^W,
"314 into
into
or
and
^y
^[r. They
change it
1.
Into
a.
and
^(iy
first member
If the
second
Tn4 paramaniyam.
to have
thought,Ace. Sing,
M4,*Hl:paramanth, the
Thus
"ifanihis
Here
treated
fuddhadhth,
^T^ftt
as
tuddhadhiyam;"$":kudhth,
^pgfftri
and
seems
of pure
man
of bad
man
best leader,
noun,
thinker, a
pure
the
thought,
kudhiyam. (Sar.)
Sing.Tffvni
Ace.
tyand
b. If
character.
forms
""tt are
radical initialconsonants.
^"M(\ljalakrth,
buyer
w
ell
Ace.
ofwjalakriyam.
Itpftt
susrth,
faring, Sing.
Sing."i
precededby two
of water, makes
Ace.
i.
p.
19.) This
is a
merelyphoneticchange,
Into
retains
here IT pro, is
prepositionbelonging to "ftnt.
the
only belongsto
suddhadhih
^JSVfc
from
compound,
Bahuvrihi
both
which
possessedof
man
^{iy
as
and
or
compounds
such
Juddhadhih,a
as
only at
of
end
the
or
by
providens)
which
Ex.
of
be in the
of
form
case
final
thinker,or
an
by
p.
119),
either into
treated
thinker),or
latter
be
The
exceptionto
verbal
as
always retained
used
by themselves,
preposition(HVfcpradhth,
them.
i.
were
compounds ending
it be
"31u
(*fh
dht/i,
the
while
either
t and
generalrule,which
this
or
in
^t and
in which
nouns
that
vowels, whether
distinguished
of certain
one
The
(^ft"
sudhih*,
governed by
was
be
pure
by themselves
thoughted);
radical consonants
*$^bhuv before
becomes
be used
character,and
exceptionadmits, however,
exceptionwould
pure
been
to have
compounds, preceded
noun
consonants,
changingtheir
admits
or
their accusative.
seems
might
noun
thinker
pure
two
is
ud
pure
bases
\v,
that
of their verbal
somewhat
but
into ^T y and
nouns
monosyllabic
real
in
T^WP,
preceded by
here
Sing."ttQunnyam;
^t is
Though
suddhadhiyamfor
^j-sfrra
have
Ace.
and thus
the Ace. Sing. ygSUts'uddhadhyam,
form
things,would
pure
Ace.
a high degree,
"ftdht,which retains
prepositionbelongingto
^P^* suddhadhth
root.
Ace. Sing.iJIHJUJ
village,
governedby "^ nth,
U"fh pradhth,thinkingin
""3ftl
unnth,leading out,
nature.
of
bases
monosyllabic
the
of "TTt nth,but is
predicate
so
Sing.T"Qpradhyam;
its verbal
i|WUfi:
grdmanih,leader
character.
grdmanyam;
which
all other
^v, under
and
^y
^bhu.
nominal.
the
only
Thus
(Pan.
vi.
real
^bhu
4,
85.)
Siddh.-Kaum.
^TV^
or
84), and
in
in
some
compounds,
such
as
"R*Jt
bolt.
punarbhuh, re-born, '^J! drinbhuJt,thunder^TT^JtMrabhuh, nail,^pT*Jt
(Pan.vi.
sudhth
p.
(Pan.vi.
varshdbhvam
karabhuh
i.
is
4,
never
sudhiyam,"c.,
*jf"f*f
as
84,vart.)
to be treated
if it
were
as
verbal
compound,
Karmadharaya compound.
O
but
(Pan. vi.
4,
85.)
100
"
TJtfh
the
bases
Polysyllabic
222.
papih,
Remember
Ace.
Sing,
in
\tm
2.
they
form
the
Ace.
Plur.
in
%*{in
that
those
two
entirely
nouns
uhj
the
^IJt
consonants,
sushkiyau,
"c.
form
antelope,
follow
like
sutyuh
is
may
for
(Siddh.-Kaum.
before
throughout,
vol.
i.p.
vowels
u.
dancer,
nrituh,
"JTg
such
feminine,
and
masculine
declined
are
as
like
that
except
an
in
Sing,
declined
be
^1
222.
and
LOG.
wishing
pradhih
changed
the
and
like
Wftlpradhih
verbal
the
'Jifttsutih,
H*Tfc
verbal
it
\i
in
and
vrikshaluh,
^3T"$*
the
follow
"3*:
and
pradhfh
both
being
road,
form
i/), it may
They
yayih,
in
they
vdtapramih,
to
"3!
1.
also,
applies
and
sun,
JT^fh
compounds
verbal
in
tpftj
the
protector,
Bases
Polysyllabic
2.
in
"
DECLENSION.
f, not
in
but
papth
vol.
(Siddh.-Kaum.
son
but
^^*
the
120).
If
into
^"'y.
I.
their
final
Ex.
p.
Gen.
long
^^tt
\i
by
The
16).
for
wishing
sukhih,
have
they
derived
if
pleasure.
and
Abl.
is
preceded
sushkih,
same
Sing.
by
$-222.
101
DECLENSION.
*"$
"
fe"
$
,2
ll
*4"i
rS*
S
58 """
"
"""""""S i
ftlf""|.|"ii
Iffll
Ht'Mll^8-
5-.
="
s,
CH
i
"s
ll
S
".
02
"-
H
if
102
DECLENSION".
222-
1-
"a
-J
compounds
All these
" 223.
masculine
in the
nouns
feminine
in the
or
sex, the
'4"4c4i4
0^1)khalapve striyai(Kasika
is such
compound
it may
second
time.
vol.
138),and
take
p.
It may
the
MASC.
is
stillbe
applied
to
allow
then form
as
if the
well
compounds
its Vocative
as
FEM.
FEM.
if it
A.
1W
pradhyam
TTWT
pradhyam
I.
TRflT
pradhyd
TFtR
pradhyd
D.
Uttfr
pradhye
or
Tn*I
pradhyai
Ab.
1TUK pradhyah
or
1HTK
G.
TWt
or
IHflTtpradhydh
L.
yfapradhyi
or
TTW
V.
TVfcpradhih
or
Tjfapradhi
am
means
woman
pradhyah
pradhydh
pradhydm
DUAL.
UW
I.D.Ab.
IwNff pradhibhydm
inft"ri
pradhibhydm
G. L.
Jn4h pradhyoh
H**fopradhyoh
N.
IT^IJ pradhyah
A.
IT^n
I.
TnfHWt^rarfAt^AtA
JUfffir.
pradhibhih
lrft*Kpradhibhyah
IWh'K pradhibhyah
pradhyau
pradhyah
pradhyah
pradhyah
pradhydm
or
MM)"TIpradhindm
pradhishu
lT"fh|
L.
MonosyllabicBases
Bases
like
^6Ar^, brow,
consists
peculiarity
in
\\
and
^su,
det?z^Feminine
"ft c?^z,intellect,
^ft srz,
monosyllabicbases
fullerfeminine
g.
radhih
Jiwft
pradhyau
224.
they take
e.
in the
SINGULAR.
N. A.V.
i.
man,
ONLY.
pradhih
HWT
of
(" 224).
m:
G.
meaning
to
punarbhu (Siddh.-Kaum.
N.
D.Ab.
striyai,
be declined
to
Plur.,where
^"f^he
Jivefullerfeminine terminations
AND
sweeper
f$9Ryrdmanye
DUAL.
Dat
woman
the
to
IPffpradhtm
ortpftlpradhth
(Siddh.-Kaum.
SINGULAR.
the
such
they refer
head-boroughor
t(i*i"w
pradhyah, not
similar argument
change, whether
any
If the
4,
grammarians
pradhyam, TtW
TW
married
I.
i.
itselfbe
A^f\l lakshmih,except in
136).
p.
by
gender.
Sing, would
Dat.
be of the female
that
without
used
be
may
should
vol.
103
DECLENSION.
224.
in
^"
in their
Loc.
and
"35 ^,
in
Gen.
declined
such
admitting a
Sing,and
terminations
may
be
as
number
Plur.
only.
throughout exactlylike
"jf"2,a
of
These
cutter.
optionalforms
may
am,
only
Their
in the
be called the
and
?ffndm.
five
104
I 225-
DECLENSION.
Optional fuller
Monosyllabic,
fern. only.
Optional fuller
Monosyllabic,
fern. only.
forms.
thought.
forms.
earth.
SINGULAR.
SINGULAR.
dhih
N.
tf :
A.
fVrfdhiyam
I.
fwr
bhuvam
dhiya
fVni dhiyai
Ab. to:
G.
tot:
dhiydh
to:
bhuvai
dhiydh
bhuvdh
dhiydh
bhuvdh
dhiydm
L.
bhuvdh
bhuvi
bhuh
vT
V.
DUAL.
DUAL.
bhuvau
bhtibhydm
tot:
G.L.
bhuvofy
PLURAL.
PLURAL.
N.
to
bhilvah
A.
to: dhiyah
bhuvah,
D.Ab.
"rfattdhibhydh
G.
tot
L.
dhishu
-qfar
dhiyam
f 225. (i)These
beginningwith
(3)They
(4)They
take
those
to
"
women)
Versus
as
and
"31 u
have
it.
\f take ^s
in
memorialis
18
T^nadi
beingFeminine
^1
and
in
into
T^y
and
only.
terminations.
before
"^v
"35 u
^i
of the Ace.
in the Vocative
have
no
^5
in the
Nom.
Base
'^vadhiland
SINGULAR.
SINGULAR.
FEM.
FEM.
N.
A.
nadi-m
"Tcft'
I.
"^ITT
nadi
nady-d
Sing.,while
(applied
Sing.: ^T^h avih, not desiring
lute.
tarfh,boat ; "rf^t:
tantrth,
prosperity
; fTtt:
^^c*y1rf'OH*"^Vl'
^g^nady.
Plural.
Singular.
a.)
and
terminations
Sing,and
in the Nom.
o5TS*rhlakshmih,goddessof
"31u,
the terminations
^i
nouns
(Sar.p.
Base
most
nouns
i "wc?
vowels.
that
in
Some
^i
their final
shorten
in
always take
final
and
n^m
(5)Remember
Note
bhushu
bases
$tffbhundm
bhuvam
Bases
Polysyllabic
2.
bhubhydh
N.
vadhd-h
Tf:
A.
'zr^vadhu-m
I.
efsen
vadhv-d
106
326"
DECLENSION.
excluding
the
fuller
terminations
simple terminations
the
compound
If the
base,
the
same
and
are
Inst. Dat.
(*?e,
(*Zai, ^\\dh,
^pfhsudhih, when
declined
Abl.
are
like
Gen.
used
as
used
The
they
and
Sing. Dual
*g[mridu,
and
Plural
they
final
the
shorten
applies to
same
\i
"31
or
of
in
masculine
the
optionally take
may
their
that
with
the
or
intellect.
substantive, good
neuters,
as
^tft!vdri
Loc.
masculine,
the
VK
compounds
^TT
forms.
Masc.
and
Pern.
Optional
fuller forms.
Optional
for
forms
Ace.
Nom.
except
neuters,
Voc.
good-tho ughted.
SINGULAR.
SINGULAR.
SINGULAR.
N.
gift:sudhih
A.
gf^R sudhiyam
I.
gfaxrrsudhiyd
D.
sudhiye
*jfv*r
sudhiyai
Ab.
gftrosudhiyah
; sudhiyah
sudhinah
G.
gftrc:sudhiyah
gfw: sudhiyah
sudhinah
L.
gfvftrsudhiyi
sudhiydm
"ffipti
sudhi
sudhind
sudhine
sudhini
V.
DUAL.
DUAL.
A.V.
N.
I. D.
DUAL.
sudhini
sudhiyau
Ab.
sudhibhydm
G. L.
PLUBAL.
N.V.
A.
or
gfv"lfsudhibhydm
or
sudhinofy
4jf\f"fU
PLURAL.
PLURAL.
sudhiyafy
sudhini
sudhiyah,
sudhini
I.
sudUbhih,
sudhibhify
D.
sudhibhyah
sudhibhyah
sudhibhyah
Ab.^ft"i:sudhibhyafy
G.
can
find
"T^
no
vol.
authorityby
i.
p.
i.
p.
119),
sudhishu
sudhishu
sudhindm
sudhindm
sudhiydm
tjfimi
L.
gv
or
which
these
fuller
the
same
terminations
its feminine
is
are
character
(naditva} throughout
distinctly maintained
as
In
excluded.
masculine
for
the
compound
(Siddh.-Kaum.
DECLENSION.
with
beautiful
SINGULAR.
N.
subhrtih
A.
subhruvam
I.
subhruvd
SINGULAR.
g^
subhruvai
or
TT^JTTT
subhrund
subhrune
^^T!
subhruvdh
or
g^!K subhrunah
G.
subhruvaJjt
g"^r:subhruvdh
or
L.
subhruvi
g^f
or
g^Trn subhrunah
"fiu subhruni
V.
subhrufy
subhruvdm
DUAL.
DUAL.
subhruvau
subhruni
subhrubhydm
subhrubhydm
subhruvoh
subhrunok
PLURAL.
N.V.
A.
PLURAL.
PLURAL.
subhruvafy
subhrum
subhruvah
subhruni
I.
subhrubhih
subhrubhih
D.
subhrubhyah
subhrubhyah
Ab.
subhrubhyah
subhrubhyah
G.
subhruvam
L.
f subhrundm
subhrushu
subhrushu
Feminine
Compoundsendingin Polysyllabic
Feminine
which
are
like
nouns
gender.
auspiciousqualities
(Siddh.-Kaum. vol.
is hetter than
an
(Siddh.-Kaum. vol.
army
Bases
and ^^c^flmw
"T3(twac?f
i.
I.
p.
Thus
pp.
may
in
form
\ i and
"3! ti.
the last
portionof
pounds
com-
who
a
man
^^qtttbahusreyasi,
116,117),and xi Pn
atichamv, one
-s^
123),are
and
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
N.
bahusreyasi
H^^^til
A.
^T? ^nTOT
bahusreyasim
I.
bahusreyasyai
Ab.
G.
bahusreyasydh
f6"*ili
lakshmfy,the
bahusreyasyau
~TS1smtO"^
bahusreyasin
bahusreyasyoh
Sing, would
P
bahuSreyastndm
bahufreyastshu
^^'"Mil^lM
1"sJ^^^^yt bahu"reyasyah
bahusreyasyau
Nom.
bahusreyasibhyah
1 bahu^reyas(bhyah
bahusreyasyoh
bahusreyasi
From
bahufreyasyah
"i^^"4**"t
bahusreyastbhydm
bahusreyasydm
V.
bahusreyasyau
Vin
bahusreyasydh
^M^l
PLURAL.
bahusreyastbhydm
bahusreyastbhih
^HSHnftfat
bahus'reyasyd
D.
L.
g^WT
subhruvah
G.L.
feminine
or
Ab.
I. D. Ab.
who
subhru
^subhru
subhruve
N. A. V.
has many
Norn.
brows.
DUAL.
" 227.
Optional forma
SINGULAR.
D.
107
be
atilakshmty.
108
DECLENSION.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
N.
^fflT^nTt
atichamuh
atichamvau
atichamvah
A.
^fftT^f^atichamum
atichamvau
atichamun
I.
^rfif^*^Tatichamvd
atichamubhydm
: atichamubhih
D.
*iiPfi"^*^
atichamvai
atichamubhydm
Ab.^rfn^^iJ
atichamvah
atichamubhydm
atichamubhyah
atichamundm
G.
vtPfl-s*"u:
atichamvah
atichamvofy
L.
wPrr*f*"lT
atichamvdm
atichamvoh
V.
atichamu
'SfPtf'i'J
Nouns
Jcumdrt,a
in
bahusreyasi,except
kumdryah.
Sing,and
Base
Ace.
I.
pp.
is avoided
not
*?m
regularinsertion
the
also two
ffam
D.
"^^ striyai
or
i,
of
^ i, e. g.
an
in the
168.)
PLURAL.
P^j4istriyau
N.A.V.
stri
ffepT
striyam
N.
or
G.L.
f^TTt striydh
G.
f^RT
%"^
L.
striydm
(Pan. i.
4,
(tfl*""
striyah
s^rzA
^t^TfstribhydmA. ^jjjfh
Q^i
stribhih
I. ^ftfW:
f^|4fl:
striydh
D. Ab. ^ft"i:
stribhydh
I. D. Ab.
striyd
and
tion
the accumula-
optionalforms
DUAL.
I.
V.
"T^ w"c?^,
only that
Pan.vi.
(Accent,
ffa*{striy.
and
npftstrt
Tfiift
sfrzm
^pff
L.
cjj*u*q
kumdryam
they form
Plur.
A.
Ab. G.
like
Remember
5/rya.
declined like
girl,are
118, 119.)
by
SINGULAR.
N.
like
Plur.,where
Sing, and
vol.
'*atichamvah*
behaves
is declined
woman,
consonants
f^fT striyd,and
Ace.
the
who
man
(Siddh.-Kaum.
,
of four
atichamushu
atichamvau
like
atichamubhyah
^lillis^/m
(P
^1n
striyah
4, 5)
strishu
4)
forms
^jfl's^
forms
masculine, feminine, and neuter, the following
compound, and
occur
has to be treated
as
SINGULAR.
N.
t atistrih
atistrim
\\atistrih
atistrim
or
atistri
or
atistri
A.
atistriyam
atistriyam
I.
ffrf
^rPrfi^flJn
atistriyd
atistrind
atistrind
atistrine
or
atistriyai
D.
atistraye
atistraye
\latistrinah
or
atistriydh
Ab.G.
J atistreh
t
atistrefy
atistriyamor
L.
atistrau
Pri
^
"JH
V.
*
or
atistraye
atistre
The
neuter
atistrau
atistreh
L ^Pfi^t*
\
'SiPi
atistrini
if^jjffijT
r
L ^Itf
atistre
N.A.V.
bahusreyasi,
Sing,o^^ilitfl
^?^"4tflP"r
Dat. Sing.
bahusreyasini,
is said to be N.A.V.
N. A.V.
bahusreyasini,
Plur.
"c.
bahusreyasyai(-sye?) or -sfoe,
or
or
atistrau
atistre
Dual
"rj^l*lt(l
-J 230.
109
DECLENSION.
DUAL.
NEC*.
FEM.
MASC.
atistribhydm
atistriyoh
atistriyoh
G.L.
atistrini
atistribhydm
atistribhydm
I.D.Ab.
In
atistriyau
atistriyau
N.A.V.
t atistrinoh
PLURAL.
FEM.
MASC.
N.V.
atistrayah
atistrin
NEUT.
atistrayah
atistrih
or
atistrtni
tu
or
atistrini
A.
atistriyah
atistriyah
atistribhih
'.atistribhih
I.
D.Ab.
atistribhyah,
G.
F atistrindm
L.
atistrishu
forms
admitted.
are
feminine
The
The
may
" 230.
They
There
of
are
Loc. Dual.
(Siddh.-Kaum.
be the
the
same
as
I.
In
the
Plur. optional
134.)
p.
^ft stri in
the Dat.
Abl.
Masculine,Feminine, Neuter.
"3 u,
masculine,feminine,and
are
atistrishu
optionalforms.
in ^ i and
Bases
f atistrindm
the compound
^t,and
to
vol.
neuter
and Gen.
be declined like
likewise
but it may
atistribhyah
atistrishu
Acc.Voc.
atistribhyah
atistrindm
^fisshortened
final
In the masculine
atistribhih
should
and
frequent occurrence,
bases
neuter
be
in ^ i and
carefullycommitted
u.
to
memory.
Adjectivesin \i
may
and
be
optionally
Ace.
If the
Some
for the
neuter
and
in all
Plur.
the
masculine
cases
be
declined
final T
^z.
is
Thus
like
like
Likewise
^^:
"gi^: uruh,
except
that
be
declined
they may
t.
as
Thus
form
P$IK
laghuh,
feminine,or
their
cflMl
"T^tnadi.
more
than
one
ifl'gpdndu,
pale; fern. HTJJpdnduh.
~su
lengthen their
vadhufy.
^v:
kurufy,a
thigh,such
vdmorufy.
u,
laghuh,to
?5T[:
preceded by
in
adjectives
declined
change, or by adding ^
any
to
laghvi,
take
substantives,only that
Nom.
either without
is
light,
substituted
like
in
appliesto adjectives
same
feminine
not
declined
bright;
The
Sing.;
are
..
Kuru
a"
Thus
;
vowel
pahguh,
T}IJ:
"qwljc:
in the
vdmoruh,
lame;
some
with
fern.,and
are
then
compounds ending in
handsome
thighs,fern.
110
" 23"-
DECLENSION.
in
Bases
in
Bases
SINGULAR.
MASC.
Base
N.
A.
FEM.
NEUT.
NEUT.
MASC.
"
15
15
mridu, soft
mridu, soft
mridu, soft
mridu-h
mridu-h
mridu
mridu-m
mridu-m
mridu
mridu-nd
mridv-d
mridu-nd
*t^cf
^W
mriddv-e
**3"x
\_kavi,
poet
matt,
J cFf%:
*rfitt
thought vdri,water
[kav{-h
mati-h
J cfff^
Jffif
I kavi-m
mati-m
*^J
**W
I.
D.
vdri-nd
\kavi-nd maty-a
miTJmatdy-eoT "nftffl
J ofi'"JM
[kavdy-e
TW
f^i^J
Tlf J mate-h
maty
Ab.G.
vdri-ne
-at
mriddv-e
or
mridd-h
or
or
[kave'-h
mrid6-h
"
mridv-dh
mridau
or
L.
\_kavau
mf(
mridau
*J^Tmridu-ne
or
*f$3mriddv-e
mridv-ai
T mridv-am
mridu-nah
^JjpT*
or
mridd-h
ipjfc
mridu-ni
IJ?'*T
or
f^T mridau
or
V.
^ftv/re*
mate
mr/c?o
DUAL.
*nft
N.A.V.
\kavi
Ifgft
vdri-nt
wia/^
mridu
mridu
mridu-nf
I.D.Ab.
L
kavi-bhydmmatt-bhydm
f^ffr*
T?ftt
"4ir"UUU
Jpftt
"pftt
JJgrfttmn'c?M-
vdri-noh
mridv-6h
mridv-dh
mridv-dh
JJ^tt
G.L.
[A:at?y-^A maty-6h
PLURAL.
N.V.
J ofT^TIJ
TiHT*
[Aravay-fl/i
matdy-ah
A.
fffti
J "^T*^
mati-h
[A:fli?"-w
^TXVf%
*pf^*
'J^*
vari-ni
mriddv-ah
mriddv-ah
^tx^ftr
"jg"^
^51
vdri-ni
mridu-n
mridu-h
vdri-bhih
mridu-bhih
mridu-bhih
mr
I.
matt-bhih
mridu-bhih
IS**
D.Ab.
[kav{-bhyahmati-bhyah
vdri-bhyah
mridu-bhyah mridu-bhyah
mridu-bhyah
G.
[kavi-nam
L.
f mati-ndm
mridu-ndm
vdri-ndm
mridu-ndm
mridu-nam
r^rf^r^ ^^
'4if"y
*gj$
"j^5
If1!!
[kawi-shu
vdri-shu
mridu-shu
mridu-shu
mridu-shu
The
Guna
Vyaghrapad, as
mati-shu
in the Voc.
be
may
Sing,of
seen
from
neuters
the
in
followingverse
""iW"T 'iJ5ri;T^'^^TT
^TTIT 7HIT
r: n
t Nouns
throw
may
ending
the
in short
accent
on
these
vowels,
matf'ndm,
or,
usually,matindm.
more
The
lines of
separationplaced in
the transcribed
paradigmsare
not
intended to divide
kati,how
" 231. ^ifif
in the Plural
only,and
declined like
they are
lf?fyati,as
many,
take
without
TOfT
A.
tt"?H"4
"arfirWT:
kdtibhyah
Abl.
^flfwr: kdtibhyah
Gen.
*fftni kdtindm
Loc.
kdtishu
^ifriij
Anga, i.e.
and
base.
Bha
cases.
sdkhd
PLURAL.
sdkhdyau
sdkhdyam
sdkhdyah
sdkhdyau
sdkhibhih
'*{fa*R sdkhibhydm
sdkhibhyah
Ab.
sdkhyuh
^rf%"n sdkhibhydm
sdkhibhyah
G.
sdkhyuh
*fWfc sdkhyoh
sdkhfadm
L.
sdkhyau
W"\\\ sdkhyoh
5aA:Ae
is
find ^f
SINGULAR.
as
follows
PLURAL.
DUAL.
susakhd
susakhdyau
4J4HslHu
susakhdyam
A.
declined
masc.
good friend,masc.
N.
like Nom.
regular,like
compounds,we
susakhi,
tjtifW
Base
sdkhishu
like Nom.
DUAL.
sdkhye
At the end
susakhdyah*
^[fl^lMlsusakhdyau
susakhln
ri susakhibhih
I.
susakhind
IJ*ifW*li
susakhibhydm
D.
susakhaye
i:
susakhibhyah
i:
susakhibhyah
Ab.
susakheh
G.
susakheh
susakhibhydm
*jufw"[i
^^t\l susakhyoh
L.
susakhau
'QM"\\1susakhyoh
V.
susakhe
At
the end
of
Masculine
prop.
as
nouns
from
nouns
"q^pWu,
Feminine
susakhishu
susakhdyah
is the
masc.,
in short Tw
Siddh.-Kaum.
vol.
i is declined like
compound
neuter
susakhindm
*jti"5i1"it
^^Isll^Ususakhdyau
a
used
sdkhibhydm
V.
The
bases
two
I.
D.
Plural.
are
Wfirfcto'
Dat.
of its
Ace.
many,
gender.
flufnfa;kdtibhih
SINGULAR.
N.
distinction of
and
Instr.
Nom.
Tffft
kdti
for the
in
irregular
in the
Ace.
J 232. ^rftrsaMe,friend,has
Tffw tati,so
and
(relat.),
many
terminations
no
*lifa
kavi, and
Nom.Voc.
It is
Ill
DECLENSION.
233.
i.
p.
are
112.
name
are
of
only to
HTg 6A4nu,
a
tree;
as
facilitate the
sun,
(" 230).
learningby
heart
of these
wind, fq"^ci^nu,
^T$ rrfyu,
neuter, the
name
of its fruit
nom.
(Sar.i. 8, 17).
fa""*^"
body.
rope, W^*
V*j:dhenuh, cow, T^p rqjjuh,
112
DECLENSION.
" 233-
Trf"T
:
pati, lord,is irregular
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
N.
Ttfnipdtih
N. A.V.
ifftpdti
N.
A.
Tffftpdtim
I.D.Ab.
*rfw"ri
pdtibhydm
A.
I.
TfTRpdtyd
tfTftt
pdtyoh
I.
D.
TTW^afye
G. L.
*rffffa:
Trfk^K pdtibhyah
D. Ab.
T7Jtpdtyuh
G.
"tjrfrfri
pdtindm
L.
ifiQipdtyau
L.
trfinj^aft'sfa*
V.
tni
V.
Tfimi
Ab. G.
pdte
trfTT
^a/i at the
of
end
compounds,
e.
g.
pdtayah
lord
^rfir
bhtipati,
of the
like cirfa
#aw.
lord of creatures, is regular,
MPri
prajdpati,
HHI
wife,she
Tfopatiis tf^tpatni, wife,i. e. legitimate
of
(Pan.iv.
thigh,are
'SrfTSf
akshi,eye,
bases
neuter
regularlylike
declined
vj
in
Anga
*%*[an,such
and Pada
base
-"f
^%[f%.vdri;
but
f"sj
akshi, Bha
base
SINGULAR.
in the
Bha
In these
to
" 203.)
wv^akshn.
PLURAL.
dkshint
*fi%nft
N.A.V.
I.
^H^ill aksJind
I.D.Ab.^Tf^"rf
dkshibhydm
D.
^r^f oJtsA^
N.A.V.
akshm
4fPi9!l
V.
^T^ a^s^e
and
^r%ftT:dkshibhih
G.
vi^ii
L.
^rf^Jdkshishu
akshndm
(or
These
235.
dkshtni
*ratftfor
D.Ab.^rf^^* dkshibhyah
akshn6h
^T^llft:
vuqfVjakshdni
Bases
"
'
I.
Ab. G. *2f""{liaksJindh
L.
sakthit
DUAL.
G.L.
part in the
takes
cases
cases
itfqdkshi
N.A.
feminine
The
(Viasthi,bone, ^f^dadhi,
curds,^^^
*\\*M\ndman.(See note
as
who
earth,
33.)
i,
fSW*fsakthn.
"mM^ aksJin,^T^1 asthn,'%l(dadhn,
neuters
233-
in ^
bases
are
ri,Masculine,Feminine,
declined after two
models
Neuter.
:
SINGULAR.
I.
MASC.
Base
FEM.
NEUT.
sister
svdsri,
VfiJdhdtn, providence
"Tff ridptri,
grandson
^T
N.
"TRTwapfa
^WT
A.
"THTtndptdr-am
^^TR
I.
ndptr-d
'5TJJT
^THT
D.
*nfr
ndptr-e
^H
Ab. G.
wajp^A
"^rgt
^^t
L.
"THftndptar-i
*3**r".svdsar-i
V.
ftfi:ndptah(r)
^[W.
If
and the
"^n
has
Udatta
and
AjadiAsarvanamasthana
becomes
cases
svdsd
V^dMtr{
svdsdr-am
VT^
svdsr-d
VT^TT
syaswA
have
is
preceded by
the Udatta.
or
fill
"lI"J
dhdtr{-ni
VTJ cta^n or
a
VTWT
or
dhdtrt-nah
VT^H
svdsah(r)
and
dhdtn-nd
dhdtn-ne
VTJJfr
svdsr-e
^r
dMtri
VTW
or
or
VTiT:
consonant,
dhdtrd*
dhdtrd
VTg: dAaMA
dhdtdri
"llrifll
dhdtah(r)
the
feminine
114:
DECLENSION.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
N. A.V.
N.
kroshtdrau
N.
"a^TO
A.
kroshtun
"^tj*^
I.
"Siftfa:
kroshtubhih
kroshtdram
*ntg|".
A.
I.
kroshtund
I.D.Ab.
kroshtubhydm
kroshtdrah
kroshtrd
kroshtave
D.Ab.
kroshtre
kroshtubhyah
sRtj"i:
kroshtvoh
G.
''
kroshtuh
^ITrffkroshtundm
kroshtroh
kroshtau
kroshtushu
Jcroshto
V.
admissible
is the only
JKf^kroshtri
he kroshtah
exceptingthe Vocative. (^ "SRtl'I
base
The
The
one
is the
^t^kroshtu
base
admissible
onlyone
Anga,
as
as
by Wilson.)
ning
begin-
with consonants.
The
other
cases
be formed
may
(Pan.vn.
i,
95-97.)
Those
who
admit
T$f%*(kroshtun
only.
kroshtum
sjfr|
admit
as
Ace.
Sing.
(Sar.i.6,7o.)
The
man,
word
of
is declined
nara,
nrindm
be either "TOT
may
or
though, for
frequentoccurrence,
like
regularly
^pOTnrindm.
frjpitri,except in
(Pan. vi.
4,
N.
ff(nd
A.
tR ndram
I.
^tW
D.
^nr^(Ved.
Ab.
cjtnt^
G.
g: nuh (Ved.
L.
rfftndri
convenience
sake, often
it
6.)
PLURAL.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
"TT* ndrah
ndrau
ff"^wnw
nnbhydm
nnbhydm
^"lf
nnbhydh
nnbhydh
nrindm
or
nrishu
nr6h
"fC* ndrah
ndrau
V.
The
TSftnadt.
declined like
feminine is Vhlgl
kroshtrt,
feminine is
2.
J 238. This
like the
with
The
Bases
correspondingclasses
accent
and ^
*"\bh
endingin
may
*.
be
on
(Pan. vi.
and
numerous
of
the first or
i,
^?
184.)
nouns
on
and
the second
most
importantin Sanskrit,
in
adjectives
in
syllables
us, a, urn
the Pada
cases
in
Latin,
beginning
115
DECLENSION.
and
learn ^ihn
The
case-terminations
kdntam
we
of the
bases
by
and
peculiar,
are
heart
in the
it is best to
same
manner
to
ending in
the
as
origin
appended
to
consonants.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
PEM.
NKUT.
ifakdntd
Base
N.
kdntdfr
A.
cMdi kdntdm
kdntam
"Kfaf
kdntdm
I.
kdnttna
"*id*ll
kdntdyd
D.
kdntdya
cfrfrtiM
kdntdyai
"*idHIkdntdya
kdntdydh
ftkdntdydh
ifkdntdydm
Ab.
r:
G.
"hlri44|
kdntdsya
L.
cRfij"
Mntt
V.
IKUkdnta
kdntdsya
W^kdnte*
DUAL.
N.A.V.
Wt
I.D.Ab.
3inrT*qi
kdntdbhydm
Jtoaw
fcfetf
kdntabhydm
ehldjfl!
kdntdyoh
G. L.
ohld'jfh
kdntdyoh
kdntdyoh
PLURAL.
fafeofiri
N.V.
kdntdn
A.
Jtantfni
I.
D.Ab.
kdntebhyah
Certain
"
will
declension,
in
explained
Bases
They
the neuter
are
and
Pada
neuter
Pronouns
and
immediatelyfrom
same
way
base
ambddd, TO?!
c5T
Feminine.
TOT a, such
endingin
and
feminine
as
gender.
In
(masc. and
fa"W{visvap,
all-preserving,
(" 238).
in TO a;
e.
g.
bdde,^H"llc* ambdlet^^Kambike.
Q
pronominal
(" 278).
verbs
in the masculine
Bha
fcmmvisvapd,
kdnteshu
which
am,
in TOT a, Masculine
declined in the
base
ah, TOT ^, TO
the chapteron
derived
are
fern.) The
bases
"nini"ii
kdntdndm
kdntdsu
efiirtl*}
in
adjectives
be
kdntebhyah
kdntdndm
""ini"ii
kdnt"hu
L.
Anga
\\ kdntdbhyah
chlriMI
kdntdndm
G.
Note
kdntdbhih
2,
^TS"akka,
the
regularVocatives
116
DECLENSION.
MASCULINE
340FEMININE.
AND
SINGULAR.
N.V.
visvapd-h
A.
visvapd-m
I.
visvap-d
D.
visvapau
visvapau
visvapd-bhydm
visvap-e
visvapd-bhih
visvapd-bhydm
visvapd-bhyah
visvapd-bhydm
visvapd-bhyah
Ab.
visvap-ah
G.
visvap-ah
visvap-oh
L,
visvap-i
visvap-oh
visvap-dm
visvapd-su
NEUTER.
fw^tf visvapam
N.
*fi^Hltsomapdh,
Decline
wealth
dhanaddh,
follows
as
Soma
visvapdni,"c.
drinker;
sankhadhmdh, shell-blower;
giver.
Masculines
" 240.
visvape
in ^TT
Base
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
PLURAL.
N.V.
A.
hdhdm
I.
hdhdbhydm
: hdhdbhih
D.
hdhdbhydm
hdhdbhyah
Ab.
hdhdbhydm
hdhdbhyah
G.
hdhdm
hdhauh
L.
AaAe
hdhauh
hdhdsu
CHAPTER
IV.
DECLENSION
$
final
As
241.
noun
every
portionof
had
compound adjectives
declension
of neuter
^^(sumdnas, as
time
of
no
($165).
an
nouns
feminine
Sar.
i.
to be
may,
of
masculine
the
same
form
the end
of
form
compound,
neut.,
was
feminine
exhibited
in the
of such
Thus
in the
at the
and
same
admitting
terminations,
appliesto
(this
is sanctioned
the
the declension of
endingin consonants,
nouns
and
precedingchapter.
fern, and
compound
the
in ^n-^as, like
In the declension
at
given in
masc.
adjective
distinction between
The
in Sanskrit
all the
adjective,
an
ADJECTIVES.
OF
Rupavali,p. 9
b.
At
the end
of
-$
all
DECLENSION
247*
Acc.Voc.
Sing.Dual
and
jalamunchi.
*M*J*0jalamucht, iraijfa
J 242.
of
subjectare
rather than
doubt
by
to their
as
The
feminine
in
J 243. Adjectives*
Certain
kdrikdj ^iscR
sends ;
$ 245.
the
be learnt
to
declension
rules
by practice
given,there
declension
this
Ex.
ftrfpriyam,
to
be
can
of the
pointmust
d.
on
no
responding
cor-
suffice.
ftnfpriya,
be declined
"*"M"tii
in
^9R ikd.
Ex.
m^"*
pdchakam.
pdchakafi,fern. *nf"l"RT
pdchikd,neut. TTPW
ttRcfcl
kdrakah, doing,"*!fX"*l
sarvikd, every; 4K"*t
sarvakaTi,fern.
kshipakd,fern, one
$^fi*|"*l
ihatyikd. But PHflJ"fcl
kanyakd, fern.maiden;
both forms
Bases
aka
HM"*;
ihatyakah,present here,
Sometimes
star.
masc.
*H"I"
masc.
base, and
in *n
their feminines
derived by ^HR
adjectives
pdchaka, cooking,
who
form
were
($238).
Likewise
^r
on
forms
the
regard to
bases,however, once
dear, masc.
244.
with
A few observations
nouns.
with
fullystated.
so
nouns
nouns
feminine
of the
of
neuter
feminine
"
remains
formation
and
subjectwere
same
which
difficulty
often
rule.
the
of
in Nom.
" 158,Jrft9ftjalamukt
declension
the
in the declension
and
the exact
In
of the neuter
See
important feminine
more
regardto
chief
The
is
adjectives
this
rules with
necessary
117
ADJECTIVES.
the special
forms
unchangeablebases,)
with
nouns
OP
in ^jrz
; vmcm
occur
and
kartri,doer, ofi^fkartri
in ^n
-q";=fti
ni"j"i
tdrakd, fern.
ajikd,a she-goat.
ajakdand vif"icu
take
the
as
sign of
the feminine
w*
dandint
mendicant, ffitfl
van
in
" 246. Many adjectives
trinamayah, made
i|*U*i"4*
If^UJI tarunah
or
form
^Ta
their feminine
base in
trinamayf
ij"u*i"fl
of grass,
^t
\i (" 225),instead
of WTa.-
taruni; ^*n",I
kumdraJi,a boy,^*fi-u kumdri;
talunah,a youth,ntj*ul
cT"5*Tt
jffat
gopah, cowherd,
kumbhakdri.
kumbhakdrah, potter,^H'"niO
^^"*iO
sukari-
of these words
that many
forms
*irwl matsi
are
or
in
TTt
matsyah, fish,
TOH
manushi.
*i"j"u
their feminine
either
Thus
adjectives.
("Qya
manushyaJi,man,
beingexpunged before ^i)J "t*j"Hl
in
" 247. Certain adjectives
7TT ft? or
white ;
^(VieiTflstVa,
^%iTTroAtVa
or
Pc4riI palitd,grey
gunavachana, the
name
for
in
etd
occurs
adjective,
in Pan.
v.
3,
58.
118
DECLENSION
formation
of feminine
J ajah,goat,forms
v"
sudrah,
"i i
OF
be learnt from
substantives must
Thus
dictionary.
*a I asvd.
of the
woman
[^rjlsudri,the wife of
mdtuli
Hl'j'cA
uncle, forms
t mdtulaJi,maternal
the
bald.
WTc5T
f SLUT swc?ra,a
forms 1 **
S'udra,
" 248-
ADJECTIVES.
S'udra caste.
Sudra.
*i\ijc4
I*fl
mdtuldm,
or
^Ti-qwfl dchdrydnt*wife
dchdryah,teacher, forms
wife.
uncle's
an
female teacher.
dchdryd,a
lord, forms
|)a/i$,
Degrees of Comparison.
J 249.
Comparative is
The
Superlative
by
or
"j?m:nritamah, a thorough
more
of
and
in: tara
H*T fawa
be
may
3,
Thus
used.
or
tjnri,man,
{pflrUf
stritard\,
in
the
personalterminations,
forenoon
(Pan.vi.
frl
pachati,he cooks,T^fjr?fxf
pachatitardm, he cooks
tH
57),M^fririHl
pachatitamdm,he
" 250.
and
"cRl fara
im
cooks
best
^"m", if added
as
^tr%"purvdhne, in
from
(Pan.v.
the
and TW /ama
in: ^cr"
^ft 5^rz,woman,
man;
pdrvdhnetare,earlier
forenoon, ^tT%Jfft
From
or
terminations
after case-terminations
Even
woman.
TTC;tara,
adjectives.Substantives
form
by
^irishtha t. These
restricted in Sanskrit to
not
are
tama,
HT
formed
3,
3,
better
the
17).
(Pan.v.
56).
to
Tfi^prdch("180),m"Kprdktara; from
\Ftt
("iftj),
("203),"|ftTTtdhanitara ; from \f^j[^dhanavat
from
f%^^^6?va5($204),fzrsw* vidvattama ; from TTF^ pratyach (" 181),
such as
VKTiK^pratyaktara.There are, however, a few exceptions,
"^gii*U
from
Thus
base.
Pada
dasyuhantamah,
from
from
and ^ishtha
f 251. %*R(iyas
are
added
never
to
supathintarah,
^i|fv("riT:
the
secondarysuffixes
ending in these
^"H, Tt^fwaf,
^v"^, "3"vala9 f"^vin,JSftin.If adjectives
suffixes require
iyah
^Ttiyah and ^5 ishtha,the suffixes are dropt,and the i^r:
3[S ishtha added
and
vdn, strong,
to
^f^r
doh-iyas,
doh-ishtha.
of the
base.
original
On
Before
the dental
theythrow
%
rW
may
Also
?R
it
on
Feminines
tama;
or
may
^ara
*^", see
and
sragvin,garlanded,^^^sraj-iyas,more
fcifi^
in
shorten
(Pan. in.
syllable
3,
from
forms
their
^JnrcrfafTT
sreyasitardor
Kshubhnadi
*rfire
mat-ishtha.
Kas'.-Vritti.
in the
\i,derived
^i^HJjft
brdhmani
not
Gana
TfT ^"ma
their first
i^ bala-
^rvdogdhri,milking,"")^1
1|^
wfe? bal-ishtha.
wise,^^mat-iyas,
garlanded.*f?RT^wa^waft,
profusely
*
^r"*H
i, 4;
vi.
i,
masculines,must
shorten
WT^rftjUrmbrdhmanitard.
vowels
There
197).
the
Other
and
%*"(iyas
are
few
\i before
feminines
^pprRTstritard
or
''SRftfilll
mdushitard
sreyasitard;
f"i^*ln"l
43-45).
^T?ishtha
exceptions.
JR. tara
in
^i
or
and
"^iw
stritard.
(^|ri"l
or
-f
DECLENSION.
252.
J 252.
and
Other
OF
adjectives,
too, lose
^ffishtha,or
are
Comparativeand
otherwise
119
ADJECTIVES.
their derivative
elements
before
new
irregularby substituting
Superlative.TJTO pdpah,
bad
bases
for the
pap-iyaSyworse
MlfMtfpdp-ish(ha,
worst.
SECOND
i.
BASE.
COMPARAT1VK.
^ffn"nantika,near
alpa,
2.
BCPERLATIVE.
nedtyas
small
4.
"^nr riju,straight
alpiyas
krastyas
6.
VttjHkshipra,quick
ksheptyas
7.
8.
T^^wrw,
9.
^TTtripra,satisfied
kshod
*
rajishtha
krasishtha
"Sjftnf
kshepishtha
kshodishtha
ttfif^B
kshodiyas
heavy
artyas
*II"I.H
'^lfl|8
drdghishtha
drdghiyas
far
gT cJwra,
davishtha
davtyas
dridha, firm
"5^ dradh
12.
TT3"
13.
parivridha,exalted
H(V"J"S
14.
^^^n^M,
15.
broad
as
pratMyas
TT^^ra^A
TR
a,praiseworthy
dradhishtha
dradhtyas
(Xd ^ parivradh
fro.
garishtha
^fs" trapishtha
as
^W dirgha,long
^l mprajasy
"^fTttf
rijishtha
rajiyas
*f$T krifa,lean
varishtha
rijtyas
5.
1 1
alpishtha
variyas
Vedic
10.
kanishtha
as
or
3.
iK-ilislithfl
f""PCs parivradhishtha
nPM8 prathishtha
IR!
sreshtha
TfH
preshtha
or
6.
dear
ftftpriya,
Upra
8.
bhuyishtha
*J5I^bhuyas
*^c5 bahula,frequent
bamhishtha
bamhiyas
excessive
bhrasishtha
Hf^Tff
19.
^F Mn/a,
20.
lg
mridu, soft
mradiyas
mradishtha
21.
fl^*^ywt?aw,
young
yaviyas
yavishtha
kantyas
kanishtha^
bhra"yas
or
22.
'^TSvddha, firm
Kshthat
sddhtyas
23. ^5Tvriddha,old
varsh
varshiyas
"**t[m{
varshishtha
unndf
vrindfyas
vrindishtha
or
K.CH
beautiful
vrinddraka,
24.
25.
f^RsMtra,firm
^
^1
stha
26.
Pan.
vi.
4, 162.
stheshtha
stheyas
sthavishtha
sthavfyas
t*t"M^
spheshtha
spheyas
hrasishtha
hrasfyas
t P"n-
v-
3"
63-
120
" 253-
NUMERALS.
CHAPTER
V.
NUMERALS.
" 253.
Cardinals.
ekah, ekd,ekam,
^
1^,if,if,
3 WQl,
fro:,
two.
efoe,
(Base
(Base^r dva;
one.
tisrdh,trmi,
trdyalj,,
in comp.
(Base
three.
(Base
chatur.)
f. n. five.
'fapdncha,
m.
^
(Base
"f^T 5^a^, m. f. n. six. (Base^ shash.)
f. n. seven.
3 TOf saptdjm.
(Base
^T^
b
ashtau,m. f. n. eight. (Base
ashtan.)
f. n. nine.
m.
"T3T
(Base
7
8
9
f. n.
ten.
10
a, m.
1 1
ekddasa,eleven.
(Base
(Baseas
in
mn.)
dvddasa.
35 W
trdyodasa.
chdturda"a.
14
ifa^Tpdnchada"a.
15
shodasa.
17
8 st
9 "l"*.
ashtadasa.
or
shattrimsat.
37 3^
38
ashtdtrimsat.
^b
navatrimsat.
39 ^
saptddasa.
ndvadasa
36 ^ ^zf^ri
fern.
chatvdrimsdt,
40
do
41
d"i
42
^^
ekachatvdrimsat.
dvdchatvdrimsat
unavimfatih.
^^rfTTJ
fern.
vimsdtih,
20
^o
21
rfir:
ekavimsatify.
2,2, ^
fittdvdvimsatih.
dvichatvdrimsat
.
43
or
R\\J(trayaschatvdrimsat
83
44
ffr:
trayovimsatih.
24 ^d
chaturvimsatih.
46
^i
25 ^M
panchavimsatify.
47
d^"
48
8b
shadvimfatih.
27 ^S
ifrf:
saptavimSatih.
28 ^b
ashtdvimsatih.
^rrtJ
29 ^
navavimsatih.
fern.
30
30
31
ekatrimsat.
32
dvdtrimsat.
33
33
34
3^
45 8M
shatchatvdrimsat.
or
r^.\\^ashtdchatvdrimsat
ashtachatvdrimsat.
49
d"i.
50
MO
51
M"l
navachatvdrimsat.
fern.
ekapanchdsat.
^cF^T^Ti^
dvdpanchdsator
52 M? ^IM^I^If^
53 M^
chatustrimsat.
trichatvdrimsat.
chatuschatvdrimsat.
$8
23 ^
26
or
flTM^I^dvipanchdsat.
^n^Nm^ trayahpanchdsat
tripanchdsat.
r^M^r^lr^
or
122
no
^nftnirsn? dasddhikam
in
"m
i^RT^nftraf
snr
satam
ekddasam
excess).Pan.
satam
113
^3
satam
^t^IlfVoF
^IW chatur
dasddhikam
^M
116
^^rrfVr"lr
"|C|^
^rw
117
8 "ttb
shodasddhikam
satam
satam
satam.
satam.
satam.
"5^ashtddasam
-"5ilfT^^
satam.
"^
rr^^Tf^Gir
satam
or
^^T
satam.
navadasddhikam
30 "^^o f^^fv%
^TfT navadasam
or
TT5|if^rwfV%
ekavimsatyadhikam
W
satam
or
*.
satam
Tjcfif^i
W
ekavimsam
"c.
$TiT trimsadadhikam
^^Tfr^fVNr
satam
f^
or
^TiT chatvdrimsadadhikam
SHT trimsam
satam
or
satam
*.
^fi3lfc$r
^nf chatvd^
satam*.
rimsam
i^^i\i%^/"a/icMsa^a^/:flms"/"morTj^T^^pfl^
"wo
Fr"3Trf
sdrdhasatam,,
or
+-J- (hundred).
100
160
^o
170
^so
^nrmiVGR1^iif saptatyadhikam
80
"^bo
^ifarfVrojr
^nr asityadhikam satam
190
SQ.O
200
^oo
ir^
300
^oo ^%
400
chatvdri
^oo ^r^rftl
Tfnnf^T
500
MOO
'q'q
600
^oo
"^7
700
500
TOT
800
fcoo ^n?
900
Q.OO
cfoe sa/e
5^a/
^Idlfrf
asitisatam.
xM^flfrtDM
or
satam
navatisatam.
TT^ffT^nr
or
or
dvisati.
ffT^nft
satdni
^g:^i^ chatuhsatam.
or
"q^ITt
panchasatam.
or
Ml^frl shatsatam.
or
WHSlrlsaptasatam.
satdni
or
^31
w"va
^nrrf*T
and
i"^H
3000
^ooo ^^Hril*T?W
^0,000 ^w
46.
or
satdni
riashtasatam.
navasatam.
"T"r^ilf
or
or
dasasati,fern.,
^Sfl^nrt
?H[H
sahdsrani,
masc.t
cfoe sahasre.
^ooo
2,
satdni
""zsa
^TWrf?T
2000
/rmi sahasrdni.
Pill
ayutam,
The
same
neut.
rules
^'cmq^}
1Xig" ekddasam
sahasram, "c.
tiHfri$('ri
saptatisatam.
or
or
by
satam
^Mif*i5"jo/asatdni
ashta
^lirrf'T
v.
^fF$nfshashtisatam.
or
f^Tfftrisatam.
or
satdni
satdni
satam
dvisatam
satdni
'SfTlTT'PfT
pancha
neut.
Pan.
Pd^M
or
^nnf5Tifrmi
IT^
^ooo
rendered
satam.
or
satam*,
satam.
satam
10,000
dvddasam
^Ifl^irftrar
^Tffashtddasddhikam
121
1000
(in
or
$Trf
vimsatyadhikam satam
CI^Q f^^rwAl""*
eleven
satam
1 20
150
"c.
^ saptadasddhikam
^m^^nftnfi
"jc|""
"i$o
having
shodasam
*fhr$f
^Tif
or
119
140
hundred
or^[^^trayodasam
^lichaturdasam
or '^njtST
or iHr^T
^panchadasam
satam
^panchadasddhikam
''T^^TTfv^
115
ekddasasatam
^T^T
or
^fafsnfirir
$nr trayodasddhikam satam
14 ^8
TOT^TW
2, 45.
v.
"\"\^IT^nfaoff^nr dvddasddhikam
or
satam, i. e.
H2
1 1
^FSlrf dasasatam.
or
ekddasddhikam
u^fiT^f
STW
or
" 253.
JTUMEEALS.
and
masc.f
Siddh.-Kaum.
1000,
so
that
^^5T
by "i"*^r=nf^^I
vol.
n.
p.
635.
ion
might
be
ekachatvdrimsam
J 253.
123
NUMERALS.
7TBJlaksham,neut.
100,000
100,000
One
million,fljwprayutam,
Ten
Tsfrfz
koti,fem.J
millions,
hundred
thousand
neut.
or
or
fern.*,
or
masc.*
millions,
^TJ^ arbuda, masc.
mahdrbuda,
millions,
*T"IJ"J
and
fagwniyutam, ncut.
and
masc.t
neut.
and
masc.
TITI padma,
neut., or
neut.,
i.e. lotus.
Ten
^
millions,
thousand
fn^c5 nikharva,neut.
millions,
hundred
neut.
billion,
H^IM-W mahdpadtna,
Ten
thousand
billions,
$vjsahku, masc.,
hundred
thousand
A hundred
thousand
million
Ten
million
hundred
thousand
In the
be
used
masc.,
or
middle.
iQ"pardrdha,i.e.
same
manner
form
as
^rfVcRadhika, exceeding,
'Sftuna, diminished, may
Another
^"FTW
by prefixing
not
If
5, i.e. 95.
"
or
ekdnna, i.e. by
not
one
3,
fatam
deducted,"gR
or
una,
K^Tlfffci^ifiT:
ekonavimSatih,
expressingnineteen
of
way
is to be
one
unavimsatih
sjiHf^flT:
ekat suffices.
is
i}*ft"f
^Tff panchonam
compounds.
numerical
i.e. 19.
host.
mahdkshauhini.
q^iH^f^ft
billions,
million
"c|f
other half.
neut.
i.e.
million biUions,^"fff^ilfl
akshauhini,fern.,
"i,
one
*nj^
billions,
*?^TVrf mahddhuna.
20
by
madhya,
Hm
or
n"^imahdhdhd,
billions,
billions,
^tfdhuna,
to
without
conch-shell,or
sea.
-"ft
H 51tipanchonasatam,100
neut., i. e.
masc.
billions,
^T^T hdhd, masc.,
One
i.e.
ant-hill.
an
A thousand
Ten
i.e.
billions,
^fa sahkha,
samudra,
minute.
Jd4
and
similar
numbers
ft: ekdnnavimsatih,
14(^31
76.)
Declension of Cardinals.
N.
*5K
A.
VFR
FEM.
tkah
tkam
eka" one-
"
SINGULAR.
MASC.
PLURAL.
l^RT tkd
tkam
T"K
^cRT ekdm
tkam
NEUT.
FEM.
MASC.
NEUT.
^BH
ekdh
U"*1"^e'A:a"
^^iK
^roA
^%t
V^iT*?:ekdbhih
eke
I.
l*cJHeTcena
T"Wm
D.
'"R"
^afc^ekasyai 5"*^
Ab.
^4^1:
ekasydhQ"*W\^ekasmdt
^cROTTi^efcasmaZ
^T"i:tkebhyah^r"i:
G.
^"=M-M tkasya
"J"*Mfekeshdm
L.
el-"5a
^(WT^efcasmm
^oh^MieArasyam'^flftTWr^e^aswit/i
"{cni^
^cF^e^e^M
V.
sur
tkasmai
^3ta
^8
ekayd
^R
eyte
vol.
n.
Siddh.-Kaum.
"
A differentstringof
la
^"*H ^tena
p.
names
^R
"
ekasya
*^T ^te
^Jba
f Amara-Kosha
635.
is given in
eifcatA
l"Wle'kebhyah'"
ekasmai
xvn.
theVajasan.-Sanhita
(1863),p. 70;
B
tkdbhyah^W^l
";cni^f
ekdsdm
^BT:
in.
2.
elaA
6, 3,
^*im\e'keshdm
^"^T^f A-esAu
^BTfiTrtaiu
24.
See also
ed. Calcutt.
Lalita-vistara,
Woepcke, Memoire
p. 168.
124:
$254-
NUMERALS.
("238).
like cfffir
Ararat
DUAL.
FEM.
MASC.
dvdbhydm
dvd'bhydm
l"T"n
dvdyoh
G.L.
$ 355.
N.V.
dvdyoh
f"f"H, three,fern.
"?R:
fwrcfc(Pan.vi.
*r"ya#
i, 166)
tisrdh *
A.
D. Ab.
fif*n tribhydh
frfWH
G.
d*U4lli
traydndm(Ved. trindm)
tisrindm
f
ftHprf
L.
trishu
"JW'3
Irt^Mf tisrishu
tisribhyah
N.V.
^rTHt
^n^tc/mWra#(Pan.vii.i,98)
chdtasrah
A.
^if"*chaturah (Pan.vi.
chdtasrah*
I.
chaturbhih
^jjf^"
D. Ab.
chaturbhyah
^TJ**?*
^i
167)
i,
^, five,
J ^57
iH^a'Ma
iHf^^ancAa^AiAt
D.Ab.
"*fa"tt
panchdbhyah
G.
"4^I"1 1 panchdndm If
L.
""fajj
panchdsu
with
Cardinals
in
shash, six.
5^4
Not
f Not
in the Veda
like
shadbhydh
ending
construction
rf^n
in the
f"r?#,nor
of the
-"i n^ft
nor
ashtd
in
or
feminine
chatasrth.
-"iri"ii]ri
ashtdbhydh
ashtdndm
as
ashtdbhyah
If
ashtdsu
or
declension
^i;
those
navan,
panchan.
in TT f like feminines
from
to 19
when
it
means
(Accent,Pan.
chatasrindm
requiresa
some
vi.
(Pan. vi.
I,
4,
few
remarks.
^fi"
^frf
*J"fieka
eke
vn.
i67,vart.;
vadanti,
2,99,
Epic poetry.
t Accent, Pan.
vi.
i,
180; 181.
\\
in ^r".
masc.
cardinals
ashtdsu
singularonly,except
tisrindm,
fw^nf
and
like
neut.
^T?
: ashtdbhih
shatsu
bases
or
shadbhih
in
is naturallyused
chaturndm
chaturshu
ashtau
shanndm
chaturbhyah
4igc^ashtan, eight.
\\vimsatih is declined
satam
chatasnshu
the
"^r
chatvdri
: chaturbhih
chatasribhyah
^HT
"j^tf;
"^ r3 1 U.
""in""ui
chatasrindm f
5"Ur chaturndm
^irt-HM
I.
chatvdri
"Tt chatasribhih
L.
N.A.V.
traydndm
trishu
G.
tribhydh
||Pan.
vi.
i, 172.
If Pan.
VH.
i,
55.
vart.)
occur
some
Ex.
men,
fifdvi
people say.
is
always used
with
tribhih purushaih,
fafa: TjpT*fc
ndrih,eleven
in
from
numerals
and
adjectives
as
twenty enemies,
men
to 19
are
treated
^w^ekddata
pvrushdn,eleven
ddsindm
their substantives
fatravah
fruits
VftH fiji^q:
shashtih sis'av'ih,
sixty
ddsyati,a hundred
satam
slaves
pluralnumber
the
take
may
prathamdh, d, am,
"|
"
ddimdh, d,
"H,
am,
"^,dvitiyab,
d, am,
d, am,
:, "tTT,"^, tritiyah,
the first.
the second.
the third.
chaturthdh,z, ^77?^,"j
d9
turtyafy,
I the
am,
fourth.
"",turyah,d, am,
0""T,
"?t,
pafichamdh,
:, ""ft,
the fifth.
i,am,
sixth.
the
""T, saptamdh,
:, "ift,
i,am,
the
seventh.
"4,ashtamdh,
:, ""ft,
i,am,
the
eighth.
the ninth.
navamdh, i,am,
the tenth.
the eleventh.
ekddasdfy,
i,am,
,
am,
S the
t,unavimbdh, i,am,
,
m^,
^
i, "#,
^NH:,
MHi^rt,
I, am
(Pan.v.
vim"atitamdh
"* MmM*,
r,"",
nineteenth.
2,56),1
twentieth
am
"4,trimsattamdh,i,am,
""ft,
l
the thirtieth"
$ft,"^T,chatvdrimsdb,i,am,
"H, chatvdrimsattamdh,i,
:, ""ft,
^
am,
0$ft5"3T,patichdsdh,i,am,
'M^'I^MHJ,
*H"H
M^i^ns^Mtpailchdsadbhir
Ordinals.
J 259.
H,
ancestors.
horses.
with fifty
liayaih,
t,
ekadasa
^Trf
$\mi
or
pitarah,a thousand
agreeingwith
adjectives,
as
substantives.
as
Exceptionallythese cardinals
r,
plurals.
and case,
in number
a hundred
phaldni,
TfHT ^uflnl6atam
fi^ri'Ct
sahasram
";"*i"^l
as
f=J5lfff!
^lei^'.vimsatih
or
satam
boys; ^Tff MirilfH
elders
and
gender,if possible,
treated both
three
3 to 19
ace.
women,
the
as
The
ace.
While
125
NUMERALS.
259.
"4,panchdsaitamdh, i, am,
""ft,
fortieth
126
J 260-
NUMERALS.
shashtitamdh,the sixtieth *.
t
h, 1
ekashashtitamdh
.,
\ the sixty-first.
:
ekashashtah,
saptatitamdh,the seventieth.
riH:
ekasaptatitamdh,]
"
the
seventy-first.
ekasaptatah,
asititamdh,the eightieth.
1
ekdsititamdfy,
:
7
,,
*/*,
\the eighty-first.
'i
d"tdfr,
"jf,
*ft,
navatitamdhji,am,
ekanavatitamdht\
,,
the
"
ninety-first.
ekanavatdhj
the ninetieth.
"if,
Satatamdh, i, am,
:, "*rt,
the hundredth.
the hundred
: ekasatatamdfy,
:
sahasratamdb,the
2,
57.)
first.
and
other Derivatives,
j, twice.
J, thrice.
f^"n tridha
^f\ sakrit,once.
(Pan.v.
thousandth.
Adverbs
Numerical
260.
and
^cRVT
^"T chaturdhd,in
chatuh,four times.
ways.
three ways.
four ways.
five times.
panchakritvahj
Tfowpanchadhd,in
six times,"c.
shatkritvah,
:
:
^"n tredhd,in
or
five ways.
(or
ekasahyone- fold.
isah9 two-fold.
(Pan.v.
"c.
three-fold,
f^r: tri"afr,
"STf dvayam
"fi[
trayam
or
or
4,
43.)
2,
42.)
These
then
form
are
also used
their
as
pluralas
in
adjectives,
as
feminine;
commentary
by
The
another
to
Pan.
ordinals from
numeral, both
t satatamah
but
v.
sense
of five-fold
"c., and
or tNTnr panchataye
"^n^fllpanchataydJ},
VFR^panchat,pentad,^r?^dasat,
used
the
both
words
I, 59, and
sixtyadmit
forms
only(Pan. v.
are
2,
of
one
decad
occur
in the
allowed
57).
form
(Pan.v.
likewise
i,
(J283).
60),are
generally
masculine
as
may
in
the
Kasika-Vritti.
only,that is
(Pan. v.
TfT:
tamahj but
satam
2, 58). !Jfif
forms
if
preceded
its ordinal
as
261.
PRONOMINAL
AND
PRONOUNS
CHAPTER
IT? mad
(incomposition)
ADJECTIVES.
Pronouns.
Personal
261.
Base
VI.
PRONOMINAL
AND
PRONOUNS
127
ADJECTIVES.
(incomposition)
R^
Base
and
and
tvad
y"T^ yushmad.
asmad.
SINGULAR.
N.
*n" ahdm,
A.
*rfWm,
I.
*RT
wayd, by
D.
TO
mdhyam, ^
Ab.
*n^wa/,from
G.
TO
L.
*cfa mdyi, in
wd,
ftf tvdm,
m
me
OTT
me
to
me,
tvd,thee
thee
tvdyd,by
tubhyam, ^
Tjwi
me
from
me
mama,
/ram, thou
of
we,
te, to thee
thee
me
in thee
me
DUAL.
/
N.
^rni dvam,
we
two
A.
^rref^v^m,
waw,
I.
W3T"li
D.
two
us
dvdbhydm,
by
to
us
dvdyoh,^ft?zaw,
of
G.
SUN
L.
VHN*ft:dvdyoh,in
Ml:
two
us
dvdbhydm, from
Ab. WTT"ri
two
us
two
two
us
^4 "TlJyuvdyoh,in you
two
us
two
PLURAL.
vaydm,
N.
yfydm,
we
A.
asmdn,
I.
D.
wa^,
^:
asmdbhih,
by
asmdbhyam,
^:
us
yushman,
us
waA,
"HWli
asmdkam,
IT: w"A,
L.
"srsm
asmdsu,in
substitutes
7T
te, ^f v^m,
sentence, nor
or, ^
eva,
^:
us
of
in the
vaA, you
yushmdbhyam,
^:
you
vaA, to
us
you
of you
su, in you
even
no
they be
indeed, ^ ha,
^:
yushmdbhih,by
us
vaA, have
can
to
us
G.
The
you
cases,
accent
followed
^r^ aha.
*n
and
md,
are
we,
never
used
7?aw,
at the
as
by such particles
beginningof
cha, and,
"^T
vd,
128
Pan.vi.
u^ tad, he, she,it. (Accent,
(incomposition)
Base
262.
*H sdh
A.
i(tdm
HX
I.
^T
IHIT
tctm
WTt
HT^tdt
TTF^ td'n
irn tdh
Wrf"Ttdni
cHT Una
%: taik
infa:t
%: tain
tdsmai
tdsmai
i:
tdbhyah
ff"H
tebhyah
nt"lit tdsydh
ta'sya
"rfTOT frf'sam
tdsya
W^f
Wg
tdsmin
tdsydm
L.
W"i
tdbhyah
tdsydh
G.
ITTf^tdni
tdh
ff te
^aya
Ab.
182.)
NEUT.
FEM.
MASC.
NEUT.
FEM.
N.
i,
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
D.
" 262"
ADJECTIVES.
PRONOMINAL
AND
PRONOUNS
teshu
DUAL.
N. A.
NEUT.
FEM.
MASC.
WT tau
TTWf
I. D. Ab.
tdbhydm
tdbhydm
rTT"n
tdbhydm
infttta'yoA
G. L.
(incomposition)
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
FEM.
MASC.
^TT
sydh
N.
A.
"FT ^"/^"i
WT
syd
mr:
tydh
#y^m
'Itydbhih mi
wt
tydsmai
tydsyai
7TO
T?w
TIw
Ab.
tyaih
tydsmai
D.
tydsya
NEUT.
FEM.
Wm
W"l"
tydbhyah
tytbhyah7TW*
tyebhyah
tydsya
G.
mW
L.
dm mftR^tydsmin mjlty"hu
10X31 tydsy
'mfeff*[tydsmin
mTQtydsu
TT^tyeshu
DUAL.
N. A.
NEUT.
FEM.
MASC.
7TT
I. D. Ab.
G. L.
mT"lf tydbhijdm
mi^TT
tydbhydm
T*nft*
tydyoh
W*ftltydyoh
tybhydm
Possessive Pronouns.
are
" 264.
From
formed
by
the bases
of
means
of the three
personalpronouns,
^T 2ya.
yam,
adjectives
possessive
"T^ytadiyah,yd, yam,
mine.
thine.
our.
:, "irr,"*r,yushmadiyah,yd, yarn,
,
Other
derivative
possessive
pronouns
dsmdkah,
your.
Pan.
iv.
our;
3, 1-3;
are
*n*?"R*
mdmdkah,
^^RTcfi:
yaushmdkah,
iv.
1,30;
vn.
3, 44.
mine
your.
riN"=K
Likewise
130
PRONOUNS
AND
I 370-
ADJECTIVES.
PRONOMINAL
DUAL.
MASC.
FEM.
N.A.V.
imt
f dbhydm
I.D.Ab.
G.L.
^TP*rfdbhydm
has
and
^ idam,
^HT^ftj
andyoh
vrn"4\Jandyoh
andyoh
when
" 270. l"^etdd and 'Zftiddm,
preceding^rf^etad
im6
repeated in
in the
vary
second
with
sentence
reference
^"f
following
cases, by substituting
ena,
to
which
accent.
no
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
A. IJ
MASC.
NEUT.
FEM.
A. 4i"tl"\ewaw
ewa/w
I. "n"T
""1*(i
enayd
NEUT.
FEM.
^TH
"niTn
ewaA
endni
enena
DUAL.
FEM.
A.
enau
JMJfl:enayoh
G.L.
^ri""""u*iMln
Ex.
^"TMU
enayoh
the grammar
payay
enayofy
has been
studied
by
this person,
teach him
chhando
'dhyd-
prosody.
271
familyof
Base
these two
persons
svam,
(incomposition)
^Qadas,
(mediate).
that
SINGULAR.
MASC.
NEUT.
FEM.
N.
asaii
A.
^TT
I.
v"ijr|iamtind
amum
D.
amushmai
Ab.
amund
5)
amushmai
amushydh
amushmdt
amushydh
amushya
L.
29,
amushyai
amushmdt
G.
I.
amushya
amushydm
amushmin
amushmin
PLURAL.
MASC.
NEUT.
FEM.
J
.
N.
ni
A.
I.
D.Ab.
G.
amuni
^FftfH:amibhih
^Wt*i:
: ambhih
am"hyah
VH*^1*!
amishdm
amibhyah
amubhyah
amushdm
L.
amushu
DUAL.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUT.
I
N.A.V.
I.D.Ab.
amubhydm
G.L.
amuyoh
-J
PRONOUNS
274.
AND
PRONOMINAL
131
ADJECTIVES.
Relative Pronoun.
272.
Tf^ydd,who
(incomposition)
Base
or
which.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
MASC.
NKUT.
MASC.
NXUT.
FEM.
N.
IHy"a
*Hy"/
*T^y"fc
$y"
TOy""
A.
*}y""m
*liyam
*n^yrf"
*H"^y"/n
TJT!
I.
M"T
^*Ty^na
*h ya/A
TTfWt
D.
*Tw
^"T:ytbhyah
TWt
ydbhyah
Ah.
T^JT:
T"RXI^ydsmdt
TJW.
ydbhyah
G.
^TWyasya
L.
""t*ii
""fw^ya5"nm
ydsydm
y^ha
ya'y^
Tm
T^ ydsyai T^ ydsmai
ydsmai
T^^lydsydh
ydsya
T"Q
ifa
yjni
"ufn yon"
ydfe
ydbhih*h ya"3i
ytbhyah
TW.
y"hdm
WT
DUAL.
MASC.
FEM.
T^
N.A.V.
I.D.Ab.
G. L.
^nt
yayo^
'n:
yrfyo^
Tt
ydyoh
Pronouns.
Interrogative
f% ^m,
(incomposition)
273. Base
Who
or
which 1
SINGULAR.
MASC.
PLURAL.
FEM.
NEUT.
MASC.
NKUT.
FEM.
N.
TXlkdk
TXlkcl
f*Mm
%*6f
W.kcth
A.
3ikdm
-atikctm
f^ktm
"S^kcln
^FTt kdh
I.
^k^na
WRkdyd
%:kafy
"SK^lkd'bhih%t
D.
"I35R kdsmai
"Pw
cR^ kdsmai
^""IJ
k"hyah
oRfl*n
^^^(kdsmdt
:"H\ktbhyah
IKW.Ubhyah
W*r.k#"hyah
^if
WTT
kdsyai
ktha
Ab. TQ"^kdsmdt
iK"CMsydh
G.
"B^I Aroisya
L.
"F^fJtasyrfwi
kdsmin
^ftR^Ara.mm
"liftR^
k"hdm
^fTSktshu
IfW.
kd'bhyah
Ara's^m
4IUI
kath
ktbhyah
kfshdm
cRHJAr/"tt
DUAL.
MASC.
N.A.
I.D.Ab.
NEUT.
FEM.
'a"fam'
^1*^
"5KT"n^y(fm
^BT"n
^i*"f
-361*6
kd'bhydm
kdbhydm
G. L.
contempt
or
dubious
relation (Pan.v. 3,
"c.
you
(See Siddh.-Kaum.
last vowel
tvayakd,By
71).
^Wotilf*?:
asmakdbhih,Wiibus
two
vol.
i.
p.
706.)
r^HRT
or
thee!
!
to
syllable,
instead of
^^4 ayakam.
132
PRONOUNS
AND
PRONOMINAL
Compound
ADJECTIVES.
Pronouns.
to
" 375. By adding igs^dris,
^fdrisa, "^driksha,
certain
or
have
formed
been
idriksha,this
tddrik,m.
formed
n.
are
tddrisi,f.;
TTT^ft
like?
followingcompound
"
see
many,
the declension of
On
}^^
"
in
'^vat (J187).
iyan"
"fiflT
How
Arrfri,
tdti,so many,
many? TfflT
and
Tfa ya7i,as
231.
chit,^R
" 277. By adding fq-f^
f^ir
kirn,it is changed into
pronoun
formed
much
How
been
iyat,so much,
feni%"/,
Similarly
implyingquantity,have
nouns
much,
as
,
certain
to
like
^declined
much,
so
,
*n^ ya^
ril^cf,
"1
much,
so
"
i.
or
and
va#
pronouns,
3Tfil
in
feminine
i,am.
"^T,tddrisah,
HT^r:, "5ft,
like
me, like thee,"c.
HT^^I mddrisa, F^T^T tvddrisa,
;
J 276. By adding
Note
genders,forming the
declined in three
are
like.
like.
kidrisa,^ft^ Mdriksha,What
These
like.
pronominal
c^aw",
^ft "p^, to
or
the
interrogative
indefinite pronoun.
an
some
kaschit,WiT^kdchit,
fsK^f^kimchitj
also
one;
'affai^kachchi
anything.
kaSchana,
kdchana, f"fr^"T
kimchana,
oFT^"T
fohHfq kimapi,some
Aropi,
^*, ofrrfTT
In
the
kaddchana, once
ddchit9 ch^m
one.
one.
indefinite adverbs
manner
same
some
formed
are
A:v",Where
; n
oin*T
"T
"ac?a,When
W"*
na
kvdpi,
anywhere.
not
Sometimes
it indefinite
Likewise
y"A
IT:
TK
^B:
yah kah,
is
prefixedto
whosoever
iRS
the
"fi^T
"irf^y^^kaschit,whosoever, or
to render
interrogative,
yasya
IT: ojrg
kasya,whosesoever.
yah kascha, or
in
"*"$H
kaschana.
The
relative pronoun,
meaning : iffiy:,zn
the relative and
^T,
if doubled,assumes
demonstrative
yattad,whatsoever.
an
pronouns
are
combined
for the
Occasionally
same
purpose
-f 278.
PRONOMINAL
AND
PRONOUNS
Adjectives.
Pronominal
} 278.
the
Under
which
but
by Pronoun,
grammarians
native
of
name
which
share
in
of declension.
peculiarities
They
may
Tit sarva,
I.
both; 5.
Tfft tar
Which
1
1
^"R
6. W9R
8. TJR
^nrc
20.
and
of
many?
adhara, west
5flma
^Kt antara
or
inferior ;
or
antard
even,
means
clever ;
nor
dakshind
clever
gdthakdfy,
ubhaya,
4. TOTJ
formed
of two?
;
10.
12.
apara,
22.
own;
the
suffixes
"3S?TR katama,
"sfa
nema,
half;
subsequent;
15. v"para,
south
other
right;
or
or
inferior ;
garment).
(scil.
^f0f*!T
; nor
pronominaladjective
kinsman
sva, if it means
nor
by
any
of the
or
seven
space
or
from
Hence
wealth
; nor
purva
to
"nvj"*K
"fttJ*U!
minstrels
antare
lower
relation in time
grdmayor
*va,
it is not
interval,
"c.;
adhara,unless theyimplya
19. ^TTC
^T
21.
puh, suburb,)or
equalor
means
prior;
or
subsequent;
means
if it
,
9. words
dakshina,
posterior; 17. ^frspff
or
of
peculiarities
ubha, two;
1 1.
^ pdrva, east
uttara, north
dakshina,if it
^rvn
14.
west
avara,
all ;
these
by
Adjectives,
senses.
katara,Which
9. qftX
as
real pronouns
^araraT
*nr sama,
10.
eka, one;
(except^rHl ^:
If OT
tama, such
the
sarva,
mentioned
pronouns
be called Pronominal
T"TH
freelytranslated
beginningwith
with
common
fira vtiva,all; 3.
2.
other; 6.
any a,
tva, other
8. w
13.
^rsr
all;
in certain
used
declension
been
real
the
affected
they are
that
remembered
it is to be
and
has
class of words
included, besides
words
before, the following
certain
which
Sarvandman,
reallymeans
have
133
ADJECTIVES.
; TWn:
Accent, Pan.
vi.
i, 191.
the two
villages.
134:
PRONOUNS
AND
PRONOMINAL
" 279-
ADJECTIVES.
I.
^f^TT sdrvayd
^T^WT sdrvdbhydm
^rflfatsdrvdbhih
D.
*rf^ sdrvasyai
^"=rt"*ri
sdrvdbhydm
^T%"n sdrvdbhyah
Ab.
*t5tHitsdrvasydh
^TtPTT sdrvdbhydm
^HtTWKsdrvdbhyah
G.
"i"it"ii!
sdrvasydh
^T^fttsdrvayoh
tf"=n*ii
sdrvdsdm
L.
"5""*fsdrvasydm
^rt^ftt
sdrvayoh
sdrvdsu
^^TCJ
NEUTER.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
^1% sdrvam
N. A.V.
1$
^qiP"y sdrvdni
sdrve
The
" 279.
W*J
f^/in
take
Nom.
Masc.
Sing,of
masc.
is used
w5^"
N. A. V.
in the Dual
-"ftubhau,
I. D.
Ab.
J 281.
Sing,and
Plur.
cRnr
katama,
fern. ;
neut.
^ran^emya^
only :
ubhdbhydm,
Tm"n
G. L. "gwft:ubhayoh;
neut.
"4
ubhayah,0"$t-yi,
T"nr:
katara,
cRTR
the neuter
^rarrawya,
in the
any ah,
^rfT itara,
any at ar a,
Acc.Yoc.
Nom.
the
Sing.^n*n
" 280.
^rsfiTT
awya,
-y"m,
Haradatta
is
used
never
only
the Dual.
admits
MASCULINE.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
N.
"WI*
A.
"JWT
I.
"SH^tT ubhayena
^TOJ
D.
"3WTCR
^3^^Wt
ubhayah
ubhayasmai, "c.
senses,
^n^a/;
from
take
may
in the Loc.
or
^WTT*^ ubhaydn
ubhayam
nine words
ubhaye
7VR
"c.
ubhayebhyah,
jjzt/rato
in the Nom.
ubhayaih
Plur.
^f!
^z"or
in the Abl.
ahj
used
in their
Sing.WV?(smdt
or
Sing.ftR^smiw
^".
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
N.
"^Ipurvah
^[%T
purvau
A.
^^
tj^T
purvau
I.
T$l$purvena
purvam
PLURAL.
^l
D.
^w
^tl"npurvdbhydm
"^^HWf
purvdbhydm
^f"Jt
purvebhyah
Ab.
Tjfwn^w/rasma*
purvdbhydm
^tn^pMnja^"^tr^rf
Xj^fa:
purvebhyah
G.
*"****purvasya
L.
^fw^^Mrvaswm
purvasmai
or
1,
^[%^Ipurvayoh
"^^ftt
purvayoh
purve
followingwords
may
likewise take
^ft "A
or
i in the Nom.
Plur.
masc.
33.)
prathamah, first,THWi
nn
or
purvaih
or
n"4*iit
prathamdhj
fern.
prathamd.
charamah, last,^T?U
charamau, ^T"
charame
or
^TflTt
similar words
charamdh.
in IHT
#aya y
fWrPTt
tritayah,
-J 285.
PRONOMINAL
AND
PRONOUNS
ardhah, half,*tffardhe
tt
cases
these words
V^Tt
Hya
?HH
trayah.
ardArfA.
"TTH nemdh.
or
are
in
katipayah,some,
In all other
similar words
alpdh.
*K-HI;
or
135
ADJECTIVES.
in
are
in
*ftsarva.
follow
tfhltfya
MASCULINE.
DUAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
N.
fedlM: dvitiyah
fsnW
doittyau
fgrtl^Tidvitiydh
A.
f^ldl4dvittyam
Psrt1"iT
dvittyau
fgnlMl^dvitiydn
I.
HSdl^H dvitiyena
PS nlM
I *4
idvltiydbhydmTS nl M idvittyaih
fsnl"4"*f
fSdl^lfl
or
doitiyasmaiT^mTWT
dvittydya
D
.
ism*!*'!! dvitiyebhyah
dvitiydbhydm
id^ I**41dvittydbhydm
PSr/1
frf
M^I
I"\dvitiyasmdt
Ab.
ifl
Pi dl ^ If(dvitiydt
or fjj ^ W
G.
ferri
JJ44J dvitfyasya
L.
feff^^nftt
fkri*ft"fofrfye
rrfHl^rm^rfmViyo^mm
dvittyayoh fsnl^M dvitiyeshu
dvitiyebhyah
or
to him
Sing."ftn^H^nT^nyo"Aayaya,
Dat.
end
at the
of
compounds
mdsapurvdya(Pan. 1.
such
1, 30).
both
are
treated like
dear
(Pan. 1.
ordinarywords
1,
29).
^"R^"Iuttara-purva, north-east,the
as
(Pan. I.
terminations
i,
may
take
In
addition to the
the Sanskrit
is effected,
pronominalbases.
sense.
language
possesses
in their
by
which
suffixes which
other
use
the
Ace.
fat;chiram,
Instr.
P^"u chirena,in
Dat.
P"RH4 chirdya,for
Abl.
long ago.
fa^u^chirdt,
Gen.
TTC^T
Loc.
f^T chire,long.
adverbial terminations
1.
rTCtah, with
are
used
frequently
2.
^ tra, with
3.
^T dd, with
tdt,with
4. UTi^
locative
long time.
long time.
a
long time.
time.
are,
local.
meaning,becoming generally
meaning.
temporal meaning
a
chirasya,a long
ablative
an
locative meaning.
declension
differ from
Thus
Other
the compass,
throughouttake
to
too,
case-terminations,
ordinary
The
may
"j5m"
the pronominal
Declension.
regular case-terminations
by being restricted
chiefly
terminations
last element
^i;
28).
Adverbial
" 285.
same
in
The
irti^J
as
Likewise
31),though in
to whom
are
also raised to
the
of
nouns
ordinary
to
particularly
in
an
adverbial
136
PRONOUNS
5. 1R thd, with
6.
AND
meaning
8.
expressiveof effect.
"UTR^sdt,
and ^rrf^
^TT
dhi,local.
"f|rhi,temporal and causal.
9.
1P"tar, local.
7.
10.
"5ha, local.
Kt tah,with
ablative
an
tatah,thence.
,
asmattah, from
bhavattah,from
W"K
us.
temporal sense). Vf
or
round.
grdmatah,
5rRWt
iti,thus, j[^iva,as.)
(cf.^flf
amutah,
VSHJcU
thence.
HJ
mattah, from
*^J
^^
Honour.
your
me.
purvatah,
^3r5?!f:
abhitah,around, near.
from
(" 260).
^rfJ itah,hence
yatah,whence,
Whence
opH frwtaA,
TTftw:paritah,all
adverbs
forming numeral
meaning.
Tin
hence.
for
2.
tham
IHf I
modality;likewise ^
of
" 285-
ADJECTIVES.
PRONOMINAL
WTitt
from
the
both sides.
ubhayatah,on
village.^sJM'H. ajndnatak,
ignorance.
cl ^ra, locative
c^T trdtas
originally
TfW tatra,there.
ya^ra, where.
'^
there, in the
world.
next
in
gotdi purushatrd,amongst
""fWAw^ra,Where
V"ffi ekatra,at
men.
^T|W
amutra,
one
saAa).
temporal.
3. ^T rfa,
taddnim.
ri^THlT
IT^Ttadd, then,and
another
^HfT
sarvadd, always, at
^T
4.
time.
"a"fcf,When?^"H^l
cIT^T
when.
*Tr?Tyarfa,
all times.
later
^oft^T ekadd, at
any
add,
time.
one
^m*) iddntm,
now.
local.
ITTi^^,
in front.
W^fJT^prdktdt,
base in
Frequentlyafter a
s :
before,
vi M ".tn i
t, below.
f^ adharastdt,below,
afterwards.
msaif^parastdt,
TMf"8 vt^uparishtdt,
above.
thd, modal.
tathd,thus.
both
^SRT*IT
ways.
y"/Aa, as.
"R^ katham,
How?
^ft^n sarvathd,in
anyathd,in
^rK^I itarathd,in
ways.
6.
T^TT
another
the other
^r*Tittham, thus.
ubhayathd,in
^R^T
in
anyatarathd,
""!""" nvm
way.
way.
every way.
^TT vrithd,vainly(?).
Or "*T#Aa, in ^HI
Or
of two
one
tham,
in
aMa, thus.
efPective.
^TTi^saf,
(TT$ft$\ftlf
rdjno'dhinam,dependent
"M^H"^ra/asa^,
on
reduced
king.)H
w^Il i^bhasmasdt,
reduced to fire.
^b*\*\\t(^agnisdt,
^iHfc
dhi,local.
7. ^TT d and
^f^Wf^
or
to ashes.
the
T^T
uttard.
purd, in the
^TiTTT antard
dakshind.
^Hsjiiu
or
in
^'rKlH^
uttardhi,
"T! -re,
or
"T^
the North,
-rena),between.
^TT
before.)
^*jf\\^purastdt,
such
obsolete
as
nouns
^pn mudhd,
in
ending in consonants.
instrumental
cases
of
;138
info pachati,he cooks;
e.g.
^"fffyajate,he
These
but
swelling;
dismisses
or
away
off
wrath;
active
or
Sanskrit
middle
in
others;
Par.,
^^f^avridhat,
Others
certain
take
3,
" 288.
pada.
Causal verbs
forms
without
two
if
g.
74).
in
Greek,
learnt
as
Greek,
verbs
some
krodham
or
middle
are
grows,
(Pan. I.
3,
enters
compounded
fiTq^n ni-visate,he
but
Aor.
91.)
Atmanepada
only,but
with
in.
enters
follow
generally
to them
of the
and
in
^srTO
forms
in the four
is
moods
forms
is
(Pan. i.
3,
90).
always Atmanepada
; the
with
modified
few
and prefixes
Atmanepada,
In the other tenses
tenses.
the
exceptions,
thirteen
and
of the
different
same
those
as
from
the
Specialor ModifiedBase.
ATMANEPADA.
^W%
3. The
Optative(Lin)
H^TI bhdveyam
*^H bhdveya
4. The
Imperative(Lot)
H^rftr bhdvdni
H%
Formed
from
the
General
or
dbhave
bhdvai
Unmodified Base.
PARASMAIPADA.
ATMANEPADA.
babhuve
5. The
Perfect (Lit)^33
Reduplicated
6. The
7. The
First Aorist
^nffftridbodhisham
^wfafa dbhavishi
8. The
Second
(Lun)
Aorist (Lun)
^*"$ dbhdvam
^rftr%dsiche
9. The
Future
(Lrit)
Hfmmfir bhavishydmi
Hfa*T bhavishye
Cf. Siddhanta-Kaumudi,
the
Latin.
^sw4 dbhavam
II.
the
of the
forms, correspondingto
vfebhdve
Present
The
always Parasmaipada.
the terminations
in Sanskrit
Formed
of the
both
have
specialor
of Greek
the Pada
in it ya, which
one
passiveare,
are
ay
Parasmaipadaand Atmane-
in the
(Lat)
Imperfect(Lan)
The
stated,
'3"favardhati;
but
H^lfH bhdvdmi
2,.
as
vinayati*,
in certain tenses
never
PARASMAIPADA.
I.
on
vinayate, he turns
possibleto appreciatewhen
he grew.
conjugatedboth
are
passivetakes
The
I.
The
well
by practice. Thus
*TJ TM "f*(fit
gandam
fVn*^
it is
avardhishta, Atm.
ya, which
Atmanepada.
" 290. There
tenses
is best
voices
expressionsas
fV^lfwvisati,he
ending
intensives have
yd
g.
3,
as
17.)
Denominatives
if
in
as
^Rffo
Desideratives
" 289.
e.
well
as
to
or
(Pan. i.
generalrules.
Parasmaipada
the
prepositions
; e.
(Pan. i.
other
or
middle
in such
Sanskrit
in
in ^H
Atmanepada,
as
any
well
as
cases,
Again,in
appliesto Causals
analyse
and
active
Parasmaipada
as
Mififyajati,he sacrifices;
for himself;
cooks
same
it is difficultto
of the
carries
The
rest in many
however,
distinctions,
"rf\
nt,to lead, is used
he
pachate,he
SMCI
peculiarconceptionswhich
in
" 288-
CONJUGATION.
babhdva
W$5
babhuva
choraydm
p. 250.
^ choraydm
vft"n[
cha
Colebrooke,Grammar, p. 337.
1 1
The
1w*fr"T dbhavishyam
(Lrin)
Future (Luj) Mflrdifw bhavitdsmi
Periphrastic
The
Benedictive
The
10.
.
12.
lih)
(As'ir
(Let)occurs
Subjunctive
$291. 1.2.
in the Veda
Command
Tenses
to the
b. Wish
; e. g.
vedam
7rl*nfhqffaj
T"r
Veda
study the
e.
e.
g.
people would
perish.
will
studies,
tvam
act
thus.
such
e.
cases
persons
bhunktdm,
I wish
ReduplicatedPerfect
6. Certain verbs
The
common
which
are
the
your
First and
Second
historical tenses
devcLS ched
honour
H*H
couldst
thou
ninderann
as
second
the
is
person
third persons
used
are
ichchhdmi
HTT^^ii
eat.
something absolutely
past.
allowed
Aorists
Brahmans
^^T *f m$ yach
that
not
g. 3*41 ft
e.
may
to form
refer
in narration.
of
They
"l^friydvaj-jivamannam
2
verb.
auxiliary
an
generallyto
time
take the
past,and
are
the
Augment ("300).
e.g.
vapsydmah,
varshishyatidhdnyam
form
reduplicated
perfect,
the
means
^N-nil^H^
far
first and
Optative;
denotes
not
The
i.e. by
perfectperiphrastically,
Future, also
rice.
*TW
; e.g.
as
explanation,
placeof
world,
the
should
tuda, Strike !
g. ijj^
in
bhavel
na
niggardly.
concerned
their
pleasesthe
whatever
frraddadhe,I believed
na
chen
^ilM^r^yafypathet sa dpnuydt,he
*("l^^Hf^W^W^^^KHr^r. yad yad rocheta
not
Imperativerequiresno
bhavdn
asau
H
T^T^
~m
dependent sentences
kuryd
evam
dscharyam,that
9. The
them
to
dandab
punishment in
not
were
dadydd amatsarah,
in relative
cha
5. The
obtain.
tad
givethat
one
in many
bhaved
student
EM^glXm: IHTTt
the
4. The
tarkam
adhiyiya,uta
M"^*ft
3"MK*ft dHHIM!^
vinasyeyurimdfyprajdh,if there
It is used
7.8.
H^wfo
^N
g.
viprebhyastat
f.
sit here!
study logic?
shall I
or
loke
let
go, i.e.
Brahman.
Condition ;
who
mayest
vedapdragobrdhmanatvdt, he probablyis
e.
accent.
gachchheh,thou
grdmam
bhavdn
Supposition(sambhdvana)
;
he is
alwaysthe
Optativeare,
^nfhftn
g.
adhiyiya,Shall
d.
has
explanation.The
village.
mif^m!*
Inquiring; e.
Moods.
and
Imperfect requireno
; e. g.
go thou
c.
of the
senses
principal
*ftprta bhavishiyd
only.
(J300),which
Augment
the
Imperfecttakes
and
Present
The
Hfaing bhavitdhe
bMydsam
^m
Signification
of the
3. The
^wfir"" dbhavithye
Conditional
13. The
a.
139
CONJUGATION.
291.
if it rain, we
ddsyatiy as
shall
long
as
sow
life
140
SPECIAL
will
lasts, he
bhoktd
kadd
is used, instead
that
Future
Periphrastic
the
have
happened (Pan.in.
not
in
wish
fft
13. The
is used
Benedictive
The
general; e.
g,
for
Sanskrit
The
he
Singular,Dual,
in
has
Plural,with
and
live
AND
GENERAL
Sanskrit
293.
terminations
of the
and
the
root
same
will be
Bhu
and
Div
CLASSES
TEN
all verbs
their
into
ten
undergo
roots
retained with
different
before
the
Imperative.
alterations.
slight
some
Thus
classes.
"TS^ bhrds,
belong
^3( tras, cJ7trut, H1^
bhrd"ate or WT^m
bhrdtyate,"c. (Pan.in.
lash
^jJT klam,
classes ; "T$IW
classes,
J 394.
root
The
will be
four tenses
and
Thus
the
ModifiedTenses
root
fa
chi
is
dchi-nu-ma,we
^rf%"pr
chitdh,searched, or
searched,without
of the
the
specialtenses.
the
searched.
ReduplicatedPerfect
nu.
We
call f%
But
the
rest
Hence
the
the
in
changed
search;
modification
requirethis
which
moods
Unmodified Tenses.
we
numbers,
VERBS.
OF
Imperfect,the Optative,and
belong to
may
three
in each.
THE
which
Present, the
One
mood
and
divided
have
modifications
long !
persons
AND
TENSES
This
happy!
be
he
VIII.
grammarians
certain
according to
bMydt, May
tense
CHAPTER
SPECIAL
also
only.
each
three
JI41rilftl
ayodhydm
but
only a blessing,
srimdn
^fhfTRJjni^
verb
been
have
proceed to Ayodhya.
in the Veda
Subjunctiveoccurs
g.
subhiksham
would
TO
g. 'snfaflT
e.
expressingnot
chiram jivydt,May
*i1mif^
292.
wilt to-morrow
praydtdsi,thou
"vah
12.
Definite Future
or
Periphrastic
The
11.
rain,there
e.
Augment ($300).
the
takes
Conditional
The
plenty.
139);
3,
abhavishyattadd
died
abundant
been
had
g. *K^T H^W
if thingsare spoken of
Optative,
6f the
szwmM^
abhavishyat,if there
e.
Future
will he eat?
H^ffi bhokshyate,When
or
Conditional
The
10.
with
optionally
used
be
may
this
circumstances
certain
Under
food.
give
" 29!-
TENSES
GENERAL
AND
of the
General
the
or
Present,
chi-nu-mdli,
fa"jR:
Past
f^nr:
Participle
chichy-u^ they
fa^aj:
chinu,the
chi,the root, f^fj
have
base
-$ 296.
J
THE
AND
295. Verbal
bases
CLASSES
TEN
first divided
are
OP
into two
divisions
I. Bases
which
in the modified
tenses
end
in
II. Bases
which
in the modified
tenses
end
in any
II
insert g nuy
which
Bases
a.
division is subdivided
second
This
"9
141
VERBS.
*1 a.
letter but
a.
into,
*ft nty between
or
u,
the
and
root
the
terminations.
II b. Bases
which
the terminations
take
without
intermediate
any
element.
I. First Division.
J 296. The
1.
The
first division
class
Bhu
v^rf^bhvddi,because
iQ
a.
is added
vowel
b. The
The
Guna,
bhd,
to
possible(i.e.
longor
where
i, u, ri,(i,if followed by
by them
be).
short
t, u, r",
consonant).
one
he knows.
^tvfiTbodh-a-ti,
in
accent
rests
on
of the
verbs
the radical
"
Bhu
class
derivative verbs,
Many
in their lists is ^
called
H^firbhdv-a-ti,
to be ;
$"M,
is.
he
language)
grammarians,and
"
native
classes:
to the
if final ; short
Note
comprisesfour
(as we
know
it is drawn
causatives,HmMiir
as
on
from
the
augment.
bhdvdyati,he
be;
to
causes
desideratives,^J?rflT
bubhushati, he wishes to be, from
he
pada, ^faildbebhidydte,
he
^ftiVdHlfa
lohitdydti,
Tud
The
2.
cuts much
"
(thesixth
class
^r
is added
b. Before
to the
Note
The
"
root.
changed
to
T^
^ri
to
^ri
to
ft^rty.
^rjr ($no).
and
^l
are
ft ri,to go;
^ mri,
them
tud, to strike).
^ iy.
by
die ;
to
uv.
fa^
to
mriy-d-te. tf kri, to
kir-d-ti*
foff^fw
accent
in verbs
Div
class
of the Tud
(thefourth
r^mf^divddi,because
Ex.
in their lists is ip
called
class rests
on
the intermediate
^?
hence
never
3. The
a.
^i
tud-d-ti.
to strike;ij^fif
"g^tud,
scatter
grammarians,and
to
nuv-d-ti.
praise; yMfcf
Guna
native
first root
^ i and
T
Ex.
this class.
a, final
this ^
follow
with
the
U^rf^tudddi,because
a.
red,
grows
and
IT
ya
is added
t^;nah, to
Note
"
The
traces to show
grammarians,and
native
in their lists is
called
by
them
f^divyto play),
accent
that
to the
with
class rests
budh,
on
to awake
the accent
on
originally
budh-ya-te.
"3"rffr
;
though there
1 ya.
are
SPECIAL
Chur
The
4.
AND
(thetenth
class
GENERAL
with
yiigfchurddi,because
them
grammarians, and
native
the
" 297-
TENSES
called
in their lists is
first root
by
chur,
to
steal).
^HT ay
a.
b. If
the
is added
ends
root
lengthenedto
Ex.
dal,to
If the
c.
these
Ex.
in
^T
",
while
Guna,
take
embrace
fg^"fcA,to
sr
is
^l^^fdddl-dya-ti,
(many exceptions.)
ends
vowels
d.
^n
cut ;
root
in
root.
^ri
%tnrflT6lesh-dya-ti.^
mrish, to endure
chor-dya-ti.^
cMr,
#,
steal ; ^Ulfff
to
*rl^W marsh-dya-te.
rt, o"
$^ir.
becomes
cfi^W",
to
kirt-dya-ti.
praise; GR^S^rrr
^i, ^,
d. Final
"3 u,
fwyn,togrow old; ^
Ex.
an"i
"35^,^H"
Vriddhi.
"^[r^take
|m\
if not
Many,
"
secondaryroots,and
as
well
accent
II. Second
J 297.
It
is
in
end
specialtenses,
certain
terminations,all
radical
vowel, or
verbs
but
of ^R
ay
a.
verbs
which
do
not, in
"Jnu,
u,
division
second
to
nd
*n
the
it
in the
before
that,
of
requirestrengthening
strengtheninggenerallytakes place by
"ftni is raised
are
the first^
on
this
belongingto
they take
syllables.This
of these
Guna,
if
grammarians,
Division.
of
distinguishingfeature
native
the terminations.
before
^T a
rests
comprises all
division
second
The
modified
in the
as
The
by
verbs
as
this class
causatives,denominatives, "c.
with
in form
identical
inasmuch
classes,
other
from
arranged under
all roots
Kri, and ^
to
*T na
their
vowels
of
means
in the
Rudh
class.
We
shall
inflective
call
base,
base ;
strong
the
rule,the
the terminations
an
terminations
vice
the
which
require strengtheningof
terminations, and
weak
and
strengtheningof
As
the
versd,
base, the
the
base
the
terminations
which
and
strong terminations,
before
them,
do
not
the
base
the
the
require
before
base.
accent
are
falls
weak,
equilibriumbetween
on
base
on
of
strong terminations,or,
termination.
if
establishing
throughout
-$ 299II
J 298. This
The
I.
(thefifth
lu,
nu,
with
native
The
out
iMltytanddi, because
them
7
with
called
by
strong terminations,
sing.Pres.
ist pers.
grammarians,and
native
called
by
is added
grammarians, and
(theeighth class
class
Tan
su-n6-mi,
^ffffa
a.
classes
comprisesthree
terminations.
suy to squeeze
VERBS.
to the
is added
OP
CLASSES
class
^rf^ svddi,because
them
"Jnu
take
first subdivision
class
Su
which
Bases
a.
TEN
THB
AND
terminations.
plur.Pres.
pers.
rttftfa
tan-6-mi9 ist pers. sing.Pres.
Note
All verbs
"
Kri
3. The
class
(theninth
ctylty
kryddi,because
"ftni is added
before
"H nd
belongingto
native
with
to
J 399.
i.
The
Ad
The
class
b. The
pers.
plur.Pres.
the terminations
with
be
called
ad,
to
by
with
them
eat).
the
with
consonants
base ;
consonants,
consonants, the
phonetic
observed.
carefully
terminations
weak
vowels, vowels
("107"145)must
the
grammarians,and
immediatelyto
vowels, and
before
classes
in their lists is
first root
of vowels
contact
base
native
joinedimmediately.
are
comprisesthree
added
are
plur.Pres.
pers.
kri-n-dnti,
3rd
the
explainedabove
strong
them
vowels.
sing.Pres.
class with
because
with
consonants
rules
beginningwith
pers.
division
(thesecond
in the
and
by
strong terminations,
kri-na-mi,ist
to which
terminations
The
called
I do.
terminations,
second
^ify adddi,
a.
grammarians,and
ist
kri-ni-mdfy,
buy; "aftarfa:
II b. Bases
^fkri,JiOfH karomi,
one,
to the
weak
"^n,except
takes
Guna
where
possible($296, i. b).
Ex.
lih,to
f?5^
thou
lick
lickest
fc5TO lih-mdh,we
($1 27);
ctftettdhd,you
lick
Tyf^flek-shi,
lickedst
($1*8).
The
weak
accent
is
on
the
when
terminations,
first vowel
the accent
of the
falls
on
terminations, except in
the radical vowel.
case
of
144:
2.
The
class
Hu
terminations
Ex.
hu,
sacrifice:
to
sacrifice.
is
accent
the terminations
(Pan. vi.
i,.
whether
in
vi.
same
as
if
ydt of dad-ydtis
The
ground.
on
dddhati
"f*nfff
dddhdti; ^vfff
Benfey,who
1,3, vart.
vowel,
2);
but
whether
or
it confirmed
by
then
longer ajadi,
class with
to join:
*[*{yuj9
accent
falls
on
native
the
The
the
question is
termination
Pratyudaharana
ddd-ita must
tia, in
grammarians,and
terminations
we
gr*n yu-n-j-mdh,
tf na, wherever
is raised to 7f
it appears, unless
Tud
class,
Div
class,
class,
"
Second
class,with
Tan
class,
native
Ad
class,
Hu
class,
Rudh
class,
I class.
class.
Divadi, IV
class.
Churadi, X
class.
Division.
grammarians, Svadi,V
class.
Tanadi, VIII
Kri class,
"
Kryadi, IX
Adadi, II
"
class.
class.
class.
Juhotyadi,III class.
"
"
rudh,
na.
it is attracted
VI
Tudadi,
"
called
I join.
join; g"lft*T
yu-nd-j-mi,
Bhu
"
are
which
"{n is inserted,
First Division.
Su
be
class.
and
terminations
augment.
Chur
Agama
the
in the Ad
as
before weak
strong base
in the
is doubtful..
at first accentuated
Boehtlingkand Bopp.
see
if
weak, likewise
added
are
this class.
OptativeAtmanepada
Prof.
(Pan.in.
no
are
the
(theseventh
terminations
b. Between
The
to the
view, and
former
terminations
Ex.
vowel.
like
the first syllable,
them
The
Ex.
the
dadhttd.
and
^vrf^rudhddi, because
rundddhi, to obstruct).
T^qffg
a.
possible.
ju-ho-mi,.I
sj^frfa
sacrifice ;
ajadi,
beginningwith
adopt the
class
Rudh
by
where
Ex.
3. The
the Udatta
jdgri have
weak.
with
begin
dddhita
on
treated
189. For
i,
the
ajadion
i.
Guna,
takes
Parasmaipada,follow
verb,if
Whether
accent
the
doubt, avidyamanavatsvaravidhau
Agama
is ta with
conjugatedin
Rig-vedaboth
tta is to be
by
lists is fr hut
192.)
i,
strong, but
placesthe
siyutis,no
called
class.
terminations
of the
the first syllable
189"190).
dadhitd,now
given
on
are
find in the
We
in the Ad
as
"299-
VERBS.
in their
first root
the
OF
grammarians, and
native
*J"H!ju-hu-mdh, we
(Pan.vi.
intensive verbs,
The
added
are
CLASSES
TEN
" 302.)
reduplication.(Rules of Reduplication,
takes
root
The
THE
with
class
b. The
The
(thethird
AND
"Spftarf^
The
c.
TENSES
juhotyddi,because
them
a.
GENERAL
AND
SPECIAL
by
the
146
General Rules of
$ 303.
with
syllableof
vowel)is repeated.
first
The
Reduplication.
e.
(i.
root
" 303-
TERMINATIONS.
AND
REDUPLICATION,
AUGMENT,
portion of
that
it which
ends
is exceptional
in forming^t^babhu. (Pan.
v$J)hu
budh=z'3^^bubudh.
vn.
73.)
4,
$ 304. Aspiratedletters
their
by
representedin reduplication
are
responding
cor-
unaspiratedletters.
fwfa^bibhid.
T^dhu,to shake,=^dudhu.
" 305.
Gutturals
palatals
; ^
by *(j. (Pan.vn.
root
chakhan.
laugh,
as, to
a
dig, ^^R[
to go,
chukut.
^^7
corresponding
62.)
4,
sever,
to
If
their
in reduplication
represented
by
are
^Z kut, to
$ 306.
begins with
than
more
one
reduplicated.
ipi kru$,to shout, ^JST chukruf.
to throw,
fqpikship,
faffcp^
chikship.
=
$ 307.
If
tenuis,the
root
tenuis
followed
by
tenuis
or
aspirated
??nlspardh, to strive,
=
WT
sthdjto
stand,
'^cf^paspardh.
tasthd.
if^n
But
" 308. If
shortened
to
^ff 5mn,
the
radical
in the
pine,
TTCR
vowel,
sasmri.
whether
final
or
medial,
is
long, it
is
reduplicative
syllable.
jagdh.
i?T^gdh, to enter, "TTTT|
^ kri,to buy, fsnftchikri.
=
to strike,
^ stid,
^^
=
" 309.
is ^fto
or
If the
radical
^ftauy
it becomes
%^ sev,
vowel
(notfinal)
to
a,
Roots
taking^r
with
a
or
^ i; if it
ftr^sishev.
dudhauk.
approach, J^cfi
=
%ai, ^ffro,
are
treated
reduplicative
syllable.
=
gai, to
^ ai, it becomes
^ dhe, to feed,
u.
final *e,
in the
is TJ
worship,
^c^dhauk, to
" 310.
sushud.
^ftdadhau.
sing,
=s
^ft^o,to sharpen,
=
like roots
ending
in
-$312.
f 311.
followingroots
The
BOOT.
SING. EEDUPL.
PERS.
FIRST
PERF.
WEAK
of the
account
liable to
are
Samprasdrana.)Pan.
called
(Thischange is
vowels.
which
147
TERMINATIONS.
slightlyirregularon
are
they contain,and
which
semivowels
AND
REDUPLICATION,
AUGMENT,
be
into
changed
i, 17.
vi.
Fomt-
WEAKEST
FORM*.
to sacrifice,
(dja,
iprnr yaydja.)
(for
^ tj.
to speak.
uvdcha,
uvdda9
to say.
^J^
tick.
dd.
dh.
to sow.
uvdpa,
wish.
fo,to
vas
vah
to
uvdsa,
TTW
uvdha, to carry.
ytfig
dwell.
uvdya,to
uh.)
(zu.)
weave.
to surround.
vivydcha,
f^nv
fzpar^vivyathe(Pan.vn.
vivyddha,to
68).
4,
(fvidh.)
vividh.
fafa^
f^T^ vivyath.
strike.
to swell^f.
$u$dva,
to cover.
vivydya,
old.
w, to grow
(Pan.vi. i, 33).
fat (Pan.
vi. i, 29).
;a, to call
f"pipye,togrow
ft^rtriv?.
to take.
-^j^jagrdha9
"
(Pan.vi.
vavrdscha,to cut
TO^
i,
7). ^^
ask.
paprdchchha9to
TRF"paprachch
^il^ babhrajj.
to fiy.
babhrdjja,
In
againstSamprasaranaby
beginningwith
Roots
change ^
to ^
va
J 312.
^i a +
u.
Ex.
The
is
t The
been
forms appear
weak
Guna
double
ending
in
2,
5.)
consonants, do
not
vavrite; ^^ vavridht.
a, and
short ^
ending in
singleconsonant,
ad,
to
""u"{arf.
eat,
neither Vriddhi
where
perfect
reduplicated
required.
weakest
added
but
(Pan.i.
tected
pro-
into 5TI d.
^F"
nor
reduplicated
perfectis
consonant.
va9
^^
in the
beginningwith
Roots
contract
form
vavrtich.
as
forms
of these
but
perfect,
reduplicated
have
the
the benedictive,
past participle,
passive,"c.
J ^T{vay
is
substitute for
^ve,in
(1Pan.
vi.
^ve
the
(Pan.n.
perfect
reduplicated
forms
^T
vavau,
IF Or
i, 38, 39.
U
^t
vavuh
4,
41).
(Pan.vi.
i,
f^ITO^svdya(Pan.
If that substitution
40).
vi.
i, 30).
148
AUGMENT,
" 313.
" 3T3"-
TERMINATIONS.
AND
REDUPLICATION,
Roots
J 314.
Other
The
Guna
and
ri
are
tf
one
4, 73.
vii.
perfectas WT^
reduplicated
of the
(Pan.vii.
prefixw^ara.
4,
dr.
71.)
to thrive, ^TRJ"^a/zn^"
^TPpfdn-rij. "^p^ridh,
treated in fact as if they were
"c.
-zw^ardh,
'W^arch,
Roots
beginningwith ^ i or
+
"$ u
into
Vriddhi,i{y
or
the base
roots
i + i and
forms
obtain,
to
^^r^',
" 315.
^j
beginningwith
roots
These
root
than
and
^
^
i and
^R
between
^ + ^
^i or ^r u take
reduplicative
syllable
radical
if the
but
inserted
are
contract
long),
(notprosodially
"su
the
the base.
(Pan.vi. 4, 78.)
^g: ish-dtuh,they two
^^A
^^(iy-esh-a
(Guna),I
have
gone.
have
gone.
"
^^
ukh
As to roots which
be
cannot
otherwise
or
are
see the
reduplicated
irregular,
of the Reduplicatedand Periphrastic
Perfect.
SpecialRules of Reduplication.
"3 1 6.
pointson
some
In the
1.
which
ReduplicatedPerfect,radical
representedin reduplication
by
are
2.
classes of
these two
medial)
Hu
REDUPLICATED
class.
But
there
bases differ;
viz.
reduplicated
ri, -^ri,whether
final
medial,
or
^r a.
class,final -^ri
representedin
are
applied
whether
and
(theydo
^ri
not
occur
as
reduplication
by \i.
PERFECT.
Hu
CLASS.
PRESENT,
"c.
V[ bhri,to
bear,
=
root
^ri,
to go,
three
babhdra.
^ bhri
TOCTC sasdra.
-qvrn:
sri,to go,
vf^Ttijahdra.
sri
^ hri
^rf"iy-arti;^pn, to
and
f^^nij,
f"^vij,
f^ vish
forms
verbs
fWiff bibhdrti.
ftmfS
"
sisarti.
f^fS jiharti.
fWa
fill,
of
the
piparti.
Hu
class
Guna
take
in tfr$red^plicated;
syUahle. (Pan. vii. 4, 75.)
The
verbs
two
TT ma,
"
han,
*""^
send
change their
initial consonant
Hu
class take
^z
in
jahghanydte.(Pan.
vii.
W*fNTiTjeghiydte.(Pan. vii.
3,
if
in the
Likewise
(Su),f*m\"*jigh$yq.
the intensive
separate,^rf^ vevekti;
76.)
Likewise
kill,*in\*ijaff1idna.
intensive "nT3W
ft[hi,to
4,
to
f%*tvij,
(H*flri
mimitej ^T hd, f*T%fft
jiMtt.
and
to measure,
reduplicative
syllable.(Pan. vii.
*TT ma,
nenikte;
the
55.)
in the
3,
56.)
desiderative
f"nrt^fTT
and
jighishati,
-$
ftfji,to
(Vl'IIH
jigdya.Likewise
conquer,
desiderative
in the
P"i""u"4
chichdya
optionally
gather, has
or
intensive
in the
149
TERMINATIONS.
fwfMn
jejtydte.(Pan. vn.
always ^hftTTTT
is
intensive,which
in the
fa c/tt,to
AND
REDUPLICATION,
AUGMENT,
3^1-
3,
jfyishati
; but
not
57.)
(Pan.vii. 3, 58.)
Terminations.
J 320.
the verbal
having explainedhow
After
the terminations
they receive
before
different ways
terminations
$ 331.
The
subjectto
table of terminations
givingthe
real
different classes of
in which
of
changes which
fanciful
or
that
accordingto
or
they
beginner should
to
after bases
^i
to
the termination
such
forms
as
at first any
in
^T a
in the
the
attached
of
2,
First Division
is
questionsas
to how
they came
undergone in
in that
verbal
dthe
^rr$dthe
take
Chur
Present.
^Tjiyam^"f^ani
^i
Imperfect.
^*
$se
*m
Optative.
ithe
as
to memory
Imperative.
^ft'ya
^e
J^ttlithdh
^(it
ijta*
^te
If ta
^Rava
"^iva
^T^T ava
W^avahe
W"4
ff tarn
^lfitam
"fttarn
ithe
^TT
3. 1ft tah
Ifftarn
itdm
^iff
WT tdm
^n
ite
itdm
^iff
i.^Rlamah
^Rama
^Rima
^"T
^HR^amahe^SKf^amahi^f^imahi
z.lftha
If ta
^if"Va
If ta
In the second
sense
changed
Classes.
1(t
the
is
DIVISION.
^lih
the
they are.
lh
fart
than
ATMANEPADA.
Imperf. Optative.Imperat.
^m
what
-*
3.
The
the termination
as
simplerto
the
form
base.
paradigms rather
to be
PARASMAIPADA.
2.f*si
each
rians,
gramma-
"ftvvi
bodhethe, fgmuj dvishdthe, ftwivjmimdthe, without asking
i.^"faamt
to
of
explainingthe
give them
the ^TT d of
81),it
Instead
FIRST
Present.
have
taking^rre
learningthat
(Pan.vn.
the
system of native
actual
the
Instead
2nd
the whole
on
the terminations.
useful to
more
memory
be
of the
(SecondDivision,A.),or nothing
and
supposed to
they are
table
moods.
and
comparativephilologists,
mechanicallybe
commit
tenses, though
accordingto
verbs, it will
may
and
tenses
in ten
tenses,
special
give a
variations,
accordingas
certain
or
Division),
(First
"Jnu, ^ut"^ni
(SecondDivision,B.) between themselves
take ^?
of the four
modified
specialor
terminations
same
so-called
for these
modified
are
we
Imperative,
Present, Imperfect,Optative,and
the
roots
and
is benedictive.
ama
third persons
thdh
^W
ithdm
U"
dhve
*4 dhvam
nfe
nT nta
TR1(tdtmay
be used
Ifftarn,
ita
avahi
fi$
^f^
^R^
irahi
arahai
^ttlRiydthdmJpRithdm
iydtdm
^Minf
^131idhvam
iran
as
sva
termination
^TTTitdm
WH$_ amahai
l4 dhvam
nffntdm
after all
verbs, if
150
AUGMENT,
EEDUPLICATION,
SECOND
TERMINATIONS.
AND
DIVISION.
Classes.
Rudh
and
PARASMAIPADA.
Present.
ATMANEPADA.
Imperfect. Optative.
Imperative.
I.
Uf dhvam
^TrTf
atdm
enclosed
terminations
The
terminations
Note
which
f^ hi
is added
the
are
squares
requirestrengtheningof
When
"
in
weak, i. e.
unaccented
base.
the
immediatelyto
the
final consonant
Kri verbs
155.
Pan.
In the 2nd
pers.
(See No.
no
ending in
form
consonants
in.
i,
pers.
sing.imp. in
4,
101.
instead
WT
ana.
83.)
sing.imp. Parasm.
termination,
except when
is
verbs
of the Su
precededby
and
Tan
classes take
(See
conjunctconsonant.
177.)
No.
Note
Note
^rvq^f
In the
"
class and
"
In
3rd
pers.
2nd
the
of
after
vowel, requireGuna.
take
is used
"gt uh
7:
after verbs
optionally
ending
in *"\ a, and
to hate.
(Pan.111.4, 109"112.)
f"^dvish,
$ 322. By
of these
means
terminations
understood
all
how
regularverbs
the
verbal
in Sanskrit
bases
student
Imperative in
Present, Imperfect,Optative,and
of
Atmanepade
the
are
and
is able
the
any
prepared in
ten
to
form
the
Parasmaipada and
one
who
has
different
clearly
ways
for
the
no
must
be learnt from
the
Dhatupatha.
$322'
151
'i
"
i
I
r
o
""
152
""
*
(-H
-8
.0;
ji
ve
ifkttll
rim
"
154
t
S'xs
!"s)h"
f 1 SI
-g
"
I
1
"
ar
^
l^"^
te
3-
r
fa
""
-i
"*"
v!
fl
"
-"S
\"s"
.8^
^
HilllMJ
4
s-
""o
PS
^1
mil
*|^
PL,
"
"""
-t^e
"r"
155
immmsi
fit! I
'5
'%
"
iiti!.
"tj
"
J5
"Jl
-41
i
i
o
09
"
t-
""
o"
":
"%
ft*
15 fl ""lH*l
(*
lj
I
1
1 el "!
ri
'^
sri
Pi
156
Ig
"
""
'.g
vs
tvr
"
."
g
^
"7
I4%
QJ
$
o
7!
'?|
P1
^e
$3*2.
157
*"."
r-
v?
2
a,
W
"g "Kr'TS
'
~"
""
?
r
""
5?
^^52 I
o
ir^S
"S
V-e
xe
^2
"
J5 X2
IfHi!
~
"^-
Bl
B"
1^1 P^
'S3
"l
1
.1
6-
J?S
lir^
^
KS
fe)^
fc
=8
158
"
4
"5
't
'is
"Q
1045
-1
-J
GENERAL
OR
UNMODIFIED
TENSES.
CHAPTER
GENERAL
$323. In
the
OR
which
tenses
PeriphrasticFuture,
the
All verbs
vanishes.
modified
"c.,
tenses
removed
are
remain,
the
Second
Reduplicated Perfect,
distinction
Benedictive,the
alike,to
from
the
to which
roots
their
preserve
had
in the
been
in
the
in
verbs
the
Imperative. Only
^R
phrastic
Peri-
classes
ten
they belong
inserted
they
the
Conditional,
the
of the
class
whatever
Imperfect,the Optative,and
class
Chur
of the
TENSES.
features,the
distinguishing
the
again
Present, the
the
and
UNMODIFIED
treated
are
X.
Aorist
Benedictive.
and
ReduplicatedPerfect.
J 324.
The
root
have
reduplication
$ 325.
The
*T
its
been
given
or
d:
'S^und,to
which
roots
such
as
Verbs
3.
of
of
($302"319.)
above.
be
can
begin
with
of all
formed
prosodiallylong
vowel
any
verbs, except
to grow
but
to light
;
jp^indh,
wet.
roots,
Polysyllabic
2.
rules
reduplicated. The
is
primitivestate
ReduplicatedPerfect
Monosyllabic
1.
in
the
such
Chur
'l*w"(chakds, to
as
class
derivative
and
be
bright.
verbs,
such
as
Causatives,
Intensives,Denominatives.
Desideratives,
J 326.
Verbs
which
Perfect by
Periphrastic
So
do
(Pan.in.
likewise
i,
form
cannot
of
means
^TI day, to
the
Perfect
pity,"c., ^n^
to
ay,
The
hu
in.
i,
38); and,
(fswrnbibhaydm),-%thri
(^^jihraydm)^ ^
Pan.
juhavdm.
in.
("SJ^T
i, 39).
verb
drnundva
^5
forms
as
drnu,
to
cover,
to
after
sit down
cation,
takingredupli-
bhri
allows only
although polysyllabic,
of
its Perfect.
richh, to fail,
although its base
only VMM^
dnarchchha.
Terminations
in the
Perfect
It is treated, in fact,as
of
the
ends
in two
consonants,
if ^^archchh. ($31
3.)
ReduplicatedPerfect.
SINGULAR.
2.
as,
I,
tftbhi
^T^
go,
to wake, fapvftjdgardm,
Pan.
*TFJ.M0T""
and
the
composition. (J340.)
^re ush, to
(Sar.);optionally
form
by reduplication,
ishe
160
GENERAL
OR
TENSES.
UNMODIFIED
DUAL.
iva
ivahe
1.
2.
^rgt athufy
3.
^BTgja"w#
i.
^IT ima
PLURAL.
imahe
or
These
terminations
native
or
here
are
given,without
comparativegrammarians, in
added
mechanically
will be
falls
followingrules
Vowels
1.
by
falls
in the three
in
form
The
the
to
which
rules
they
therefore
be
may
the omission
on
in
the
Parasmaipada
singularParasmaipada.
persons
of
systems
of
given below.
terminations
the
on
on
that
roots.
reduplicated
to the
regard
any
is
In
and
these
strengthenedaccordingto
the
capableof Guna,
Guna
take
if followed
throughout the singular,
consonant.
one
f^T^ bibhed-a.
bibhed-itha,
fa^bhid9 f^T^ bibhed-a,fsftf^q
bubddh-at ^ftftTO
bubodh-itha,^r"rtv bubddh-a.
"j^fai
**F^budh,
medial
a
*fatjiv,
long
But
vowel
being liable
not
P"f"flcf
forms
Guna,
to
P*|"fl^
jijw-a, PH jflfavjjy
iv-itha,
jijiv-a.
Final
2.
vowels
Vriddhi
Vriddhi
take
only in
Guna
or
nindy-a or
in
the
second,
in the
Guna
first,
singular.
or
PfHP*4"inindy-itha,
ninay-a.
3.
if followed
^r a
Guna
takes Vriddhi
singleconsonant,
only in
Note
root
If the second
"
if with
In
termination.
singularParasmaipada
person
^ZJitha, the
this
accent
the
case
fall
may
radical
vowel
on
any
is formed
" 328. As
there is
in
may,
first,
singular.
before
circumstances,
Atmanepada.Here
Roots
like impat,
singleconsonant,
initial consonant
with
tendency
in which
which
without
with
any
in their
verbs,
be
to
base
is
without
in the three
weaken
of the
the
on
the
Guna,
persons
base, under
Perfect,Parasmai
must
be observed
is
preceded and
falls on
accent
3.)
terminations
followingrules
i.e. roots
and
the other
the
aspiratesand
is
there
by ^ftha,the
certain
tendency to strengthenthe
singularParasmaipada,so
certain
i.
in the
Guna
but generallyit
syllable,
PiT^T
but P"P"=I
f^3*1viveja,
f%*(vij,
(Pan. 1.2,2;
vivijitha.
and
or
or Wttjaghdn-a,^qfaRjaghdn-itha,
v{*FRJaghdn-a.
hanS3"K*{jaghdn-a
the
by
followed
by
syllable
reduplicated
repeat the
change (thisexcludes
gutturals;roots
roots
beginning with
beginning
'Zv,
and
162
THE
Roots
ending in
Most
u, ^
u,
roots
we
niny-ivd,
have
two
ri**K^ttastar-dthuh,you
you
p chakar-dthufy,
spread. 5
CHAPTER
$331.Before
Perfect
to
by
of
means
unmodified
the other
to be
has
with
difficult
chaptersof Sanskrit
rules
paragraphsto simplifythese
The
of the
pointof
view
^ i between
it would
representthe ^
no
of
an
as
an
doubt
be
omission.
But
majorityof verbs, it
i. e.
exceptions,
state the
denning the
termination
only,that
In
yet
Sf
become
the
in which
cases
to
the
the
or
fixed,and
(ashas
been
an
historical
terminations,and
to
S{* has
in
$ 326)
give the
prevailed
may
to
employed, instead
not
be inserted.
In the
omitted; e.
occasionally
further
$RT"i sasrdtuh,"c.
speak of
to
consonants,
keeps the
3rd pers. plur.Perf. Atm.,^tire,
of the
is
following
the terminations
from
and
the ^ Hs
in which
it must
most
easier,for practical
purposes,
will be
cases
the intermediate
as
all circumstances.
being shortened
^ i than
integral
part of
in the
vast
correct
more
intermediate
requireits
not
objectof
which
possible.
as
termination
and
base
rules which
has
of the
beginningwith
generaltenses, originally
or
requirethe addition
One
one
in
and
base
rules
and
The
^ i form
it is the
much
as
the verbal
consonants.
of this
and
Reduplicated
root, it is necessary
the
between
inserted
grammar,
the
ReduplicatedPerfect
in the
insertion
require,allow, or prohibitthe
of
paradigms of
the
beginning with
originally
terminations,
the
to
form
^i, which
tenses
you
^fJTJ! yuyuv-dthufy,
have praised,
two
eg#/"",
^ i.
joiningthe terminations
intermediate
consider the
^ stri,
XL
proceed to
can
we
done.
have
two
yw,
INTERMEDIATE
THE
u).
4,
scattered.
have
two
(Pan.vn.
"^.ar
fa "ri,fyfeiftra
we
6i"riy-ivd,
led.
have
two
to
chakr-dthuh, you
have
two
the vowel
have
two
*f kri, ^m^l
gone.
" 331-
^ i.
INTERMEDIATE
shortening may
(Pan.vn.
4,
12.)
take
g.
gpr
duduh-re.
-$ 332.
Let it be remembered
i.
When
is it necessary
3.
When
is it
3. When
For
knowledge would
optionalor
before
both
changed, and
at different
minute, would
the
as
starting-pointthe
with
beginning originally
representas
beginningof
The
vu.
^t
on
2,
not
(Note
The
language
that
the
say, that
state the
enormous
35) that
2,
every
the
takes
we
literary
which we
^ "",
i.
exceptions,e. the cases
(except ^ y)
as
the
on
rules,however
no
(Pan.vu.
axiom
proceed to
has
fancies.
and
general
number
India
of
admit
that
long history,
have
been
collected by
carefully
extensive
laid down
indeed
is to
the
insertion is either
the
the
it.
the termination.
verbs, which
following
10),are
the
only knows
be inserted,or,
account
no
omit
anything but
obligedto
are
consonant
will
termination
the
its
safe if he
in which
in
much
so
this
in which
those
equallyright to
differ;that
periodsof
suffice to
the
be
may
grammarians
differed
writingSanskrit
except
after Panini
of ^ i authorities
of India
for
grammarians have
and
native
even
optionalinsertion
in which
Even
cases
verbs
the
Native
necessary.
country, and
all
safelybe inserted,
although,according
^ i may
know
to
\ i?
^ i.
in
be considered
the ^ i ?
a
particularly
beginner,is
him
rules,but
language
to omit
omitted,nor
^ i is necessarily
reading enable
of
the
and
therefore,
in which
cases
the
grammarians,it
of native
student
omit
to
pointsto
\i?
to insert the
for
sufficient,
is necessary,
views
or
163
t.
three
are
readingSanskrit,all that
of
be
the
optionalto insert
it is necessary
omission
to omit
is it necessary
the purposes
is,When
to
INTERMEDIATE
THE
or
"
grammarians(Pan.
affixes beginningoriginally
with
in
perfectand its participle
reduplicated
native
^^rcrsare
(except*(y).
consonant
" 334.)
see
1.
All
2.
All monosyllabic
roots endingin
roots endingin
monosyllabic
(23,41). (Note
2,
"
^ t, except ft*sri,to
laugh,must take ^
ftRsm*,to
$ftsi,to
4. All
"
rest
^f,except ^
Pan.
in the Desiderative.
df,to fly(22,72
vu.
(24,24);
to
"jjnw,
Aorist
These
2,
36). (Note
"
the
snu, to flow
and
26,26. anuddtta),
vu.
2,
(24,23;
not
31,9); ^rw,
to sound
TSJfoAt/,
(24,29),takes ^"
Parasmaipada. Pan.
refer to
figures
mix
T9JJkshnu, to sharpen(24,28).
(Pan. vu.
(24,22).
to
roots ending in *5u, except *fyu,
monosyllabic
to sound
74-)
roots ending in
monosyllabic
3. All
^f[d.
to pour,
take
in
(24,27);
Parasmaipada
"
in the First
72.)
inWestergaard'sRadices LinguaeSanscrit*,1841.
Dhatupaflia
Y
164
5. All
vn.
2,
take
Desider. (Pan.vn.
In the Benedictive
8. Of roots
^5
ending in
loose
(Pan.
take
to go, take
(28,136);
(Pan. vn.
ri and
i in the
beginning
43).
2,
ai, ^fto.
roots
above, all monosyllabic
ri,must
take
not
ending in
i.
be able
(23, 27);
^f^pach,to cook
ch,
and
ending in cjfJc,TfT^fak, to
much, to
may
mentioned
exceptions,as
take
may
in TJ e,
ending
monosyllabic
few
2,
Atmanepadaverbs ending in
First Aorist
and
roots
with
Thereforej
(Pan. vn.
conjunctconsonant
ri take
2,
i in the Desider.
with
^J
70).
Cond.
332-
choose (31,38).
Important exception:
6. All
i.
INTERMEDIATE
THE
to leave
to sprinkle
(28,140); ft^n'cA,
fa^sich,
(29,4);
'fa^wcA,separate(29,5).
to
9. Of roots
to
ending in "^chh, Tf^prachh,
(Pan. vn. 2, 75).
10.
Of roots
(23,33);
(29,7);
to let off
*n^sn)',
Desider.)j
or
29,
Of roots
to eat
endingin
find
to be
f"^khid,
28, 132);
to know
endingin V(dh,
*3p(budh,
aww, to love (26,65),to keep
^5T5J
2,
52);
to
^JVswdA,
ending in
70); likewise
14. Of roots
Part.
clean
2,
"c. (26,61
distressed,
(28,137);
droop (28,133) ; ^
24,
56);
and
Ger.
sad,to perish
to cut
fo^bhid,
(29,2);
swear
ASlfVlr4l
kshudhitvd (Pan.
to succeed
ftr^sz'dA,
(26,83); ^TTVsadA,
to anoint
to
(31,37).
(24,2),except the Fut. and Cond.
to think
(23,31
(Pan. vn.
2,
(26,67).
are
28, 142
(26,80); ^1 kshudh, to be
be angry
to go
^^drip,which
ad,
to fight
(26,64); ^ rudh,
Ijftyudh,
to grow
(26,71; 27, 16);
(29,i); TT^rddh,
'Q^badhj*"[man,
f"{lip,
to strike (28,
(26,79); "g^tac?,
to
to reach (27,14); f^Jcship,
sleep(24,60) ; ''Srr^ap,
fflj/npand
vii.
(26,82);
r^w,JR^han,to kill
(26,63);
off
"WfVrTkshudhita
^6awc/A,
\p,
not
13;
"^fcrwdA,to
to bind
its substitute
endingin
svap, to
(28, 4, except
T5H*
Of roots
^H("ya^, to
sad, to
(28,138? 29,
with
bake
(29,16).
^^
to sweat
to be (26,62); "fe^sm'd,
"fa^w'eJ,
to
(28, 134); f^vid,
12.
(26,60) ;
to go
f^
(23,8);
(24,i)j ^pad,
29, 12);
separate
(26,68),to join
to bend
to break (28,123);V[*{bhuj,
to dip (28, 122); *^*{ruj,
Tr^majf/,
to break
(28,124),to protect(29, 17); lfc(bhafij,
1 1.
f^w/, to
(25,n);
23); [Kas'.
^mri;]; *[*{yuj,
(26,69; 28, 121); ^^bhrajj,to
not
(23,30;
colour
in the Desider.
to meditate
(25,12;
28,9,
to
^i
take
must
to
(23,7); fV^tyaj,
embrace
ending in *(J,
W^svanj,to
(28,120). It
ask
(28,139); ""^chhup,
generallyincluded, may
throw
to touch
take
sow
(23, 34);
(28,5) ;
(28,125). (Note
",
"
according to Pan.
45.)
15. Of roots ending in "T bh, t"(rabh,to desire (23,5); ""*Xlabh,to take
n).
coire(23,
(23,6) ;
T*T yabh,
_$ 333-
go
Also
W^kram,
to nourish
please(26,75) ;
(23,12);
2,
73). If^cm,
to
^J^rfftl,
(26,73
J^dusA,to
distinguish
(29,14);
$J(daih",
(23,19);
see
; not
28, 6);
touch
(28,128);
to shine
ffr^tvish,
pervade(25,13),to
17,
(28,3);
to
(28,131).
(23,21
to
2,
2, 36).
draw
to
50)j
(26,77); fjf^uA,
to embrace
fe^tftsA,
spoil(26,76);
to pound
fq^pish,
(23,32) ;
(29,15).
endingin ^s, ^^t?as,to dwell (23,36),except Part. ^Cnn; ushitah and Ger.
TfoFTTushitvd (Pan. vn. 2, 52) ; T"^ghas,
to eat (17,65, as substitute for W^cwJ).
19. Of
20.
incline
(Pan. vn.
Put.,Cond., and
(20,26) ;
ft^vtsA,
hate (24,3) ;
47)J ^push,
to rub
iJSJmrtf,
(28,130);
fg^dvish,
to
^*
in Aor.
Par.
to
endingin "^sA,
ff^krish,
to
165
t.
(26, 70;
fo"S^Ji/,
hurt
to
to
(28, 126);Fpjaprtf,
(28,126); ft^rtf,
to enter
Of roots
^
of
to be small
18.
^"
to
(23,20) j
to hurt
before
to shout
1{4,"J^Jtri^,
three take
these
it takes
(23,13),but
58).
But
(23,15).
cease
*^ro,
T^ram, to play (20,23) ; "T^nam,to
in
ending
16. Of roots
to
INTERMEDIATE
THE
roots
Of roots
to
ending in ^ A, ^? ruA, to
sprinkle(23,23) ;
f"^dih,to
" 333- Other
^
(23,35); J^
vah, to carry
smear
roots
dah, to burn
(20,29) ;
grow
must
take
not
duh, to
not
17,
87);
(24,4;
milk
fo^miA,
(23,22) ;
only of
in certain
the
general
tenses.
A.
In the future
(formed by
and
desiderative,
take
", if used
the
Desid.
B. In
the
in
participle
in the
to shape, Fut.
gr^^/ip,
ITT
"h rWI
Fut.
kdlptd,
(V|^i%rn
Part.
cJiiklipsati;
and
future
conditional
2,
2, 15;
2,
(formed by
44),the verb
*ya),the
must
Jf^klip
not
60.)
oF^rfif kalpsyati,
Cond.
t^akalpsyat;
"" rn"
giTKkliptah.
(formed by
in IT ta,the following
four
participle
(Pan. vii.
(Pan. vu.
cT ta
conditional
**T
verbs must
sya),the
not
take
*, if
the
pada.
used in the Parasmai-
59.)
Desid. rq^rofn
vivritsati;
Fut. "TO^favartsyati,
Cond. ^GRF!(avartsyatj
to exist,
^!(vrit,
Part. ^: vrittah. (Pan. vn.
2, 15; 56.)
Desid. fq^wfn
vivritsati;
g
rowt"ut.'5j"fKvartsyati,
^(vridh,to
Cond.^31Q3(avartsyatj
Part. ^: vriddhah.
Desid.
Cond. ^^4i^^asyantsyat
;
^^syand,to
drop,Fut. ^Wft syantsyati,
Part.
sisyantsati;
t"iq;
Fut.
Mritsati; Part.
syannah.
fritartsyati,
Cond.
314*)
^!M, ^n,
(Pan. vn.
to
^L"Att,
2,
Desid.
sriddhah.
^fSf:
in the
7w,
^^i"3i^
asartsyat;
^rl,
and
hi
participle
?T^^"A,to
take, and
W /a,
roots ending in
monosyllabic
^uA, to hide,do
not
take
i.
12.)
bubhushati;
be, "yjjrfiff
Part.
^IH
MtftaA.
f=H^H|fAjighrikshati;
rule,cf.Pan.
Part. *prfa:$rn"AftaA
(longf by special
ITfi/rraA,
Pan. vn.
Part. *J":gudhah (cf.
2, 44).
5f guh, 'SfflQfftjughukshati;
See
in
and
liable
to exceptions.
are
" 337. Pan. vn.
(Verbs ending
^rt
*J0ri
vn.
2,
2, 37).
38-41.)
formations.
Participial
D.
i.
Roots
which
it in the
may
be without
in If ta.
participle
the ^
"
in any
one
of the
generaltenses,
must
be without
166
THE
in K
(Remark that the participle
disposedto
INTERMEDIATE
the admission
ta is most
7T ta,
(Pan. vn.
""Zw,to
to
to
form
(Pan.vn.
form
protect,may
its
which
2,
(Pan.vn.
TOTt
participle
native
by
in the
future
verbal
base.
n.)
2,
(Except^pu, "
W^M
as
gdh-i-
If ta
marked
as
(Pan.vn.
with
or
"
\t do
or
take
not
16.)
2, 14,
wJ^ic^
"T na
take
not
(Pan.vii.
2,
lagnah.
and
for specialreasons
in
specialsenses
i.
See " 332,
n.)
2,
shake; ^"art
Jcshubdhah, if it
to
technical ^TT
f^Ilft
fritvd. (Pan.vii.
fritah,T'JdqT
*frfWT#qp-i-fa
or
f"i(*"*=!
svinnah.
t;i nishvidd);Ptsrq*
do
go ;
2,
in
of Participles
"^prkshubh,
the participle
guptak only.
K ta.
(marked
*"to be ashamed
"fa"w,
44) the
grammarians are
in
participle
to sweat
'c?,
f^Tsri,to
3["before
weaken
to
its participle
TT2't gddhah only.
hence
List
tend
^Wt vri-tah,'^nm^vri-tavdn,
^r^Tvri-tvd.
enter,may
hence
5ft
do not take
which
u.)
2,
"ft, to cover,
Roots
terminations
cut, cg"T:
Zw-wa#,"""HI"llu-navdn, eSFTT Zw-taa.
2.
other
perfectis most
reduplicated
5[".)
of
join,JIT:yu-tah,^jf^l^yu-tavdn,
fFTTyu-tvd.(Pan.vn.
yu, to
before
nor
the
opposed,as
333-
2.
18.)
(Pan. vn.2,
churning-stick.
the
means
2.
T3"^ svan,
to
; ScJTlfJ
to be near;
fTOT virebh,to
sound
vdh, to labour
,
to
^T^ard, with
2,
with
^I^arc?,
vddhah, if it means
try;
grow
oFlft
if it means
Jcashtah,
the prepos.
note.
effort.
an
bold.
(Pan. vii.
2,
19.)
arrogant.
strong. (Pan.vii.
HfY"|"sJ
parivridhah,if it
indistinct.
excessive.
means
without
tVsfUjcU
visastah,if it means
difficultor
2,
20.)
lord. (Pan.vii.
means
2,
impervious. (Pan.vii;
21.)
2,
proclaimed.(Pan.vii.
22.)
2,
23.)
*i*i"5t
samarnnah, plagued.(Pag.
24.)
^rfa aZ"My WIWi
the prepos.
(ascausative),WJ
mid, to
f*fc"
be
by technical
vrittah,if it
means
abhyarnnah,if it means
^TT
a.
or
fa^J minnah
near.
(Pan.vii.
2,
25.)
read.
meditah
as
"iP^nJ
participle
marked
7g"ldridhah,if it
to manifest
vii.
; ^PSTt
parwrih, to
to
darkness.
attached.
Tfife:
phdntah, if it means
praise;
to grow
drill.,
to be confident
,
dhvdntah,if it means
lagnah,if it means
W?T*
to prepare
the mind.
speak indistinctly
mUshtah, if it means
; ffn?J
mlechchh,to
it
^flTtsvdntah,if it means
to sound
13^ dhvan,
^,
sound
(Pan.vii.
W
2,
a,
may,
17).
The
appliesto
its
all verbs
-$
Intermediate
"
precedingrules, prohibitingin
The
334.
generaltenses, do
which
omit
must
not
fact,has the
in
Perfect.
Reduplicated
i in the
i in all other
of the
use
prohibitedfrom
affect the
takingit.
number
of roots
reduplicated
perfect.Most
general tenses, do
i become
These
in the
omit
not
2,
2.
^ sri,to
3.
^ bhri,to bear,f$3
4.
^vri
J5^
flow, tjt^
srw, to
J^T
8.
IQ tne
ram-rat,
Atm.
vavri-vahe,
^p^
SMsrw-ra.
second
susro-thn.
3JH"ftVJ
perfectPar. the \
singular of the reduplicated
person
i before
(The
form
"*"H
is considered the
vavar-tha,however, being
rightform.
Dhatupatha.)
the
In roots
2, 61.
vn.
*TT
yd, to
go ; Fut.
3. In roots
ending in
roots
are
are
given.
and
having
in the future
^?
an
Pan.
(iTT
td),
vn.
See
are
given.
Tf^pach,to
he
"pH(V
krishati,
(Bharadvajarequiresthe
^
roots
Pan,
(ifT
td),
in the future
Mini
consonants
without ^i
necessarily
without 5["
necessarily
are
these
i in the
cook
drags;
Fut.
^Kfpaktd;
Fut.
ctff
T karshtd; 'qcuPHN
of
omission
future
periphrastic
sf'H'q
pechitha,besides
allows
chakri-va; but
^pf
samchaskaritha.
tush^o-tha.
before.
eightroots, enumerated
restricted to the Veda, ^^^vavaritha
without
pers. dual
dudro-tha.
the
But
absolutely
be left out,
necessarily
*T /Aa must
2.
only are
susro-tha.
tjtaTiv
In
choose, Par. ^^
g*W
dudru-va.
7.
1.
perfect. So general,
eightroots
vavri-she.
335-
most
just enumerated
babhri-va.
tushtu-va.
?*Jstu, to praise,IJJ^T
"
of the verbs
or
sasri-va.
tlljq
go,
and ^rnVi*),
to
ty^vrirl
^"4
5.
for all
13),
1.
the ^
it in the
that
perfect,
(Pan. vn.
are
167
J i.
INTERMEDIATE
THE
335*
i after roots
(Pan. vn.
2,
papaktha;
MH"T^
HMTH
with
papak-tha.
chakarsh-i-tha.
only,which
ri
63),except
root
are
necessarily
ri itself. Hence
besides
iyajitha,
^MPiiN
he
^I" iyashtha:
^ftnryayitha,f'UfilVIchichayitha,
"c.)
also
All other
4.
and
so
all verbs
with which
with
i is either
optional or
but ^
a,
require^*,
in the
indispensable
future
(ltt
to).
t?nn,
t?arane,
Su.
^t?r"n,(34,8) SHN"jJ
dvarane, Chur.
rrt",
sambhaktau, Kri.
(31,38) WW
t The
(27,8) ^TTET
form
commentator
may
be
derived from
to ^Trrin and
another
168
THE
^ i.
INTERMEDIATE
Exceptions:
In
1.
and ^S^drif,
the
Iffisrij
^(srij,TO?
The
2.
omission is optional.
UtjfaTVI
sasrijitha.
sasrashtha, or
verbs
^Tad, ^nf^Tdd-i-tha,(exceptionto
^ri,
""! i
No.
in which
cases
No. 2.)
the intermediate
the Terminations
of the
3.)
^T vye,
Root
fvq dr-i-tha,
to
(exception
take
so-called
No.
2.)
be omitted
i must
General
between
the
Unmodified
Tenses, originally
beginningwith
"
tive ; ^T sya
for the
Future
f"3
I. For
Omit
stands
and
Conditional
all General
Before Ttta,
In
In
fti^sich,
fc5^lin
y^klip,if
332.
WT td:
Parasmaipada. "
333, A.
by
fwfri and
verb
are
others enumerated
in
the
In eightverbs,mentioned
Before "Htha, 2nd
pers.
J^ guh. "
333, C,
marked
a
with ^TTa,
\t,
*.
generallist," 333,
~"u
or
D.
Perfect,
Reduplicated
"
"
334.
sing.:
ending
1 ifwithout ^ "
in vowels
endingin
332
with
consonants
Optional insertion
" 337' F"r practicalpurposes,
would
be wrong
to
the
use
different grammarians,
or
as
was
intermediate
the usage
stated
or
may
student may
The
be
^Ta
as
radical vowel
in the
future.
/periphrastic
of ^ i.
before,it
is sufficient to
know
grah, and
^ i,
Before all terminations,except ^C ire
must
rt,
^
^, ^
native grammarians
II. For
2.
"3!u,
ta:
b. The
333, B.
."
verbs ending in T,
monosyllabic
5. Before Tf
1.
if Parasmaipada. "
^?(vrit,
^fivridh,
l"^syand,
yfts^idh,
In
a.
rTT td,
'Q^san,^sya,
Omit
Future
Periphrastic
"
4.
td for the
; HT
\ *',
In the verbs enumerated
2.
Participle;
ff^san stands for the Desidera-
1.
at much
collect the
painsto
cases
when
the
i.
in which
here follow,which
i is optional.
"
^i
the early
safely
pass by.
it
views of
337, 1. 2.
170
THE
having
technical
T^T tvd
(Pan. vn.
"31u.
Slftfri
I samitvd
3I*/am (flQgamu),
6. Before the gerundialtermination
f^P^RK
or
^pu.
(Pan. vn.
sdntah
quiet,^itcH
fill,
^jSt
purnah
^Ttpur,to
c?"5,to
touch,
to
chhad, to
to
^"
in
D.
333,
damitah.
^f*Trf:
or
note) :
2,
(Pan.
vii.
2,
27.)
puritafi.
"%ftjK
or
dastah
or
or
cover,
aw^aA
hasten,
t jnapitdh.
^rPTff
or
or
2,
28.)
^i(*irtt
amitah.
or
turnah
IT^J
rqf^nJtvaritah.
or
take
or
to go, WrH
am,
It must
^rf'Trf
J samitah.
or
i, to
klishtah.
fjf":
"ffwa.;
or
inform, ^Ijnaptah
to
or
t ddsitah.
^iftnf
*Mlf$M:spdsitah.
^"re: spashtah
chhannah
chhdditah.
"(i(^fT!
"SfflfJ
perish,^cTJ
If ta
cH ddntah
$T*T/am, to
50.)
%*[dam,to tame, ^f
In the verbs
in IT ta
participle
74).
2,
terminations
7. Before the participial
"^
the
51.)
2,
desiderative(Pan. vii.
the
^T^f\ sdntvd.
^^Alpavitahor "JTTt
putah.
T$t31putvd,
pavitvd or
n\*tt*\
2,
56.)
2,
ffrfspf:
klisitah
f^ifT
klishtvd,
Misitvd
In the verb
or
(Pan. vn.
fjfR^klis.
In the verb
$ 338-
^ i.
INTERMEDIATE
sahghushtahor
2.)
"9"^^s"an,to sound,
vti
taintdsvdntah
or
vfi^rrtn;dsvanitah.
(See "
333,
D. 2.)
^mA,
to
(Pin.vii.
^?J
rejoice,
2,
or
29.)
*.
honour, "smF*frrt
apachitahor ^TH^irMnt apachdyitah
apa-chi,to
8. Before the
hrishtah
In the verbs
TH
to go,
#am,
^fH1
H "ll^jagmivdn
vividivdn
PqP3i\crir|[
V, to enter,WV%^T"^ vimswdn
dadrisivdn
ris,to see, ^"T^TTP^
to know,
ia7.,
or
Necessary
" 338- ^
nor
"
allowed
only optionally
be mentioned
i.
must
Before
(Pan. vii.
2,
"f*l"4
[^jaganvdnf.
i^T^jaghanvdn.
M
or
vividvdn.
f"cfc|g^
or
f%Pq*a l*^vivisvdn.
^STSTT*^dadrisvdn.
insertion
in
or
of ^
i.
neither
prohibited,
may
of reduplicated
perfect:
^^pas, participle
In the
verbs
In the verbs
^TST
as, to
In the verb
Other
ending
verbs
in ^TT d
reduced
to
(Pan. vii.
2,
67).
singlesyllablein the
*TT pd,
perfect(Pan.vii.
reduplicated
to
fR^ghas,
eat, "i
P"j
"( \*{jaksMvdn.
rejectit.
Pan.
vii.
2, 30.
f Pan.
vii.
2, 68.
2,
67).
-$
2.
THE
34*.
T*T*yaof the future
Before
and
conditional
'
Parasmaipada (Pan.vii.
the
in
the verbs
to
fFJstu,
(Pan.vii.
2,
In
70).
JTl^am, if used
in
58).
a,
(fa^sick)
:
the
Parasmaipada (Pan.vii.
72). Thus
2,
Aorist
praise,First
171
han
of the firstaorist
3. Before the terminations
In
^ i.
INTERMEDIATE
but
from
in the
the terminations
Before
TpT^am,
of the desiderative
if used in the
in
(Pan.vii.
termination
participial
^^
2,
74.)
(Pan.vn.
K ta.
2,
afich,to worship;
52-54.)
"y^/u"A,
only:
old ;
^[jrt,
W^arf,
pers.
eat;
to
2,
55.)
sing,reduplicatedperfect:
to go;
thus
3[ i
vye, to
Wlty"!
dditha,against" 335,
cover.
3;
PqcMPM^ vivyayitha.
335, 3, note;
vowel
The
^n,
""n(V'H
dritha,"
J 339.
75); and
to grow
In
a/.
^HT
2,
58).
2,
to dwell; Ijftkshudh,
to hunger;
'3R(vas)
to confound
In
^*^otij,and
n,
fR^prachh (Pan.vii.
Parasmaipada (Pan.vn.
ftiRsmi, ^pu, ^
In the verbs
In the verbs
(*P^"an):
and
^f krf, *lffrt,
^ dji,^dh^-i,
In the verbs
inserted
is
liable
never
to
Guna
or
Vriddhi.
Insertion
J 340. Long ^ i
be
may
long \ i.
the
of
substituted
for the
subjoinedto
short when
the
ending in ^" ri,also to ^ vri,except in the reduplicated
perfect,
aorist Parasmaipada,and the benedictive. (Pan.vii. 2, 38-40.)
verb
nrfaT taritd
Per. Fut.
teritha
TtftriT
"c.; but
taritd,
or
I. Aor. Par.
3rd
^ vri;
Aor. Par.
" 341.
or
c(0in varita
Per. Fut.
or
avdrishuh
^SHifoj:
pers.
sing.
pers.
tarishishta
3rd pers. sing,'rffimlif
Perf. 2nd
*.
Tfcn
varitd; but
'cifWtevarishishta.
Bened.
and
benedictive Atm.
not have
may
however,
far
as
"fftri; Des.
as
PvHl9 tarishishta,
tirsMshta.
vjij
Des.
fqqfVMcivivarishate; feiqOHfivivarishate; ^^
avarishta, ^Tq"1s avarishta,and
qf"M*l8varishishfa,
^T^TTavrita; Bened.
vrishishta.
The
verb
?^ ^rraA,too,
and
desiderative,
?T^grah;
*
The
certain tenses
Per. Fut.
forms
takes
the
of the
long
the
i, except in the reduplicated
perfect,
passive.(Pan.vn.
2,
given
starishishfa,
are
in
the
wrong.
Calcutta
edition of Panini
(See Pan.
vn.
2,
2
39.)
37.)
but Perf
vn.
jagrihima.
"fjf^T
2, 42,
MOMlV
varishishta,
172
PARADIGMS
" 343-
PERFECT.
REDUPLICATED
OF
Perfect.
Periphrastic
$ 342.
form
Verbs
^rf dm
perfectby affixing
their
abstract
in wr
noun
perfectof
$325,cannot
which, accordingto
d)to
form
base,and
known, ^hWHehTCj
make
reduplicated
shine,^cinflM"*K,
to
feminine
babMva, dsa.
bodhaya,
this the
addingto
^r?(as, to be*
?,to
of
termination
(an accusative
the verbal
reduplicated
perfect,
^TTH,
^^,
bodhaydmchakdra,
babhuva, dsa.
After verbs
is
which
but
Atmanepada,
conjugatedas
Hence
from
*j\rff edhate,
edh-amchakre
^VT^sR
passiveall
the
of Guna.
admit
never
but
which
chakdra
in the
Parasmaipada.
take
and
the
dsa.
^TW
Atmanepada.
it before
^srf
dm;
desiderative bases
(" 339.)
bubodhish, desiderative
^J^frfVr^
But
follow
Guna,
take
can
base
frequentative
w^bobhu,
^ bM
and
^*j$ babhtiva
verbs
auxiliary
three
bases
Intensive
" 343.
as
^^
"fkri
grows,
"N
In
he
verb
Atmanepada,the auxiliary
in the
used
are
of
*^bM, ^T^T^cUR
base
of
bobhavdmchakdra.
"c.
i.
bases
in
^TT a,
requiring intermediate
i, to
i.
place.
PARASMAIPADA.
SINGULAR.
ATMANEPADA.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL,
DUAL.
PLURAL.
DUAL.
dadhimd
dadhtf
dadhivdhe
dadhimdhe
dadhdthuh
dadhd
dadhisM
dadhdthe
dadhidhvt
dadhdtuh
dadhuh
dadht
dadhdte
dadhirf
dadhwd
or
"
2t1
\3$W
^u
3.
dadhati
Verbal
2.
dadhitha*
bases in
^i
and
^",preceded by
one
*ftni, to
(_Mti^
nindya
\ r*iH*(
nin"ha
or
consonant, and
i.
requiringintermediate "5[
lead.
ninyivd
ninyimd
ninyf
ninyivdhe ninyimdhe
Prj^fq:
frf^T
f"ff^^
nmyishf
ninydthe mnyidhveor-c
f*T^
f'f^T'if frfpsq^
niny"
ninydte
2.
L P*l"lP"4^wmay^a*
ninydthuh ninyd
3.
f*frfl}J
nindya
^*5*
P"i**i^[J
ninydtuh
*
ninyuh
" 335.
2^ and
" 335, 3.
ninyire
vy
"'
-$
PARADIGMS
343-
3. Verbal
bases
in
OF
REDUPLICATED
preceded by
ri,
and
consonant,
one
173
PERFECT.
requiringintermediate ^
t.
to hold.
Vdhji,
f ^VTT dadhdraor
dadhdra
[f^rt,
"prQ dadhdrtha
2.
4. Verbal
dadhrvod
dadhrimd
dadhrt
"r^3*
chakdra
chakdrtha
^RTO
^fSRi'C chakdra
3.
5. Verbal
bases in
^t
qiMM
^WTM
^T"w
dadhridhve'
dadhrirf
dadhrdthuh
dadhrd
dudhrishe
dadhrdtuh
dadhruh
dadhre"
dadhrdte
not
consonant,
one
or
admittingintermediate ^
^^
^*^j^
^"p*f^
chakrimd
chakrt
chakrivdhe
chakrimdhe
^BT*J*
lf"
^"^
^J"IN
1^'?
chakrdthuh
chakrd
chakrisht
chakrdthe
chakridhvf
^l^K
chakrirf
^^T
1'^'^
chakrivd
^3"^"
^"5*
^"
^J^iH
chakrdtuh
chakruh
chakre"
chakrate
\f,precededby
or
two
-dhtf
or
t.
do.
*" Art,to
2.
dadhrimdhe
dadhrdthe
bases in "^J/"/,
preceded by
chakdraor
dadhrivdhe
consonants,
and
intermediate ^
requiring
t.
"aft
krt,to buy.
J f^rWT
*" 1
\^%*\
._.
chikrdyaor
T
-T
chikrdya
chikre'tha
or
-dhv"
[f^"r"4^ chikrayithachikriydthuhchikriyd chikriyisht
chikriydthe
chikriyidfivtor
'
3.
fWfliiiJ
chikrdya
6. Verbal bases in TM
or
P"ir""4in
chikriydtuhchikriyuh chikriyd
chikriydte
chikriyire"
"31u,
precededby one
or
two
yu, to
P^rj"rM"
join.
J^MI"Iyuydoa
^^Pqq
^*jfaH iffl3
^^^q^
L^^0'yuydva
yuyuvivd
yuyuvimd
yuyuv"
yuyuvivdhe yuyuvimdhe
yuywsdthuh
yuyuvd
-dhv"
or
yuyuvishe' yuyuvdthe yuyuvidhve*
yuyuvdtuh
yuyuvuh
yuyuve'
or
preceded by one
or
two
^^fq"i^
yuyuvirf
yuyuvate
intermediate ^".
consonants, and not admittingthe
*J stu, to praise.
L (H^
tushtdva
tushtumdhe
tushtuvd
tushtumd
tushtuve"
tushtuvdhe
tushtuvdthuh
tushtuvd
tushtusht
tushtuvdthe tushtudhcf
tushtuvdtuh
tushtuvuh
tushtuvt
tushtuvdte
tushtuvirf
" 335, 3.
t If 3 yu is taken
from
Dhatupatfia 31,
9, it may
form
allow
tushtavitha
fJHfq'"|
even
againstPan.
vn.
2, 13.
2, and
174
PARADIGMS
8. Verbal
in
bases
REDUPLICATED
OF
^J ri, preceded by
consonants, and
two
" 343-
PERFECT.
intermediate
requiring
f f^tTR tastdra
nwf^q
'fi^cffiJH
HHT
cUtlTi,^
I fftrtX tastdra
tastarivd
tastarimd
tastare
tastarivdhe
tastarimdhe
tastardthuh
tastard
tastarishe
tastardthe
tastaridhve
tastardtuh
tastaruh
tastarg
tastardte
tastarirt
tastdrtha
"cTCcr^?
2.
9. Verbal
bases in ^T
cF
[^ofT^C
chakdra
chakaritha
^nKT^f
2.
intermediate
requiring
n,
kri,to
10.
3[*.
chakarivd
chakarimd
chakare*
chakarivdhe
chakarimdhe
H
^R^t
^^f^
^^Ttt^
-4 "hCI ^
chakardthuh
chakard
chakarishe
chakardthe chakaridhvt
chakardtuh
chakaruh
chakarts
chakardte
Verbal
bases in consonants,
"*R.SET
"e
or
chakarire'
intermediate ^[".
requiring
lf^
ijm^ tut6da
Verbal
ii.
^5*^^
33'V**
"$
ggfq^^
^4^*'^
tutudivd
tutudimd
tutudf:
tutudivdhe
tutudimdhe
tutuddthuh
tutudd
tutudishe
tutuddthe tutudidhvt
tutuddtuh
tutuduh
tutude
tutuddte
bases in consonants,
having
1J e, and
tutudire'
requiringintermediate ^
i,
to stretch.
I rift 11
tat
ana
or
1,4
|_fTfTrTtatdna
dMV(
2.
3.
tenivd
tenimd
tene"
tenivdhe
tenimdhe
tendthuh
tend
tenisht
tendthe
tenidhve
W^t
?T*f
tenuh
tene
tenitha
tatdna
ii(i"i"J
12.
rf"T^[J
Verbal
bases in consonants,
TWyo/,
iyaja
J 5[^rr5f
i.
^TTT^1
or
*.
sacrifice.
^w
S^Wqtj
'^f^'H^
ijimd
tje
ijlvdhe
ijimdhe
^5f
^ftf^
i("TTT
^ftT^
ijd
ijisM
ijdthe
ijidhvt
^*fij*
t[5*
^"TTn
^f"R
tjdtuh
ijuh
tj"?
ijdte
yire
or
'\^f3[Hiyajitha
ydthuh
^Tflifiydja
to
*f"TT
\^lf*fiydja ijivd
J5pPH?iydshtJia ^'T^J
3.
-dhve'
scatter.
tud,to strike.
or
cJiaTcdra
or
f ^fom*.
".
stri,to spread.
UK
or
or
-dhve*
-$
PARADIGMS
344.
OP
REDUPLICATED
bases in consonants,
13. Verbal
175
PERFECT.
requiringcontraction, and
intermediate
i.
J *! *4 1 ^\jaghdnaor
"^fiji-i
aiiHM
Ifn
flii^^
[ *\n"\jaghdna
jaghnivd
jaghnimd
jaghnt
jaghnivdhe jaghnimdhe
"fH
[fpfajaghdnthaoT
WIT^I
[ *\M PHVjaghanitha jaghndthuh jaghnd
jaghndtuh
jaghnuh
base
14. Verbal
**$yv"4babhuvitha
2.
"SfflT1^
1HIM
jaghnisht
jaghndthejaghnidhvf
jaghnt
jaghndte jaghnirt
babhuvivd
babhuvimd
babhuvt
babhuvivdhe
H"J5^;
^*"?
H"JJ^H
^"J5TM
babhuvdthuh
babhtivd
babhumsht
q'JJ^ufor^
babhuvdthe babhucidhv"or-dhi;"
babhuvdtuh
babhuvuh
babhuce
babhuvdte
AND
STRENGTHENING
J 344.
It
be
between
differ from
which
each
other
by
"^
The
by nasalization.
to
ri
dropping of
nasal.
be
strengthenedor
to
change
in
one
weakening, as,
and
far
intensives
as
for
are
cannot
be
only of
these
instance, all
will
minute
to
and
verbal
strengthenor
many
to
weaken
the
under
vowel,
placeby shortening,
by changing
to
^T
ir,
by Samprasarana, or
weakened,
sets.
derivatives,
takes
tinguish
dis-
details,to
by Vriddhi, by lengthening of
Some
derivative
which
(in the Atm.),
their bases
terminations.
enteringinto
consonants,
There
BASES
TENSES.
tendency either
weakening
before
ir, or,
babhuvirt
VERBAL
specialcircumstances, likewise
or
THE
GENERAL
strengtheningtakes
The
base.
their
of
sets
OF
REMAINING
useful, without
two
babhuvimdhe
XII.
WEAKENING
SIX
THE
may
TfWT
^JbhH (irregular).
CHAPTER
IN
"lfHH"
and
which
therefore
resist both
are
cannot
liable
strengtheningand
generallyhave
allow,previouslyto
either
by
their
been
as
strengthened,
176
STRENGTHENING
The
base
AND
1.
The
Future.
2.
The
Conditional.
Future.
Periphrastic
4. The
Benedictive
1.
2,
strengthened,and,
in
Participle
The
1.
The
Atmanepada.
ending in conson.
not
taking interm.
12. vn.
2, 42.)
n;
Gerund
ta
in
if
(unlessit
takes
(unlessit
takes
i).
3f*).
Passive.
4. The
Benedictive
5. The
First
6. The
Second
Parasmaipada.
Aorist,IV.
Aorist.
(Except verbs
Per.Fut.
strengthened.
in i"n tvd
3. The
Conditional.
Future.
intermediate
Base
is not
" 344-
BASES
weakened
possible,
VERBAL
intermediate
3. The
Pan.
base
i.
(Except bases
^ ri, and
or
OF
The
is, if possible,
strengthenedin
^i.
WEAKENING
in
ri,"c.
" 364.)
Ben.Atm.
bhavishydti dbhavishyat
bU
bho
tud
tod
div
dev
chur
krt
kar
bhavishishtd
dbhavishta
(tutsishtd)
dtautsit
ift^
dtotsyat
so
su
tottd
^P"nu
VHtjP"|*Mi^
^P^ifte
^"Hfl
ddevishyat
devisMshtd
ddevit
devitd
dkanshyat
karitd
^T^fhUT^
tTlrtT
dsoshyat
sotd
karishishtd
dkdrit
^dP"i*Ui^ fiPniti
dtanishyat
tan
tan
tanitd
tanisMshtd
%
kri
kre
dvekshydti
dvish
dkraishit
dkreshyat
ddvekshyat
dveshtd
1
dhaushit
dhoshyat
ho
hu
-..^-..1^
*H
rodh
rudh
Caus.
"F
Des.
^
kri
Int.
drautsit
drotsyat
^ToFRPH1^^
WT
f^T^"^f%c|HfH^ttPrfwf^olftfH^ni f^offtf1^
chiMrsh
kri
rotsydti
"*i"^ ^"KP*i"MPff
kdray
kri
VUrUlfl
kdrayishishtd
fWohTT^tftv
chikirsUtd
chikirshishishtd
chikirshishydti
dchikirsUsJiyat
^"SftP^^n
-"(rfil^
dchiktrsMt
-ef-qjn^f^
dchekriyishta
chekriyitdchekriyisMshtd
dchekriyishyata
chekrty chekriyishydte
178
guh
guh
BASES, "C.
VERBAL
OF
WEAKENING
AND
STRENGTHENING
J 345-
ghokshydti
dghokshyat
godhd
(ghukshishtd)
guhishydti
dguhishyat
guhitd
guhishishtd
or
srij
sraj
srakshydti
dsrakshyat
srashtd
mi
md
mdsydti
dmdsyat
mdtd
nas
nams
nankshydti
dnahkshyat
namshtd
srams
srams
bandh
bandh
bhantsydti
Base
II. Root.
not strengthened,
Ger.RTtoa,
dsrdkshit
dmdstt
mdsishtd
dbhdntsfa
Ben.
Passive.
Par.
Sec.Aor.
mrishtdh
mrishtvd
mrijydte
mrijydt
guh
guh
gudhdh
gudhvd
guhydte
guhydt
^f5*nr
^^if^
snj
srishtdh
srishtvd
srijydte
srijydt
f*ir^i
*i!*i^
*nmr
mitdh
mitvd
miydte
meydt
was
nashtdh
nashtvd
nasydte
nasydt
dnasat
srams
sras
srastdh
srastva
srasydte
srasydt
dsrasat
bandh
badh
baddhdh
baddhvd
badhydte
badhydt
ft
Pan.
vi.
4,
89.
Pan.
10
or
vi.
Roots
4, 24.
which
w^srams
may
:
while
Pan.
But
"
vi.
marked
with
beginningwith
vrimhitd.
if it means
Or
i, 50.
vi.
guhitvd," 337,
'jf^r^T
Pan.
i, 60.
vn.
written
in the
1.
2.
Dhatupatha
with
written
their
nasal,
without
the
an
to
to
53) :
its
nasal, even
affixes;
in the
24, vart. 3,
4).
causative
The
same
(Pan. vi.
anchitah,worshipped; otherwise
4,
30) and
^T3u
before
terminations
varhayati,but
^ij ^"t^ffT
intermediate
rajayati(Pan.vi.4,
sport; TJrfirfff
worship,must
^N^ff*
Or
before the
II
Pan.
mdrjitvd,not Hf^r^Tmarjitvd.
^i, Hlf'Sfll
with
128.
38.
deformed
2"
i,
indicatory
^ i; ^f^ nad, "c. (Pan. vi. 4, 24 ; vn. i, 58). Two verbs thus
withstanding
by ^ i, c3fHlag and "fif^
kap, may, however, drop their nasal, the general rule notf^cfrfiTfT
burnt ;
if used
in certain meanings, f^^fTTT vilagitam,
vikapitam,
nasal,but
means
dghukshat
II. Atm.
and
mrij
mi
First AorJV.
without^*,
mrij
fa
dsramsishta
banddhd
dbhantsyat
Part.Wte,
without ^i.
dguhit
(i.e.before
root,like
4,
26).
or
vowel),
others,
if it
^^(anch,
^ i (Pan. vn.
^f^lfj anchitah, bent.
aktah
some
d'T
sjfsg
-f 347.
Note"
their
The
beginning with
verbs
Per.
^fcmfdkujishydti,
to fear,
finery,
a),
^H"tfrntt,to
(Pan. i.
which
cover,
Fut.
do
may
marked
are
I.
2,
i).
Alftlfll
w"W(Pan. i.
Per. Fut.
w"5fqnivrnavitd
urnuvitdor
^Nijfqni
;
optionally
so
be
fT hif, to
(Pan.
*^f\J(dlcuttt
Aor.
";
strengthen
not
by *^flor ^n;
First
$fzdlkutitd,
before intermediate ^
Guna
takes
never
terminations
before
base,except
bent, Put.
3"
179
AORIST.
3).
2,
CHAPTER
XIII.
AORIST.
J 346. We
formed
Aorists,one
this
"
in Sanskrit,
as
distinguish
can
take
the
J 347.
The
which
Augment,
First Aorist
nation,
termi-
terminations
the
Imperfect.
of
First Form.
1.
ATMANEPADA.
PARASMAIPADA.
^^ isham
^^
$ltft
^#
^^ishtdm^lishuh
In
and
root
by addingthe
always has
of the
is formed
Terminations
between
kinds of
two
Aorist.
terminations
the
modifications,
some
sibilant inserted
we
Greek, between
another,formed
"
Aorists
Both
of
means
we
base, this
to the
by
in
ishva
ishtam
^QR ishma
ishi
j^fa
^Tiishta
^T^ishthdh ^m"u
take the
all the
intermediate
in fact,by
differ,
the latter to verbs
^ i.
this
the
verbs
The
which
that
ishdthdm
^$4 ^
take
the former
is
Second
sam
^R
sva
sma
-(
or
If ta
4,
which
note.)
Wf^
^f\|svahi
smahi
\or^ITt thdh
^rsffl
^: stth
[or HT
verbs
First Aorist
s/m
sit
of the
tarn
-{
^IHI
[oriT^a
"
satam
the
liable to
verbs
are
(See$332,
re
part of
as
ATMANEPADA.
ft?si
idhvam
ishata
^ i stands
forms
or
Form.
PARASMAIPADA.
^TT
to
peculiar
^ i.
idhvam
or
this form
second
intermediate
reject
2.
ishmahi
^**if^
intermediate
first and
only,that
ishvahi
^'mniishdtdm
ishta
^S
because
terminations,
^^H?
THT sata
take,
180
J 348-
AOKIST.
Third
3.
There
verbs
some
are
terminations
taking the
terminations
usual
which
add
^ i, viz.
of the
"c.
They
are
before
root
after this ^ s,
which
^4 isham,
end
the
to
Aorist,and
of the
with
Form.
employ
the
conjugatedin
the
Parasmaipadaonly.
PARASMAIPADA.
s-i-sham
(forffSm sish(a)h)
s-ih
ftt"*i
s-ishva
ftro
fftf?s-ishtam
fav
(for
f^^^sish(a)t) faST s-ishtdm
Fourth
4.
Lastly,there
by ^
*,
u, ^
few
some
are
ri,which
take
s-ishuh
ftnf:
Form.
verbs, ending
in
^ s, f^sh,^ h, preceded
mediate
followingterminations,without an inter-
the
PARASMAIPADA.
tTTq
ATMANEPADA.
sdvahi
r"
*ITH
sava
T^T
sama
si
"TT^ vahi
^Trf sa/am
*TrT sata
$ 348. For
dldvisham
(Pan.vn.
For
final
For
medial
The
vowel,
vowel
Vriddhi
or
in
Form
of
the First
Parasmaipada*.
c3
Aorist.
/w, to cut,
in
both
(ifpossible)
Guna
vowel,
^Vf\ni dbodhisham
followed
dkdnisham
; Par.
^r a,
by
beginswith
dkanisham
^rsfiftj^
f.
consonant
2,
to
5). "^l^wrwM,
cover,
(Pan.vn.
or
may
a,
not
may
Atm.
and
Par.
Atm. ^TTtfafadbodhishi.
singlefinal consonant,
in
7);
or
may
take
not
may
take
(Pan.vn.
santa
i).
Guna
initial
know
budh, to
2,
or
the First
vowel, Vriddhi
final
^K
W ta
or
*^ dhvam
[ or
^TTirf
sdtdm
sadhvam
J f hah
Ml
'ttsan
f^?4
^TT^n 5"^aw
[ or
^tftsatdm
sathdh
~_
^fTHT^ samahi
or
Wilsat
s-ishta
(ksa).
^ i
r: sah
s-ishma
Vriddhi;
^"TT'
"
i.1 ojdgarit
f^
Wi ^"iTi^
aurnuvit,or
^TRV^J^aurndvit,
(Pan.
^rr^qRT^aMrwat?^
2, 6).
or
vii.
burn,
(Pan.vii.
and
^'*n"ft?(djvdKt
(Pan.
2,
to
^f^grah,
throw,
2,
2).
^ A,^"",^y,the
class,roots with
dvyayitj "^TJTkshan,
^^ifl1?^
", to
vowels,
vii.
Likewise
hurt,
to
Parasmaipada ; ^"^jvalf
speak, and
to
to go
'Gfi^vraj,
to hurt,^R^"as,to
T5prjA;sA"m,
technical
to
in the
^vad,
roots
take, ^lf^J[^dgrahit
j
fQ^syam,
stt ;
Vriddhi
or
sound,
breathe,
(Pan.vii.
2,
5).
to
TSR"*ftf{dsyamft;
'"F{vyay,
dkshantij "^^
^"SHUI1?^
svfls,
to
breathe,
to suspect, *Z(T?f\J(aragt
to minish, ^n*flf('f(jiunay(t
;
"3i"T^Mway,
TJl^rag,
shine,^ft
vet-
", to
on
desire, and
intermediate
^fr^Tdaridrd,to be
^ft.^[T
daridrd,
^
t ;
poor,
drop
their
final
-$ 35"5"
Guna
No
349.
181
AORIST.
placein desiderative
takes
bases,
Desid.
"^budh;
"
dbubodhishisham.
^TJ^tfvfrnt
Aor.
Intensives
drop
in
their final
^y.
dbebhidishi.
TO'^faf^ftT
bhuyishi.Denom.
is
^y
precededby
vowel,
in
*Jy may,
is left between
^y
the
^t.
*^bhd,
to
l"it*^namasy, worship ;
base
denominatives
must, certain
consonant,
intensive
If the
the intermediate
and
final vowel
precededby
if
^y,
to
Aor.
dnamas-isham.
" 350.
Vriddhi
^fhidsaisham
Pan.
i.
2,
if
Atmanepada,
12);
2,
of
in
(Pan.vn.
in
Guna
Form
the Second
SpecialRules for
otherwise
ends
verb
the
change
no
base
Terminations
in
ends
beginning with
short
vowel
^ri|Tf
dkshaip-tam,3.
f^^kship;
But
2.
dkrithdh,3. p.
sing.Atm. "H"$VJT:
p.
" 352.
The
pity,*f dhe,
terminations
roots
to
drop
except
nasals.
but
f^ 2r.
their ^*
Ex.
rt,
if the
p. dual
2.
of
plur.^fr%R
dkshaip-ta,
Atm.
sing,^fudkritayof
ifkri,
p.
dmamsta.
*HHW
feed,^ do,
to
Atmanepada(Pan.i.
of the
"^r^ becomes
FTT
(notin
^sth
or
consonant,
7, "31
Final
^T%"rf
dkshaip-tdmy 2.
p. dual
JRT^ mdnyate,
from
in
or
^ET st
z,
of vowel,
dkrishi.
fq^kship,^rftff^r
dkshipsi;^ "rz,^i^rfa
J 351.
in ^,
3).
2,
ffupdsthi-shdtdm. In the
17).
2,
sthd,3
WT
to
^rfe,
place,
to
updsthi-ta
;
the Second
Parasmaipadathey take
Aorist.
($368.)
" 353-
The
iftmi (mindti),
to hurt, fa
roots
from
take
the Third
aldsta
or
to
Atmanepada; and
and fa mi, "w*iiw
In
aleshta.
^^H?
the
Form.
its nasal
*ftmi
from
Thus
c5^ /",^""iw
from
in the
into ^TTa
$ di,Atm.,
and
to throw,
(minoti),
mi
in the
Atmanepada (Pan. i.
2,
14); V^H
ah at a,
ahasdtdm, "c.
or
stshta
" 35^' ^
meanings;
or
drops
go,
yam
3";""n
^1*1 1 (Vi
M*T amdsisham
50.
The
Dr.
in
rule
same
Atmanepadaoptionally
(Pan. i. 2, 13);
applies to the benedictive Atmanepada
;
the
^t^fh?gamstshta.
Prof. Weber
Panini.
The
agamsta.
drops
its
2,
similar
Kellner,however, was
15);
2,
its various
vpdyata, he espoused,OP
"JMi^n
16).
vol.
(Kuhn's Beitrage,
and
accordingto
optionally,
or
nasal, necessarily
udayata, he divulged(Pan. i.
updyamsta (Pan. I.
*
its nasal
vi.
p.
forms, and
right,as
102) blames
denies
will be
placewherever
seen
that
Dr.
Kellner
these
from
there would
forms
for
having
are
the commentary
otherwise
have
admitted
authorised
to
Pan.
vi.
by
i,
182
" 357-
AOEIST.
f 357.
to
nam,
ending
roots
in H
SpecialRules for
see,
cf. Pan.
They
(Pan.in.
" 361.
i,
The
which
roots
d,
in
or
remains
Form.
verbs
I hurt ;
Form
this form
2,
of
73.)
end
must
in SI ^
this form
verbs, such
Other
remains
radical vowel
as
only if
to
(asto ^j(dri$9
any vowel
intermediate
rejectthe
takes
fig^sUsh
aslikshat.
^{f^renT
this form
the Fourth
take
which
Their
45.)
root
take
47),T{sh,1(s, ^ h, preceded by
i,
in.
be
must
^TT
^rr
Second
the
take
Aor.
bend,
$ 360. The
This
substitute.
verbs
in
end
tf aldsisham
Three
Aorist
into ^SRT a.
likewise
the
of
their
as
of
" 359.
form
Atmanepadathese
In the
unchanged.
change
take
which
diphthongs
taking this
verbs
Most
Form
the Third
SpecialRules for
z;
but
"
^T, ^n
a.
17"20;
332,
unchanged.
it means
and
"tjftpush
to embrace
sush,
Tjre
are
(Pan. in.
i,
46) ;
excepted.
specially
(" 366.)
" 362. The
(Pan. vn.
3,
to lick,TR^guh,
to anoint,fe^lih,
to
Z^duh,to milk, f^TeftA,
take in the Atmanepada
roots
73),may
If ta
gf]duhj
?4
^Trf sata.
"
^rf^vahi
1RI
p.
sing.Atm.
^g'^Ttadugdhdh
3. p.
sing.Atm.
^^V
2.
1.
p. dual
2.
p.
Atm.
plur.Atm.
dhvam
of
tu^f^sdvahi.
TOI
sadhvam.
Form
the Second
instead
hide
adugdha
or
aduhvahi
^Ig3ffl"
^VTSpITt adhukshathdh.
or
'STV'^fTadhukshata.
^V^T^f^
or
^npl"!adhugdhvam
or
adhukshdvahi.
adhukshadhvam.
vi^isjSel
AORIST.
FIRST
First Form,
intermediate
with
a.
Verbs
Vriddhi
ending
in
in
3Ji-
vowel;
Parasmaipada, Guna
in
c" lu, to
cut.
Atmanepada.
PARASMAIPADA.
fq "*t dldv-ishva
^rcolPei'^T
dldv-ishma
1.
^T?5Tf^
2.
^Tc5T^J dldv-ih
^?rtlf^^dldv-ishtam
^Ic^Tf^F dldvi-shta
3.
^Ic^T^fTdidv-it
^051^81
dldvi-shuh
^TrtlPq^t
dldv-isham
^co
dldv-ishtam
ATMANEPADA.
1.
^Tc4'P"lfll
dlav-ishi
dlav-ishvahi
^TcoTqwif^
dlav-ishmahi
^?"5ft^Tf^
2.
^r5f?l"Ttdlav-islithdh
^Tc^r"i1miqTdlav-ishdthdm
^?c5T%l^dlav-idhvam
^rafel?dlav-ishta
^r^f^^TUT dlav-ishdtdm
^cofqmi
3.
dlav-ishata
or
"^-dhvam
-$ 362.
183
AORIST.
ending in
b. Verbs
Guna
wvbudh,
consonants;
know.
to
in
PARASMAIPADA.
1.
"vianPt"M
abodh-isham
^WTttV1^ abodh-ishoa
2.
^Bnfftfh
abodh-ih
W^tfVn?
3.
W^hrh^a"orfA-f/
^H""riP*4"i
abodh-ishtdm
abodh-ishtam
WqlP*!1!?abodh-ishma
W^fViB
abodh-ishta
abodh-ishu/i
^TTtfv^:
ATMANEPADA.
1
^BpfVfvftf
abodh-ishi
vi^P^t^p^abodh-ishvahi
^T^ftfv^Rf^
abodh-ishmahi
^"f\PM"iJabodh-ishthdh
^T^tfVmxjiabodh-ishdthdm
TO^ffVl**J
abodh-idhvam
^I^tfw
^ToTlfMmrff
abodh-ishdtdm
VH^PyMrf abodh-ishata
2.
3.
abodh-ishta
Second
without
a.
Verbs
ending in
Vriddhi
in
Form,
intermediate
consonants
i.
to
f^^ Ar^z/?,
Parasmaipada,no change
in
throw.
Atmanepada.
PARASMAIPADA.
vjtsj'^i
akshaip-sam
"fB|MS
2.
vj^tdjakshaip-sih
^T^fff
akshaip-tam(" 351)
^T!pT akshaip-ta
3.
akshaip-sit
v^^tilf^
^I^Trt
akshaip-tdm
^\^^lakshaip-suh
akshaip-sva
"s^K|^3kakshaip-sma
ATMANEPADA.
1.
^TTTSfftl
akship-si
^TT^T^f^ akship-svahi
""iPe$M3Hn"
akship-smahi
2.
vfPBj^xflJ
akship-thdh
^rft^Tnrt
akship-sdthdm
^T^Pf akshib-dhvam
3.
isfPsiN
akship-ta
^P^tiifli
akship-sdtdm
^TPnjtirt
akship-sata
b. Verbs
ending in
Vriddhi
in
vowels
Guna
Parasmaipada,
in
tftwi,
to lead.
Atmanepada.
PARASMAIPADA.
1
^Tn
*fanaisham
^In^
anaishva
anaishtam
"ci^**!
anaishma
2.
vf"iHiJ anaishih
^fn"
3.
^sH'fli^anaisAft
^T%1T anaishtdm
^Tn?
anaishta
*I^Jtanaishuh
ATMANEPADA.
1
2.
"SfrPHaneshi
^MiBit
3. ^fn"
aneshthdh
aneshta
c.
Vriddhi
Verbs
in
aneshvahi
vffiw^n^
^ti^P^
vt'imMi aneshdthdm
")H^anedhvam
vifiUmt aneshdtdm
^HMif
ending in
Parasmaipada, no
n;
aneshmahi
aneshata
^f Arz,to do.
change
in
Atmanepada.
PARASMAIPADA.
i
xt'cRm
akdrsham
akdrshih
--Scfciu^
akdrshva
rM=fl^ akdrshma
%M"*|5
akdrshtam
xM4l^ akdrshta
^nfinll
akdrshtdm
184
" 362,
AORIST.
ATMANEPADA.
1.
'^ifaakrishi
2.
^I^iV
3.
^T^irf a"rzta
I? akrithdh
vi
"fepm"fTakrishdthdm
^^f"
akrishdtdm
^TOi^TUT
d. Verbs
akrishmahi
fifc
akrishvahi
'ST^i^f^r
ending in
^TT
akridhvam
^TOi^ll
^?r a;
Atmanepada
only j
"ym
^r
da,
akrishata
give.
to
changed into ^
t.
ATMANEPADA.
1.
^Hl^iMadishi
^TT^^f^adishvahi
adishmahi
^?f^"^Tf^
2.
^ff^rnadit hah
adishdthdm
^rf^m^qi
^%"
3.
ac?^a
^rf^lT
^rf^^TrTf
adishdtdm
vif^qnadishata
Verbs
e.
ending
Vriddhi
In
Atmanepadathe
^i
is
If
is not
insertion
Guna
then
inserted,
If
(" 348)
then ^n
inserted,
^ */r^jto
stretch.
in
of
in ^jr?/
adidhvam
and
337, II.
Pan.
4.
vn.
2,
42.)
changed
to
PARASMAIPADA.
Second
vitclO? astarishta
"wWliM
astarishi
or
astirshthdh
^TOft%astirshta
astarishta
or
3[i'
astirshi
vtwIeK
astarishthdh
or
Form,
without
SINGULAR.
^RarfanJ astarishthdh
or
or
^ i.
"*nsi*3"n?
astarishi
or
Form.
ATMANEPADA.
Form,
with
First
DUAL.
1.
^wft^fifJ
2.
^Kri'fXmvjj
'^wOMfifi
or
3.
^i tsl
1.
^SMHlX^n^or -^wO^Hn^
^T4df^"c(
"^ or ^HWtH"f "^astaridhvam
U.H i nT
^^TT^^f^
or
^IwOmin
or
astarishvahi
astarishdthdm
astarishdtdm
viWl ^"f^asttrshvahi
astartshvahi
or
or
^HWlSl^lastirshdthdm
astarishdthdm
or
^tfliHtclT astirshdtdm
astarishdtdm
PLURAL.
3.
astarishmahi
^JMriPlXri
astarishata
^r^cTirt^Tf
or
with
Peculiar
Vriddhi
in
^n^l^\k astirshmahi
astarishmahi
-dhvam
astaridhvam -dhvam
or
astarishata
penultimate^
Verbs
f.
or
or
ri /
Parasmaipada,no
change
"n/,
in
to
let off.
Atmanepada.
PARASMAIPADA.
3.
asrdksham
^^TSS
\lasrdkshih
^TFT?
asrdkshva
asrdshtam
^TWrKfasrdshtam
'STOTSffa^asra"s^
^t*H5^
^H5m
asrdkshma
asrdshta
^T^rr^tasrdkshuh
ATMANEPADA.
1.
asnJfo^z
^njfrSf
2.
^T^fFTJ
asrishthdh
asrishta
asrikshvahi
''H^iyr^
asrikshmahi
"^^"*if^
asrikshdthdm
^^VijIVjl
vujsc
^W^ITftasrikshdtdm
^ti"|n
asriddhvam
asrikshata
186
$363-
AORIST.
ATMANEPADA.
aghukshdoaU
aghukshi
I.
[laghukshathdh
or^PJcFKagudhdh
^ H|'V|
2.
41
3.
^nrefcf aghukshataor
It may
(I337
agudha
^^
I"
aghukshdmahi
aguhvahi
or
^H gHjIVJ1aghukshdthdm
First
aghukshanta
aghukshdtdm
vi^im
*Jf *icr
or
aguhishi.
!")
/"A,to
fc^;
smear.
PARASMAIPADA.
aliksham
alikshdva
^?fc5^T^
j aliksJiah
alikshatam
^rfoJ^iT
alikshata
alikshatam
^rfc^^rrf
alikshan
^f"^l^alikshat
alikshdma
ATMANEPADA.
^av^m^
alikshi
i.
2.
alikshathdh
^rfc4H|'m*
3.
""i
PC*ej n
alikshata
alikshdvahi
alidha
or
alikshdmahi
^"*i\**\alikshdthdm
aUdhdh
or
alihvahi
vtrcodr^
or
or
alikshanta
milk.
to
PARASMAIPADA.
adhuksham, "c.
ATMANEPADA.
f^ adhukshdvahi
adhukshi
I.
adhukshathdh
2.
WJ^nt
3.
^f^fcT adhukshata
or
^SI'f^aduhvahi
adhukshdmahi
"f^'^Tt adugdhdh
^87V
or
or
or
adhukshdtdm
adugdha
anoint.
c?^, to
adhukshanta
PARASMAIPADA.
adhiksham, "c.
ATMANEPADA.
.
^rftff^
adhikshi
adhikshdmahi
adhiksMthdm
or
or
adMkshdtdm
or
SECOND
J 3^3- Verbs
terminations
or
adopting
this
form
(FirstDivision)of
of the Tud
aghukshadhvam
adhukshadhvam
adhikshathdh
adhikshata
or
or
or
or
the
adhikshanta
AORIST.
take
the
imperfect to
verbal
attach
base
alikshadhvam
adhugdhvam.
adhiksMvahi
adhikshadhvam
alidhvam.
or
or
adihvahi.
or
the
ending
form.
adigdha.
and
augment,
aghudhvam.
adigdhdh.
6
^rfarSEJ
adhigdhvam.
-J 3*7-
1*7
AOKIST.
nnchdmi
Impf. wftK
asincham.
PARASMAIPADA.
asichdva
asicham
asichat
asichah
agichdma
nail-lintn
am
asichatdm
asichat
asichan
ATMANEPADA.
asichdvahi
: asichat hdh
s anchdmahi
asichethdm
asichata
asichadhvam
asichetdm
asichanta
General
base
PARASMAIPADA.
ahvam
ahvdva
"Hd^i ahvah
2.
ahvdma
aJivatam
ahvata
ahvatdm
3.
ATMANEPADA.
ahvdvahi
t ahvathdh
2.
ahvethdm
alivata
" 364.
vi
ending in
Roots
in
ending
base
substitutes
in short
ig M;O,
^^ic?m,to
see,
^? a:
^365.Roots
"
Bopp
^sn',to go,
with
^, ^
e,
ahvanta
Roots
asvam.
(Pan.vn.
4,
ending
16),and
^STTO^asarfltf;
^5T driktto see,
are,
aorist,
f 370,
reduplicated
^^os,
to
throw
Kas'.on
perished,
take
this form
The
verbs
^^
vach
(according
avavacham);
^rni
aorist
reduplicated
Pan.
4,
120
^n^ ^"*;
WTO
vi.
(^I^T avocham), WT
in.
or
ending
for
(possibly
dstham,
are,
base
root
(Pan.vii.
4, 17.)
^"s.
which
the
^^T^a"?ar^a/.
for ^^ci^
contracted
a
(possibly
itf^pat
apapatam) ; ^3R^fanesam,
H, and
form
fv" 6vi
askadam.
skand,to step,^ragi"*
nasal,dropit: T3fi"[
penultimate
contracted
threw, from
in ^
then
substitute
ahvam
"??a^
for
I
ahvadhvam
fii
ahvetdm
Ave
Guna
take
apaptam, I flew,from
VHIMri
Q^
^rr
Aor. ^nS
forms
J366. Irregular
to
iihrumnhi
in
optionally
i,
i,
Myd,
to
speak
52.)
vifcoH alipta.
classed
as
"^f^pushddi,
beginning with "$\push(Dh. P.
'dyutddi,
beginningwith ^^rfyi/^
(Dh. P. 18),and
in the Parasmaipada.(Pan. in.
i, 55.)
B
those
marked
26, 73-136),^mfV
by
technical
"^ /t,
188
^ sri,to
verbs
The
marked
technically
verbs
Optionally,
Atm.
Par. and
in the
but
t^abTiaitsit.
or
or
^w^l^
C^^f^l^astabhat
stiffen
^ScPT stambh,to
Optionally,*[jri,to fail,
or ^rafNh^amrocMtf),
"jr^mluch,togo,
(-Wyi^amruchat
to go (^Pcf^ agluchat or
steal,r^^gluch, to steal,*l"^$rZttnc^,
to
^J^mrMcA,
to
go
f^["z,
agluncUi),
" 368.
to grow
There
are
the
Tt uh
these
Atmanepada
^TT d to
change
the
d, *J e, ^STto, which
to be.
^bhu,
also
Parasmaipada;
aorist in the
in ^TT
verbs,ending
few
rejected. In
in the
"""")" DU*
(irregularly
^HST?^
Parasmaipadaonly.
i, 58.)
(Pan. m.
second
(^nttfram),in
^J ri,to go
by ^ir,
^5W wl
^fatC^abhidat
57).
i,
go,
1,56.)
(Pan. m.
and
" 368-
AORIST.
They
before
pers. plur.,
3rd
of the
in ^TT d take
verbs
this form
take
retain
throughout
which
Form
the Second
the
of the
the
long
final ^?T d is
3[".
Pres.
^T da, to give.
daddmi;
^Tf
adaddm.
Impf. ^^
PARASMAIPADA.
1.
^njfarfaw
^r^T"^arfawa
2.
^T^Tt arfa/f
iH^Irtaddtam
3.
^R(Tf^a^
addtam
^si^ini
^6^w,
Pres.
to be.
addma
^TT
abhavam.
PABASMAIPADA.
1.
^S^
2.
3.
abhuvam*
^*$$
abhuva
^^
abhuma
^T^r:"5MA
^*J?
abhutam
^^
abhuta
^*"j{abhut
^T^WT abhutam
Verbs
which
IT #a, to go
TIT # W,
Optionally,
to be.
do, to cut; *j^bhu,
to smell
destroy.(Pan. n.
to
are,
guard;
to
this form
take
^^^abhuvan
nine
4,
to
e?Ae,
drink
4,
^ftso,
to
^ c?e,
77.)
sharpen ; "sft
chho,to
cut ;
^fft
50,
78.)
of the Tan
roots
(Pan. n.
sthd, to stand
WT
class
ending in
"fTn
or
Tff n
\
may
form
2nd
the
and
3rd
pers.
sing.Atm.
stretch; Aor.
(Pan. ii.
second
4,
in ^IT: thdh
79). These
forms
Uta,
before
which
^TiTlf atata;
or
might
be
is
rejected. If^tan, to
^IirfVn?TJ
atanishthdh
considered
or
^-Nri^i: atathdh
irregular
Atmanepada
as
forms
of the
Second
" 370.
roots, the
base
and
vjnPrigatanishta
in
the
terminations
few
or
Reduplicated Form
verbs, and
primitive
denominatives
and
causatives
aorist,taking the
of the
imperfect.
ist pers.
the Second
the very
second
Irregularin the
of
class
numerous
in
augment
^ro
as
sing.,dual,and plur.,and
Aorist.
ay,
of the
reduplicatetheir
before,and
in the
Chur
3rd
pers.
the
plur.
usual
-$374" 371.
which
primitiveverbs
The
fof/ri,to
to run,
go, "Jrfru,
agent. Ex.
the
189
AORIST.
fa
Optionally,
^H
to
wt,
this form
take
are,
to love
flow, ^^kamt
sru, to
fa M asitriyat.
f^i
r^
^ dhe, to suck
grow,
(Pan. in.
i,
(Pa?, ill.
I,
48),if expressing
49),if expressingthe
agent.
or
364,(or \t^4\"^adhdt
^MMl"1i^a"M""sft.)
far
as
Their reduplicative
syllable,
consonants
as
concerned, is formed
are
perfect.
reduplicated
^"^ i^adudruvat, he
tj he went.
grew;
$ 372.
call,forms
verbs
The
^ho
*eto^i;
would
"
modayati
^T
In the
d,ty,^
e, ^
: wr
to ^
^ri. (Pan.vn.4,
$^frto
do not admit
roots, which
exceptional
are
ait'md,'?fto,^au
this
in the
represented
7.)
shortening
process,
syllable
by
reduplicative
atilikam.
^ifc"f;cF
zte"folikayati,
amamdlam.
mdlayati, ^rmrft
vowels
amumudam.)
ij^mud, (Aor.^njjj^
"
"
49).
amimadam.)
if^mad, (Aor.1"nftiT^
fw^bhid, (Aor.vtffa^ abtbhidam.)
become
bhedayati
" 373.
simplebase
^,^ar,to^H;
to *u;
JTlr^frt
mddayati
Thus
to the
i,
and
in
their Guna
reduce
^V^arfarfAa^,
First Aor. "Wll^afoaytt(Pan. in.
and
vimi^fl"af
its Aor. Caus. W*\"W{ajuhavat
(Pan.vi. i, 32).
Sec. Aor.
also
2^hve,to
he flowed.
-wtj^qi^flstm-Hra/,
fvjJJ|^asiiviyat,
"W f^|
he
ran.
he sucked.
f, he loved.
alu/okam.
cftcFTrfTT
lokayati,^?$"\3;
J 374.
In the vast
leavingbases
with
short
base,with
reduplicated
which
^i
the
a,
is not
either
Where,
as
the vowel
in roots
of the
"
thus
takes place,
shortening
the
or
tendencyis to
"
Hence
Those
in which
the
make
the
all roots
lengthenthe
long by position,
syllable
(amdmudai).
reduplicative
leave
position,
Here
iy ^u}^ri.
augment,
vowel
the shortened
the
vowel
vowel
is
of the
long by
short (ararakshat).
reduplicative
syllable
beginningwith
double
of the
These
Certain
exceptionalverbs
denominatives
are
From
(Pan. vn.
Hlc4l
mala,
4, 2,
a
Red. Aor.
with
"""
31 31 1 "
t[^a"a3dsat.
W^bddh, to
technical ^Jn-
the
3),
garland,is
formed
Caus.
mdlayati,Red. Aor. ^*\*{\"A^amamdlatj "$f\1{6ds,
Those
in
hurt; Caus.
the
*iioiMrrt
denominative
he punishes,
^utf^fn
sdsayati,
"^PHlfTT
bddhayati;Aor.
SH^HIVTi^
ababddhat.
to shine, VX^bhds,to
^dX^bhrdj,
live,*ftc^
mil,to meet,
to vex,
tfrSpid,
"\ababhrdjat futiifi^abibhrajat
(" 374).
to surround, ^"^ cheshtay,to move,
take
%F^t?es^f"y,
'SRfc
to lighten,
to
to speak, tf*{dip,
"SfNyfr,
shine,*H^bhdsh,
i "i
or
optionally.Ex.
*ff*{bhrdj;
^M
either ^ "" or
in
the
reduplicative
iH f"4^
8 ^aviveshfat.
syllable
or
; ''Z"R'tn^avaveshtat
inn^rfyo/ay,lighten,
to
takes
^t;
^?f^f iadidyutat.
n
190
" 375-
AORIST.
beginningand endingin
roots
(achaskandat).
broken
consonants, this metrical rhythm is necessarily
two
" 375.
In the roots
which
do not
^ i, ^ uy ^J ri
^T a,
Second
or
and
all
cook, M H
to
syllable
by
reduplicative
the
where
lengthened,
ReduplicatedForm
I.
pack,
shorteningprocess,
representedin
are
resist the
Aorist.
the Second
of
"
necessary.
-Mfri
pdchdyati;
moddyati ;
jft^rfff
rejoice,
to
,
-sftwqfnkirtdyati
rit,to praise,
; ^r^\^lT?(dcMkritat^.
The
lengtheningbecomes
because
the
two
before
superfluous
make
consonants
beginningwith
roots
nants,
conso-
heavy (guru].
vowel
the short
two
;
iq^ tyaj,to leave,Tm"RflT tydjdyati
;
^TT^ bhrdj,to shine,yi'H^fribhrdjdyati
M i^
ip,to throw, "^TTTfw
dchikshipat.
Jcshepdyati
; ^Tp^ PH|
^ftTT^fTT
fall,
chyotdyati;
to
,
svri,to sound,
Tlinfrf
svdrdyati;
rakshdyati;
protect,iHinfrf
to
,
begins and
root
ends
with
double
consonants,
this
rhythmicallaw
is
broken.
to
,
skand, to step,"tai^"4fii
skanddyati; *x
with
"
or
radical ^ri
kathdy
cFTO^
followingverbs
take
*3fa
same
followed
take
instead of
by
consonant, may
take
optionally
or
^i
^T
or
or
optionally; ^*(\*\1"1{djigan
\i in
the
of
reduplicative
syllable
^WT"*(
mrad, ^c[stri,
fffsmdrdyotij
hereafter
T"
Aor.
instead
of
^*
in the
reduplicatedaorist:
A or. of Caus.^R ^C
Des^^^v^fiKnundvayishatij
"^nujCaus. ^\\^^tindvdyatij
Radical
^R
is
the
fQsmri;Caus.
The
*5h^ dchaskandat.
forms.
"
^n,
or
reduplicatedby
^T
double
consonant.
of
-J 380.
^W vrit,to be, tli*
"5SFH
M/,
beginningwith
Roots
have
in the
the
dchikirtat.
wfrnflfrl^
or
internal
same
desiderative
reduplication,
bases.
Thus
In the
same
" 379.
and
with augment
lastly,
and
Are
({476.)
irregular:
slightly
forms
dptpayat}.Pan.
4,
vii.
dpipyat(insteadof
^"Ml*"4i^
as
4.
aorist
its causal
its causal
forms
smell, which
to
aorist
its causal
forms
stand, which
sthd, to
ghrd,
ay,
d$-i6-am.
termination,^nfifllfr
manner,
/"f,to drink,which
WT
vowel
hereafter
will be described
which
TTT
to
J 378.
vartdyati;W""jn i^dvivritat
to cleanse,
TOmry,
191
AOKIST.
aorist
^rnf"Mi dtishjhipat
(insteadof
as
or
^ djighripat
as
djighrapat.
AORIST.
REDUPLICATED
PARASMAIPADA.
1.
1"iiI'5tM
ds'israyam
asifraydva
asisraydma
2.
vif^i^Mt
a6israyah
asisrayatam
uslsrayata
3.
vi
f^i
^ ^
i^atisrayat
asisrayan
asisrayatam
ATMANEPADA.
f^ asisraydvahi
asisraye
2.
asisrayathdh
As
in
Greek,
do
forms
However,
is
and
of Sanskrit
the
of
they are
each
and
verb;
are
complicated,
not
number
limited,three
The
As
generalrule
barred
is that verbs
the
of verbs
classes
or
to
rules
the
of
the
adopt.
teach
effectually
can
follow
they take
that
by generalrules
of verbs
which
ending in
roots
fourth form
to
given as
which
grammarians,
unfrequentlycontradicted by
the
from
take
JT
m,
and
roots
aorist,the
roots
which
first
the
form
of the
first aorist,
diate
of the interme-
ending in
^T
of very limited
must
this
aorist,unless
employment
second
the
first form
the
been
authors.
and
specially
prohibited,
unless
have
Sanskrit,too, practiceonly
actuallyoccur
minute
however
usage
in
so
rules
certain verbs
forms
particular
asisrayanta
as'israyetdm
the
asisraydmahi
a"israyadhvam
asisrayethdm
asisrayata
" 380. In
or
may
use
see
follow
"360.
it
are
192
" 381-
FUTURE.
indicated
in
which
Roots
the second
follow
allowed
only,are
which
the roots
are
take
the
form
reduplicated
of
$ 371*
aorist in
the second
so
be
to
aorist
conjugatedin
or
optionally,
first
the
in the
Parasmaipada
the
aorist,subjectto
general
rules.
CHAPTER
AND
FUTURE,
PERIPHRASTIC
CONDITIONAL,
FUTUKE,
XIV.
BENEDICTIVE.
Future.
Terminations.
$381.
PARASMAIPADA.
SINGULAR.
DUAL.
1.
i^*miH
ishydmi
2.
3^4
3.
^Hjfrr
ishydti
(Viishydsi
PLURAL.
Sf^TRJisJiydvah
3pR*{\ishydmah
^3T*Kishydthah
^wfH ishydtha
ishydtah
S^tQTI!
^"4ffl
ishydnti
ATMANEPADA.
The
1.
^$tishy6
2.
^W
3.
^HT ishydte
have
ishydse
the ^ i of
in which
cases
in
stated
been
the
the
See
regulatedby
are
though
ishytie
sfSTcT
^^TTishydnte
^snfaishydmi "c.
the
of the radical
strengthening
their
two
in
and
*r
sa,
see
$ 100
the
seq.
seq.
the terminations
and
futures,the conditional,
of
*(i is
in which
of
the benedictive
givingweightto
the
of certain
peculiarities
base,
verbs.
be learnt
must
peculiarities
sha
be omitted
may
cases
undergoes before
that
generalprinciple,
one
the
or
chapterXII, $ 344
vowel, see
varies accordingto
application
illustrations
be
must
For
seq.
change of
the base
strengthening
tenses,the
Atm.
^f"l ishyddhve
On
^*MIH^
ishydmahe
^^faishyethe
chapterXI, $ 33
$ 340.
changed to ^ ",see
On
ishydvahe
$*MI^
but
by practice,
changed
^TT
few
generalrules
may
here
be
repeated:
1.
Final
e,
$" ai9 ^\
are
to
d;
gai,
to
sing, JllHJlfa
gdsyami, "c.
2.
Final ^ i and
usual
There
are
the
3. Penultimate
^ i, ^u9
^ri, prosodially
short,take Guna;
^ri
becomes
$384-
FUTURE.
PERIPHRASTIC
ATMANEPADA.
1
J*tq
aishyadhvam
aishyathdh
"jwfqit
2.
aishyanta
aisJiyetdm
aishyata
3. JrofiT
aishydmahi
aishydvahi
aishye
PeriphrasticFuture.
" 384.
The
terminations
are,
PARASMAIPADA.
2.
^niPwitdsmi
itdsi
^ruP**
^dl^t itdsvah
itdsthah
$HIW
3.
^cTTltd
itdrau
^rillJ
itdstha
\ itarah
ATMANEPADA.
i.
3.
itdhe
i^HI*"
^ itdsvahe
^fli*3
3[HT""a
^rtl'Uitdrau
terminations
These
suffix for
clearlycompounded
are
forming nomina
and
agentis,
On
On
2nd
retention
the
the
persons,
itdsmahe
and
or
of
strengthening
no
TTT
the
distinction
the radical
gender in
to
the
^ i
or
common
to be.
There
gender in
and
the
3rd person.
i,
see
J 331
seq.
" 382.
vowel, see
*ry^budh,
with
of
of number
intermediate
of
the
(base^ tfn),
verb ^rc^as,
auxiliary
distinction
td,no
omission
of in td
know,
intermediate
i.
PARASMAIPADA.
SINGULAR.
1.
"BM
fVci i Ujf
DUAL.
PLURAL.
bodhitasmi
2.
^tfwrf?? lodhitdsi
3.
"ilTMriI bodhitd
bodhitd'stha
"nPviril^|
bodhitdsthah
bodhitdrau
bodhitdrak
ATMANEPADA.
1.
2.
WTTVffll^bodhitdhe
bodhitdsvahe
"Tl
PMn
bodhitdsdthe
itf
bodhitd'se
bodhitd'dhve
WtfvnTO bodhitd'
rau
3-
without
intermediate
bodhitd'rah
"'.
PARASMAIPADA.
tdsmi
etdsvah
etdsmah
etd'sthah
"ni"J
etdrau
J etdrah
-" 388.
195
BENEDICTIVE.
ATMANEPADA.
i
etdhe
FrT!^
JgrilH^ etdsvahe
^rtlfietdse
"ni"im
2.
etdsdthe
":niCfetdrau
3. ^TTT e/d
etdsmahc
*ni"HC
3711*4
etddhte
"niC
et
draft
Benedictive.
J 385. The
optative. It
so-called
differs from
the
and
the
Ben.
TK,
tions.
"^s before the personaltermina-
an
inf,
Trnrf,
*n*r,
*rnr,
TTT^,1TTO, 1T^,
^IWI,
ydstum,
ydsma,
verbal
In the
"t\*(t{ydst.
seems
In *TH
*JTO,
of the modified
compound
Veda
similar
ydh and
base
compound
the
Atmanepada
and
Pan.
stands
ydsta,ydsuh.
with
second aorist
ancient
an
base
of the unmodified
of
contractions
we
vm.
an
with
an
"n"^y"fos
y^.
73"74.)
2,
beforethe
of the
terminations
have
we
TR}:.
irer,
Tffl^ydt have
or
beginningwith j(Jt
^
additional ^s.
Cf.
optative,
originally
Thus, instead of
$351.
Opt.
3:,
iTTt,
g. T"nstyainstead of
e.
verbal
full modified
1TO,
In the
of
the
analogy to
As the optativeis
der D. M.
close
ydm,
and
in
instead of
TTT^,*TR,
ydsam, ydh,
ancient
formed
actual
Opt.
is
by not admittingthe
optative
the insertion
base,and, secondly,
by
In the
benedictive
t^l"
idhvdm, trdn, we
have
Ben.
siydsthdm,
siydstdm,simdhi, sidhvdm, sirdn.
is really
Atmanepada
optativeof the first aorist. Thus
siy"x,sfshthdh,sishtd,sivdhi,
The
^bhu,
benedictive in the
an
Aor.
HfclMl^bhavishfya; from
Aor.
VN^iMtf
akreshata, Ben.
bases
of the
from
^J stu, Opt.
"S^Arf,
Opt. Atm.
from
Atm.
'
^TT^ArresA^ran.
benedictive Par.:
Denom.
before the
but
Ben. *"ft^nf
chorydsam;
^ft^choray,
in
Atm.
"
chorayishtyd.Denominative
Ben.
^"1"4 1
" 387.
tt
putriydsam; but
The
benedictive
The
benedictive
benedictive
bases in
^y drop ^y
the
strengtheningforms
Atm. ^fWN
fa"qiti
chitydsam,
benedictive
the rules
" 331
takes
intermediate
seq.
a
the
to
weakening, the
($344).
Hence
from
chetishiyd.
Parasmaipada never
Atmanepadagenerallytakes
provided for by
fMMll putriyishiyd.
^cfl
Parasmaipada belongs
to
Atmanepada
f^chit,Par.
" 388.
in Atm.
intermediate ^ i.
^
t.
The
Exceptions are
196
Weakening of the
" 389. Some
benedictive
"
390.
intensive
of the rules
Base
of the base
While,
in the
here be
influence
weakening
Tw, before
the
lengthened(Pan.vn.
fa chi,to gather;
Final
4, 25),but
do
In
(Pan. vn.
vn.
4,
Also in ^n,
as
appears
^smri,to remember
to the
apply
of
benedictive, passive,and
in
ending
important,though
one
3[i,^
u,
^J ri.
Final
intensive,are
benedictive,passive,and
Guna.
28.)
4,
Pj**4H
kriydte. (The
Pass.
^R
(Pan. vn.
ar.
Intensive
^nO^n
has
strengthened
actually
ia
r*
29.)
4,
Ben.
Ben.
to go;
that
27.)
by Guna, and
rules
base, there is
regardto verbs
strengthenedby
kriydt;
(VhHli^
Pan.
chekriydte.,
the
Pass. **ft*tt
chechiydte.
-*ftm'i\chiyd't;
chiydte;Int. ^T^falff
Ben.
Ben.
required in the
base,
is
of the
the verbal
on
terminations
not
^J ri is changed to ft ri.
^ kri, to
y.
which
together with
terminations
rule with
of the
^y
of the
passiveand intensive.
stated
generallyspeaking, the
exercise
beginningwith
beforeTerminations
regulatingthe weakening
Parasmaipada, may
weakening
^i
$ 389-
BENEDICTIVE.
Pass.
Final ^Tn
is changed to
^ftsi,to
He
TJP^s'ay.
does
down; (Ben. $\m\i\sayydt
^", to
lengthen the
Ben.
"#[^uhydt;
Ben.
ti^^iiIT
is
prepositions,
tanydte; Int.
final vowel
it
4,
23.)
their final
WHTI^sdyd't
orW^^anyat;
Pass.^T'Tfl'
sdydteor 'ff^
sany ate;
samsanydte.
khdydt
'^1^41^
^KNI^rt
*\"*njanydtej
or
janjanydte.
"TW^TiT
Pass.
^khanydt;
!?("*{
I
or
khdydte
"sii*ifl
or
"?r*mi
Pass.
n"*\"(^tanydt;
#ay^e
ni"qn
or
n"Mn
ffrT^Rff tantanydte.
a
generalrule,roots ending
into
drop
not
may
or
Ben.
(Pan. vn.
uh.
43.)
diphthongin
or
^^Pmf
or
sdsdydte
khanydte;Int.
In
4,
or
jdjdydte
dig;
to
7^
Pass. Himtijdydte
"P*ffity'arey""
"SfT^m^/ay/jf
Ben.
^*{san,toobtain; Ben.
^*{khan,
to
24.)
(Pan. vi.
tiitiiMrt
shortened
4,
Pass. t4"j^in
samuhydt;
samuhydte.
*F[jan,to beget;
Int.
in the benedictive.
Pass. "Zv"lt
uhydte
Int. **R*fmft
5fi
vn.
after
uh, to understand,
"35^
precedingvowel.
final
Atmanepadin);
22.)
4,
but ^T*\Wi(^samiydt.
\Hit(iydtj
(Pan.
Ben.
go;
not
the verb is
occur, because
not
^TT d:
into
"TT^a,TTTff pdydte,he
\f in
the
is
"Wf
dhyai,UTnTlf
protected. But
passiveand intensive;
in ** ai and
(Pan.
vi.
4,
change
dhydydte.
Roots
the followingroots
66,67, 69.)
then*
ending
change
Par.;
final
and
in
their
keep
-$
*"ghu*,and
The
the
to
s/H
WT
measure
BENEOICTIVE
f.
GERUND.
";"{l"4n
dediydte
IpRl^deyctt
Tf$\H praddya
'ffaTfl'
miydte
*i"il"4H
memiydte
*fami mey""
pramdya
TFTR
stand
to
OMII diydte
IJTddy to give
mdy
followingverbs
INTENSIVE.
PASSIVE.
ITT
197
BENEDICTIVE.
395-
ifbfKgtydte wfanT
l\gai,to sing
prasthdya
^Tf^geycltWmpragdya
jegiydte
TftTftpiydte
^Mlqi)pepiydte
^T Ad, to leave
^I^H Afy"ft"?
^IJInj'eAfyrffe
^Tn^Aey"" HfRpraWya
*ftso,
^^(siydte
tlH)"u)
seshiydte
TRpd, to
"
drink
to finish
The
393.
followingverbs
speak; ^^waptH,
to
"4"iif^
yajddi,i.
e.
those
to
dwell; % vc, to
f^Gf
sut||,to
uchydte;
gerund,and
"i
in the second
in consonants
(Pan.
1.
1,
change
sow
vah, to cany
T^ro*,
rarf,to speak;
the
benedictive,
passive,participle,
As
W^sca
to
grihitdh; Ger.
grihydte;Part. Ji^lfft
JJ^lii
f^T^sish, in
(Pan. vi.
the
aorist.
benedictive,passive,participle,
34.)
4,
f^t?t"shtdh;
Part.
$ishtvd
(31^1
Ger.
VT dhd;
20).
Hence
weakening
not
into ^e
^T^and
fffrnt
^^,
diyate,it is
in the
or
send
to
"JTfrT
ddti,he
i.e.
Pan.
given;
but
belonging to
as
vi.
cuts, and
^mnddyate,
benedictive
sleep,takes
more
optional(Pan. vi.
Par. is
gleydt
or
jpffi^
^fT^T^gldydt.
to
(Kit,Nit,
terminations
4,
24).
Thus
six roots
but
(which is reallywritten
nasal
J ^fl^svdp,
^mfinddy at i,
it is cleaned.
than
68).
one
sonant,
con-
" glai,to
^im^khydydtwmi(khyeyd't.
or
Samprasarana
4,
of
in the
18). ^f^^asushupat.
|| ^^
intensive
svap,
also
f^ifvi takes
or
tt^t?/
Ger. TW
to fry.
VlTS^bhrajj,
ask;
preceded by
before
nasal
comprises the
term
the
I,
the
||.
and
^ir^im^osisAa^.
ending
wither
3$ hve\\,to call;
cover;
Samprasaranain
rule, substitutes
to
he cleans
u^""A
Part. T1K
fijl
Pass. f^PRffsishydte
U|| i^tishydt
;
;
This
20), to wish;
i,
0 '^t$l d jarigrihydte.
gerund, intensive,also
Roots
(Pan.vi.
^t?a/
sacrifice;^*{vap, to
Pass.
J|^IIc^grihydt;
take
to
Tf^prachh,
see
rye,
grihftvd;
Int.
Aor.
104),
to fail; **F^vyadh,
to pierce;"H^t?yacA,
to surround;
take; 'vlfljyd,
Ben
Ben.
4,
grow.
vratch, to cut;
and
(Pan. in.
benedictive
15.)
^t?ye||,to
weave;
|followingverbs
The
" 394.
the
pra*/ya
HFR
following
*H^ yaj.
The
1,
sleep;
to
Pass.T^
T^TTT^McAy^;
Ben.
HW^seydt
Samprasarana in
take
^racA,
VKFlprapdya
Tfrtfl(jpeydt
to
sleep,^tpT
sound, and
to
rye,
take
Samprasarana
fql^n
^PHWIn sesimydte,
(Pan.vi. i, 19); tftMU^ soshupydte,
Samprasarana optionallyin
^THlt^H
sesviydte.%
forms
syam,
hve forms
Int.
the
intensive
(Pan.vi.
^\"*Wjohuydte(Pan.
Mcfclnlf
cheMydte(Pan.vi.i, 21); ^pydy,
vi.
in
the
veviydte.
i,
30);
so"ydtc
^i\a^Mn
I,
33).
In the intensive
^TNTT pepiydte
(Pan.vi. 1,29).
" 396-
PASSIVE.
198
Ger.
Ben. HWi^
srasydt,
^R(srams, Part. "*$: srastdh,Pass. ^TR^ srasydte,
Ben.
Int.T"ft"QR sanisrasydte,
;
fromt^ranj,
^on.^B^dsrasat
srastvd,
Part. t3K raktdh, Ger. TiiT rctoa
(or tw ranktvd, Pan. vi. 4, 32).
Pass. "Tl|ri rajydte,
from
$ 396.
"3u,?$ri
left
are
(f344).
Guna
and
Final
generalrules
the
as
to
Remember,
seq.
^ i,penultimate^ i,
intermediate
in other
ri,too, remains
see
$ 348
particularly
take
not
unchanged,whereas
^ ir,
becomes
to fill,
fq^kship,to throw, ftfml4 kshipsiyd;^pri,
4r.
labials,
^
after
base,$ 344,
that if the
or,
the
of
strengthening
the
Atm.
benedictive
the
regard to
With
Benedictive.
PARASMAIPADA.
1.
budhydsam
"JUJTtf
2.
^TH
3. TURff
budhydh
budhydt
^HITO budhydsva
'3p$m budliydsma
^*HHfl budhydstam
^"irai
J ^M IW
budhydstdm
budhydsta
^*Hi^tbudhydsuh
ATMANBPADA.
1.
'^IfM^^ bodhishiyd
bodhishivdhi
^flfVM'HfV
2.
^fFmflaU bodhisMshthdh
HtlVll^lW
bodhisMmdhi
^Vftml*tf^
^tfVT^?4 bodhishidJivdm
bodhishiydsthdm
bodhishirdn
^i(VfMii5^
"T bodhishiydstdm
XV.
CHAPTER
PASSIVE.
5 397. The
passivetakes
the terminations
of the
Atmanepada.
and imperativeof
optative,
present,imperfect,
to the
by adding IT 2/a
it is in
Div
the
root.
verbs, so
that
This
the
if ya is added
Atmanepadaof
in the
Div
in
^T^ ay (Chur,
Caus.
Denom.
the
ay
passiveare
manner
same
is in
verbs
all
is bound.
before
ya
of
the
passive.
"*tt*n^bodhdy
', to make
chordy"to steal j
**TV"*^
Intensive
without
bases
any
ending
in
^y
intermediate
,
know;
one
^"n
^tWrf bodh-ydte^
he
chor-ydte,he
retain their
1y,
is made
is stolen.
to which
the
lya
of
vowel.
to cut much
to knuw.
3fico*snloluyydte,
he
is cut
much.
the
passive is added
199
PASSIVE.
ending
Intensive bases
in
*^y,precededby
to
qfal^bebkidy,
sever
shine, q^
"fhft
didM, to
^(*iwn bebhidydte,
it IB
severed.
q(V."'
daridrd,to
vevt,to yearn,
^y.
be poor,
drop their
final vowel,
usual.
as
i.e.
it is lightened,
didhi,^teti
^t*ft
didhydte,
$ 400.
As
the
to
benedictive,
J 389
of
weakening
the
it lightens.
base,
the
see
rules
given
for the
seq.
Passive.
SINGULAR.
2.
I.
3.
vj$bhdy6
Impf. *ng$dbhdye
WgW.
Opt. VgWbMyfya
tgWCbMytthdh
VgfrbMytta
*j*tt bhuydsva
*gllft
bhuydtdm
$TH*bhuydse
Pres.
^bMya(
Imp.
"07*bMydte
dbhdyathdh
*T"qTT dbMyata
DUAL.
^q^ bh"ytthe
^T^^lfdbhuyethdm
vgtt^bMydvahe
Pres.
Impf. ^T^lT^f^dbhuydvahi
^4*1^bhuytuahi
*JJJN^
bhtiydvahai
Opt.
Imp.
*"" bhuytte
^J^iff
dbhuyetdm
^Tnrf bhtiyfy"tdm
^iH bhuyttdm
"J5^Rtbhuyfydtkdm
*J^zn
bhuytihdm
PLURAL.
Pres.
^TR^ bhuydmahe
*$$"bhuyddhve
^-qiTbhuydnte
Impf.
^UJTHHf^dbhuydmahi
dbhuyadhvam
^T*J?T5"I
^NJjTiTdbhuyanta
Opt.
^l*lf^
bhuytmahi
^Twt bhuydmahai
^^
bhuytdhvam
V^f^bhuy^ran
^^
bhuyddhvam
^TiTfbhuydntdm
Imp.
Tenses
General
f 401.
certain
the
the
In
the
exceptionsto
generaltenses
be mentioned
of the
therebyfrom
passiveand
retained
the derivative
verbs,which, with
in the
are
certain
passive,
^ya
hereafter,there is
of the
those
which
(vikaranas),
and
of the
generaltenses
the Passive.
of
of
one
in the
the
is
no
dropt,so that,with
distinction between
Atmanepada.The
class-marks
conjugational
specialtenses
only, and
of causative, desiderative,
and
syllables
remain
exceptions,
ifya of
throughout both
it differs
intensive
in the
special
generaltenses.
ReduplicatedPerfect.
The
reduplicated
perfectis
the
same
as
in the
Atmanepada.
Periphrastic
Perfect.
The
periphrastic
perfectis
verbs
auxiliary
as
well
as
^ kri.
as
and
(J342.)
^ bM
the
same
must
as
be
in
the
Atmanepada,but
conjugatedin
the
the
Atmanepada,
200
$403-
PASSIVE.
Aorist.
$ 402.
Verbs
admit
which
The
J 403.
aorist
Atmanepada
(but^r
is
the
from
differing
to be used
in
first aorist
paradigms given
purelypassivesense
Vriddhi
requiring
of medial
consonant.
one
dldv-i.
1
"
,,,.
^T^tfv? abodhishta,
*.
fixed in the
Guna
final,and
of
find
we
dlavishta,
been
has
singulara peculiarform
followed by
lengthened),
of the
forms
three
singular.
is not
ending in ^ i, and
passive,
vowels
without
above, except in
the
conjugatedin
and
Atmanepada,
of
second
be
may
abodh-i.
"
^rfojTT
akshipta,
First Form.
akshep-i.
anay-i.
^T^rTakrita,
akdr-i.
"
^iftjaddy-i.
"
astirshta,
Fourth
Form.
addh-i.
"
adikshata,
TBrf^Tf
Form.
^T*rf^asarj-i.
"
adagdha,
^xv
Second
^HsTTftastdr-i.
"
asrishta,
fc
"
agtih-i.
alikshata,
adhukshata,
^rftrepadhikshata,
"
404. Verbs
ending in
"fTda,
^TT d
or
aleh-i.
"
adoh-i.
"
adeh-i.
"
"H^|ftl
addyi,instead
of
adita.
^fq'ff
in
t, though
may
reappear,
dbodhi;
these
either
case
"c.) drop ^f
the
ay before the
passiveHya,
the
either drop
^^ay
or
retain
original
^P^ay
it,being conjugatedin
of the firstaorist."
or
^MTf^fabhdvi.
fJ abhdvayishthdh,
" 406. Intensive
Int.
Intensive bases
Desiderative
bases
in
T^yadd
the
passive^[i,without
Guna.
^T^t"jftr
abobMyi.
Tft*$l(bobhuy,
bases,likewise,refuse Guna.
Des.
This
Aor. ^R^rfvfa
abubodhishi.
^hf^fbubodhishj
would
passive
verbs may
the passive2[*.
in.
i,
54, 56.
202
" 411-
PASSIVE.
Dual
r.
pers.
-?Hc*lP^Hf^
aldvi-shvahi,
by
the
i aldvi-shdthdm,
Plur.
i.
pers.
^cSfamdl alavi-shdtdm.
"
"
the side of
^TcSTfaTf^aldvi-shmahi, by
"MlP"4Mffaldvi-shata,
Fut.
c^TPM^JIdvi-shye,
by
the
Per. Fut.
^Jc5p^ aldvi-shye.
"
oSlfcrilj
Idvi-tdhe,
Idvi-tdhe.
c^P^ril^
"
fyrP^t^ Idvi-sMya,
f% chi, to
gather,3rd
pers.
-4Mipjjachdyi; hence
^T^P^PM achdyishi,besides
^?^f^ acheshi,"(i.
Fut.
M iP"M^ chdyishye,
^"^ cheshye.
SH^ul acheshye.
Per. Fut.
Ben.
"
^r-cftPnui
achdyishye,
xjiPuHI^
chdyitdhe,
"
^TTT%cheiahe.
"
^iP^Mln chdyishiya,
^"^hl cheshiya.
"
aghrdyi; hence
Aor.
SHmHuPM aghrdyishi)besides
SHUlPu aghrdsi.
Fut.
i||Pi|u)
ghrdyishye,
TTT^ ghrdsye.
Cond.
Per. Fut.
"
Pnul aghrdyishye,
-*{|||
^.syif^
aghrdsye.
"
MlfMril^
ghrdyitdhe,
UMI^ ghrdtdhe.
"
uiPijtflii
ghrdyishiya,
Ben.
l||^^
"
ghrdsiya.
Aor. ^rc^rfcfaadhvdrishi,besides
Fut.
Per. Fut.
t^lfc^dhvdrishye,
"nfbn^ dhvdritdhe,
Ben. "nfbrfa
From
Pass.
Aor.
Cond.
From
e3P^*flnIdvi-shiya.
"
sing.Aor.
dhvdrishiya,
"^.
side of c*P"^tM
Idvi-shye.
Ben.
or
^c-ifMMH aldvi-shata.
"
-flrtlfciui
aldvi-shye,
Cond.
From
aldvi-shmahi.
"
3.
From
"swfV^ng
aldvi-dhvam
^roFfes"r
^K"ifasafaldvi-dhvamor^^dhvam
%.
From
alavi-shvahi.
"Hc*P"iHP^
'HoiiVmvjjaldvi-shdthdm.
"
"
^TcSTfr^Tiri
aldvi-shdtdm,
3.
side of
adhvrishi
^Ifi|f^
or
hence
^ruiftftadhvarishi.
isrftw dhvdrishye.
"
i9%1%dhvdrtdhe.
"
sq^dhvrishiyaorvstfttvdhvarish
"
^"?z,to kill,
3rd pers. sing.Aor. Pass. ^iinP^ aghdni; hence
Aor.
besides
^HlPnPK aghdnishi,
(^
Fut.
MlPn^ ghdnishye,
^Pnul hanishye.
"
Per. Fut.
TfiffTdl^
ghdnitdhe,
Ben.
yifHMl^ ghdnishiya,
"
"
Aor.
^n^tfa adarsishi,
Fut.
^f^^1darsishye,
darsitdhe,
^Pjlrii^
Per. Fut.
^P$|*(hl
dar"shtya,
Ben.
See
besides
"
332,
"
"
"
PyPn avadhishi).
Pan.vi.4,62 t-
^ffrthantdhe.
vadhishiya).
(c|Pififln
Pass.
^f$t adar"i;
^rfP"fadrikshi.
fiss drakshye.
-5^^drashtdhe.
^l
drikshiya.
5.
f Siddh.-Kaum.
vol. n,
p. 270,
seems
to allow
^P*
ahasi.
hence
-J 414.
From
TRyrah,
to
Wil^lfMagrahishi.
Fut.
?rrfT*f
grdhishye,
inf^*fgrahishye.
Fut.
Trfziri^grdhitdhe,
IF"lrikgrahitdhe.
Ben.
yifgiflq
grdhishiya,
i|^1*rlq
grahishiya.
^Klfa ard/we
or
Aor.
Certain verbs of
412.
Thus
"
delight,Caus.
to
JTT^ramay,
Atm.
intransitive
pers.
other persons,
udapatsdtdm,theytwo
(*i\*M
jdyate,he
burns, Div,
is
born, he
form
same
it is
up ; but
regularin
Div
the
i, 60.)
(Pan.in.
"c.
arose,
in the
Atmanepadaof
of the
he sprang
an
("j1u|d
dtpyate,he
(Hu, Par.)"to
sing,present
arose,
"KHfafo aramayishi.
passive^*
the
meaning take
J^Mltyudapddi,he
o^MWini
Pass.
sing.Aor.
pers.
^Tifirfaardmishi, besides
utpadyate(3rd
IrqClff
3rd
t1^ram,
hence
or
an
of
becomes
verb),he arises,
jan
agrdhi; hence
"{{jif]gfa
agrdhishi,besides
weft arami
"
203
INFINITIVE.
Aor.
Per.
From
AND
GERUNDS,
PARTICIPLES,
(Pan.HI. 1,61);
optionally
fM adipi ^"OrMKadipish^a.
Atm.),"*"1
is,Div, Atm.; it cannot be formed from Iffy'an
^l"Tf*T
ajani
beget),
or
^enifneajanishta.
or
""
Bhu,
(TTRff
tdyate,he spreads,
abuddha.
or
of
form
Div
Atm.; really
Tan),"Mlfa atdyi or
atdyishta.
dyate,he
xi"qif"l
grows),
apydyi
of
$414.The participle
of the ten
classes.
droppingthe
which
the Pada
and
rules
(J182).
where
it
of the
cases
was
The
in the
and
H^f?T
be
can
remains
the feminine
if that
Nom.
S.
falls
If the accent
does
participle
Ace.
"T^
the
on
participle
not
H^TT
accordingto general
easilydeduced
in the
and
participle,
the Vikaranas
final ^ i.
base
accent
easilyformed
It is most
Bha
INFINITIVE.
AND
GERUNDS,
the
-"*mrM8 apydyishta.
XVI.
CHAPTER
PARTICIPLES,
or
take
on
the
last
syllable
all Bha
nasal,then
(Pan.vi.
HWTf
syllable
same
"
I,
173.)
Instr. "T^HT
Thus
"c.
bhdvanti
bhdvant
bhdvan
bhdvantam
bhdvatd
tuddnti
tuddnt
tuddn
tuddntam
tudatd
dtoyanti
dfvyant
dirynn
divyantam
dtryatd
204
^K*J"^
Norn. S.
$415-
INFINITIVE.
AND
GERUNDS,
PARTICIPLES,
^TCTIT
Ace.
Instr.
chordyant
chordyan
chordyantam
sunvdnt
sunvn
sunvdntam
"c.
"qioiifi
chordyatd
"c.
tanvdnt
tanvdn
tanvdntam
WtWi^
"BfalF^
"c.
krmdn
krmdntam
krinatd
addn
addnt
adatd
krmdnt
"s^i^
^fifrTT"c.
addnt
am
(" 184)
aJ"^riT
juhvat
jtibvati
juhvat
juhvatam
rundhdn
rundhdnt
rundhdnt
Intens.
*TT*J^T^
"fl*j"if^ ^JTff
"37*j^ni(" 184)
bobhuvat
bobhuvatd
^fatq-^
Norn. S.
takingthe 3rd
accent, with
followed
form
and
1.
the
That
base
Bha
Pada
and
bases,it
vowel,
ending
been
naturallychanged
That, accordingto
countingthe
"3:
the rules
uh,
P. Plur.
Instr.
Sing.
This
sh.
are
best
into
the
" 204.
the
as
it is
forming
by
and
in form
base,it
Bha
In
s,
formed
always
is easy to
the
Anga
Nom.
before
T:
uh,
semivowel.
monosyllabicin
the
3rd
pers.
plur.,insert ^
i.
Sing.
babhuvushd
babhuvdn
ninyuh
ninyushd
ninivdn
tutuduh
tutudushd
tutudvdn
Ace.
Sing.
Instr. Plur.
babhuvddbhih
nintvdmsam
ninivddbhih
tutudvdmsam
tutudvddbhih
didivdmsam
didivddbhih
^nT^TTTTf^T^T^f
^ftonHTfirafg:
"3^fk"
tJl^SlT^
f^r^"ji"^
f^f^t
didivushd
didivdn
^TIj'nTPgJ ^K*(T*Jt4jlit
^TKTn^TMFT^T^
choraydmdsuh
vowel, which,
that
intermediate
babhuvuh
didivuh
be
both
corresponds,
Having
restore
on
bhavishyatd
remembered,
roots
Instr. Hfcufri'l
bhavishydntam
bases, accordingto
in
fa *M rf
participle,
only that
to
principle.
same
reduplicatedperfectmay
of the
be
must
the
on
Ace. H
that tense.
vowel, is changed
Anga
Pada
had
2.
by
the
the
plur.of
pers.
Hftra^
bhavishydn
of
participle
The
b6bhuvatam
is formed
the future
bhavishydnti bhavishydnt
" 416.
rundhatd
am
bdbhuvat
of
participle
The
415.
juhvatd
choraydmdsivddbhih
PARTICIPLES,
3rd
P. Plur.
Instr.
AND
GERUNDS,
Nom.
Sing.
205
INFINITIVE.
Ace. Sing.
Sing.
Instr. Plur.
fTO
sushnvuh
sushuvdihsam
sushuvushd
sushuvdn
cT"jm
7ff"TTF*^
tenushd
tenlvdn
ten lilt
tushuvddbhih
"v
teniva/hsam
fafag:
tenivddbhih
P*iftl"iiti
chikriyuh
chikriytishd
chikriodn
^IJtn
^Nlf^l^
ddushd
ddivdn
*J?^^T
^Sc|[c^
dduh
chikriodmsam
chikricddbhih
ddivdmsam
ddivddbhih
*lf'-ffe*
juhuvuh
juhuvushd
juhuvdn
juhuvdmsam
juhuvddbhih
rurudhuh
rurudhushd
rurudhvdn
rurudhvdmsam
rurudhvddbhih
In five
" 417.
forms
get the following
3rd
the insertion of
verbs, where
P. Plur.
"
is
before ^
Instr.
Nom.
Sing.
Sing.
Ace.
Instr. Plur.
Sing.
or
jaganvdn
jagmuh
jagmushd
jagmivdn
jaghnuh
jaghnushd
jaghnivan or
vividuh
vividushd
vividvan
or
vivisuh
vivisushd
vivisvdn
or
dadrisuh
dadrisushd
dadrisvdn
jagmivdrhsam
jagmicddbhih
jaghnivamsam
jaghnivddbhih
vividivdn
vividvdmsam
vioidcddbhih
vivisivdn
vivisvdmsam
vivifvddbhih
dadrisvdmsam
dadrisvddbhih
or
jaghanvdn
or
dris
" 418.
The
by dropping
of
participle
^T ire, the
^TT"T
substituting
termination
dadire
mdna
for verbs
of
the
3rd
pers.
formed
plur. Atm.,
and
dna.
chakrire
The
dadrisivan
reduplicated
perfectAtmanepadais
the
babhdvire
J 419.
or
^L^M:
"
^?W^n:
"
chakrdndh
daddnah,
^R:
"
babhuvdndfy
Division.
In the First Division
drop the
termination
In the
Second
Atm., drop
*
we
same
the
Division
the termination
The
again take
may
we
may
^nr
optionalforms
likewise
ate, and
run
JfRt
take
mdnah.
the
replaceit by
^TR!
and
through
dnafy.
Bha
cases.
206
AND
GERUNDS,
PARTICIPLES,
J 420-
INFINITIVE.
Second
First Division.
bhdva-nte
tudd-nte
sunv-dte"
bhdva^mdnafy
VRJTR:
"
IJ^TRJ tudd-mdnah
"
Division.
dpnuv-yte
^rnreff
: tanv-dnd
krm-dte
"
tudyd-mdnah
tudyd-nte ^HMt
bhdvdya-nte HN+HM:
Des.
Int.
ad-dte
^f'^HS ad-dndh
"
uhv-ate
^^bubhusha-nte^JWT": bubhusha-mdnah
bodhuyd-nte "^JtWHt bobhuyd-mdnah
^ft^l^
rundh-dte
"
jfftaiFT:
krin-dndfy
"
bhdvdya-mdnah
"
dpnuv-dn*
^MI^HM:
"
sunv-dndfy
g^R:
"
juhv-dnah,
^3^1~*{\
"
%VT"f:
rundh-dndfy
"
"
" 420.
:
in the
mdnah
of
participle
The
is formed by adding
Atmanepada
manner.
same
bhavishyd-mdnafy
bhavishyd-nte ^P^U|Hri!j:
"
neshyd-nte T^iMHRd:neshyd-mdnah
"
i edhishyd-nte ^Puu(H|iii:
edhishyd-mdnah
"
J 421.
of
participles
The
in the
the
same
present
and
future
passiveare
formed
by
manner.
bhdvishyd-nte-bhdvishyd-mdnah
IURT^T: budhyd-mdnah
^i4^budhyd-nte
"
"
ndyishyd-nte ndyishyd-mdnah
Or like the Part. Put. Atm.
"
HT^ bhdvyd-nte"HTsq^R:
Past
The
to
the
the Gerund
formed
masc.
in i^T tva.
by adding
tdh
IT:
or
eft ndb
lundh, cut.
/i","g"T:
"J[
This
termination
or
which
Besides
must
being
termination
tendency to
weaken
$ 423.
MfaHl
The
is,as
that verbs
so
to the
averse
their past
gerund
of
if ta
insertion
always
verbal
most
which
insert ^ i before
ta, having
The
saw,
we
of verbs
root.
7T ^a
much
^ iy so
been
in 7H tah and
^ fai,^r?f:kritdh,done,
root.
neut.
with
ParticiplePassive
passiveis
past participle
The
J 422.
bhdvyd-mdnah
bases.
the
opposed to
may
form
small.
is very
of intermediate
Udatta, is
one
generaltense
one
any
without
participle
it.
The
number
($332, D.)
^ i} the participial
of those
which
have
FTT tva
to
(See$ 344.)
simple verbs
is formed
by adding
the
Tf^pun,
pavitva,having purified.
rules
as
to the
given before.
insertion
With
of the
regard to
the
intermediate
^ i before
?=rT
tvd have
strengthening or weakening of
the
-"
In
Udatta.
not
I. H:
"
the
case
424.
and
ta
always
has
point,it will
this
tvd
iWT
It
18).
2,
on
^ i weakens, with
the
be
venient
con-
as
they agree
together,
to
altogether.
t ah
I F7T
"in
intermediate
intermediate
v;\, with
in certain verbs
it may
3[",
? i.
produce Guna.
In this
Guna
^ftsi,to
specialrules
more
the terminations
take
to
few
givinga
intermediate
(Pan.i.
root
207
INFINITIVE.
tvd without
is that WT
^ i strengthens the
intermediate
AND
GERUNDS,
PARTICIPLES,
430.
lie
^|f"4ni
fayitdh(Pan. i.
down,
avid,to sweat,
sveditdh
^jtyrit
meditdh
mtrf,to be soft,^f^TTJ
19);
2,
(V"lf|!
svinndh
or
$ayitvd.
^ff^HIsveditvd.
31 forai
;
i^ni meditvd.
k thrill. to
to
,
to
,
purify,^f^lf*pavtidh(Pan. I.
with
penultimate T
2,
22) ;
or
may
marshitvd.
20) ; Hf*li"ll
2,
take
not
may
" 426. If
18),or
theyare
intermediate
tod takes
WT
at all events
does
produce
not
^",
it
^5^A:m,
taking intermediate
weakens
base, in ^
viditvd;
Ig^mush, to
to
rud,to
nasal
(Pan.
1.
25);
ruditvd
tjRrqi
2,
7);
2,
same
^crtV,to
23). ^
in any
15). SH*
tvd
Roots
(i.e. ^^pun)y
pu
singleconsonant
2,
26) :
saw,
to
except
to
Ip^cfyttf,
"jfar^T
trishitvd
not
(Pan. I.
*J^gra.h,to
or
37-)
nf^rqitarshitvd.
mrirf,to rub,
8) ;
mriditvd;^TV^urfA,
to
"jH;i"ii
speak,
to
and
nasals
WT
tva, without
lengthen their
vowel
intermediate
2,
24);
i.
r^T ted
(Pan. vi.
4,
sdntvd.
rest, ^TTTr:sdntdh,T^rfi^T
step, may
or
to
in
endingin
Arram, to
JfP{
4,
(Pan. i. 2,
exist,qfrfrti
to pluck (Pan. I.
appliesto the roots ^^vafich,to cheat, and rJ^/ancA,
vanchitvd
vachitvd.
^f-Hr^
or
I
" 429.
ai.)
dwell, ^fm^fiushitvd.
ending
WT
2,
to thirst
option appliesto Jfitrish,
same
2,
i.
optionally(Pan. i.
steal,^fm^lmushitvd
II. Kl tah
vi.
shining.(Pan. i.
klisitvd;
to hurt, f^iP^IHI
gudhitvd;
JjPviHI
f^iS^"fr/,
^vad,
uditvd;'3R(vas,to
WT
cry,
mriditvd(Pan. i.
delight,ijf^r^T
cover,
The
been
mediate
inter-
ending
Guna
dyotitvd
dyutitvLThe
or
shine,tflfriril
'^PriHl
to attenuate
(Pan.
and
consonants,
"31u, take
"3",
bear;
before Tf fa with
of the base.
weakening
any
has
requires,as
vartitvd.^^srams,to fall,tjiftfrm
sramsitod
sfqrqipavitvd
(Pan. i. 2, 22).
purify,
to
Guna
156.
used
impersonally.
Pnn dyotitdm,
it
to shine, ^fnndyutitdm or iTl
Wi{dyut,
^
No.
may
lengthen
not
krdntvdor
followingroots, ending
in
its vowel
before
i^T tvd
(Pan. vi.
kramitvd.
"air^T krantvd;also ^iP"irGU
nasals, drop them
before
WJ taA and
WT
fp"
4,
18).
208
PARTICIPLES,
GERUNDS,
AND
" 431-
INFINITIVE.
to
'%*fkan,
go,
to
ending
Note
and
Of
"
insert
the
nasal
"
in
verbs those
same
ending
431.
the other
"^^van, to
class,
5^w.
the
The
to
'
TlTt
namt
J"znhatvctj
T* gam,
kill,^TfTtAafrfA,
to
4,
11*171
in
"^w drop
the nasal
in
1(m may
or
drop
not
may
pragdtya or WFRtpragdmya.
vowel.
to
1.
ending
in
t|cM,
or
(Pan. vi.
"3iw.
19.)
4,
f^div,to
to
,
play,fpTJdyunah,
dyutvd.
Roots
2.
ending
l^murchh,
"
^i
The
432.
to
^r", drop
or
4,
faint,^J murtah;
verbs change
following
(Pan. vi.
u.
"^rc^A,
in
their
^v
with
to
Roots
21.)
precedingor followingvowel
into
20.)
" 433.
the
*{r"T
jurtvd;13Ttvar,
4,
#wr", to strike,wftjturnah.
ail,*T*!fcjurnah,
to
,
(Pan. vi.
to
to
*8*{av,
w^a;
wrqi
substitute
d; ^
ai
^TT
I ," T
are
"
434.
The
roots
change
following
c?z^a
f^TTt
f^rfl
rf"7"^,
do, to cut,
5toa;
*TTma, to
(Pan. vn.
4,
into
40) ; ^ftso,
(*ii"l!
ftlft
mitvd;
rnzYa/^,
measure,
i.
to
finish,ftfWJsitah,
l"l
(Pan. vn.
Ai^a
(^*T:Mwa^), f^r=lT
Az^a
(Pan. vii. 4, 43).
'JJTWo,
to sharpen,and ""t
chho, to cut, substitute ^ i,or
4,
42); ^T M,
to
leave
" 435.
$ftso, %JT:AVa^
or
si'^a
sdtah,f^JHI
^TTrT:
sphdy,to
/ai,to
up
to
,
vi.
i,
^FRii'KJ
sphitah(Pan. vi.
i,
4,
46).
22).
Mfeilri:
prastitah(Pan. vi.
i,
i, 24,
grow,
^ft"Tt
s^a^,
sinah,and ^ftrT"
cold
but
'H^flT^Jsamsydnah, rolled
25).
forms
but
fft^lpinah;
"OfR:
pydnah
after certain
prepositions(Pan.
28).
41).
54).
2,
curdle,forms
(Pan. vi.
4,
a.
(Pan. vin.
(Pan. vii.
$llrilsa^a
forms
grow,
or
the regular^TT
take
See verbs
verbs which
without
take
Samprasarana
intermediate
3[t.
(" 332,
13, and
be
WT
mentioned
taahave
been
the final
3[" and
16.)
dropt,and
suttah.
of
210
PARTICIPLES,
AND
GEKUNDS,
" 443-
INFINITIVE.
an
^T7f:bhugnah.
beginningwith
6. Verbs
ending in
and
double consonant,
d, or
^1
J?
e,
T*
at,
57);
2,
"%^,
^TT
changeableto
in
participles
and
*""pilr,
while
with
then
optionalform
an
of
participle
T^priis
the
^far:kshinah, from
"s^,
be
in
^Nr: hrmafy
"
443.
their
Native
and
sinah
^fhr:
ashamed;
with
contact
grammarians
take
2,
from
27);
2,
2,
57);
to
f^.dit;,
lagnah,from
cIP^Tt
18); also
(Pan.viu.
words
certain
enumerate
from
c^T
be
c*^ laj,to
rather
than
56).
2,
which, though by
participles
as
are
place of participles,
the
if derived
9^H:
hritah, ashamed
^tlf:
or
*
dyutah)
;
(Pan.vii.
grot
dytinah,from
^R:
In
optional;
(Pan.vii.
^fTTHptiritah
be trS:purtah (Pan.
viu.
waste;
it is inn
said to
to
is
^S: ptirnah,only
wa/L-
"T:
2,
khydtah.
proclaim,WTW:
to
7. Miscellaneous
(Pan.vin.
^n
faded.
43) 5 fl^fl*"JJW gldnafy,
dhydtah (Pan.viu.
o,
being a semivowel,
of them
one
by
their
formation
to
be
"T^itpakvdh, ripe;
"tflRtkshdmdh,weak',
H tctl
1 1prastimdh
206);
(Pan.vi.
dry
i,
T"$Kkrisdh,thiYi',
^^ilsushJcah,
classed
substantives
or
adjectives
as
participles.Thus
as
kshivdh,drunk,
crowded; "J^:phulldh,expanded; isffat
"c.
being
and
"T nay
in fact
who
has
done,
but
kritavdn, he has
katam
take
IT ya
*"3\bMtva,we
j 446.
Verbs
conquer,
forms
Pan.
gambling;
a
the
mat
as
definite verb.
feminine
in the
or
fTrepTT^^kritavat.
They
are
^
*rr
regularly
viu.
see
verbs, but
not
in "q ya.
verbs
the
precededby
negativeparticle
ending in
short vowel
take
fartijitva,
having conquered;
in
throughout like adjectives
j 445. Compound
to
Thus
is formed,
occurrence
generallyused
made
Gerund
^T a,
common
very
participle
perfectactive.
kritdvdn,one
sa
of
participle
new
participles
the
but
but
tya instead of
f%fww
2, 49, allows
tJ"Tcfywwain
Dhatupatha 26, i.
all
senses
?J"Tdyuna
pain,Dhatupatha
and
33, 51.
of the root
ya.
f*f
vijitya. ^ bhri,to
TRsfaprakshiya,
having destroyed(Pan.vi.
if
4,
f^
kshi,
Except frsy
59).
div,except in that of
"4P".^H(
paridyuna, pained,
come
from
having
caused
^ ( (Pan.vi.
to
to
4, 69).
or
agamy
or
^m,
to
"T^"am,
WT
measure,
But TRpd,
prasthdya.
sthd,HWR
to
wf\ftpraptya(Sar.).
of intermediate
admit
do not
which
or
H"u
bow, Vk*$+*\prandmya
dgdtya.Other
WMIi^
to the Tan
belonging
"SfR
or
prapaya
to
avaddyaOT
Jim*f
Ex.
*),*TT md,
^T hd, to leave,?ft*o,
protect,
to
or
endingin
*Tm.
\i,
tan, nnm
"ifr^
or
suffix^H{ ay
drink,may form
^SMIW|
causative
4,
droptheir
(Pan.vi.
to
short
having caused
singor
with
211
ADJECTIVES.
VERBAL
verbs
pru
", may
ndtya
or
may
T^^am, to
not
go,
of intermediate
not admitting
endingin nasals,
class,always
drop their final nasal. Ex. ^Aan, Tf"lprahdtya;
pratdtya^.?f"^khan
v"[janform
and
^n^I
khdnya or
khdya,
^TT
j/ya.
verbs
^p
are
into
fr tr,and,afterlabials,
change itto
"3Rdr.
Ex.
having filled.
sampurya,
in
irregular
taking Samprasarana.
not
Thus
ve, to weave,
Wmpravdya;
upajydya ^vye,to cover, H"**m pravydya,
^ft^^IparivJy
^ f^^M
but after ijftpari
I*1parivydya
(Pan.vi. i, 41"44).
optionally
*ft
he
rntndti,
mf, ^liifff
" 452. Some verbs change final ^ i and ^" into ^TT d. Thus
forms
"^\jyd,to
d M
fail,
N
-rt|
or
to destroy,
and fH mi, f*l"l\fff
mindti,he throws,form f"i*ii*i
nimdya; ^ ctf,
destroys,
c5^/I,to
upaddya;
or f=ic4l*lt?i%a
f"lc6l*Ttn/tfya
(Pan.vi.
melt,optionally
CHAPTER
XVII.
ADJECTIVES.
VERBAL
Verbal
in
Adjectives
cf^:
^tfhi:aniyah,a/w/ IK yah
tavyah(ortavyah),
(oryah
" 453-
and
yah).
in meaningto the
adjectives
(called
Kiitya)correspond
Latin participles
in ndus,conveying
the idea that the action expressed
by the
verbs ought to be done or will be done.
"*uul4Ukaraniyah,
"*ri^: kartavyah,
cfir":
"F^: dharmas tvaydkartavyah,right
kdryahJ, faciendus. Ex. VHMm
is to be done by thee.
rare
These
i, 50-51).
verbal
ifH3(*H*i1
irfHHfn:I rPJ
^fcTCg^rWT
t Versus memorials
of these verbs
% Another
is ^cOT
forming verbal adjectives
occurrence;
suffix for
to
Tf^pach,
brickie,fragile.
bhidelimali,
(Pan.in.
E
i, 96,vart.)
2
which is,however, of
eliinah,
212
J 454"
In order
future,and
Thus
instead
gai,to
to
f^Tjz,
sing
the
periphrastic
^TW^ft ddtdvyah
gdtd
TTrf^J
gdniyah
gdtavyah
*?ferTT
bhavitd
t bhavaniyah
bhavitavyah
do
^eyaA
'TO
*m*f\q:jaya
STcT^K jetavyah
conquer
of kri,to
tavyah, take
ffst,:
TTtfT
*".bhu,to be
to
/rl,
in
adjective
the
^THT ddtd
to give
^T c?o,
n
form
to
$454-
ADJECTIVES.
VEEBAL
: kdryc
karantyah
kartavyah
old
grow
kshvid,to
kshveditd
sweat
budh, to
^J"I
know
kshvcdyah
kshvedaniyah
kshveditavyah
V*t1**ibodhaniyah
"Hf^l
H'"MJ bodhitavyah "ft
bodhitd
i,to draw
kuchitd
meeze
mih, to
sprmkle
"nV,to
gantavyah
rashtd
drashtavyah
^FT damshtd
damshtavyah
see
uchyc
medhavyah
'TTfT Crania
hs, to bite
Caus.
medhd
T^T
to go
P"iri**|:kuchitavyah ^^l"fl"4t
kuchaniyah
'^i
darsaniyah
"
damsaniyah
,to
to be
cause
bhdvayitd
bhavaniyah
bhdvyah
^rcfhr.
I^T:
bubhushitd
bubhushanfyah
bubhushyah
bobhuyitd
bobhuyaniyah
bobhuyyah
^riH"f"f)^;
"nH"qt
bobhavitd
bobhavaniyap,
bobhavyah
to
I^bubhush,
wish
to be
Int.-sft^bobhu
Int.
^i^^rflu:
^fftrir
bebhidy
bebhiditd
"455. In
order
sufficient to take
intermediate
^nl^t
aniyah have,
be
causative
and
verbs
;
are,
no
it appears
as
before
course,
occasion
the
adjectivein ^Trfhj:aniyah, it
the
the
for the
inq:
before
Guna-vowels
intermediate
after consonants
generally
however,
tavyah,omitting,
instead.
semivowel
is
The
3[ i.
of intensives
and
^n( ay
other
of
the
derivative
yah
usual, rejected, '^^budh,^tvqfif bodhayati,^tVTfat bodhani-
as
f"?"*
bebhidaniyah.
bhidy"srftrenr
bebhidyate, "3rf*r"*rffan
" 456.
1
karshtd
Never
This
the root
^ i, and
can
there
form
to
bebhidyah
bebhidaniyah
In
or
order
krashtd.
takes
termination
Guna
is
to
form
the
adjectivein
irt
"c.) it
yah (i"jinyat,
karshtavyahor krashtavyah.
" 456, 3.
which
have
or
is
-$ 456generallysufficient
ani.
Thus
adjectivein
the
take
to
213
ADJECTIVES.
VBKBAL
becomes
HqHl*T. bhav-am-yah
^nffar.aniyah and
Final
1.
^TT
itaai,
Final
2.
few
be
a,
e,
*ft o, become
cz,
^z
and
Guna,
take
conquered, different
destroy,^^: ksheyah,
vi.
81).
i,
changed
Final
to
*r^
and
after
or,
avy
bhdvyah
be
as
Final
pure.
^
3. Final
m^
^friHl
before
Vriddhi
i^gu,
^"r"
instead
of
before
vi.
to
filji,^W.jeyah,
the
as
when
^^^m"":
or
sound, 'NHl
ya/t,but
wA:
Guna.
before
uv
of
high degree
bhavyah
T^
(Pan.
circumstances, are
same
avafya,
H*i:
destructible
kshayyah,
Tspzn
wsr^r
*r:
65.)
4,
to
give, ^itfdeyah
^T rfd, to
under
^,
if it appears
"nya;
and
be mentioned
to
here
vpfaaniya;
from
15
have
98;
i,
^m:
different
"f|i|Hl"j:
bodh-ani-yah, ^m:
e.
before
as
from
(Pan.in.
sing,*m: geyah.
to
^i
specialrules, however,
more
off
cut
bhavyah; ^rfffffar.
chet-ani-yah,
H*n
to
avasya-
Brahman
must
guvaniya, i^Qguya.
before
not
kdryah ;
trnfc
w"fN:
aniyah, take
(Pan,in.
pdryah.
i,
124.)
120,
4. Penultimate
Guna
ri, which
before
(Pan. in.
^:
with
yaA,
no).
takes
Guna
few
vfiMlq:aniyah, does
before
take
not
But
to do, forms
to
W"T.
kalpyah; ^(^chrit,
tf^krip,
kill,^5: chartyah (Pan.in. i, no) ; ^vrish, to sprinkle,
^q: vrishyah
or
i,
varshyah (Pan.in.
^q:
i,
120),
Penultimate
^^;
becomes
^re
ferity"|i^: kirtyab.
c|7^
5. Penultimate
and
^e
take
g'w
fs^vid,^ivedyah;
6. Penultimate
^r a,
is
aniyah,
i,
remains
*T?T.
derived
Panini
forms
from
short
The
in
^sah,
WTt
^ khai,
Sarasvati
final
laugh,
^pw:
to bear
to
dig ;
yah,
cyK
/a6A,
from
(Pan.in.
i,
hant
i,
w?ffan aniyah;
among
vah,
(Pan. in.
vdhyah.
TRH
The
labhyah.
c?"i:
labial
^a^,
99),and
vadhyah
W.
^^
the
char, 1H
Sakadi
verbs,
in
other verbs*.
Tmq:
yam,
^J
able ;
be
to
some
or
WH*N:
before
not
(in. 7, 7) includes
is
hdsyah
fakyah,
but
consonant
*TRm:
kheyah (Pan.in.
preposition.
to
the
^"0^ sapyah
curse,
sahyah, from
^f^khan
has,
likewise
before
ij: ya/^,as
$fta:soshyafy.
yj^tush,
lengthened,unless
$r^ s"jo, to
before
prosodiallyshort, before
98; 124); ^
But
Guna
be
may
ghdtyah.
if used
$T^
without
s'ak,^
sah,
214:
VERBAL
The
" 457.
guh, to
3Ji|
followingare
hide, may
"Jf*TT
brahmodyd kathd,
find
We
verbs
story told
^T^
107.
i,
udyah,
1, 109,
Kasika);
?J^graJi,to
op*/
in
by
Brahman)
*J,bM,
106; 114.
i,
be, "JIJbhuya, in
to
brahmabMyamgatah,"Yr\.ved atBrahmahood)
TH*
rule, f^T^T*
s'ishyah,
pupil.
to
^T^sas,
yah, formed
form
cherish,^fmijushyahj
to
derivatives in *tt
few
" 457-
ADJECTIVES,
IT " inserted
before
*l" f/a$,in
analogy
to the
in 1
gerunds
jra, in the
following
^ i, to
go,
^mt ityah; ^
praise,^JW* stwtyah-
S^M" *"
choose,
to
"3^vri,
^WJ vrityah;
c?n, to regard, ^Wt drityah; *[ Z"^ri,to bear, ^m: bhrityahj *" kri,to do, ejfiq:
"""
But
krityah.
considered
following 1
bhuj, to
occur
g^i:duhyah
ch
verbal
regular
and
change their
"^./
or
bhogyam,
of
pravach,
the
gutturals. Likewise
(Prakriya-Kaumudi,p.
base
has
The
before
the
infinitive
the
K*n\
(See J 454.)
Krishna
55
and
if the
pdkyamj
Hin"w
(Pan. vn.
69).
3,
do
guttural
^pT
admit
not
^^^fl/,TR^ydch,^T^rMcA,
that
pass.,
;
from
twice
over.
eaten, he goes
the
verbal
KT
ta
of the
tydjyam,
wirq
Verbal
Adverb.
the
J 403),a
pd,
verb
verbal
to
(Pan.in.
vrajati,he
goes.
22).
to
see
verbal
This
*p^ bhuj,
vfof 33Tfcf
adverb
is most
bhojam vrajati,having
It is likewise
divided
passive^
From
Ex.
general
as
the
is formed.
?T"ffiT
*ThT "rftf
bhojam
4,
which,
before
assumes
adverb
goes
eat.
drink, irnipdyam.
first eaten, he
Ex.
accent.
no
periphrastic
future,or
suffix ^f am,
unaccentuated
which
has
bodhitum.
adjective. "|*rbudh, ^ftfVTJ
to
in
which
by adding g to",
is time
form
archyam,
Thus
turn.
dvaidhamkdram, having
compounds; %VcfiTt
loudly.
pravdchyam, W3?
kdlah,it
bhojam vrajati,having
frequentlyused
eaten
is to be eaten
drashtum
of the
agre
"^Spach,
^affrr krishnam
bhoktum
means
to
the
^ratf
^
"RTc5:
added
of
tdvyah
(3rdpers. sing.aor.
to
vowel.
'T ^
or
b).
before
as
be
and
^TJ guhyah
into cF A:
beginningwith
n"4 \ "*!
is formed
form
same
Ex.
"f
J 460. By
rule, is
final consonant
following verbs:
in
Infinitive
The
not
must
^^vanch(to go).
^H^ aj, '3*{vraj,
^^ricJi,m*{tyaj,'%*{puj,
J 459.
and
senses,
adjectives.Thus
";ft5*f
bhojyam, what
but
in certain
"ftT?n
dohyah, "c.
substitution
TR^
the
only used
are
(nycit)
requiresthe lengtheningof the
ya
enjoy,"rW
There
the
both
ending in ^T
Verbs
forms
supplanting
as
*fltjn
gohyah
" 458.
of these
many
used
at the
end
of
TincRTt uchchaihkdram,
-"
46"-
CAUSATIVE
CHAPTER
XVIII.
CAUSATIVE
vowel, and
of their radical
treated
^Tir ay
as
Thus
a.
^V
The
accent
is
the
on
of
mfa
that
of
^i
bhdvi
final ^ i.
The
in the
appears
and
Guna
by
Vriddhi
root
is then
specialtenses
bhdvdyati,he
^T^Trrif
qtaiifribodhdyati,
he
and
or
to
causes
know.
to
causes
as
which
the vowel
either Guna
takes
Vriddhi
or
are
as
Final
Thus
to
^plu,to
swim,
V^bhu,to
"i i q
Medial
""5" followed by
makes
swim.
vedayati,he
to know, q^n
t?fc?,
Thus
budh,
fU
makes
^T
followed by
singleconsonant
to sit,*u^*ffn
TfffJ
sac?,
sddayati,he
to scatter.
is
take
Guna;
^rf
becomes
know.
makes
he causes
to cut, ^R"4ifl kartayatiy
A;ri/,
^Tff
he
to be able, "n"4Mfnkalpayati,
JSj^klip,
3. Medial
to make.
singleconsonant,
to
be.
to
causes
lead.
to
causes
"4 fff
pldvayati,he
bases
dya.
accordingto
rules
causal
the addition
^fv bodhi
a
into
class,so
becomes
\^bM
becomes
budh
be ;
by
Bhu
followingthe
VERBS.
changed
are
215
VEBBS.
to
know.
cut.
renders fit.
lengthened,but
there
are
many
exceptions.
sets.
fall,^TTHifir
pdtayati,he fells.
to
Exceptions:
endingin W^aw
verbs
I. Most
do not
Verbs
in
kram, to
stride,ai^MPn kramayati,he
do
which
^X^am
lengthen the
vowel
kdmayate, he
to desire,4rH^?f
cli^Jtam,
go.
causes
to stride.
are,
desires; Caus.
cFTTTfiTkdmayati, he
makes
desire.
^SW am,
^*T
wiTn amati, he
to move,
cAam,
,
but
to
if it
eat, ^nrfTTchamati,he
means
but
to see,
it
means
eats ;
Caus.
^i*iMPndmayati,he
makes
SIH*lfHchdmayati,he
sees;
Caus.
makes
move.
eat.
^n*mf" sdmayati, he
shows;
quiets.
to eat,
*IH*|(Hyamayati,
; Caus.
^IIWjflT
sdmyati,he
^nPjflrr
samayati, he
unless
moves
he extends;
Caus. ""i*iMfiiyamffyaf"*,
Tf^fftyachchhati;
he feeds.
216
CAUSATIVE
"TH nam,
*f1*1*4fr ndmayati
vowel
^^vam,
"i*f^Pff
namayati, he
or
to remain
always ought
short
(Dh.
if it is used
bends.
P. 19,
the vowel
^*T*tfrf
vamayati,
or
class of verbs
collected
19, i),do
lengthentheir vowel.
not
in the
vowel
3rd
contains the
pers.
by
native
sing,aorist
19,
verbs
same
of the causative
these
preceded by
If
vomit.
(Dh. P.
The
without
preposition
;
the
preposition,
67).
grammarians, and
important among
more
he makes
short
to remain
always ought
If
if it is used
to
q"*i"4Pn
vdmayati
II. A
its vowel
bend, optionally
lengthens
to
$462-
VERBS.
verbs
without
preposition;
precededby
preposition,
67)*.
ftf ghat (Dh. P.
beginning with
may
passive(" 405).
followinglist
CAUSATIVE.
Eoot.
1
THf
ghat
2.
3rd
Pers.
to strive
fear
vyath,to
TEf"2[
mrad,
aghati
vyathayati
'
to be famous
3. Tf^prath,
4.
Passive.
Par.
ghatayati
^T^T
Sing.Pres.
to rub
avyathi
prathayati
aprathi
mradayati
amradi
akrapi
5. "a^ro;), to
pity
krapayati
6. FTC
hurry
tvarayati
atvdri
jvarayati
ajvari
7.
"yar, to
with
burn
W^j^"r,to
fever
'
natayati
to kill
^T*^*rfltfA,
10.
^prJtMm,to actf
11.
*3c*jval,to
12.
13. ?
to
smn,
shine
srathayati
pravanayati
"f"
prajvalayati
fc^prdjvali
H 1 5e|"I
or
asmari
smarayati
regret
c?n,to respect,
(notto tear)
";""4fa
darayati
srapayati
^TOTnJ
or
to
to slay,to please,
15. '^TTjna,
adari
^i.
or
asrapi
%i9rftf
ajnapi
or
to perceive
sharpen (?),
1
6. T^
cAa?,to tremble
17. T^ mac?, to
1
8.
chalayati
"c.
rejoice,
sound,
"el^c?^aw,to
to
madayati
ring
achali
or
amadi
or
dhvanayati
adhvani
or
19.
^"^ dal,to
cut
dalayati(optional)
or
adali
20.
^W
cover
valayati(optional)
or
avali
vaZ, to
21.
to drop
Hdc^skhal,
22.
W^trap,
23.
"^ kshai,to
*
to be
skhalayati(optional)
ashamed
trapayati
Dhatupatha
19,
only,
nothing
t
mit
optionally
else.
Without
seems
(i.e.short-voweled),while
^TGtlPM atrapi
or
^HJtP'if
akshdpi
67.
^MHI*i5IT^ft)It
"iIT^
-^ '""riM
are
or
"jM"4flT
kshapayati
wane
'iHjaiPco
askhali
or
and
preposition,
optionallywith
with
prepositionsthey
Grammar,
a
without
p. 317, note.
preposition.See
note
*.
prepositions
are
mit, and
218
collect,f^nftfif
chinoti; Caus. *nnqP7T chdpayati,or
6. fa chi, to
^rqqPd chdyayati,he
(Pan.vi.
to collect.
causes
54.)
i,
he
^m^Prf chhdyayati,
Caus.
regularly
7.
chhyati;
^ chho, to cut, "SFlfw
8.
Caus. *wwfajdgarayati, he
to be awake, W*tf%jdgarti;
*R*[jdgri,
9.
to conquer,
-ftr/i,
makes
he
1 1
he
*wfajayati;Caus. vWFtfnjdpayati,
^fr^Tdaridrd,to
10.
12.
be
poor,
daridrdti
^ft^rfrT
doshayati,he
^faqfif
Caus.
dushayati,he
^^qfcf
(Pan.vi.
vpai, tfTOfwpdyati, to
to protect,mfa pdti;
iCTjt?^,
TTTPptrfTT
pdyayati,he
Caus.
be
6.
to love, Tfanfir
iftpri,
prindti;
7.
bhrijjati
; Caus.
^R3^bhrajj,to roast, ^J^5rflT
19.
f?Tm^
to
Caus.
2,1.
^
he
causes
iftmi, to
to
ufaffriyate;Caus.\cnrflT
repayati,he
to go,
grow,
T^frrrohati;
to grow.
(Pan.vn.
3,
43.)
root
24. "3ft
vz, to
to make
means
25.
obtain,^fk #e^
^ve, to
conceive.
if it
PrTvdjayati,
Caus. ^Tq^rfiT
vdpayati or
(Pan.vi.
I,
cover,
Pd linayati,
55.)
causes
^^(vyayati;
Caus.
he
^[T^?(vydyayati,
sad, to fall,
^ftrrwsiyate; Caus. ^iri^Pri
$dtayati,he
(Pan.vn.
3,
$fts""
31.
to succeed,"teqfrr
sidhyati;Caus.
fw^sidh,
but
32.
*f)so,
sharpen,^irfcf
syati; Caus. ^ll^^Pri
sdyayati,he
to
fells ; but
cover.
choose.
not, if
42.)
30.
to
weave.
to
causes
29.
move.
to
he causes
to choose,fjififnvlindti;
jj^tf/z,
Caus.^qqfftvlepayati,
to
shakes.
^nitrfifvdyayati,if it
28.
it means
1,48;51.
he
means
/a,also
c5T
; seePan.vi.
weave,
vfi^ ^
flow.
makes
"|^qPffrohayati, ft^rfffropayati,
Caus.
to
56.)
destroy,PHHlfrimindti, form
23. ^T^a,
I,
T:tri, to flow,or
22.
he makes
^r^irflTbhrqjjayati,
gi^ 6Ary.
^o.
ruh,
drink;
to
causes
he delights.
iftTprfif
prinayati,
Caus.
from
"TWTfif bharjjayati,
their Caus.
to shake.
causes
also regularly
Hl^^lfdbhdyayati. (Pan.vi.
frightens;
he
sin ;
to
causes
Caus.
fear5f^Hfirbibheti;
shine.
dry.
roast, or
to
causes
91.)
4,
Caus. VfT^rfwdhunayati,he
pibati;
14. JJTjoa,to drink, ftRfiff
8. tft bhijto
daridrayati,
^(X.$qfr
he
^fanifrr
didhayati,
demoralizes.
dhunoti
to shake, "JrftflT
13. i^dhu,
15.
rouses.
to conquer.
causes
Caus.
to sin,g^fff
dushyati;
"j^dush,
also
Caus.
to cut.
causes
poor.
didhite
^hftc?^2, to shine,^hflrf
also
" 463-
VEKBS.
CAUSATIVE
causes
to
sharpen.
Tnwrfifsddhayati,he performs;
acts.
he
sdyayati,
causes
to
destroy.
-$ 466.
CAUSATIVE
^pc sphur,
33.
^Mttmfh sphorayati, he
^ORnsphdy,
34.
to
to
makes
WN^fri
smdyayati) he
Arz, to be
%Ave,
38. -^Aa/i,
J 464.
class, there
is
verbs
retain
formation
of the
imnifiT ghdtayati,he
in
^ kri, as
verbs
the
kdraydnchakdra,
($ 342) ;
-chakre
Fut.
J 465.
If
causative
remains
ohliVfr
kdryate,he
grow.
The
verb
the
same
is made
In
get
forms
Fut.
Cond.
Per.
Fut.
Ben.
First
Aor. 1.
the
auxiliaryverbs
causative
^n^
ay
may
or
bhdvayishye or
mfV^
iHmcjfijuJi
abhdvayishye or
HNfrdlf! bhdvayitdhe or
MHfrtflJI bhdvayishiya or
1.
p. ^MHfufa
2.
p. ^WNfuai:
3. p. ^Wli^
abhdvayishi or
the
p.
ruh, he
-ta ;
Fut.
Pres.
is made
regularly.
to
The
Atmanepada.
n
ya
not
of
the
reappear,
198, note):
bhdvitdhe.
Hlf^ril^
bhdvishiya.
^MtfVf^ abhdvishi.
or
Atm.
Hence
bhdvishye.
Mrf^mln
and
dropt (J399),
^HHifVuj abhdvishye.
abhdvayishthdh
abhdvi.
ay is
formed
may
the
Opt.
^n^ay.
CT
in the
throughout (seeColebrooke,
^mfrut
with
where
bases, and
kdrayishishta.
passive,^m
been
and
akdrayishyat, -ta;
"^,
imperative are
the
($401),the
two
have
Chur
achikarat,
imperfect,optative,and
disappears
thus
it would
Like
Pres. Par.
"*!Ml?
wtfft\kdrydt
;
in the
Chur
Perf.
^obKf"Mm,
to be used
as
to
perfectis periphrasticwith
J 466.
has
Red.
iH^cfc^, "u
Cond.
the
of
of their
causative, forms
Aor.
kill.
perfect periphrastically.
formation
-tdm
call.
form
is the
kdrayatu,
Imp. cFTC^, "lff,
-ta ;
makes
to
to
causes
"ZFUMfrf,
"7fr,
kdrayati,-te; Impf. %4"*im^, "J[, akdrayat, -ta;
kdrayet,
he
causes
complete paradigm.
they
verbs
Thus
aorist.
and
causative
he
are
Parasmaipada
in
only difficulty
The
^Mlfffhrepayati,
grnHTfo hvdyayati,
Caus.
throughout, except
^n^ay
astonishes;
he
smdpayate,
smile
no
benedictive
the
causes
36.)
verbs
causative
As
they
3,
kill,T$fnhanti; Caus.
to
WIM^
Caus.
causes
call,^[^hvayati;
to
fidjihreti; Caus.
faff!
ashamed,
(Pan. vu.
ashamed.
37.
and
grow.
also
36. ^
sphdrayati
miiqqfa sphdvayati,he
Caus.
sphdyate;
WHTUTT
grow,
tuUUlfd
sparkle.
35.
Caus.
sphurati ;
sparkle, FJ*f?r
to
219
VERBS.
^wif^8T: abhdvishthdh.
passive
and
we
220
XIX.
CHAPTER
DESIDERATIVE
will have
of which
the peculiarities
by reduplication,
and
separately,
wish
bubhush, to
be, ^^
to
VERBS.
formed
are
treated
to be
^bh49
from
Thus
bases
Desiderative
$ 467.
" 467-
VERBS.
DESIDERATIVE
by adding ^
to be.
The
the
to
is
accent
root.
the
on
syllable.
reduplicative
bubhu" 468. These new bases are conjugatedlike Tud roots.
^J^TTfo
bubhtishasi,
bubhushati, yj]TO: bubhushdvah,"c.
shdmiy "gij^fa
^"]tflT
$ 469. The roots which take the intermediate ^ i have been given before
("33
to
34") as
Iy
we^
or
" 470. As
in
budh
^V
forms
chikarishati;
from
TT
Thus
f%^ vid,
from
titarish
finrfT!^
tri,to cross,
to cross.
to
be stated
it may
exceptions,
if
strengthened by Guna,
be
may
the
they take
But
2,
12).
ending
Thus
i.
also
kri,
"|r
f^ftTf^rfk
bibhitsati (Pan. i.
fa^bhid,Des.
that bases
intermediate
didevishati:
div,!^P*f*lPiT
bubodhishati
^r"nfvflPil
u^
didarishati.
^dri, f^fc^flT
2,
to know
generalrule,though liable
consonant
one
^ i.
take intermediate
which
those
as
In
fact, no
cases
the
Guna
without
mediate
inter-
?[i"
" 471. But
base of the
desiderative
weakened
rud,
or
which
which
Verbs
*$"ritdjto
to
2.
In many
Certain bases
1.
important exceptions.
are
strengthenednor
is neither
be
there
Verbs
do
do not
cry,
not take
take
intermediate
rurudishati
l^jft^frt
may
or
may
and having
3[i
T3i$vid,to know,
(Pan. i.
2,
i.
n^Ni^MuTvividishatij*|^mush,
8.)
or
intermediate
not take
beginningwith consonants,
Verbs
actuallyweakened
are
steal,^rnHfn mumushisJiati.
which
^i
(Pan. i.
intermediate
singleconsonant,
2,
3[*.
except TI y
or
2,
49);
v,
26.)
didyotishate.
didyutishate f^ftfw^Icf
Pt^Prmfl
^(^dyutf
or
But
f^
div,
didevishati
r^r"mflf
f^fiT^TIvivartishate
l^rrif,
3. Verbs
ending
and
f*{ji,
^ri
in
become
to conquer,
"fkri,to
^i
or
^T w, not
or
after
jigishati;
^
do, P^iqi^rnchikirshati
without
*,
dudyushati(Pan. vii.
t^ir,and,
Mt'iT^nr
^^5^
vivritsati.
fe"JNirrt
or,
"
IT
labials,"3ft ur.
yu, to
mix,
tri,to cross,
(Pan.
vi.
4,
ri
16.)
^^HiTlyuyushati.
(anl^Ta titirshati.
"^pri,to fill,
*J^*ni pupurshatL
fcT^fciUrt
to
pipavishate;
f^Rsmi,to
smile,ftrwftRW sismayishate ^pu, to purify,
t^gri,
swallow, f*fl[ri^ff[jigarishatij
~"dri,to respect,f^U^ln didarishate.
j
472.
DESIDERATIVE
*1*{gam,to
4.
as
go,
before the
substitute
for
wishes
go, and
5. 71^ tan,
f^Aan,
kill,lengthentheir vowel
to
16.)
4,
read
to
but
ftflftncfir
jigami$hati,he
to go.
T^han, f"iMI*
fri
jighdmsati,he wishes
stretch,lengthensits vowel
to
fii
cii^fcr
titdrhsati or
"fl^tftn,
to kill.
optionally.(Pan. v.
fflrtUfHI
titariisati;but
4,
17.)
rrtrtfHMfil
titanishati. (Pan.
also
2,49, vart.)
vn.
(Pan. vi.
lengthens the
vowel
before the
^*
of the desiderative.
42.)
4,
but
take, 1"{svap,
to
?T^3TaA,
7.
^", to
of the desiderative.
(Pan. vi.
^s
^rfvfn'iitirt
he wishes
adhijigdmsate,
IT^yam,
221
VERB"
(Pan. I.
Samprasarana.
(VmfnMfn
sisanishati.
sleep,and
to
Hi^racAA,to
ask, shorten
their bases
by
8.)
2,
tjjjtifii
sushupsati.
*3TR.sca/",
jsgrAfifoAalt.
#raA, flT^TKjflT
3"T^
piprichchhishati.
frnjf^a^fif
TX?^prachh,
8. The
J{t(Pan. vn.
to
"
before the
^*
of the
insert
desiderative,
the reduplication.
54),and reject
4,
and fatitfif
(HTHlfci
mino/t, to throw), Des. ("miTm mitsati.
mindti,to destroy,
r*i"ilri
TTrf mayate, to change),Des.
(TlflT
wia^',to measure,
mimite,to measure,
*ftrni
md
their vowel
shorten
followingverbs
farwfii
mitsati,l"irwn mitsate.
^
to
(^rfk rfarfa^',
da
do,Dh.
P.
26, 39
; but
(^Vlfir
dadhdti,to
VT c?A"f
to
to go
66), Des.
it is not ghu,
frt
rW
f"{
f"Jcfhl
ditsate.
ditsati,
f^Hin ripsate.
fcoti
lipsate.
(^T^tflT
sakyati),Des. ^151^ sikshati.
saknoti,^r^fif
pitsate.
Des. ^tifn
(-*n"flfK
(psa/i.
dpnoti),
^ Prt
(siJIM
jnapayati),Des.
to command
,
sflnffn
jfttpsati.
frfsart.
Des. ^rSfrf
(^flftfff
ridhnoti),
to grow
to deceive
to free
for
Iffifc?ya/",
to cut,
:
reduplication
Des. Psro
(T"XH padyate),
to obtain
P. 22,
P. 22, 32;
to fall
without
Des.
(77HTTlabhate),
to be able
Dh.
rfrfw,
Des.
begin (T"Trtra""ate),
to take
P. 25, 9,
desideratives formed
,
not
Dh.
^ITfr
day ate, to pity,den, Dh.
9. Other
give, c^w,
dhipsati.
dhtpsati fVr^rfk
(^ftft
dabhnoti),Des. vfHrfiT
or
munchati),Des. H^Hfdmokshate
(*J^flT
or
^g"|rimumukshate, he
wishes
freedom.
spiritual
,
to finish
(Pan. vii.
4,
in the
Des. nfd Oli^fd prati-ritsati,
(THflfK
rddhyati),
otherwise
54, vart.),
verbs
which
are
commonly
considered
to
belong
sense
of
injuring
Pn riritsati).
to the
Bhu
class
are
reallydesiderative bases.
he
chikitsate,
it,fafchrHrt
cures.
he bears.
titikshate,
gup,
Tlt^ man,
jugupsate,he despises.
'$*l**M
HlHltlHmimdihsate, he investigates.
222
^^ badh,
"^WTT
" 473-
VERBS.
DESIDERATIVE
he loathes.
bibhatsate,
sisdmsate,he sharpens.
" 473.
the
Besides
Reduplicationin
Desideratives.
generalrules
the
followingspecialrules
to be
are
syllable
Radical
^r
observed
and
(Pan.vn.
^n
with
in
of
regard
and
^B^ av
by 5[
represented
"
^TT^dv, standing
Guna
as
Vriddhi
or
reduplicative
syllable
of
radical ^
4,
Caus.
are
p, TR
ph,
80).
"l
mrimfri bibhdvayishati,
(Red. Aor.
"ftnrf^
and
1 Pn yiyavishati,
"SRw,
or
reduplicativesyllable,
providedthey be precededby ^
in the
f*l"l(lf
fq"n*r
(Red. Aor.
pipdvayishati,
yw,
i in the
reduplicative
tishthdsati.
sthd, PriKiuPff
^qr
base
79).
4,
fri
pipakshati;
if^pach, films;
" 474.
of the
desiderative
forming the
representedby ^
are
vowel
the
to
abibhavat.)
^nrfaRT^
f"f
*4 1 q f*"
H fif
yiydvayishati.
Desid.
"5WM,
"**
swim, ^g cAyw,
to
fall,
may
similar circumstances
under
take ^
optionally
or
to
in the
reduplicative
syllable.
nfrisisrdvayishati
or
tjtsmfVHrfi
susrdvayishati
; but
^Jt^n
,
J 476.
susrushati
sushvdpayishati.
^J^TtrfirqfTf
forms
beginning with
to
reduplication,
vowel
was
made
allusion
forms
^f^T5T+ ^fila"is
at forms
+ 5[^fTT
"/^
^rfr^
forms ^rf%^
+ ^ft
In
ubj, "
"^Hrs%the
double
CBSU
from
$ 378.
Thus
(Pan.vi.
I,
2)
+ ishati.
+ ishati.
achiksh
ishati.
uchichchh
^^fll
ishati.
is
"^w,^d, or ^
undid-ishati.
"^ und, ^(^r^Hfn
archich-ishati.
1*11*1*1111
ubjij-ishati.
last consonant
is
reduplicated.
Pnirshyiy-ishati
In the verbs
in
of internal
peculiarkind
reduplicated.
^T^arch, ^nK^^n
o*j\
^fc-cd 4-
forms
uchchh
have
which
aA;5A
tive
simpledesidera-
only.
Roots
the
beginningwith cn^fi
or
$/Hifi^fii
(Pan.
irshyish-ishati.
vi.
1, 3, vart.)
kanduy, ""^T^fVrMHPcl
kanduyiy-ishati.
in MciiHn
besides
occurs
chikishati,
Exceptionalreduplication
"N chi (Pan. vu. 3, 58) ; in f^TEThrfTf
M (Pan. vn.
jigUshatifrom fi?
^fsin
3,
chichishati,
56),"c.
~$ 481.
223
VERBS.
INTENSIVE
CHAPTER
XX.
INTENSIVE
{ 478. Intensive,or,
meant
are
to
receive
intensive
the
bases
idea
of
liable to be
are
syllable,
be
cannot
exceptions.
Thus
he wanders
vui"k|H aldtyate,
into
intensive
about
Verbs
bases.
There
1.
By
two
and
peculiarreduplication
i,
Chur
some
vowel,
u.
p.
one
forms
^
rt,
tfrnu,
16); ifl^
22).
forming intensive
of
ways
of the
drnonuyate(Pan.in.
**uT"JM^
are
Some
however,
are,
to
There
times
some-
consistingof
beginning with
though
go,
and
consonant,
5^ ardryateand 1wrfir
vol.
ararti (Siddh.-Kaum.
$ 480.
action
intensives.
as
to go, "enj
cover,
the
"c.
reproach or disgrace,
intensive verbs.
into
at, to
^T7
if used
motion,
tortuous
turned
changed
of
frequentrepetition
or
beginning with
bases
bases
called,frequentative
the idea of
convey
$ 479. Only
class
simple verb.
the
expressedby
sometimes
are
intenseness
an
convey
they
as
VERBS.
adding *i yd
verbs
the
at
end.
This
yd
has
the accent.
2.
the
By
without
peculiarreduplication
same
portionof
the
the accent
Bases
formed
ending
tenses
in
the
ending in
is
Hya
to
Parasmaipadaonly,though,according
d is
$$.ir,
or,
consonant,
is
be formed.
may
'ql^fribobhoti.
intensive base
drop
it.
Hence
in the
general
bobhuyitd,
^fojifaiTT
(Pan.vi.4, 49.)
the
effect
benedictive
Par.
added,
on
the
base
($389).
is
Thus
generallythe
final
same
vowels
are
to
after
changed
followinga
or
of the
consonants
^i^iir:
labials,
fill,
tfl^5d
poptiryate. Final
When
of
hear, sft^d
gather,^rvflu^chechiyate
; ^J 6ru, to
dedhiyate. ^ ri
changed to \i : VT dhd, to place,^frqrr
lengthened: fq chi,
becomes
admit
retain the TJ ya
passive and
"o"ruyate. ^TT
has
bobhute.
*ft*J7T
be
in vowels
roots
When
frequently. It
Atmanepadaonly.
of
bobhaviti
v^bhu, qflHcTird
sosuchitd.
'-Hto^faHT
$ 481.
as
admit
way
some
but
less
occurs
reduplicative
syllable.
Atmanepadawould
Roots
latter form
in the final
^^J5Tff
v$J)hu}
bobhuydte.
Ex.
The
The
in the former
formed
to
the
on
Ex.
Bases
base.
modification
any
to
double
tf rt, not
consonant
tri,to
cross,
TTiTfinr
tetiryate;^prit
following a
simple
224:
INTENSIVE
sdsmaryate. These
remember, jTimffii
of the Div
bases
that
in
^ i, while
intermediate
from
in
conjugated like
are
should
observed,however,
be
retain
vowels
before
off the
throw
consonants
*r
the
ya
of
bobhu-y-itd;
^J?I bobhuya, ^tJjftnrT
from
bebhiditd.
^rfozx
bebhidya,^rfaf^iTT
T^ya is not
of the Hu
class.
that verbs
with
final
in ^ri
in
base
treated
are
of their
therefore
ar, and
like bases
Observe, however,
same.
peculiarforms
ri have
from
start
bases
the
are
reduplication
penultimate^j
or
verbs
intensive
added, the
rules of
The
490),and
($489,
^TT"
in
ending
roots
altogether.Thus
specialtenses
the
ending
roots
bases
intensive
Atmanepada. It
class in the
general tenses
the
" 483-
VERBS.
own
have
in the
tdtirati.
IfTfirtfiT
($297).
Guna
Hence
bobhumah.
Remark,
T^ftfl bobodhmi
remark
weak
bobudhimi;
^t^ftfo
or
further,that
terminations
do
"^fanJrfVl
abobudham.
bobudhdni, ^{"sfl^^
PRESENT.
3,
sing.Pres.,2.
require
^fawr: bo-
^t^t
but
3. p.
sing.
:
or
bobhavimi.
^t*f=flfH
likewise before
^ i, and
intensive
87).
but
bobhavdni
^TtfH bobhomi
vowel,
(Pan.vii.
Guna
3. p.
this intermediate
beginning with
take
not
before
1.2.
inserted
optionally
be
may
in
that
however,
Impf.,3. p. sing.Imp. \i
And
^twtfvr bobodhmi;
ift^^bobudh,
from
bobhomi, TTfwfrr
^^ bobhu, sftoftfa
From
budhmah.
terminations
class,the weak
ending
bases
in
sonants
con-
^tyftfabobudhimi,
Hence
f%^vid,
From
IMPERATIVE.
IMPERFECT.
or
vevedmi
^iw
or
avevet
^f%c(tfir
or
vevetti
^T^?^
vevidishi
or
^"f^TJvevidvahy
to take
The
avevet
by adding IT ya,
and
then
Guna
avevidit
to form
in the
to
the
to
change
^{ a
the
vowel
to ^TT d
it into
passivebase
generalrules
of the
(Pan.vn.
gather,^ffarchiya,^^NNrffchechiyate;^%fw
to
veviditu
Intensives.
the
possible,
82),and
or
is
of intensives,
reduplication
peculiar
general tenses,
4,
or
vevettu
according to
reduplicate,
(Pan.vii.
^T^
veviddva
^fc|^|'c(
of Reduplication
for
to raise,where
lastly,
syllable
by
fq chi, to
used
or
^TTfol1 avevidva
"c.
simplestway
the base
veviddhi
avevidih
or
Rules
f 484.
or
%f^fe
^nf%^t:
^T^Ti^^P"|"(lf^
veviditi
or
veviddni
avevidam
Tf^tfq
or
vevetsi
^%fw
vevidimi
or
4,
of
cation,
redupli-
reduplicative
83).
checheti.
chokroshti.
abuse, ^[qkrusya,'^Tsfiifft
chokru"yate;^sffaitffc
trauk, to approach, ^R
totraukti.
traukya,TTt^l^dtotraukyate; ff^^ftj
226
appliesto
same
^TTtfiTcha
krij
vye, to
T vus,
^ft^ffffcharikarti.
ri kariti.
^Tfarft charikarti.
to
,
to
A"n,
jeghriyate;ll"iPnjdghrdti.(Pan. vn.
smell, %TTta7T
blow,
^TWT^lTff
dddhmdti.
dedhmiyate; ^TWnfff
;
derivative
From
verbs
Thus
to
then
wish
to exist
formed
causative
new
yishati,he
and
Charkarita, have
their
rise to
(Pan.i.
By
i,
this
great deal
63),except
grammarians
82-92.
differ.
Atm.,
About
Thus
but
and
chekiyate,
the
the
form
allows
commentary
moot
Intensive
changes
which
Intens.
changes,
authorities
form
of
^fflT
it is in the
point among
grammarians ;
bobhuva,others ^TT^ bobhdva.
among
some
be
the
considered
to be
base
pressed
sup-
by Tj^yaii
Anangakarya,
as
of the root
so-called
grammarians.
has
in the verbal
that
to take
are
mentioned
distinctly
Par., are
extended
directly
Prakriya-Kaumudiforms
argues
are
native
Atmanepada,
changes produced
not
^rfiffi
sesinte"because
*lPtf"ffl
sesimyate. Whether
property
he
bibhdvayishati,
Parasmaipada, or
in the
discussion
the
also in the
19, prescribes
soshupyate;other
TFnjpfiT
sdsvapiti.Colebrooke
o1
^jrnr bobhuyate, he
intensive
reduplication.Changes
as
other
of
sign of
certain
4,
the
Intensive
the
suppressionthe
the
grammarians^than
most
cj^iluk.
31.)
4,
formed,
is derived, f^HHf^MPlT
from
conjugationof
given
vart.)
22.)
be
may
30.)
20.)
2,
4,
i,
31.)
4,
vm.
vi.
to excite the
formation
cease
may
and
really
;
wishes
Accordingto
So
existence.
cause
really,is
to
21.)
from
desiderative
new
derivatives
new
the creation of
rather
are
be,
to
causes
declines
i,
4, 30,
spoken language.
Panini, vii.
20.)
(Pan. vii.
^HTtiiM
ff jegilyate WT^TfS
jdgarti.(Pan.
which, however,
placenot
19.)
vi.
swallow,
by
i,
(Pan.vi.
to
$ 492.
The
cheketi.
(Pan. vii.
jeghniyate;^TZfajanghanti.
kill,^Jll-M^
to lie
exists
(Pan. vi.
to
to
1,
or
to
wishes
of their base *.
m*MiPn_p^py^".
^fi^jMgrfytife;
i, 29.)
(Pan.
sesveti. (Pan.
^i*yl*4n
sosuyate
swell,31)94*1*1}
sesmyate; ^nSfflT
of the
the formation
to grow,
peculiarin
are
'"IN^n
desire,
to
sw,
charkarti.
to sound, ^?Ptu-Mn
sesimyate;but ^T^TTff samsyanti.
q"fl*lrt
vdvydti- or (" 483) "n*tPnvdvyeti.
veviyate;but qi"qiPfl
cover,
syam,
Parasmaipada.(Pan.
(Pan. vi.
soshupyate; but ttKflPxsdsvapti.
sleep,"hf^*trf
to
^P^ svap,
i,
in the
if used
cha ri kariti.
bases
" 491. A few frequentative
would
n,
^%fS
kariti.
cha
^J
92-)
4,
he
in
ending
roots
" 490-
VERBS.
INTENSIVE
to the
Intens.
*flHlPNsoshopti,
because
by
Par.,
Pan.
vi.
only UUjlPHsdsvapti
Pan.
vi.
cheketi.
i, 21,
But
prescribes
Colebrooke
Pan.
vi.
(p.321)
i, 19,
or
reduplicatedis
periphrastic
allows
likewise
bobhavdnchakdra,others
forming "sffa^facKTC
-" 496'
DENOMINATIVE
CHAPTER
XXI.
DENOMINATIVE
" 493.
There
are
bases*,and
nominal
treating
some
like
a
hawk
from
; from
syllable.Thus
Krishna
from
These
of
are
denominative
rare
would
rules,
however,on
their formation
wish.
verbs
and
might
like
one
without
formed
are
behaves
at
base
iftgo,
of
any
and
pleasure;
than
many
grammarians,
These
in
like
father.
verbs should
A
grammar.
here be
few
given.
Parasmaipada.
a
denominatives
noun,
formed
are
Jnqfirgavyati,he wishes
cow,
be called nominal
like
generalmeaning,may
in ^ ya,
to the
From
some
for
cows.
govern
accusative.
new
J 495. By addingthe
lookingupon
Thus
a
treats
be formed
rather
dictionary
Denominatives
expressinga
pitdrati,he
by
the
expressedby
he behaves
krishndti,
ifm krishnd,;"*nfif
be sanctioned
for in the
behaving like,or
is
be looked
from
denominatives
verbs,however,cannot
occurrence
therefore
from
have
we
Some
of
meaning
yflWrtputriydti,he
son,
son.
the
derived
clearly
are
doing whatever
or
father,fmnfn
f^pitri,
of those which
even
have
generally
putra,
derivative
;
in Sanskrit which
h/ena,hawk,
^TR
he wishes for
or
son,
which
VERBS.
like,or wishingfor
one
Thus
noun.
verbs
many
227
VERBS.
from
treating
somethinglike
or
as
if one
were
in
Final ^T
for
t
and
They
one's
expressing
subjectexpressedby
the
noun.
and
firer:prdsddiyati
palace; HHU^I^frfffigjf
in his hut
as
if it
were
palace.
this H ya,
^TT d
are
changedto
he
\i;*pTTsutd,daughter,^Jdl^PH
surfyati,
wishes
are
called in Sanskrit
are
dhdtu,root.
^ dhu, for *TfiJ
t Minute
the
formed
are
fsntf
putriyatisishyam,he treats the pupillike
ijcfhrfa
from mn^prdsdda, palace,
prdsddiyati,
process imrr^W?f
similar
to behave
means
denominatives
Hya,
"^fputra, son,
By
son.
same
distinctions are
time,and ~4i^|11
*fif!
made
lidhu,from
fc5"{
(Carey,Grammar,
between
p.
is greedyfor wealth,and
he
^^"^hrfff
asaniyati,
and
craves
he
V"ffafHdhaniyati,
G
asks
2
master;
543.)
asandyati,he is ravenouslyhungry;between
treats like
some
wishes
he
"J^ "nTMiff udakiyati,
ween
money.
wishes
V"1l"lffi
dhandyati,he
(Pan. vii.
4,
34.)
228
^ rt,^fto
becomes
^ri
3.
he
pitriyati,
for
like
treats
*"^av,
father;
he treats
"flJjfrf
rdjiyati,
for milk
like
man
$497. A
expressedby
of
in if ya,
like
hawk
differ from
They
noun.
by
base.
the
^i"^|"Mrisabddyate,he
is
bases
generallydropt, and
2,
and
3. Final
^ i and
is
5^n
ri,^rt o, ^
u, ^
Some
dropt,and
treated
ushmdyate, it
nominal
bases
like nominal
the
milk, "MU^W
in ^j
xnTFTW
or
apsardyate,she
xsmi^i^H
apsaras,
bases
payasyate
verbs
beginningwith
it
Those
They
generaltenses
Nouns
ending
that may
Kandu.
the
through
(" 501).
classed
are
rest
-te, he becomes
take
base
i of
taken
behaves
like
take
in ^T
both
(Pan.
in.
behaves
like
wise
man
native
it before
Apsaras ;
from
13.)
i,
from
^TT
grammarians
and
Thus
from
Atmanepada
brihat,
12.)
applying to other
"*Tya.
be
milk ; from
as
Kandvadi's, i. e.
Parasmaipadaand Atmanepada,
in
n)
from
becomes
an
i,
vidvas, wise,
(Vg1^
Parasmaipada
i,
(Pan.in.
must
from
paydyate, it
*T ya, both
Thus
J 496 ; ^f%
like
the restrictions
drop
in
as
is
others
Hence
a.
together by
under
by ^T^ kyan.
red.
pure.
like
i(t may,
heat.
out
and
treated
are
precedingvowel
sends
in ^s
au
Pc|^||i|7i
vidvdyate,he behaves
vidvasyateor
final
The
masculine
the
becomes
much
36"41.)
he
suchiyate,
"SJ^t^
"uchi}pure,
4. Final
3,
sound,
becomes
ruminates.
he
behaves
makes
he
instead; ^pT^t kwndri, girl,'$HKl4ri kumdrdyate,
girl.(Pan.vi.
of the
kashtdyate, he
oFFnTff
ruminating,dH"ITilrfromanthdyate,
feminine
modification
in the
bhrisdyate,he
vpfrnfir
bhrisa,much,
*jpjr
is
Thus
sabda, sound,
$T^
has
difference
by adding
he
lengthened; ^frfsyena, hawk, $7)r(m7i
syendyate,
kashta, mischief,
OFF
Atmanepada.
what
sounds
he
19).
15); "i"it^namas,
4,
yd,
and
followingthe Atmanepada*,
i.
payasyati,
T*
the
^r
i,
denominatives, formed
of
class
second
meaning
milk, MM^fK
^^vdch, speech,^T^Tfcfvdchyati(Pan.
Denominatives
Final
wishes
unchanged; "J"f"^rdjan,king,
king; nm^payas,
1.
ship,^TRlflf
ndvyati,he
remain
final consonants
other
dropt,and
is
he wishes
the
father,
f^pitri,
^TT^Tay;
becomes
au
"TT waw,
ship.
4. Final "T
^1
becomes
" 497-
YERBS.
DENOMINATIVE
are
denominatives
and
in
said
to be
formed
keep
Tya
from
by
"fl lohitdyati
c^tf^W
red, c5Vf^rrr^flf
lohita,
or
-$
DENOMINATIVE
502.
is free from
aaadyati,he
illness,vf'itirt
he givespleasure; from
illness
"
499.
Thus
W"
denominative
verbs,which
in ^
express
he desires
lavana,salt,wsKUt^fn lavanasyati,
and
^HT sya
sya.
a
wish, take
^TO
longs for
cow
in the
asya,
sense
instead of 1 ya.
sya
Likewise
salt.
^T
from
"4*"Q
fulfill
ascasyati,the
WH4
the bull
of extreme
(Pan. vn.
i,
mare
Some
52).
from
Thus
"jm^fd
the
vrishasyati,
admit
authorities
for
sukhyati,
*pl sukha, pleasure,*pwftf
the
T5|fa
kshirasyati,
kshira,milk, JSil^t^fn
from
bases.
from
Denominatives
Certain
229
VERBS.
honey.
Denominatives
4IWJ
the wish
for
son
Put.
"j"a
dropt. (Siddh.-Kaum.
to be
$501.
from
kdma,
VR
""
vol.
n.
p.
kamya.
by compounding
Thus
love.
I P*-q
n i putrakdmyitd.
Here
^"a "*
the
i*""
nominal
base
with
Pn putrakdmyati,he has
^y, it is
said, is
liable
not
222.)
in ^ ya
denominatives
The
"ni**j
desiderative verbs
to form
denominative
in
conjugatedlike
are
verbs
of the Bhu
class in the
when
may
not
generaltenses
In the
fyendyeya.
the
be
denominative
dropt in
the
the
is
base
is
^f\\putriyor ^Hl^
preceded by
(Pan.vi.
generaltenses
consonant,
4,
TJy may or
50). Hence, Per. Perf.
Fut.
Ben. ^iMIfi
putriydsam.
g^ftinputriyitd,
^nin"S Syendyate,Per.
From
Perf.
^HI^IHI^Ityendydmdsa,Aor.
Fut. ^JHlfrtMsyendyishye,
"c.
a"yendyishiy
samidh, fuel,^TfJTvrfiT
samidhyati,he
^f?T^
From
wishes
samidhitd,"c. (Pan.vi.
samidhyitdor ^rfJTfVnn
Denominatives
" 502.
denominative
Some
They generallyexpress
verbs
of the Chur
in the
Atmanepada
from
implied by
They
^H^ay
and
class
are
the
in the
base.
aya
to
They
Parasmaipada
general tenses
mundayati, he
(Pan. m.
(Dhatupatha
i, 21;
may
and
modified
accordingto
the
be looked
bases.
the
as
upon
Atmanepada,
under
causatives (viz.benedictive
he unties; from
^TT^Tpdsa,fetter,r^m^iMrnvipdsayati,
sound
certain nominal
some
limitations
Par., reduplicated
rules applying to
the
(" 296,4).
he
sathvarmayati,
retain
of the Chur
the nominal
50).
aya.
by adding ^SR
conjugatedin
are
only. They
class
formed
are
aorist,
"c.)5and
verbs of the Chur
Thus
the act
class.
verbs
in WT
4,
25).
arms,
shaves
33,
40);
w*{varman,
^P^
sabda, sound,
armour,
shaven,
^Smunda,
he
^i^MPns'abdayati,
fifW mis'ra,
mixed, fii^^fnmisrayati,he
makes
mixes
230
PREPOSITIONS
verbs
of these
Some
lifts up
utpuchchkayate,he
is to be added
to
(Pan. in.
formed
the
nouns
affixes
vin, these
the tail
by
be
must
i,
"
from
Thus
always Atmanepada.
are
" 503
PARTICLES.
AND
20).
secondaryaffixes*H(mat,^l(vat,
tsrf'q^
sragvin,having
From
dropt.
garlands,
srajayati.
If ^HT
(Pan.
white
vi.
before
same
^HT
^TO
denominative
without
where
it exists
Guna,
where
Thus
authorities
some
as
possible,
softens
g^
dura, far,
any
of the
Bhu
class.
in the Bhu
satydpayati,
Affix.
base
^T
be
may
of the
is added
Division, and
to the
base, except
medial
into
turned
First
take
vowels
class.
he behaves
like Krishna; from 5RT?ST maid,
Jcrishnati,
^Wt krishna, effHUfH
Aor.
*Uc*5lflT
mdldti,it is like a garland,Impf. vi*iic5if^ama/a",
garland,
from
olffe
kavi, poet, cRTPrfff
kavayati,he
amdldsit; from
bird,^rfffvayati,he
like
4,
bird
from
like
behaves
poet ;
f^ vi,
from
pitarati,he
pitri,father, PMn ^.fn
fxnj
he is
TT"f^ rdjan, king,TT"TRflfrdjdnati,
father ; from
flies like
like
is
15)-
CHAPTER
XXII.
PREPOSITIONS
" 504.
called
do the
superlative,
satya,true, ^KMiMMirr
nominal
every
alreadyas
of the
he explains.
arthdpayati,
ordinaryverbal terminations
verbal base
WiQ
WinnTfr
artha, sense,
by adding the
like
base
treatingthe
to
from
Thus
dpaya.
^T^PT
Denominatives
verb
ishtha
^"
removes.
he speaks truly;from
before
ijgmridu,
aya.
take
bases
nominal
their base
change
^cf^fcf
davayati,he
Some
her
makes
36).
3,
adjectiveswhich
Certain
he
T^ffisyeni(" 247),white, 3"4imfn
syetayati,
From
base.
masculine
bases,they are
to feminine
is added
aya
The
Sanskrit
off.
^5itj apa,
down
'Siw ava,
uddtta
J 505.
be
on
Certain
(sometimesft pi),
the first
^ sam,
4,
d, near
to.
together. ^
T^ ud,
if pra,
"w, well.
after.
up.
^TJ
upa,
before.
They
all have
the
syllable
except ^rfa abhi.
adverbs,called
Upasargas(Pan.i.
W(
then
are
" 148).
tjftpari, around,
away,
f% vi,apart.
fVrni, into,downwards,
g: duh, ill.
back,
joinedwith verbs,and
over
^srftj
api, upon
58"61
4,
(sometimes^va).
next, below,
para,
(Pan.i.
^rfv adhi,
^rfcfati, beyond,
back.
PARTICLES.
following
prepositions
may
Upasarga in
"q^
AND
60),may
Gati in
be
Sanskrit,a
term
also
applicable
to the
like prepositions,
to certain verbs,
prefixed,
go.
-$
achchha
addressed,
between.
astam;
^TCcr
alam;
^J?*
e.
e.
e.
olaAkfilya9having
^ic^T1'
g.
g.
prddurbhuya,having
expressingregard or
($89, II.
Words
known.
(Here
final
like
the final ^r
^BT a
contempt
ri is
changed
e.
e.
clearingone's
" 506.
Several
and
to
them
(Pan. i.
The
4,
changed
The
ablative
bhakteh
U^iT
rained
is
is
nishke
adhi
certain
changed
^1;
to
imitative
TQRl(khdtt
J 503
in
They
the
of
produced
also used
are
with
called Kar-
then
are
which
noun
after;
is
governedby
^q
for
Vishnu
Hara
(4 UMH
^T*J^ft^Ut
Ex.
upon.
upa,
beyond Govinda;
H
"
vishnu-
harim
anu
surah,
Hari.
prati, Tjftpart,
governedby Tfflf
amritam, immortalityin
from
away
^:
f^TTW^ft ^
^R
^rcr
apat ^rr d-
for
return
faith;
H%:
Ex.
d
Jpffc
wr
vrishto devah, it
trigartebhyo
apa
xrft;
f^TTW: pari trigartebhyah,round
Trigarta,or
touchingTrigarta.
Mrshdpanam,
Karshapana
panchdleshu brahmadattah,
There
lengthened;
are
Words
like
cases.
was
" 507.
Words
anu,
venom
worshipped after
praty
without
Trigarta,
The
are
t.mtyoh,until death;
has
"W^as
governed by ^rfirati,beyond;
less than
are
TM
king.)
mentioned
prepositions
prati haldhalam,
manvarchyate, he
gods
white.
83).
govindam
haram
^ i and
and
they frequentlyfollow
accusative is
the
Final
d.
to ^n
around; ufiff
prati, against;^rg
part,
and
suklt,in SJ^l^d
suklikritya,
havingmade
^raft
said to govern
and
mapravachaniya,
g.
throat.
of the
then
are
e.
khdtkritya,having made
g. i"fir"j"7T
e.
fin::tirafy;
TRgiprdduh;
e.g.
*n^ sat
g.
g.
sound
i).
having
rest,
sdkshdtkritya,
having made
Ul"J!r"sjit"J
g.
rdjikritya,
having made
TT"ri^[rw
having assented.
*^"jw urikrityay
nouns,
to
d is
^TT
or
manifest.
become
Uiqif^sdkshdt;
in
ornamented.
e.
adahkritya,
^:^?l
g.
g.
e.
g.
^nfa: dvih;
set.
^nj: adah
it thus,
having done
231
PARTICLES.
achchhagatya,havingapproached($445);
g. fUMIfl
e.
achchhodya, having
e.
AND
PREPOSITIONS
5"7'
are
many
other
and
is
^rfvadhi.
more
than
Brahmadatta
adverbs
Nishka
governs
in
fH^fi4IMIMIU
Ex. ITT
;
over
Sanskrit,
vpa
the Pafichalas.
some
of which
used
as
may
here be mentioned.
i.
The
accusative
of
in
adjectives
the neuter
may
be
an
adverb.
232
^: mandah, slow, ^
from
Thus
Certain
such
these
of
3. Adverbs
slowly,slowly;
mandam,
mandam
accusatives
of neuters,
yathdsakti,accordingto
TreT^rfli
as
the rules
see
$%
g^fdhruvam, truly.
^fftrttghram, quickly;
2.
" 507-
PARTICLES.
AND
PREPOSITIONS
used
are
one's
bially,
adverFor
power.
composition.
on
place:
WO
ace.
antarena, between,with
SHiTOl
ace.
between, with
gen. ;
antard,
without,with
ace.;
nichaih, low.
with
gen,
^WT
adhah, below,with
W^samaksham,
before.
from.
^iv:
ijTSpurah,
ace.
^RT
gen.
loc.
^re:
iha, here.
the presence.
amd,
avah, below,
t(rTpurd,
'3"R\^(sakdsdt,
^r^T
with
ace.
from
all sides,
gt duram, far,with
near,
with
abl.,and
4. Adverbs
or
^^^(sdkshdt,in
before,with
abl.
gen. and
ace.,
of time
both
ubhayatah,on
'WTrf:
sides,with
ace.,
sides,
iwwn^samantdt,
ace.
and
abl.,
all
^rfrTcjf
antikam,
gen.
gen.
nidi,
am,
at
time,
same
^f?r:purvedyuh, yesterday.
to-morrow.
eve.
jyok, long,
Tzfto^
^nr
^:
chirdt,fro*T chirasya,long.
fgTTT^
^glfk paredyavi,
JvaA, to-morrow,
TOffw samprati,now.
^RT
*awa,
^:
bhuyah, ^rt
^inT iddnim,
^Tc5
5. Adverbs
once
*rnj./a/w,
now.
^T
upon
5ac?a, ^mi
dat.
or
time, ever,
santatam,
^ifVf^anisam, always.
cirrtkdmam,
now.
instr.
^npn adhund,
mudhd,
^^"/,
|ifi^
almost,
pray ah, frequently,
in
little,
rranflf
in vain.
-^fsjupdm"u,
whisper, firo
ingly,
^nfhr ativa,exceed-
certainly.
234
This
retained.
may
be
and
would
it
The
3, 34
(Pan.
suffix ;
to be observed
of
is treated
an
feminine
by losing the
vi.
3,
If the
41).
3,
suffix
34);
feminine
as
compound
appellative,
^*T:
kathibhdryah,
forms
predicate,
mere
TjffrR"Tr"t
sobhanabhdryap,having
beautiful
wife
words
been
rice,as
bahuvrihih,possessingmuch
one's
like Hrg^J:
into
as
strength,
an
have
substantival
as
^"aH^:
iWltyfffi
yathasakti,
compound.
adopted
different
sion,
divi-
of
principle
under
man,
^rir"pjjft
agni-
oxen,
and
adjectival;
adverbial
an
grammarians,however,
classingall compounds
classed
substantival,
tatpurushah,his
fire and
divided
been
words
Thus
blue
"ftcSfaranllotpalam,
accordingto
have
might
adverbial.
and
adjectival,
Sandhi
of external
those
are
seq.*
24
$ 512. Compound
Native
priorelements
42).
phoneticrules
dhumau,
in the
beautiful
its feminine
explainedin "
as
case
generallyloses
(Pan.vi.
of
mother
Kathi
the
when
meaning
its distinctive
lose
kalydnimdtd,the
having
the
is chiefly
feminine
gender
"511. Sometimes
" 511-
WORDS.
COMPOUND
the
of
names
is
Tatpurusha
in which
compound
for
precedingwords,
last word
the
instance,Wr^^J
is determined
tat-purushah,his
the
by
or
man,
rdja-purushah,king'sman.
As
subdivisions
of
determined
The
by
words, if dissolved,would
in other
last,the
The
alwaysa
for two
*
be called
in which
numeral
lengthen it
is not
in the
ending
in
middle
of
bad Brahman,
consonants
vada, and
grass.
The
lotus
same
case,
dvigufy,
bought
fg^j:
or
oxen,
Karmadharaya,
in general,
adjective
an
long
vowel
compound;
the bases
it,and
shorten
bases
substitutes
:
cfftlkad
in
^r^5Jkadushtrah,a
trina
TJJJT
same
is intended
to
^i^^J kadrathah,
is
particle
changed
contempt,
express
to WT
camel.
a
in
T^ udci),
"Z^udan (i.e.
Tf^pad,and ""
determinative
bad
ending
bad
short
or
with
is
governed by
of the
last word
for fire.
subdivision
figFR dvigavam,two
heart, frequentlysubstitute
.hridaya,
The
Karmadha-
in the
is
two
oxen.
bases
Occasionally
vowel
stand
king,or
being a compound
but
the
of the
man
in which
The
e. g. Tfcyfajcfc
ntlotpalam,blue
precedingadjective,
component
whereas
Tatpurusha compound,
the
Karmadhdraya
is in fact
raya
the
generalterm
vi.
same
51-60.)
^WTSr^TJkubrdhmanah,
as
compound
The
3,
before words
^f^pathin
and optionally
before ^jTC purusha. (Pan. vi.
kdpathaJi,
and
3,
beginning
place before
takes
kattrinam, a
carriage; "*^UI
kd before
hrid.
101-107.)
T^f
bad
^TCf aksha:
ratha,
kind
of
-" 513-
COMPOUND
three classes of
These
be
may
Compounds,while the
class,called Dvandva,
consists of
of the
three kinds
nom.
plur.masc.
nom.
sing.neut.
called
class,
next
which
word, and
used
are
which
smoke
as
be
may
slightchanges in
last
indeclinable
another
or
adhistri
The
word.
neut.
ace.
i.
that
class
or
participle
Compounds
^Wfw:
instead
an
like
the
that of
by
indeclinable
by joiningan
in which
duties
are
for
of the
in
as
woman,
the
againindeclinable,
ordinaryterminations
the
adhi-stri,for
^rfvfi^f
They
women.
may
Compounds.
last word
The
precedingone.
would
sritah.
pain,instead
f. n.
having
to
of
be
substantive
noun.
be in the Accusative:
atitah.
duhkham
JtlsWdld:
the
be
may
generally
Krishna,
m.
duhkha-atitafy,
|:*flrf1d:
enjoyed a
reached
in which
Krishna, dependent on
to
gone
^stfftnr: krishnam
f. n.
rdjd,king.
conforms
adjectives,
if capableof governinga
adjective,
varsha-bhogyahym.
prdptah,m.
Compounds.
in which
having overcome
Thus
they belong.
formed
adverbs, in
f. n.
m.
krishna-frritah,
of
some
of accent, sometimes
comprehendscompounds
(Tatpurusha)
governs
last
possessive
compounds,
household
grihakdrydni,
called Adverbial
of
predicate
resultingcompound,
I. Determinative
into
which
to
particle
alwaysforms
ends,
generally
nom.
class,called Avyayibhdva,is
with
particle
and
may
the substantives
gender of
to the
the
Compounds.
be turned
change, except
any
expressedby the
wife,scil.4.1*n
handsome
compounds, like
genderof possessive
The
IV. The
notion
rice,scil.^^K desak,country
much
compounds
without
collective term
pounds
grammarians,comprisescom-
adjectives.The
rupavad-bhdryah,possessing
sometimes
native
by
Determinative
nouns,
fasa-kusa-paldsdh,
3T$r$3IMr4l$u:
be called Possessive
bahu-vrthih,possessedof
the terminations
compounded
as
determined,forms
variously
may
words
two
or
plants,
sasa-kusa-paldsam,
3l$l$3IMc4l3l
be called Collective Compounds.
Bahuvrihi
subject.They
other
the
of
will
They
of
singular,
being treated
agni-dhumau,fire and
^rfr"njfll
or
in which
compounds
the number
plural,
accordingto
or
the terminations
III. The
under
Karmadharaya (Ib)
of the dual
be
comprehended
determinatives.
next
are
or
be
may
as
the Dvigu (Ic) as
appositional
determinatives,
distinguished
numeral
II. The
compounds
of Determinative
generalname
235
WORDS.
year
f. n.
"nUfl'"ji
long.
JjlHJirff:grdma-
of
?jn}UTH: grdmam
instead
village,
236
prdptah
it is
(Pan.ii.
such
prepositions,
or
adverb,
an
or
by
of
means
^fjrflftL
atigiri,
past the hill,used
as
the first
would
noun
: sankuld-khandah,m.
ddtra-chchhinnah,m.
Idbhih}.^l^f-gJTC
^rfaj|^
in the Instrumental
be
f. n.
(chhinnah)
by
cut
supposed auspicioussense,
pitri-samah,m.
fxj^nr:
nakha-nirbhinnah9
f.n.
m.
f. n.
f. n.
svayam-kritah,m.
in which
Compounds
IM^UV
yupa-ddru,n.
would
noun
(ddru)for
when
;
e.
g.
Compounds
5.
in which
gone
Compounds
from
the first
in which
would
noun
purushah, the
would
the first
*J"Uj"U:
aksha-saundah, m.
produced on
Hence
Most
words
^TT^T
bhettd, breaker
heaven.
be
(chorebhyah).
apa-grdmah,
^TJJJW:
in the
instead
the
sakhah.
Genitive
devoted
of
to
be
rdjnah,of
king'sfriend.
hundred
in the Locative
dice.
the
king,
In these
cgHcRK:kumbha-kdrah,
jft^nr
go-satam,
would
noun
f. n.
in
"Jtri or
"R ka
of towns.
pujakah,worshipper of
thieves
TCfa":
of
cows.
uro-jah,m.
f. n.
the breast.
ending
^TrTT
be in the Ablative
rdja-sakhah,m.
tT5TH^"
man.
compounds,
his man,
is changed to
compounds sakhi, friend,
Compounds
Determinative
village.
the king'sman,
m.
TTafJ^: rdja-purushah,
6.
iftf^TT:
(ytipdyd).
go-
sacrificial stake
(bhayam)arisingfrom
fear
the
m.
TTTJ^: tat-purushah,
maker
be in the Dative
for Brahmans.
m.
r: svarga-patitah,
m.
worshipped by all.
as
chora-bhayam,n.
f. n.
(nakhaih).
treated
neut.
intended
nails
m.f.n.
(gobhyah).(V*H":dvija-arthah,
for cows
hitah,m.f.n.good (hitaJi)
i.e.
object(arthd),
^frl!*^:
by oneself.
done
the first
wood
be
to
with
(Dieu-donne).
pitrd samah.
by the
(nirbhinnaJi)
cut asunder
visva-updsyah,m.
father,i. e.
like the
f. n.
the
may
knife
^^w:
hari-trdtah,
^ft^Trf:
m. f.n. protected
by Hari.
(trdtaJi)
(ddtrena).
or
as
a proper
name
deva-dattah,given(dattah)
by the gods (devaili),
the
as
(arthaK)
(acquired)
by grain (dhdnyena).
a piece(khandah)
(cut)by nippers(sanku-
wealth
dhdnya-arthah,m.
determinatives
ultramontane
'^frffnfX:
atigirih,
adjective,
an
in which
Compounds
MlvtiflH: prdptagrdmah
say
"c.
facing,
abhimukham,
2.
as
to
formed
4). Similarlyare
2,
adverbs
usual, however,
more
" 513-
WORDS.
COMPOUND
the
There
are,
gods, "c.
are
of
not
allowed to form
mat, not
however, many
compounds
of this kind.
o^oF'STkatakartd; $TT
such
exceptions,
as
H^T
^""l"lu
purdm
deva-
COMPOUND
237
WORDS.
the
case-terminations
in
the
governed
noun.
done
T: sahasd-kritah,
sixth with
labdham, obtained
learned
gehe-panditah,
in the
khecharah,moving
proper
To
" 515.
"element
is
class
vi.
the
of
i). They
changed
Bases
to conquer.
ftfj'i,
upon
the second
final
for the
portion,such
instances
some
such
as
great king.
kimrdjd,a
dear
masc.
bad
friend.
the
the
governing
the fore-teeth
(Pan. n.
" 517.
base,no
change takes
tftHMIsoma-pdt
cloud;
same
purpose
subdivision
the first
of the determinative
portionstands
m,H
as
the
IrH I parama-dtmd,
a
the
as
night,from
masc.
the
Saka-king,explained
king of
sarva,
the
Sakas.
whole,
and
cf. ^trra:
purva-rdtrafy,
to rdtra;
masc.
midnight; yiwu^:
"c.
^tn,
Compounds.
like,not
whole
the
^T a,
are
neut.
space
numeral
In
compounds
(Pan.vi.
parama-rdjah,
that
fore-night;*T"lTra: madhya-rdtrah,
nights,is
JT^TwaM
which
compounds
appositional
of
would
Sakas
the
punya-rdtrah,masc.
two
battle,
in black-beetle^
sky-blue,"c.
as
is changed
rdtrih,night. Rdtrih,fern.,
the
in
all-conquering,
J(JtPq*a f"ii(visvajit,
them
sarva-rdtrah,masc.
SHUd:
masc.
cf.
sdka-pdrthivah,masc.
spirit.3llomiPlH;
king
pond, water-lily.
or
suffixes used
neut.
nila-utpalam,
in
is a verbal
AppositionalDeterminative
followingare
as
first
form
compounds (Karmadharaya)
These
supreme
in
person.
contradict him.
can
compound
compounds (Tatpurusha).In
The
referred
are
Karmadharayas;
as
take
generally
Other
I b.
predicateof
speech.
ignorant
an
one
i. e.
*Tc$g^jalamuch, water-dropping,
short vowels
endingin
J 517.
of
Soma-drinking, nom.
from
sake
of
yudhishthirah,firm
jfvf^TJ
compounds
determinative
in consonants
Hence
^\d.
no
teeth,lit.the king-teeth,i.e.
of
better be looked
of
rdjadantah,the king
goat,
tKJVui!sarasi-jah,
born
air.
^5"lcf!
purva-rdtrah,the
fore-body;
would
gods,
i.e. where
home,
at
supposed
for the
9).
3,
number
to take
JJ^iK
night ;
2,
this
the
body, i. e.
(Pan.
word
qi^rMPn; vdchas-patih,
lord
hridi-spris,
touching the heart.
a
the
dlmand-shashtha/i,
with
devdndm-priyaJi,beloved
name
riiw"tlH":
parasmai-padam,a
swm;
lord of heaven.
dioas-patih,
23). (^eitHCri:
l
3).
3,
of verbs
transitive form
i.e. the
another,
suddenly(Pan. vi.
these
3,
king :
king (Pan.v.
*T% sakhi is
highestday.
but
4,
these
as
a
good king,
4}{j*Usu-rdjd,
69, 70).
changed
In
46), and
supreme
*nr?T
of
to ?re:
compounds
^5^
^THT^:
parama-ahah,
238
for
substituted
Jcu-purushah,
before
(dchdryd)
or
i.e. not
horse.
^nT^iTW
and
In
" 518.
ghana-sydmah,m.f.
Bharata
$ 519.
follows.
non-
non-horse, i.e.not
n.
the
f.
n.
little brown,
sdmi-kritah,m.
srrfo^fT:
word
qualifying
rdjddhamah, the
They
is
numeral
is
f.n.
lowest
placed last.
king; H^if^ro
bharata-
great man
they
also
may
without
or
Compounds.
first
to ^ am,
and
go,
feminines,and
meant
or
thus
adjectives,
form
(Pan.u.
neut.
i,
an
five
ships.
from
fingers,
an
and
in
kapdlam}
to
to express
three
4,
the
The
compounds.
neut.
the four
what
of them
are
has
ahan
f.
i,
from
am.
panchan, five,
the
imgava
as
iv.
i,
of
measure
an
ahah
a.
offering(puroddsah)
an
from
panchan, five,and
tri-loM,fern.
88). f"^c5J"*l
takes the fern, termination
takes
assemblageof
two
(Pan.n.
Dvigu compound
for
being changed to
changed to
n.
compartments,
(Pan.iv.
termination.
the neuter
ten
youths,
the
"^fn
chatur-
ages.
followingrules applyto
Very few
or
tNg: pancha-guh,
Dvigu compound
dasa-kumdri,fern, an
"^$l$HlO
yugam,
changed to ^z
are
in
dvinauh, bought
92). flg^fb
days ;
i, 51, 52;
here the
here
changed to ^ i, fern.,or
angulih,finger;final
five
aggregate
an
worlds
ndva.
TTR
(Pan.v.
space of two
(Pan.n.
becoming possessive
compound) is changed to
cows
dish with
neut.
to express
aggregate
made
which
noun
of five cows,
"gr^:dvy-ahah,masc.
is
^r a
^n
dvy-ahgulam,neut.
ST^cS1
are
numeral,
aggregate
tftnau
23),and
worth
adjective,
two
Final ^r^
iftgo(inan
cow.
is
secondarysuffixes.
neut.
Tfarrepancha-gavam,
which
the
cases
portionof
generallyneuters,
are
with
compounds,
Determinative
compounds, the
The
Dvigu.
aggregates,but
" 520.
krita,done.
TT^TTVtt
Numeral
c.
Determinative
called
i,
masc.
a
tiger-likeman,
^v^CTTn purusha-vydglirah,
teacher
a prime cow.
govrindarakah,
an
a-brdhmanah,
^frXRcS:ishat-pihgalah,m.
Brahman;
white
best
the
freshthah,
some
an-asvah,masc.
^T"TO
appositionalcompounds,
some
vipragaurah,a
If
Brahman.
sdmi, half,and
half-done,from
f^^:
been
has
-*\d\$(W.
from
are
fore-QOon.
who
one
formerly(pro).
black.
sydma,
man,
the
is
ahna
^r
cfirg^: kdpurushah,.TTT^T^:pra-
or
teacher,i. e.
hereditary
dchdryah, masc.
Brahman,
bad
masc.
Sometimes
day.
^tr^: purvdhnah,
ahan;
^^
last
the
uttamdhah,
cf. drHl^t
^Tjf aha;
" 518-
WORDS.
COMPOUND
the
changesof
the
final
generalas requiring
a change
in
syllables
determinative
without
regardto
any
the
-J 520.
COMPOUND
precedingwords
while
special,
being
1.
in the
compound.
The
of
the
within
^^richt
sphere of
final ^
(Pan. v.
74);
4,
after the
nfa"\pathin
2.
negative^a;
7T^
wr0s,
means
Likewise
pratyurasam,
isf\5f
erArsAt,
eye,
window
5.
but
but
(Pan. v.
compound
expresses
""H"\ brahman
becomes
Brahman
that substitution is
7. n"j"^ takshan
final ^T
takes
animals, with
throw
which
*U"1"^sdman, hymn,
with
11.
the hair
fTP^tamasbecomes
tamasam,
12.
H?^
raAas
blind
after ^fnT
compared
and
^T
darkness.
"^^varchas
(Pan. v.
M^H
becomes
'ft^o
five
15.
cows
of
ships. (Pan.v.
16. "n nau,
4,
4,
4,
ship, after
kdldyasam,black-iron;
of
name
4,
country ; *}"jgtf":
104). After ^
and
ku
TffT
and
"FT7 kauta;
141*1(1*3*
yrdmatakshaJi,
after certain
words,
the
not
of
dkarshasvah,a dog
of
names
die,a
bad
a?;a,
rtl*i
4,
85.)
at the
v.
adv.
75.)
4,
TTsam, and ^V
andha;
^""in*i*i
andha-
79.)
^"^
^8ft ava,
anu,
and
1TR
lapta; ^J^T^Tt
(Pan. v.
end of
numerical
an
fH^TAasf/;""q^t*
and
brahma
after *^(
Brahman.
it forms
and
^T*T sdma
81.)
ndva,if it forms
TTO
final ^f
94.)
4,
hair, become
"lt^Jt
ponchaguh, bought
"ft
nau, ship,becomes
76.)
4,
prddhrah. (Pan. v.
prepositions
; TO*!*
after
varchasa
*T3gava, except
but
(Pan. v.
105).
4,
^JlafiH^I*
after ^T^
anurahasah, solitary.
(Pan. v.
13.
'i"fiQftgavdkshah, a
"nicoi"4"f
(Pan. v.
v.
(Pan.
regularly.
T^TT rahasa
becomes
HrfJM"
aray
!T*TO tamasa
becomes
excellent
an
is expressed;
eye.
Brahman.
name.
ati,and
after
cOm*^ loman,
grain,i.e.
or
*Rf
95.)
adhva
^TUI
and
pro^",^Tg anw,
rdja,^J^ aha,
97.)
4,
becomes
mean
(Pan. v.
it is
(?). (Pan. v.
adhvan
9. ^Tl"n^
iron.
of Surashtra
final ^Ta
THT
lake, take
iron,^TO^sffras,
ayas,
optional(Pan.
a
villagecarpenter. (Pan.v.
iJJ^/tfan,
dog,takes
to
WCf
optional with
Vinftuiascorasam,
eye of
forms
or
mahd
10.
kind
is
vfai: apanthdJi.
or
urasa;
ceases
^m^
stone,
a*m"w"
This
82).
4,
j^f5J*tlifK|
brdhmandkshi,the
surdshtrabrahmah,
8.
half-verse.
if the locative
TTf?T/"r"/i,
^HSf aksha, if it
becomes
cart, TOS*^
^frft^anas,
if the
6.
the chest
on
compounds
grammar.
aputham
TT^I
after
more
91.)
4,
chief, becomes
the
XIM"I
mahdrdjah. (Pan. v.
if it
4.
are
3.
of
ardharchah,
"WM1^:
afterwards
given first,
are
singlecompound
one
^pur,
verse,
generalrules
rather than
dictionary
239
WORDS.
brahma-
78.)
4,
Dvigu.
adjectival
for five
(Pan. v.
cows.
numerical
aggregate;
adjective
; s^ntt
M'S'iq
4,
panchagavam,
92.)
^^ni^panchandvam,
five
panchanauh, worth
99.)
^IV
ardha, becomes
^T^TT^ ardhandcam,
"^mndva;
half
ship.
(Pan.v. 4, 100.)
17.
^P^khdrt,a
also after
18.
measure
of
grain,becomes
ardha; ^I^lt
^tTZkhara
ardhakhdram.
as
an
(Pan.v.
aggregate; PS"s
4,
i "-
drikhdram
101.)
^"ffc5anjali,
a
handful,after f^ dvi or f^ tri,may, as an aggregate,take
handfuls.
si^ltadryarijali,
two
or
(Pan. v. 4, 102.)
dvyafijalain
final ^
a;
240
finger,after
^bjfc5fl%w/i,
19.
dvyahgulam, a length of
fingers.(Pan. v.
two
20.
UlVvjsakthi,thigh,becomes
21.
purvasaktham. (Pan. v.
^N optf
^rf^ra^ri,
night, after "*f%sarra,
98.)
4,
after
partitivewords,
after
^^TT^I
sankhydta,
ti"?Min
sarva-
fore-night;VST'Ucf
dvirdtram,two
the
purvardtrah,
night;
*$"purva;
and indeclinables,becomes
after numerals
likewise
*Te3 ahgula;
86.)
4,
after
saktha
"QW*l
punya,
indeclinables,becomes
and
numerals
" 521-
WORDS.
COMPOUND
^C%*[ahan,day,under
22.
the whole
day
circumstances, becomes
same
days. Except
two
the
^'^H^punydham,
also
singleday. (Pan.y.
words,
of words
Collective
be
naturally
that would
terminations
the
dual
either of the
kind
same
of
divided
into two
the
or
The
second
but
elephantand
an
Likewise
and
If instead
is to express
of
horses
horse,is
an
number
the
samdhdra
nouns
in the
instance
of the
(inan army),an
horses
more
or
instance
black
and
horse.
horse
two
into neuter
ujll sukla-krishnau,white
91 "fioh
4
cow
in which
(called
MHI^K
class
formed
The
classes.
plural,accordingto
gavdsvam, a
by and, are
compounds
singular. ^frt'y!
hasty-asvau,
of the latter class.
and
Compounds.
connected
formingthe compound.
comprisesthe
the
an
(called
comprisescompounds
itaretara)
^tftrR
first class
sarvdhnah
4HI^$!
compounds (Dvandva)are
Collective
aAwa;
^1^
it expresses
88-90.)
4,
II.
" 521.
when
numeral
and
and
elephant,^f^yjihastyasvau,the
an
the compound
elephants,
terminations
the
takes
intention
of
plural,
^4-KJHji:hastyasvdh.
" 522. SQme
Words
rules
with
given
are
fewer
as
to which
should
syllables
Kes'ava;not
kesavasivau.
W^r^ftfT^T
stand first:
fs'aand
"!lt
$"(ep
isa-krishnau,
"3" u
the
bhoktri-bhogyau,
have
precedence:
of
putra, son,
T
first:
enjoyerand
"^^m
Brahman
a
kshatriyau,
in earlier Sanskrit
stand
Words
the
stand
and
first :
Krishna.
"
vowel
Hari
and
of
demon
the
compound,
change
their
and
^J
being
ri into
and
followed
mother.
mother;
another
by
the
names
(Pan. vi.
of certain
3, 26).
agmshomau, Agni
ending in
in
and
Soma.
should
Kara
^?
also
cns("J.i5ir"a"ii
brdhmana(Pan. vi.
sacred
word
and
3,
father,but
33.)
titles,forming the
ending
in
ri,or by
(Pan. vi.
deities are
Thus
pound.
com-
greaterimportance should
;
or
ending in ^J ri, expressiveof relationship,
a
Dvandva
mdtd-pitarau,mother
Kshatriya; TTrTlftniTr
the
potri^orm ^^T^^Tfj hotdpotdrau,
fil
its final
ending
Lastly,words
and
and
vowel
Words
IriTT pitard-mdtard,
father and
father
mdtdpitarau,
524. When
*?fenCThari-harau,
enjoyed.
first in
(Vqon^nisiva-kesavau,S'iva and
beginning with
the god
deva-daityau,
04 rRl*f
stand
should
words
fry
3,
Hotri
compounded,
N
and
Potri
priests.
^H(!mitrdvarunau, Mitra
Similar
irregularities
appear
lengthens
and
in
Varuna;
words
like
242
3.
having
heads.
two
(Pan.v.
4.
hair,substitutes
ojta^/omaw,
5.
Hir"H"*lwasz7;a,
nose, becomes
cow-nosed, i. e.
6. After ^
",
kalydnadharmd. (Pan. v.
knee,
SfHJ./awM,
10.
This
is
(Pan.
v.
pro/a, progeny,
and
sthiila-ndsikah,
"^cO"llftloK
HVTmec?Aa, mind,
becomes
IT 5aw,
122.)
4,
ending in
noun
^^^dhanvan;
w^aw
names
(Pan. V.
"fiT
danta, tooth, becomes
of
bow
optional.
*tfVf
after
$rawS/M
after
""n^^ac?
129).
131.)
4,
pushpadhanvd,having
^TV^T
iHfajdni;^JH^TTf^TJ
subhajdnih. (Pan.
4,
130).
4,
this is
prajnuh(Pan. v.
U3J
^Jnw^
^$nftkundodhni.
16.
treated like
'^fo^jambhanj
^^TTsujambhd.
ttkurdhva (Pan. v.
12.
v- 4" 135-1370
^l^pdda, foot,becomes
are
124.)
"3W^
15.
substitute
121.)
4,
(Pan. v.
words, becomes
iRRljdyd,wife, becomes
gonasah,
*nntt!
tffflrq
sakthi,thigh,may
and
(Pan. v.
udder, becomes
*3\W(udhas,
14. *TV
name
118, 119.)
4,
^("cotahalih.
11.
13.
of
takes
4,
becomes
117.)
*?$" sthula;
durmedhdh.
g^ITt
certain
optionalafter
4,
change
same
nose.
ifaljambhd,
jaw, after
after
f?fc3kali,furrow,
or
ending in ^H(asj
(Pan. v.
antar^f^tvahih; ^iic5i"t!
and
^TcT^antar
not
The
JHU
particles,
same
nouns
8. VT
tf su,
or
^T^cSt ahalah
final ^a;
7. After the
but
prominent
g: duh,
after
"^^nasa,
hog.
and
dm
115.)
final ^T
snake;
large-nosed,i.e.
unnasah, with
4,
"%
after
the
lomah,having
9.
final ^T
head, substitutes
Igfi^murdhan,
" 529-
WOKDS.
COMPOUND
4,
134.)
^nfvtsugandhih.(Pan.
words;
certain
v.
(Pan. v.
vydgJirapdd.
"=qi"Mi^
certain words;
4,
138-140.)
^
(signof
having
^c?a# after many words; flT^dwe/an,
fern,
d
vidati.
fk^cft
141-145.)
age) ;
(Pan. 4,
certain
teeth,
two
v.
kakuda, hump,
becomes
ajdtakakudja
bull
young
before
his
and
words
after certain
'"h^^kakud
have
humps
in
certain
senses
(Pan. v.
grown.
i46-i48.)X
1
8.
and
'3T^ uras
other
words
belongingto
vyudhoraskah,broad-chested.
19. Words
in
^t'n
masters, from
20.
Feminine
add
words
21.
Most
having many
(Pan. v.
other words
bahumdldkah
may
4,
or
indeclinable
in which
are
or
the
may
of the
not
add
nom.
v.
4,
in
152.)
^J ri,add
final ^
ka;
^J"roBJbahubhartrikah, having
many
(Pan. v.
Adverbial
indeclinable
indeclinable
or
4,
154.)
Compounds.
are
compounds (Avyayibhava)
particlewith
again indeclinable,and
terminations
final ^i kaj
151.)
feminine; ^^iHcM
maidens;
bahumdlah.
^Jittc*:
or
Adverbial
joining an
4,
add
153.)
IV.
$ 539.
ih the
class
same
Wffo*{svdmin,
master.
(Pan.
in ^",like ^T^ nadi, and words
bahukumdrikah,
husbands.
(Pan. v.
final cR"a
the
another
word.
particleforms
The
always
neut.
by
pounds,
resultingcom-
the
formed
first element,
the
ordinary.
-J 531.
COMPOUND
243
WORDS.
adhi-hari,upon
Examples : vifij^fi:
Hari,
instead
*ftf f
of
adhi
harau,
Vishnu,
sing, ^froj
fVrtfgpii
vishnum, ace.
sing. 3M"J"uuupa-krishnam, near to Krishna.
nir-makshikam, free from flies,
flylessly.^ffff^Hati-himam, past the
winter, after the winter, instead of ^HlT f^f ati himam, ace. sing.
anu~vishnu, after
loc.
the
pradakshinam, to
M^fKJilJ
i.e.
instead
accordingly,
with
sa-trinam
the
even
from
of ipg*i^
the
near
at the
approachof
samit
or
are
fn8"tishthad-gu,at
particle.Ex.
at the
pancha-gahgam,
Benares); McM'^m
" 531.
The
place where
eats
(everything)
^N^l*
the grass,
final
107). "5M^i^*upa-jarasam,
4,
(J167). 4MHPH^M/?a-
age
samidh,
*rfir^
an
time
cows
M'S'i'i
ghat at
village.
changes of
the
indeclinable
stand to be milked
the
followingrules apply to
the
is not
of which
first element
the
pratyag-grdmam, west
the
king.
king; from tr*F{rdjan,
the
when
delivery.
TT^TC]^
upa-saradam,near
near
Avyayibhavasthe
some
atti,he
old
iRQjaras,
upa-rajam, near
^m"T
saha,with
(Pan.v.
"5MHPH^ upa-samidham,
the form,
sing, 'Jjvji^ifa
yathd-
ace.
amukti, until
^rr^f^i
Ganga.
sarad, autumn
fire-wood.
of
trinena
verse,
^TO
autumn;
rupam9
satrinam
ugmtjfe
ydvach-chhlokam, at every
anu-gahgam,
vicjJNi
anu
instead
ability,
grass;
of ^Tejfaujj
anu
of OTJ ^q
Sakti,accordingto one's
instead
the
in
syllables
final
adverbial
compounds :
1.
Words
may
endingin
or
may
the fire-wood.
2.
Words
v.
endingin ^^an
neuters
in
4,
4,
zwfal^upasamit,
ITRTfW upasamidham or
final *8a;
take
(Pan.
(Pan. v.
3. But
mutes
not
near
in.)
final ^B?a;
substitute
^"rnT
self.
one-
108.)
^f^an
may
or
may
^M^H
not;
upacharmam
(Pan. v. 4, 109.)
*il"5*il4ll
^iiiisi^"u1
dgrahdyani,and
"T"^nadf,
paurnamdsi,
or
^"'H
upacharma, near
the skin.
4.
take
final ^
and
112.)
5. Words
";
^mf^ upanadi
belongingto
or
the
class
upasaradam,about autumn.
"im^ upanadam,
near
beginningwith
(Pan.
v.
4,
107.)
STC^sarad
mR^irt
the river.
take
may
or
may
(Pan. v.
final ^
a ;
not
4, no,
3*431 45
I.
APPENDIX
Explanation of
^T
is put
their
Accent.
the
at
VERBS.
Anubandhas
in
ending
roots
OF
Indicatory Letters.
or
in
consonant
order
facilitate
to
pronunciation.
order
gravely accented,
both
divided
the
show
to
or
are
is accented
root
Atmanepada,
themselves
roots
of
accent, in
the
pada,
letter
last
The
"
circumflex
The
of
end
Verbal
the
of
some
LIST
OR
DHATUPATHA
with
that
the
verb
the
the
acute,
follows
or
grave,
Parasmai-
the
forms.
into
former
and
admitting,
latter
the
anuddtta,
mediate
inter-
rejecting the
^ i.
d
^TT
prohibitsthe
("333"
2), Pan.
-D.
be
to
omitted
manthati, Pass.
ir shows
that
where
vii.
($ 367), Pan.
from
"Vjfw^chyutir.
(" 333"
D.
renders
the
admission
""
but
samu;
renders
the
therefore
seddhd
of the
5), Pan.
ri
prevents
from
Ex.
from
Pres.
month,
Hr^
or
2,
15).
aorist
second
or
^r^l^achyutat
^ i in the
Ex.
vn.
of
the
all consonants
iffwr
the
aorist
first
"33:
56;
Ex.
^ i
and
in the
Parasmai-
or
formation
of the
Nishthas
-$$ undi.
from
unnah
intermediate
2,
admission
inadmissible
or
ih^
be
would
nandati
*f^f?f
Ex.
nasal
which
the
optional before
gerundial
inadmissible
therefore
^rfai^Tsamitvd
^nFTT
or
in
sdntvd
the
from
^ifw:sdntah.
before
tenses
vowel,
actually written
4, 24.
from
the
2, 14.
vii.
past participle
(Pan.vn.
^ig
radical
is
that
intermediate
of the
II.
last
the
vi.
but
57.
i,
in.
2),Pan.
(" 337,
tttva
58
i,
take
may
pada
use
after
Nishthas
of the
fHMicftI
niphald.
from
TJ^: phullah
nasal
formation
the
mathyate.
Hs-MH
verb
prohibits the
nasal
3[Hn
Ex.
16.
tfera nandyate;
Pass.
nadi3
of
($345, 10),Pan.
omitted
intermediate
2,
vii.
insertion
^i requires the
is not
of the
use
in
sedhitd
substitution
of
fjfftilokri.
causals
intermediate
but
the
from
past
\y
^ i
(" 337,
($ 372*),
2), Pan.
short
Pan.
2,
the
general
2,44;
and
^T
15).
Ex.
in the
cated
redupli-
ftr^t siddhah.
for the
vii.
in
vn.
participle(Pan. vii.
but
fa\t^sidhu
;
of the
!"
optional
4,
long
2.
vowel
Ex.
^aftoin^alulokat
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
is formed
participle
Pan.
shows
Ex. TJ^:phullafy,blown,
187).
Pan.
that
of the
lengthened in
is not
passive(Pan.vi.
4,
I.
4.
Ihdvdvah,
*^R:
Ihdvatha,
8. *r^*T
3
^ava/,
7. ^IHTR
dbhavdma,
bhdveh, 3.
2.
VR:
7.
H^T"Mvema,
3.
"T^g
2.
bhdvata, 9. "T|
6. T$]snj: babMvdtuh,
II A.
dbhdvam
^r^
i.
5. ^*$$dbhutam, 6.
F.
i.
3.
7.
Ihdvantu
4.
(seep.
1,
2.
2.
6) ;
the
regularform
\\
Pf.
dbhavah,
i.
"i^ Ihdveyam,
bhdvetam, 6. *^rribhdvetdm,
*T^nf bhdvatdm,
"^^5 babMva^
i.
8.
^"J5 babMvd,
^ij: azA,
(seep. 175),
9.
^ijj: babhdvuh,
bhavishydtah,
bhavishydtha,9.
bhavishydnti,
dbhavishyafy,3.
dbhavishyat,
6.
dbhavishyata,9.
8.
instead
irregular,
have
bhavishydti,
bhavishydthah,6.
is
7. *TqTR
dbhavishyatam,
would
6.
^f^
8.
^6a
reduplicative
syllable
2,
dbhavatdm,
6.
O.
Nfcuifo bhavishydsi,
3.
dbhavishyam, 2
dbhavishydma^
(Pan. i.
2.
dbhuma, 8
7. ^TJJIT
^JlffdbMtam,
dbhavishydva,
5.
t The
dbhavatam,
Ihdvati,
bhdvdmah,
7.
^nrt dbhavam,
bhdvatam,
^f^iT babMvimd,
bhavishydmah,
i
i.
^M^ff
5. H^TT
*nj"rbabMva,
HP^uflfH bhavishyami,
Ihdvatah,
6. Witt
Ihdveva,5. "m
bhavishyavafi,
5. HfrtTO
C.
bhdvdva,
H^T^
^jfT*TbabMvitha,
the aorist
2.*"lhdva,
Ihdveta, 9.^^:Ihdveyuh,l.i.*Fnfolhdvdni3
8. "TWlf
8. H^ff
("462, note),
H^ftr bhdvasi, 3
2.
dbhavata, 9. ^w^a^avaw,
8. ^W^Trf
H^
H^i/iav^,
4.
bftdvatu,
4.
bhdvdma,
dbhavdva, 5.
4. ^M^TR
causative
optionally
lengthenedin
Ihdvdmi,
H^fif bhdvanti, I.
9.
the
^J)huyto be.
bhdvathah,
5. HTO
niphald.
ParasmaipadaVerbs.
*mfa
i.
(Bhvddi,I Class).
i.
P.
72).
93).
Class
Bhu
Parasmaipada:
is
3,
of the
fowl
from
and
4, 92;
vi.
vowel
the
(J442, 5),
n ta
^ffarnft
opydyi.
the power
has
participle
instead of
subject(Pan.i.
to the
the former
2,
inrTfyawa-
both
follows
the verb
that
f*T ni shows
Ex.
Atmanepada(Pan.I. 3, 12).
the Atmanepada
and Parasmaipada,
the
shows
*T/*
in tf na
Ex. Tffa:pinafyfrom
2, 45.
vin.
shows
^"
Parasmaipada($367),
if^ maths.
thit from
in the
forbids Vriddhi
aorist in the
*Pl*n{agamatfrom ng ffamfi.
first aorist ($348 *),Pan. vn.
2, 5.
Ex.
the second
75 li shows
245
VERBS.
been
^^
of
bubhdoa.
dbhavishyat6m
dbhavishyan^
base, too, is irregular
246
P. F. i.vrfacTTftR
bhavitasmi,
Hfaffrftr
bhavitdsi, 3. tf^TTTbhavitd,4.
2.
bhavitasvah, 5. ^f^iTT^r:bhavitdsthah,
tdsmah,
2.
*gn:
"rfVriHW bhavitdstha,
8.
bhavyah
Perf. ^^T^
bhdvan,
bhdtvd or
bhavitdrah, B.
Fut.
babhuvdn,
9.
JJITO bhtiydsam,
bMydstam,
bhuydsva, 5. "m*T
"J?n^r bMydsta,
i.
6. $inw
ij^ng: bhuydsuh
Part.
\\
(J456).
bhdvdvahe,
5.^^
vadhve,
H^W
9.
bhdveydthdm,
H^
6.
i.
6.
VR*i
2.
bhdvase, 3. *r^ffbhdvate, 4.
^SM^rdbhave,
dbhavdvahi,
5. ^WT*TT
8.H"T
dbhavathdh,
^nnvji;
2.
dbhavethdm,
dbhavadhvam,
8. ^T"WEJ
bhdvethdh, 3.
HT*n:
2.
"r^bhdve,
bhdvante, I.
^M^THf^ dbhavdmahi,
bhdveya,
i.
bhdvethe,
dbhavata, 4. ^nm^f^
9.
^forTO
9.
8.
Hf%WT" bhavitdrau,
7. ufarfiw: bhavi-
P.
:
Atmanepada'""
7.
6.
bhuydh,
4. ^rns
3. ^fi-^bhuydf,
Pres. i?^
VERBS.
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
BHU
6.
3.
^TH^Hf dbhavetdm,
dbhavanta, O.
9. ^WRTT
i.
^Tif
HTTTTlfbhdveydtdm, 7. *RJ*ffbhdvemahi,
8.
^*4
bhdvedhvam,
4.
"j.*f3TP^bhdvdmahai}
i.'f^ babMve
(seenote f, page 245),
TT^f^ babhuvishe, 3. "^^ babMve, 4. ^ijf^t babhuvivdhe,5. "sn^rre babhuvdthe,
babhuvimdhe,8. ^f^i^ or "^ babhuvidhve
6. ^^5m
Idbhuvdte,7. ^Jjf^m%
^wfaft dbhavishi, ^^f^?r:
or
-^Ave (seeJ 105),9. ^jfft babhdvire,I A.
bhdvadhvam,
9.
vr^irtbhdvantdm
\\
Pf.
2.
i.
2.
-dhvam,
or
9.
^wf%mr
C. ^THftrsir
dbhavishye "c., P.
3.
HfVtfTbhavitd,4.
F.
B.
shishtd,4.
HMfar
i.
9.
bhavitdsdthe,6. HfaflW
tdrah,
Hf^TTT^bhavitddhve,9. ^fViTR* bhavi-
8.
lhavishiyd,2. HW^Tt
lhavishishthdh,3.
^rf^^^f^bhavishimdhi, 8. HP^"D^4
Hf^hj^ bhavishirdn
babMvdndh,
Passive
"^
6.
fmd^f^ bhavishwdhi, 5. ^f^Ml^ll^i bhavishiydsthdm,
7.
-dhvdm,
or
^f^ril^^bhavitdsvahe,5. ^f^dWR
bhavitdrau,
bkavitdsmahe,
7. "TfVffTWf
^wfe4
dbhavishafa,F.
i.
8.
a"Aa-
\\
or
0S" lhavishidhvdm
or
bhdvamdnah, Perf.
i.
be used
used in the
sense
of
2.
in the
Atmanepada
*T^
: *T f^R
obtaining
after certain
sa
Even
prepositions.
sriyam bhavate, he
obtains
P- 4, 1. 3-)
in
means
to
and may
perceive,
yielda passive.
by
itself it is
happiness. (Sar.
BH"
CLASS,
Atmanepada,I
Pf. *n*"$babMve
"c., like
2.
^swfatfi:
or
"c., like
PARASMAIPADA
wfofo
^wrWw
or
dbhavishi,
bhavitdhe"c.,
Hfadl^or mfcirfig
dbhavishye "c., P. F.
II
i.
bhdvishye
"c.,
"c.
bhdvishiyd
A.
dbh"vilhjhdb,
3. *wrfa
^wrftm:
247
VERBS.
bhdydmdnah,
C. wfro
or
B. Hfrifa
or
bhdvishyd-
Fut. HfqqjHm:
Causative, Parasmaipada:
0. HN^ii
bhdvdyeyam,
II A. wr^T^
I. HIMmfH
dbtbhavam,
P. F. WNf^rilfw
shyam,
bhdvdydmi, I. ^XFTQ
C. WHnf'nQ
bhavayishyanii^
B. HT*TW
bhdvayitasmi^
P. nm
\\
dbhavayam,
bhdvaydiichakdr
F. UNfamifa
Causative,Atmanepada
dbibhave, F. m^fTO
P. Mi^ifa
bhdvyasam.
bhdvdye, I. mm
Pf. HR*d'*n*
dbhdvayi-
dbhdvaye,O.
II
bhdvaydiichakre,
A.
F.
Causative,Passive
1. HT^ Ihdvyai \\
I A. ^WRftrfa
Pf.
P.
m*nr
bhdvyeya,
dbhdvayishi or
dbhdvishi,F. HTCfirofr
Ihdvayishyeor
or
wrfa*T
dbhdvishye,P.
F.
B. Hreftnfal bhdvayishiydor
Hlf^ril^bhdvitdhe,
bhdvishlyd.
Desiderative, Parasmaipada
:
"^J^Wbulhusheyam,
P.
lulhushdmi,I. ^ryjw
"yj^rfa
dbulhu-
bubhushdni
u Pf.
"J^mftT
^JJ5T^BR bubhtishdiichakdra, I A. ^rygfw dbubMshisham^ Y.^^f^snf^bubhushishydmi,
P. F. ^^fMrfifiH
B. *^)jTxn^
bubhushydsam.
bubhushitdsmi,
dbubhilshishyam,
0.
Desiderative,Atmanepada: P. ^$5 bubhushe, I.^^5a"MtAz(5A6,
I A.
bubhushdiichakre,
bubhusheya, I. g^5 lubhushai \\ Pf. ^%MN*ft
dbubhushishi, ^^jwr: dbubhushishthdh, 3. ^R$ftF dbubhushishta,
sham, O.
I.
2.
bubhushishye, C.
^ijf^
dbubhushishye,
P. F.
bubhushitdhe, B.
gflfafn^
^ijfq^ bubhushishiyd.
Passive
Desiderative,
I. ^"f^
P.-z^bubhiishye,
O.
dbubhtishye,
I A.
u Pf.^^f^raiiwiA^A^icAaArre,
lubhushyeya,
l.^-^lubhushyai
dbubhushi
(see J 406),
dbubhushishi^ ^^jjwr: dbubhushishthdh, 3. ^TJ^jf^
i.
2.
F.
5^^
B.
^fq^rhrbubhiishishiyd.
bubhushishye,C.
Intensive,Atmanepada
: P.
^ivg"lobhuydse,
-sft^bobhuye,
3. ^t$inr
6. ^^fffbobhuyete,
lobhuydte,4. ^^JirT^t
bobhuydvahe,5. ^t^J^ bobhiiyethe,
9.^$^ bobhuydnte,I.
bobhuydmahe, 8. ^t^TO bobhiiyddhve,
7. "sftjJTT'R^
2.
i.
dbobhiiyata,
dbobhuye, ^t^-q^n:dbobhuyathdh, 3. ^nrfr$5iT
4.
2.
bhtiydvahi,
5. ^t$5*U dbobhuyethdm,
6.
dbobhdyetdm,
'3nft"inri
9.
^^^?T
7.
O.
dbobhiiyanta,
BHfi CLASS,
248
VERBS.
PARASMAIPADA
lobhuydtdm,
lobhdydsva,3. -sfhjTnri
*ft"JTO
lobMyetdm^
bobhuyethdm, 6. ^^in
lobhuydvahai,
5. *ft$ifcrf
4. wfojTjret
lobhdydntdm \\
bobhuyddhvam, 9. sftiJTriri
lobhuydmahai) 8. "sfrj^"sj
7. ^*J5Tm|
IdbMyat,
lobMyeya "c., 1. -aft^rr
2.
1.
I A.
-sfr^^bobhuydmchakre,
PF.
i.
dbobhudbobhuyishi, ^rsft^ftrsr.
^pfrjlfafa
2.
dbobhuyishta,
yishthdh,3. ^nft^ftrf
dbobhdyishdthdm,
-dhvam,
dbobhtiyidhvamor
dbobhuyishata,
^l^iflfwiT
8.
or
WTtijftrsor
F.
C. ^t^ft^ dbobhuyishye,P.
bobhiiyishye,
"sftsjnra
B.
bobhuyishiyd.
-sftsftpfta
"cT
Intensive, Parasmaipada:
^^ft
2.
bobhoshi
or
P.
9.
F.
^"^f"T bobhomi
i.
^frnn^ bobhuyitdhe,
^ffartf*?bobhavimi,
or
bobhoti
^ftaTfrfa
bobhavishi,3. ^tvrVlTf
TmrtilT bobhaviti,
or
2.
i.
wqto^h
or
bhuva,
5.
dbobhavih,
3.
dbobhavuh,
^nfta^t
Tfrsftbobhuhi,3. ^^5
5.
bobhutdm,
^t^Jrf
9-
^J^l
6.
bobhuvatu
vdmchakriva,
bobhuva,
^Rfarh^dbobhavit,4. ^TWt^JWa^o-
7.
bobhotu
7.
Pf. i.^fa^HroFTT
^T^TH
Wt$5 bobhdvd, 9.
^H^ra
bdbhavdma,
also
8.
^^JJT
i.
4.
8.
bdbhavdva,
^t^FTbobhutd,
^fa^N^1
'"fiHm bobhdva
bobha-
or
^$^ bobhuva, 4.
bobhuvimd,
Wt^J^tbobhdvdtuh, 7. ^t^f%JT
'"rt)?R bobhdva
^^jg:bobhuvuh, II
dbobhuma,
4.
bobhavdmchakdra,
ThT^f^fRbobhavdmchakrima
^hff^T bobhuvitha, 3.
2.
bobhavitu,
sftarfc|
or
bobhutdm,
"sft^HT
\\
7. ^t^"T
^^
O.
or
dbobhutam, 6. ^t^Jjrrf
^?^t)Jlf
dbobhutdm,
dbobhuta, 9.
2.
dbobhot
^iwt"Th^
A.
i.
or
^[^ dbobhufy
a"odbobhuvit,4. ^nsft"5
^T^t^Ttl^
^TTt^5 dbobhuvam,
dbobMt
or
^T^)J5^:
dbobhuvih, 3. ^nft$^
^Mv", 5. ^R^ijif
dbobhdtam, 6. ^I^ft^ifrf
dbobhutdm,
or
7.
2.
^nA^5 dbobhuma,
8.
dbobhilvuh
I A. i.f ^r
dbobhuta,9. ^rwt)J|:
(not^TT^5^ dbobhuvan),
dbobhdvisham,4. ^rwtHTf^B^ dbobhdvishva, 7. ^^Trfa1^
dbobhdvishma,
"^fafranftbobhavishydmi,
C. ^r^t^fVa} dbobhavishyam,P.
F.
F.
bobha'sjfaf^rilfw
vitdsmi,B. ^rijtrr^
lobhuydsam.
Note
the
"
followingforms
Fut.
,
who
Pres.
^ftjlTT
bobhutdm,
Imp.
allow
the intensive
without
Tya
to form
bdbliuvita,
Tta^teTfibobhavdmchakre,
Aor. 'SI^Tf^ dbobhavishta,
Per. Perf.
Fut.
p.
The
t The
second
Atmanepada,
give
an
^ft$%
bobhute, Impf. ^sft'JW
dbobhuta,Opt. Tt^hf
WNTfrHnT bobhavishydte,
Cond. ^rwVHf^Efif
dbobhavishyata,Per.
Ben. TtHf^^
bobhamshishtd.
(See Colebrooke,
194.)
the
Grammarians
form
t$^
bobhuviva
usual
is not
form
first aorist
grammarians
on
for
optionally
the
^5M
sanctioned
for
the
by
but
intensives,
simple verb.
(Colebr.p. 193).
conjugationof intensives
are
rule of Panini.
any
in
^5M
it is
superseded by
the
Some
The
conflicting
opinions of native
BHfr CLASS,
250
VERBS.
PARASMAIPADA
J 99"
lingual^,
with
Pt. -fftmr,
as
not
Int.
Des. ^faitfTT,
II Pass, "fWff,Caus.-fTrefir,
Adj.-ffzm^i:
and fav sidh,to command
(fan*).
sidA, to go (ftox),
ftn{
ft**" ftrefw, 9. fttfw, I A.
" pfP. *vfn (fMwftf
*),I. ^^
B. ftnsr^.
P. F. ftftrar,
irftrofir,
7.
2.
1.
F.
In the
"gj
commanding
of
sense
(f^v),and
the intermediate
hence
(as before),
^T^rtl^
I A.
or
7.
Int.
^fff
^^,
(a), ^^ft^r,3.
^^rfif, P.
2.
^HT,
F.
I A.
^^:,
9.
B.
^^T^^
P.
M'"l^,
4.
"ftnff,
Adj.
ftr^r,
ftff^rfiT("103),
W^(fi), (Pan.vn.
or
gad,
^fifII Pf.
i.
T^
TTT"? ("),2.
^rra*,
i.
wfrrf
,
^fir,1."^,O. ^,
The
change
It is admitted
explained to
Its proper
in the
of
by
be
the
into
Sar.
for the
meaning
command.
This
$348),F.
2, 7;
I A-
^H
(")"(J
^K
or
2.
go, to
Pf.
is forbidden
of
I
("), Hf^'M,
9. ^j:,
by
Anubandha
or
vfi"
ask, to pain.
govern,
(I325)
^pq^R
Panini
vin.
or
"T is sometimes
is
optionalin
forms without
change
its initial
added
the
intermediate
^m(
after
or
ftfV
3, 113, when
be that intermediate
verb must
A.
F. ^rf^'orfiT
I A. wnfFf^,
u
^Tfjrff
*r, 9. 'sri'Tjt,
II Caus.
-si^fw,
^nf^TJ,Des.
2.
I. ^rg
past participle
(" 337, II. 5). The
to
ftr^
i.
trace, to scratch.
^ ind, to
The
sake
would
Pf.
Int.
in^rfw,Des. ftFrf^fir,
H"II^
i.
also p. 166
see
13.
P.
9.
^rf ard, to
I. ^nfirii Pf.
^rffif,
not
^f^jtt,
to
V^T,
"T^f7r
(iro^fir,
u Pf.
wfim^fif)
12.
P.
rad,
n.
P.
f 348),
speak.
to
Caus.
nf^wr,B^nim^ w
F.
JJ, 7;
-q^gt,
Ger.
^rf^ir:,
^T^TT^,
6.
^^^t,
5.
O. TT^, I. n^g
I.
T^fw (nftpr^frr),
*"I?T((THRITT^),
P.
^rnf^n^,
P.
eat.
^^f^,
I A. ^nn^or ^SR^(a),(Pan.
vn.
*fTf^r,9. "SFTg:,
Pt.
irfVnnor
F.
yi^fii,Des. f^^f^flT,Int.
10.
to
Pt.
^Em^
Caus.
Pass. ^?rw,
steady,to kill,to
to be
9. IT^
C.
2.
^Srtt'lf^,
4. viSr*3,
5.
Ger. irftn^r
or
ftr^.%
n Pt.
'srirg:
khad,
Pf. i.^^T^
^^f^fT,8.
2.
%wfiT, P.
^rentfh,3.
2.
Pf.
technical
^fTOff,H^fe
P.
F.
^T%W,
by
Thus
Des. ftrefVmfif
Caus. ihnrfw,
or
ftnflff,
Pass,
II
8.
7.
i.
'sitr^T,
8. ^rite,
9.
TO^i:
or
omitted.
be
^ may
is marked
root
ftre^, 4. ftrfafireor
or
this
ordaining,
or
to
marks
to
means
"ftr^
to
it
as
gerund,and
go.
go, but
is
erroneous.
forbidden
^ belong properlyonly
prepositions
;
BHU
IA.
i.FfH, a^W:,
PARASMAJPADA
CLASS,
F.
Perf.
Wlf"4|1^,
or
or
fchjfir
nM""i,J 98, 8, 2)u
(uftfrsT
P. F.
^Nftuu: or
Pass.
Perf.
Pt. jfijTn,
"^JTR:
or
14.
P.
251
VERBS.
Pf.
I A.
frfrfc,
^fHTfyF.
fTOT^.
B.
fctfsWT,
RffffSffrr,
$ 98, 8, 2)
(R^^ITT, not
II
Pf. fHfHHf,I A.
P. F. f^Tf^TTT,
B. frltt^m.
f"irKJU4Pn,
16. TGukh,
to
go.
"
P. vftwfrf(litarrf,
43),I.
7.
I
JlflSH,
II Pf. i. T^T
(J314)) 2. J^favj,3.
y"U44|^
C. VHrf^mf^,
F. ^finwu^frf,
P. F. ^f?HfT, B.
'sriWlc^,
A.
^n^fH,
The
Anubandha
anchitvd
"7
PNo.5);
P.^fff
F.
qjpqmfw,
honour:
not
Pass.
gerund,
^t of
2,
(seemonth,
note),I A. w
he worship),
5,
Des. ^
^NjTT,Caus. ""(1Mnf7f,
and
(Pan. vn.
i in the
10.
Distinguish between
moved
optionof intermediate 7
'srnH
i.
C.
^rfv.)
and
Pf.
worship,(^^
to go, to
"wm\
or
^^
of
andi,
w*l
17.
^ftf%f^nrfTT.
Des.
vi.
53;
is
he
"a*MH
4,
30); ^T
to
seems
never
honoured, iH^Mri
The
is moved.
he
two
when
it
to
means
roots, however,
are
8.
to stretch,farf%.)
^r^dnchh,
F.
w^
(J313), I A. Wflfli^
or
^nTamfd
Caus.
^ii^Mfn,Des. viiP"ir"a.Hrn.
,
mruch,
19.
^tafir n This
or
second
and
2,
Pt.
II
or
(33.)
the
$ 367 take optionally
^5:,
Perf.
^^^|t^,
Ger.
fAfir(J143)H
j%
Pf.
hurchh,
^|*, I
to
A.
be
P. ^rsrfiT
ii Pf.
"q
wpefitn
Pt.
to go.
"snjwz/,
(a), 2. ^finT (f 328), I
or
i.
^nr
A.
"n"fl^or
Hn""fif.
22.
P. TnTft
Caus. ^M^fd,
Pf.
HfBR^T,
(5%.)
jf*r |* (j431, 2).
crooked,
21.
F.
first
26),or ^IRT.
20.
P.
enumerated
mtfiWli^Wj*l^
aorist ;
(Pan.i.
verbs
other
to go,
i.
Des.
^niT
vrq;,
(a), ^^ftriT,I
(^1^^,
2.
Int. ^id^fj
K
to go.
A.
Pt
BH#
252
^T5T"/,to
23.
I.
*mfw,
P.
u.
4,
Pf.
^n*fi^II tf
(a), f^j
f^nmr
i.
in the
i.e. both
is optional,
before
general tenses
all consonants
Before
ftnrftro(I335,
or
2.
go, to throw.
vowels.
substitution
this
56,vart.)
VERBS.
substituted
be
must
beginningwith
terminations
PAKASMAIPADA
CLASS,
except
and
^(Pan.
be used
may
3), [jsrrftnr],
3. f^ro,
fafere
4.
A.
8. fa*r, 9. f^j:,I
6. faaiij:,
($334),[^iftre],
7. fafai* [^TTftnr],
5. f^i^r:,
P.
[F. ^rf^TfTT,C. ^rf^ni;,
fs?^Ai,
H^fff u
Pf.
i.
I A.
f^^ffiT^r,
9. fafofft,
II
ftp:
%%fif.
fq^lMfrf,Int, ^Sjfaffir,
oFT
25.
The
Anubandha
1J
P. -sreffT
II Pf. ^^TJ,
The
verbs
or
-^tan U
not
^ tflr^,
Caus.
The
-si
Caus. 3JH4Hfri,
'HjT^H,
Pass.
(Pan. m.
P.
WI
preventsthe lengtheningof
I A.
26.
in
aya
vichh,to
ftr^
to warm,
specialtenses, and
the
go, "^TTT^an, to
take
it
traffic,
tJ^ JJOTI,
the
in
optionally
rest.
1,28; 31.)
I A. ^TTfhrnft^
^H'itmlrt
or
"spfhr,
(J337,
^RViffy
1.
("325^ 3)
Pf- i^m^i^auK
2),6. "snmr,
F.
TrVqiftrofff,
P. F. jfimrnHi,
B. jplm^iri or
^ftftnrr,
or
Tf^rr,
Tft^FrfiT,
or
JTfairflT
or
Caus.
^"ur^
or
jilMif^Hi,
nVftrf^T,
JTRT,Adj Tft
Pt. Trttrrftnr:
or
nir:, Ger.
II
in the aorist.
the vowel
I. 'ftTnrg
I. wftum^, O. *i\m*n^,
H
jfarrafir,
TU^K
(oF7.)
^J^^M^,to guard,W^dMp,
praise,take
to
or
23)*.
II.
or
Perf.
Pt. tfir: ["ftTff:],
diminish,(Colebrooke.)
/r"/i*. to
to wane,
B. ^tinr^
-^BTflT,
("390)
Des.
^terr
Caus.
24.
F.
^fw?n]
by Panini).
sanctioned
P.
F.
B.
F. Tin,
-cf^H^:,w:
"Thr, Adj. ^ff^r:[^ftnr*i:],
[^ftr^r],
Int. ?3tTR (WlT is
Des. f^Wrr
[^ftTf^frr],
-qTHJ^frf,
Ger.
Ijsnftnn^],
Pass. ^7T,
TOfir
II
Des.
JntjTHnfjT,
WnfxjwTfTj
'T'TTnT^nT,
^'ItsPrt,
or
Int.
*FftTTftrefff,
W^dhilp,to
27.
P. vtmrfir
I A. ^JqFffa
Pf. vqmNcFTC
2.
wrwt:,
*
Roth
The
II
3.
Pf.
the
is
vowel
long),
(a),
ffiTTxr
i.
(J332, 14.)
wfxR ("335, 3),3.
rTH^
or
P. F.
^nn^il^, 6. ^nrTrrt(f351),F. -ax^rfiT,
causative
impossible,and
because
or
28.
P. rmfw
(no Guna,
?WTJ
or
warm.
cannot
a,
should
have
short
they produce
always be
no
a,
and
though
authorityfor
changed into
both
wm,
I A.
cfffTtT,
B.
n
TfTam^
Westergaard
it. The
and
i.
Pt.
Boehtlingk
is equally
Hjf^ri:
participle
PAKASMAIPADA
CLASS,
Adj.FTO:,
Ger. mjT,
Des. fffn^fn,Int.
ATM"lfff,
With
"
fTfUTffit
TH^
prepositions
takes
active
in
It has
devotion
an
distressedby
sense
cham,
Vf
precededby
(seeNo. 35) ;
kldmati.
H5^ kram,
(J348^) u
(Pan.in.
i,
to
to
taking Guna,
of
when
kram,
W1
II
vowel
3, 75, 76): ^T
Pf.
i.
or
A.
^farff,Adj. ^ftnw
roam,
of
(sit)
It takes
the
Parasmaipada
intermediate
no
grammarians
some
in the
("348*),
-sniiirl^
Pf. *nRT*, I A.
wti.
jMHfrf,but
F.
89.)
4,
^TTR
generaltenses
the
cham,
tire,"JITTfiT
^H^kfam,to
trut, to cut,
^T
in
^ in
admit
-afar,Perf. ^^TRTT^,
Ger. ^f^T
Note
one
valid.
of the
The
Prasada
; but
3,
74);
and
vn.
and
and
instead
for
of "a"*Twe
ought
Rajaramas'astri
supports
76,tyan
is
no
longer
^": j^i^nlfriI
The
to read
UW.
to
Taranatha
in the
"aWis
not
Samadi
at
all,
Dhaturupadarsagives ffMjffl,
jni*^fff.
31.
T*T gam,
3,
fs
It is
ql^iH^fTT McniV
145) ^i"ii"{l"ii
jnu-qPn,
giving the generalrule (n. i,
enumerating as ^ITrf^,
^IJT^^HH^^'^'aiHR^. But
"Rl
roots
whether
doubted
It has been
"
Sarasvati decides
I. XS^HII
P.-rarfir,
p. F. iJTn,B.
Tfcqfir,
Pf.
TH
HH
to
yam,
to cease, and
F.
was
v*w"^, ^Tfifif
Int.
The
he
""*""ui
^.
Caus.
"affq^r,
not
the
stride,("^55.)
to
^IW^fd bhrdmyati or
Hence
lengthensits
In
I.
-jRTJsifr,
^^T^ or ^^i^^
P. F. -afar, B. -ai^T^n
-aifinqfif,
"aw
(Pan. vn.
(see ^No.30) ;
vowel
P. fRTHfiT
or
F.
MIMI
Gflfttras, to tremble,
fail,
specialtenses.
devotion.
shthtvati
spit,iThlfiff
f^^shfhivt
("429),Ger. ^fr^r
^IHMfri (J462).
Caus.
stride,W5T
37) ; THHTTf,
if it refers to
to
fliT*tffT
krdmati
stride,
to
30.
JK$ kram,
Atm.),
austere
^i"*iqinN
specialtenses
Pt. ^ifw:
126)u
3,
(*nj.)
eat,
*Rfw, but
^tnw
guhati,follows
#wA, to hide,JJffrf
throughout, instead
P.
performs
dchdmati
rinse,iMi'^iHfri
d, to
^TT
to
in the
passive(i.e.Div
(Colebr.)
sinful act.
29.
The
Atmanepada(Pan. I.
the
the
the Aor.
forms
" 456, 6) u
in ^,
it ends
nin"M?T9 fimfw.
devotee
the
n*Mri nmxtiH":
regretting(being burnt) it
of
sense
certain
shines.
Iftj: austere
because
(short,
TO:
253
VEKBS.
stop.
to wish, substitute
"S^ish,
specialtenses.
(Pan. vn.
3,
"
Pt. ^nr:,
^^RT^, Ger.
chchha
for
77.)
I
i.irow(5),ir^for ^f"ni,
9. %:,
2.
^5
A.
*I^T, "^^
^wh^($359)"
or
"TTW,
Adj.
Bffft CLASS,
254
Note
may
be
t the
tree
*PT
"
he
in the
used
Atm.
spreads,or
puts
its
as
governs
his hand.
forth
the
with
Likewise
; ^"od.H
reflectively
to espouse
means
^"JNrt
divulgedanother's faults.
he
TH
32.
P. -^fw
Pf.
Anubandha
2.
given to it
II
Pf.
II A.
3T"rg:"c.,
^riT^
With
"
prep.
the
follow
S5TT,
may
own
rice.
intransitive,
agent's body ;
^5?T,
?T,"3^,if it is used
prep.
Likewise
1"*T,when
after
Sita:
On
H"T.
the
Atmanepada.
("367),F.
I A.
it
also be OMIMH;
^Hfi^ (f359),F.
$ 461.
Causative,see
(Pan. in.
89.)
i,
is declared wrong
grammarians
some
by
others.
(IT*.)
to go,
(J328, 3),
^17??, 4. "*fn^
^TTP^T^, Ger.
or
of the
JTRT, "TT"I
JTWT
OJTTT,Adj. TTTTO:,
or
Int. ^J|*^rior
j|*Hfn,Aor. ^^l^*iri,Des. firnfH^fiT,
it follows
if it
Atm.,
be
the Atm.
.
the
or
^rf^, 3.
(a),2. -STHrfVpz?
^TITR
i.
with
^firo,
9. %,
or
TTH^aw,
33.
P. n^fiT
-JR^T
by
member
objecta
bow, (*PT.)
to
nam,
the
^TT, if it is either
prep.
(" 356.)
like
Tfnrn^"c.,
conjugatedin
be
"qi?may
"
The
("),
"^n*
i.
B.
tfiTT,
P. F.
5.
A.
iRfiT.
Int. TfanajTT
or
finfafiT,
Des.
like
(a),("461),II
Tmnfa
*iT*rff,Caus.
u Pass,
(fifinwr:)
TOT:
VEfcBS.
PARASMAIPADA
the
means
dropt in
Atm.,if
intransitive.
to have
patience; ^I'i"i1^
Ben.
The
twin
or
TTT^wait
the
prep.
little.
In
ti^'iw,^Urtilgor
I A.
i.
to burst, (fHMWI.)
TKcfphal,
-qTRTH
(I
^nfiTc^
II Pt.
348*),F. TfifoTirfH
Aor.
TBTT^irfff,
Pass. TB^TW,
Caus.
(Pan.vn.
87-89.)
4,
35.
P. -sWff n
Pf. ftnhr or
Vowel
Intensive
4-
2, 55),Ger. MifaHl
vin.
Des. f^tfifj^fiT,
Int.
^IifliMr^
II
qij^ri,TT^foff.
f?^shthiv,to spit,(fi^.)
ftH
I A.
ipr: (Pan.
TTOc*,
"3nNfyF.
fff^f^fk
or
^f%^?fiTn
Pt.
(Pan.vn.
g^T^fff
"g:
2,
Pass.
49),Int.
Parasmaipada.
36. f^ji, to
P. nMPffn Pf. i.f^rrnr("),2. f"|j|vr
or
excel.
f^Jifiivi,
3.f*nrnr,
4. r5ff"?"=r,
5. ftn^rjt,
I
s. ftrnr,
f^nrg:,
(J350),F. imfr, P. F. inn,
7. ftrfnur,
9. fsrg:, A. ^^^
Perf. fuDNl^, Ger. flfSrT,
B. 'sfhlTfl;
II Pt. flTff:,
^HRhi:, ^H, and
Adj. %rf^T:,
: (f45^" 2)9ftw* only with
^fe: (Pan.in. i, 117) II Pass, iftnw,Aor.
Caus. ^TTRfff,Aor. ^nf^HTi^,
Des. ftfnWff, Int. ^ft^, ^%fif. It
6.
follows
The
the
Atmanepadawith
the
TO
prepositions
change of l^into
Txin the reduplicated
perfectis
and
anomalous
fw.
(" 319). It
does
to wither
placein 7*n
take
5.
II
^TE|fTT
6.
vnisj^,
Pf.
i.
2.
-viiiGf,
or
vHifHf1*!
7.
or
mftsfri!
r, P. F.
Su
follows
hew,
to
^??T
II
Ger.
^T
throughout,also
W^
I A.
6.
^m?,
i.
^rrf^jfor
Pass.
n
^?ft|?^T
or
V^T?T,
in the
optionalforms
of the
class.
38. ^
P. ^fr
Pf.
i.
"q^ft^,3. ^it,
*n*t,
2.
viomefT;,
3. ^nirnsflfi^,
4. ^IcRn^,
^nsr?| "c.,
or
forms
would
I A.
or
4.
*t*iS, 6. ^M"WKT,
5.
If used
"c.
*?^rsf
i.WfflSf,
2.
I A. 4.
I A.
2.
I A. 4.
I A.
F. ai^frf or
2.
i.
^ejT^f^r,
4. ^T^VSINf^,
7. ^^fif,
4.
P. F. TOT
^fw,
Aor.
xM^ohMH
or
or
of
and Vriddhi
peculiarGuna
V^UJjIlToptionallyin
:
'"
71
to
verbs
"3TTTor
rejoice,
^,
"^ST,
with
3.
5.
^cyGlixif,
6.
5.
id.
6.
8.
^S?^f
9.
^p|l4,
9.
(I337,
II.
see
(Pan.
vi.
Des.
40.
i.
i.
"
Vf H||(ff,
id.
Pass. ^nr?r,Caus.
^T^and
WIT, take
place
and
^9T^TT^,
^T"T, "JFT,
rejectintermediate
which
or
^ (Pan. vi.
i,
'STWT'^rh^
vtni-^flTi^,
or
^^rush, to
kill.
lA.^CiMX, F.dft^fir, P.
F.
to
"S^ush,
^fteNoRn:
or
burn.
"gr^r^(J326), 2. ^fmy,
B.
^qr^
11
3.
Pt. ^ir.
or
'sftfafinrfiT.
41.
iiPf.
of
58) j
i,
P. F.^"ftir,
F.'sftfTOfrr,
lA.'sftrh^,
("425) u
Mr
two
i).
Pf.
I. "sfrm^
u
^ft^tlr,
"c.,
^T
TT, instead
viz. ^and
penultimate^,
tT^T,
Aor.
"
P.
^K"ii,9.
3-
*i$KfV|i:,
P.
i.
the
Atmanepada,
the
2.
?R|T11
to
39.
df^n
in
A.
Int. ^O^f^lrt,
Des. f^Effff,
^0*1?
^T^^i^i^,
in '"*{,
to emit, and
necessarily
59)
7. V"CIIIQ"I, 8.
2.W""n,
id.
I A. 4. 7. -"Hc(ilSJIHflf,8.
The
4.
be,
I A.
or
or
^rrfsr*
5.
OF
or
or
^wrfiejg:
VTTJ:, F. vfujviffl
^BTTF, 9.
Pt. ^T?:,
VMfyq
4.
Des. vnf^nsjMfk(J476).
*snfa"t|i^,
Aor.
Caus. SH^Mfri,
K^,
wrftf^ or
^rrep, 8.
"c.
wr"rcr, 9. "Mgr,
^ror,
2.
^TPTSf,
3.
s.
*uri""f,
^rref, VHIVSJ'):,
4. VNI(H|Hor
3. ^msfri^,
or
2.
akshnoti
class,Vt^jllftOl
or
vj|fiPB|X4
xii"tK,
-winsjg'j7. ^sTRfepror
comprehend
obtain,(v^.)
to
^^uksh
to
its reduplicated
perfectflT"*ii.
i*n forms
Samprasarana.
P.
255
VERB*.
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
t^;mih,
fifWT"2. f^f^zr,I
A.
to
sprinkle.
P.
("360),F. TCjrfrr,
"*f*ren^
F. "TT
256
Pt.
BHU
Ger. jft^T
II Caus.
jf^T^(fafaa^),
Perf.
*fte:,
*f
Des.
trfrr,
Wifift^,
Int.
P. ^ft
Pf.
II
"mir1, I A.
i.
2.
vsgfr
F.
^iv,
or
2.
'srvTEf,wrcfttj 3. ^visf)^4-
i.
9. ^rorer:
^mr,
("), \f^
^T*r
to burn.
dah,
42.
8.
VERBS.
PAKASMAIPADA
CLASS,
5.
5. ^FV,
^rorw,
(seep. 185) u
(J118),P.
7. ^nn^r,
^PVT,
Aor.
^qfw,
F. "pvr, B.
Des.
^^^,
T% glai,to droop ;
r"3T^II
Pf.
(I329),
W"t
i.
J mlai,
also
2.
to fade.
STfroFZIor
!Tc5T^,
3.
^Tc^,
Te^rinrfkor
Caus.
,
I A.
P. '1T*lftf
II Pf. "Hn,
45.
shtyai)to sound,
Note
Pan.
"
vi.
til"i im
INMIr^H
or
wiHlr^
With
i,
the
regard to
64,
19,
as
(*jtT*T^"?J"^1
HT^i'mopr^^^^3TTw*"i
jf)HI"
($103.)
same.
F. KMirti)
(J443).
^r^frf^Vi I
^SkTT^W^'Kfif^^T
(" 392)'
Caus. Tl^nfrf,Aor.
"HJ||f^,
F. KMitMfn,
P.
^STWT^T^IT,
Pf. ?TB"Tr,I A.
HWlTt
Trcrt7fl,
initial
"mir^
Pt. *ffa:,Ger.
styai,the
also TO
gather;
Int. "n-
croak.
F. Jllril, B.
Bened.
the
Pass. ift^H,Aor.
II
Pt. ^mi"TJ,
T"" in
and
to
P. KMiMfifT
(^103)?!" ^TPrnTW
B.
(Dh. P.
P.
F. Jlimfrt,
^TTCrfa^,
between
the difference
T,
T^q^rcT
(impers.)
Pass,
44-
Mark
TcSlWhKj ^WT.
Adj. THTW^:,
"'c5T^,
(J3921) n
B. ^Hrmi^or THU^
P. F. TOnrT,
F.
^T"3Tftre,
9. ^Tcjrftr-q:,T^i^rfF,
marginal
^^fira "i i m
quotes
note
flT W
says,
M in
31 "^*i
the Varttika
to
""*ii^r"Mbrtit
MI
K.fn
MC*"n
imr
"
46.
This verb
is
distinguishedby
not
comprised
and
does
P.
not
u
^nrfff
^RTf^II Pt.
under
the
^,
mute
I A.
TJ
or
i.
is
one
8.^V, 9.^:.
i.^,
It admits
2.
I A. 3.
It is therefore
it takes
2.
^r^frr,P. F. ^m, B.
f^T^fk,Int. ^T^n^,^Tfif.
^T^ft: "c.,
Des.
^HnrffT,
F.
ghu
**"
^mor
"c.
a.
roots
(" 392),roots
P. vrrfif
u Pf.
verbs,like "fTda
other
(" 392*);
for ^ST
^rftnr,
47.
This verb
from
verbs
^ ghu
\i
substitute
Pf.
dai, to cleanse,
^VTO,
3.
^,
II
($357),
A.
or
4.
which
in the
general tenses
VT dA"l
^ftw,5. ^Tj:,
and
($368),
Red.
6.
^"Tg:, 7
II A.
($371):
258
9.
BHU
CLASS,
F.
P. F.
^i(t"fPfl,
^[^t,II A. "^^^fi,
Int.
Des. O^lrMPrt,
drives),
P. tflqPn(Pn^l^Pn)
Pf.
u
perish,('*"")
to
("), ^f^*ror
TOTT^
i.
Caus. $(lrtHfirf
he
(^fl^'Mfa
II
$|l$(Pr(.
sad,
?re
VERBS.
Tjr^T, B. tysim
^i^iejn,
52.
F. tutttPft,
P. F.
('MH^r^),
PARASMA1PADA
$^:,II
^rarr'zr,
9.
2.
^T^T, B.
53.
P. ftRfrr u Pf.
inirr, B. M*in^
^nTTj
i.
(j392)
^rf^^ior
2.
Pt.
54.
I A.
^irn^j or
1) H
392
Pt.
* i
TTTiT:
I A.
(Pan vu.
with
After
"3"^,if it
f?r"W,
Red.
to
Pt. OTiT.
Pass, ^pm,
2.
Des.
^fdfs^r^,
is used in the Aim.
to rise
with
or
*ir"xfor T^R,
Caus.
^r d", to
n Pf. ^,
(Trftr^^fw)
(seeNo.
Pan.
200,
vu.
4,
II A.
46),"^T,
ymiri
or
^rr^fw, B.
Pass,
Int. ri^/l^rf,
Pd8rf"rri,
;
also after
"3^1,if it
if it means
"33T,
to
means
to
worship, "c.
affirm;
:
Pres.
study.
TOt, I A.
B.
^rwWlf^,
^rnrn^or#m^
Int.
fH^iqfff,
Des.
II
HltiNri,
give,
^r^, B. ^in^(f392) u Pt. ^r:, Ger.
^q: H Pass. ^hlW,
Adj.^nT^t, ^TTftiT:,
Int. T^fanr,
Des. f^rHfri,
^T^rfH1.
^IMMfrf,
59.
P.
9.
F-
wnl^:, ^i:
58.
P. ^aiiT*
r, B.
"nrr,
Aor. "Jj*j|p{{,
Caus.
ITR^",
II A.
(^rfVfir^),
Tsn"m (**"0" 9- ^:"
strive,not
*TW?
nid
9.
57. ^T mnd) to
i.
"iPiivi
or
^vi^,
2.
to blow.
"jf^r,
Aor. ^rfWiT,
Fut.
9. ^ftfif^rf,
P. T"TfiT
II Pf.
Pass.
f^Tr^T,
f^znr:,
"OT*?, Adj.^mr^:,
Pt.
means
*fw,
i.
^n
*t,
^TT
W^", TT,and f^T,
Perf.
(Pan.
Int. ^'ifl^rf,
^fTMlPri.
6),Des. nisiiuPfi,
dhmd,
IRT
Caus. Frm^fii,Aor.
Aor. -?H^j|ftr,
"
qlm ^
-fl
F. im^jPd, B.
"HMiin1i^,
56.
K^
Pf.
TTTr^T U
4?
Caus.
Pass. "WTRff, Aor. ^TWTTftr,
P. firefr u Pf.
Ger.
UTOt,
or
55.
Note
Aor.
swallow),
to
^rP5rn?^TfT
pjj|
or
vi P^i
4 n
392) u
F.
in
I. "itPii"f^,
I. f^yg
O. ftnn^,
P. r^'iifrf)
II A.
mmPrf, P.
(or"^
mnijOT
^T^rrf^,
m^iPn.
Int. i|i(1^ri,
fVnrwfir,
4, 4),Des.
Vii.
Aor.
to drink.
pd,
Ger.
"iffan,
A. ^srnfff
d^fW
II
Pf.
i.
^d^K
0),
2.
5^ hvri, to
bend.
4-
^fe
(J330, 334),
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
9.
"a*rffy 9- **rf:,
I A.
iT5^:,
^fr^fir (f338), P.
F.
^r, B.
3^fl^n, *ni: u Pass,
($390) u
Pt.
"^
60.
P.
skand,
F.
approach
to
P4n.
Trfccfr^fir,
^f?r (tfba^fwor
259
VERBS.
74) u Pf.
6.
or
*n"fi?zr,9. *n"fi*: or
*raj: (seeif^,No. 5), I A. TOKrafl^,
II A. ^r^f, F. Jsfcwfir,
P. F. ^swr, B.
9. *mifRr: ; or
^urn^ ($345, 10)u
("103, 6), Ger. ^RH ("438) u Pass. ^sir", Caus. ^qfr, Aor.
Int. ^Hl^MI'ri (J485),^Hl**ffl.
("374)"DGS' r*ll"ir^rH,
61.
P. tfrfiT
u Pf.
or
we
or
generallyfind
^mto
F. wftin
("340), P.
irrNfTT
or
verb
the
^nnrte, F. Kftw^
Pass.
62.
and
This verb
4,
^(dams,to
bite,
1 A.
?K^,
^nnr^, F.
TrtSnj. In the Atmanepada
wfW?
ifWft?
or
Pt.
Aor.
irWh, Ger.
rrtdfimfif
or
frirtOMfdor
to stick, and
^3^saf?j,
to embrace
(Pan.vi.
svafij,
T?T5{
and in the weakening
tenses (" 345, 10)
special
in the
penultimatenasal
P. Mfri, I. ^t"n^, O.
t^,
I. T"fiJII Pf.
i.
TT3T,
2.
lAP"fV|or
F. i^iflT,P. F. t^r, B.
rig:,I A. mdvsfl^,
Atmanepada: P. Tinr, Pf. TT^, rtfW^,I A.
ttftm,
in the
4.
forms
4.
w?nt,
as
B.
(?),
Pt.
to cross.
inihrT,B.
or
used
ifHiw,Aor. ^nnft,
irnrfS.
Int. wrft^w,
finrfrtfir,
0Ht"
M,
(a),2. Ttfnr,3.
tnm:
i.
TT
3, 73,
vm.
9.
2.
i.
or
TUT
M^frt
or
(Pan.vi.
hunt
to
$ 438) II
4, 31,
tt"pzr,
3. TT"T,
7^11^.
3.
Pass. n^TT
Also
used
''st^i,
9. ^l"fd
(Pan.HI.
90),
i,
Int. iK^^l,TTtf^i
fM.Hj(H,
.
63. f^ kit,to
This and
verbs which
other
some
if
terminations,
in certain
to
P. fatorfir, I.
P. F.
,
In the
same
^fawn^
r*i 14111*1
way
i
2.
cure, it is
are
(faff.)
class
if it
"fau^JhV,
senses.
means
be
Chur
but if it means
used
are
cure,
to
conjugatedas
regularly
Bhu
verb ;
P"iPenw Pn chikitsati.
"c.
Pf. f^fawrNsRK, I A.
.niVcMn^,F.
ril.
conjugated(J472):
he despises.
IJT^(toconceal),
"jJjmrf
he endures.
ffffrr^TT
(tosharpen),
fir^
he
Htaitiri
3. *TF( (torevere),
investigates.
4. "^
(tobind),"{tarUrihe
loathes.
5. "^
(to cut),^1^1U(H
straightens.
6. ^rr^
he sharpens.
(tosharpen),^ft^rNrfif
L!
he
fa-
260
ATMAKEPADA
CLASS,
BHU
VERBS.
("337,
9.
%",
P. 'cJ'uPri
II Pf.
to dwell.
dufw,
"3^:,
7.
6.
^qi%ri
(J351), F.
8.
Pf.
Pt.
"HIU,
4.
'^ifta,
5.
MltmPrf,Aor.
^imftr,Caus.
Aor.
66.
^fir
3.
^m^^T^, Des.
mqftct.
Int. ^Nf^Tf,
P.
T3W5
2.
irer, 9.
T$,
Pass.
(a), "^ftr^T or
44144
i.
6.
II
"qflT^fff
R
3).
H.
65. ^wz$,
"T^I
(f366),F.
II A. WW
inrRfir,Des. ftrofirefir
or
^nrrfw, Caus.
tjmff, Aor.
Pass.
Pt. trfrnr:n
Wff,
i.
2.
Pass.
Ger. Tf^r^TU
Tf^TT:,
Int.
n=Ni^MfH,
Des.
,
speak.
to
(a), ^f^zr,
T^
i.
^vad,
-95:, I
9.
A.
F.
tfiptfa,B.
Aor.
^IW,
^nn^^,
Aor.
*^R%.
TI^OT?
fry.)
67. f*$ svi, to swell,("4?)
or
f^mrMM,
(a), "Sprf^I
"^TR (")or %y"j||i|
or
f^P^T'T?
f^rf^f^W,5. ^^"^i or f^lf^M^t,
4. 5J5jP=|^
9. "^1* "r
P. *y^Pri II Pf.
or
I A.
B.
^T^^l^,II
u
^nm(
A.
Pt. ^15:
Int. 'md^H
Pass,
P. F.
^T^Tji1^,F. ifffquiftr,
and
^T%f^R(^
^ren^ or
Des.
Aor. ^f$n3R^,
Caus. Tgn^fff,
-gnr^,
or
AtmanepadaVerbs.
II.
68.
to
T"s^edh,
grow.
P.
F. JjfVnqTT,
C. $fVHHT,
l^W, I. *TTHT II Pf. UVmm*,
^fvfw, $fwr:, 3. SrfvF,4. ^f^^f^, 5. ^(VtTqi,6.
O.
I. ^VJT,
P. Wff,
T,
3.
2.
i.
I A.
i.
2.
Aor
7.
II A.
"ir,P. F. Tjvfinrr,
"Tf,B.
$f^"^,
69.
P.
C.
^^w?
I.
"Pqmri,P.
Des.
$^IT, O. ^?f,
F.
^%in,
I.
^
u
^9
(Pan.vi.
I. ^^r,
4,
^r,
O.
I.
126),IA.^f^,
and
the
Pf.
Pt.
Des.
^f\^w.
see.
^^rf^;,I
^f^ff:u
Caus.
A.
$%?,
^ufr,
F.
Aor.
^PeiftjfMH.
70. ^
P.
iksh,to
n
f[3nri
|f^F
B.
uvMte,
passivethat
^Tf^,
^^J5
^n*T
are
and
Caus.
used
^$5
^rf
F.
to give.
c?0c?,
,,
pf.
^nnr,
3.
P. F.
^TrfTr,Aor. ^^c,
in the
take
Parasmaipada,^"35
B.
Des.
in the
Atmanepada
terminations.
^^
9.
Pt.
Int.
f^c(P^Mri,
Atmanepada.
It is
only in
ATMANEPADA
CLASS,
71
P. *!p3inr, T. qMm"rt
Pf.
"
261
VERBS.
shvashk, to go.
ctrta^
P.
*i"nair,I A. **cfair*,F. "rfV*"nr,
F.
mrt*di,
B. "*|Pi.3|i*fltf.
Note"
p.
The
^. (See No
45
Pan.
vi.
i,
^f^nnr, p.
F.
64, i.
Colebrooke,
219.)
72. ^y^ rij,to go, to
^nSr,I. *rr^?ru
P.
"^
Pass.
II
^-i*Jd
Pf.
wnpfr,I
A. *nftre,F.
gain,"c.
^nrfr,I. ^H^nnr
TO^
Pf.
2.
^^JofV/i:,
3. ^T^^J, 4. ^h^f^,
9.
vi *s
5.
(Pan.i.
*^nr
vf
2,
(Pan.vi.
4,
I A.
6, vart.),
i.
B. t"f"|l^II Pass,
*^'"rHn,
F.
"| if,
or
B.
to embrace.
tenses
dams, '^safij,f*T*{svaflj
drop their nasal in the special
P.
*f^r,
^-rtlri, Caus.
^'iMPn,
fa HUM,
Des.
(^p.)
I. ^RW
Pf.
"w^rqfM or ^?cff"tf,
2. ^Tcffwn
B. ^fMMlg
w^ (Pan.vi.
3.
or
4,
^Tcf'-'m:,3. VH^fm;
or
XICIM,
A.
i.
F. c^TMUjdor
dufly.
or
75.
forbear.
^y, to
f?T5^
Pf. frifdKfi^^.
P. fTTfffT|K
I A. xMfdfrimv, F. fdfdfymri,B. rflfdP
n
Caus. H"nrfif.
Note
See No.
"
The
63.
simple verb
76.
P. WRff,
I. ^TWTCH
TTCT
or
sharpens.
praise.
to
pan,
Pf. miimNlfi
II
if"Tcf he
is said to form
TO
(without^TT^).Thus
"
This
xN
L/1
mil rj, Des.
verb
togetherwith T^,
not
take
only
follow
which
with
unless
WT,
does not
(see No.
the
it
^TR, but,
it shares but
to
Atmanepada,
praise.
because
as
meaning of
the
It is likewise
the Anubandha,
he traffics. Other
mtM
simple verb, "^P^,
the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. The
suffix ^TR
(Pan.
ITI.
i,
-SBTO^,I. ^reT*nra
Pass,
(Pan.in. i,
Aor.
oh'ujri ("),
Note
"
(Pan. in.
^W
would
to
by
Panini
praise,it is argued
HI.
28,
that it does
if it takes
i,
WTTf,
grammarians,however,
may
be
kept
in the
allow
both
general tenses.
31.)
77. W\
P.
it is mentioned
the
to
Ruimltf H Caus.
Int. ^M^n.
fimflUMrl,
26) takes
means
or
likewise
kam,
to
love,(w%.)
or
^OR^,I A. ^sr*rtai*ra
(without*ni)
II
F. -SF^rHiTr
or^FmfWr, B. chfHMlg or ofimftnft?
48, vart.),
Des.
XS"*I(H(Pan.vn. 3, 34, vart.),
Caus. "*l*^fd,
n
Pf. ^nrqf^
or
class,and Vriddhi
i, 30).
be
In the
262
BHU
CLASS,
ATMANEPADA
78.
P. ^nrff, I. ^ntnr
3.
9.
^nr
Pf. ^nrNn*
VERBS.
ay, to go.
(Pan.m.
i,
37), I
A.
i.^nftrftr,
2.
'snfag'j
8. ^nftflc}or
4. ^Tlftr^f^j
5. vnPMm'qi,6. ^nfqmrfl, 7. ^nftr^Rfi^,
^
Des. wftrfir^.
PMH7T, F. ^rftnmfjB. -"(P*("flg
U Caus. *5"|imPri,
With
with
"^,
tflCT it forms
*Ic3T*nf he
flees
(Pan. vin.
19),Ger.
2,
H, JTTTif J and
^c*5l"f ; with
TTfr,m^i^n".
P.
Aor.
^,
aim.
i^;ih,to
79.
"
80. SRTST
P. SRT^TW
Pf.
||
^GRT^T
or
Ms,
shine,
to
("326),I
ehl3rMa
|f^"
B.
Pf.
Caus.
t^rfif,
(^BTST.)
A.
Caus.
F. ^T%BTff U
^TSRTf^re,
Int.
^M^mffT,Aor. ^^chi^i^,Des. f^firf^ff,
8
P.
"Sfimff II
Pf.
"SRmf^
SRT^Ms,
1.
(TTf^w) u
Des.
^rftr^?^,
P.
I.
3.
to
fa^siv,
II
F. TT^W,
A.
serve,
^f^,
F.
(^.)
^PmMH
ii
Caus.
"Rfr,
Aor.
"ftref^w,Int. ^^q?r.
Pf. 3. ^TT,
yd, to
83.
ITT
ist
pers.
6. "i'iin,
B. TTRrt? ii Pass,
i)
9.
(m^.)
go,
sing,ft,I. imrt,ist
"rfhT, I A.
i.
pers.
sing,it,O. 5nr,
L"a*riftf,
2. ^TTTWTJ,
Aor.
Aor. '^iiTf^Caus. TTItmfif,
jffafif,
3.
"si'iiw
"c.,
Des.
^^IJIM^?
Int. ^TTtinf.
84.
T3%
P.
ftr^, I
Pf.
^1'iiff
Aor. SJM"hWr^(f372*).
Caus. "SRHRfiff,
("326) II
82.
P.
cough,
to
Pf.
II
3.
^^,
ru,
6.
to go, to kill
to speak, (^.)
(?),
wriff?9- ^^Nt
I A- ^ffe?
II
Caus. iHJiPir,
Aor.
II
Pf.
f^ (Pan.vn.
i.
F. ^i^Mtf,B. ^T^H^
-^r^rf,
Int.
4,
9), f^frift,
3. f,
2.
Pt. ^w:
Pass,
I A.
i.
^ft,
^fanr,Caus. ^m^Pn,
2.
Des.
^^Hff.
Note
"
It is
of the
one
1|verbs
^,
to
protect,forms ^RTT
in the
present,but follows
in the generaltenses.
86.
P. tftaK
Pf.
to shine, (uiT.)
tt(^dyut,
f^re (Pan.vn.
4,
367:
67),lA.'^rertfTTF or mSJrit^
B. ?ftf?r^ u
55),F.sftfinirff,
or
P^silPn
P^aiirtfK
^eftfw.
^|^, Int. ^i"mff,
in.
3, 91;
Note
"
i,
87.
P. ^
II Pf.
*FW,
I A. ^nrfre
Caus.
admit
^T^ optionally
Aor.
sftiRfiT,
the II Aor.
Pan.
i.
^^7T^, Des.
Parasmaipada(" 367).
?n,
F. ?rfff*nr
or
^flf,
B.
^fNte
Caus.
ITMANKPADA
CLASS,
Note
take
not
and
i.
Parasmaipadatenses
in their
6.
^TTT
^^
^tenr
Pf. i.tKH^,
II
^^r^MMT
or
^, ^, 3|V,^^, ^,
(Pan. vn.
2,
i.
3,
59) ;
Parasmaioptionally
are
The
91"93).
J^,
to
as
Int.
f^pwfir,
or
see
do
verbs
same
Pan.
vn.
60,
2,
3, 93.
88.
P.
i.e.
4,
desiderative (Pan.
aorist,future, conditional,
in the
pada
beginningwith ^,
The verbs
"
(Pan.vn.
*nnrff
or
263
VERBS.
or
(6.^fMrWIdi),
j-MimPri
(Pan.vn.
or
Ger.Tqf^T
t,
or
"*"JP"^
*mbr?.
*U4rt),4. "**iP""!"
or
2.
^hf
or
No.
see
(Pan.vi.
^TWT
or
2, 59;
II A.
31) u
4,
I A. 3.
(notw*q^), F.
*TO^
87), B.^pftF
Caus.
wnrfte
or
Pt.
Des. frwrf^TT or
Tg^Trfir,
ffc^TWfiT.
or
to
89. ip^krip)
P. "*^
II
Pf.
^|"^)I A.
chfgMMl? or
B.
Int. ^Tc9nmT
4h"tmiH
^ft^
Pt. ^rw:
6. ^r*mirtl,
P. F.
cfc^^iifrf,
or
^f^eR^orn
or
able, (^g.)
^cfcfVjyor ^TR,
3.
or
be
Caus.
9.
"+f^4riIWor
2.
fa,
4-^
^5*ffif,or
II Aor.
"fc-Hl"
p^^rrMMff
Des.
or
or
or
P. srznr
Aor. ^nqfa
Pf.
Pass,
Int. ^r^^r^,m^P^.
Des. fcf^nqMrf,
("),(J462),Caus. uiviqfri1,
^"T
91.
to
ram,
sport,
(T"J.)
P.
3,
"THTor"Tjq
^r,
II
fRftf, Aor.
Caus.
r^T
92.
verbs
The
"3\ u,
*^jvar, r^
l^mu (Pan. vi.
tvar,
ffer^m",
^T^av, iT^mat?,substitute ^/iir, TJJtur,
20) before
4,
if used
except semivowels,and
Des.frt^TT,
Int.tcwjTT,
^CkHi^,
as
Pf.
I A.
rfi^t,
bases.
Hence
jurnah,
"3JT":
mutah.
^Hft.g,8. 15n^ft"4or
3.
H^frt
wftlT: H Caus.
432) or
beginningwith consonants,
monosyllabicnominal
terminations
weakening
("462,
Hri.Mrd,Int. TTTrW^if,
lf^"i|fw.
93.
P. ^w
Pt.
Pf.
it
*fte:,
Adj.*r?r:
Des.
I A.
,
"
^T? and
(^456, 6) u
amalgamation
of
change
^?
?[ with
III.
Pass, ^nprff,Caus.
would
Parasmaipada and
Pf. T^HT,
or
*ter
Aor.
TnfrfiT,
(J337, II. 2) n
^*"!M^,Caus.
wr^ftf^1.
^I^^H,
^T
Pan.
be followed
vi.
3,
by ^T,the
112.
AtmanepadaVerbs.
94.
Tnffff,
"?T II
bear, (^.)
to
P. F. ^in
^raf^r, F. *f^ni7r,
Int.
Des. ftr^f^M^,
fTOT^ftr^fir,
Note
P.
sah,
result of the
Birfr CLASS,
264:
PARASMAIPADA
F. TTf*i
*MflTj
"n? B.
"ff,Int.
ITMANEPADA
AND
II
Caus.
Aor.
tT*nrfJT,
1^9Des. f
41 UN
miW?
95. ^f^ khan, to
dig.
($348),
(f328, 3),I A. 4r"tfli^(a),
B.
Atm. m"Pf|g only,F. ^fVfiqfir,
or
("391) II Pt. TfTiT:,Ger.
T3"Hffi^
^T*TTi^
or
JsrfVrrTT,
Adj. ^q: ("456, 6) u Pass. ^RTff or ^n*?T (f391), Caus.
P.
but
Pf.
^cfTTU
Tf^TT
i.
P. F. -^T, B.
fficoifrr,
^:
Pgmi^ii
^f guli takes
"3i
before
terminations
beginning
^T^T^, Atm.
A.
2.
Adj. ^: u
^^H^, irff^"c.
with
Pass.
would
that
vowels
(J351),
^T"W
^^r,
Des. ftT^^fif,
"rT,Int.
^nrfft,Caus. ^rciflfj
Aor.
(" 391)9
^n?rmw
or
96.
P.
9.
fVftlPHtPfl?
"ff, Int. ^MH
F.
VERBS.
ordinarily
require Guna.
P.
Atm.
P.
||
J^Prl
Pf.
^^9
I.
2.
Or
^7jf^^I
"pft"?,
3. ^^9
"c., I
"^^9 "^"5% ^|]f%^
or
2.
i.
jft^l(^457) II
Pass.
^plF, Aor.
"55^^'5' 'J'vJ^*^C"'
4'
J 362, F. JjP^uiPrt
gHfl^(J345) n Pt. JT^:,Adj.n^n
Aor.
or
or
see
Caus. ^qPir,Aor.
^I1jf^9
or
"H"JJJ^H,Des.
^jWtfe.
("470),Int. "sft'j^fn,
Pf.
i.
go, to serve,
(fa^.)
frjpsrrpf
("), Pijpjrftpzr,
4. f^jforftR,
5.
3. f^i^jnr,
2.
Aor. ^rerrfr,
Caus.
B. ^ftim^
u Pass, ^fturr,
("371),F. -^fimfif,
^r%f^ir^
Aor. ^ff^T^^Tr^9
Des. f^l^rfn^PrJ f^T^ft^flT
TSITI^rflf,
(J471, 3; jj3379 H" 3)5
II A.
or
Int.
^P^ffafiT.
99. TT"T
P. inrfflr
u Pf.
6.
5. ^nn?9
3.
^*n?,
4.
or ^ir? (^
2. ^iftnj
335^
^rr"f("),(^311),
s. ^MIK,
^i^rr"T9 7. v*"*ii"*f,
^^rfw, P.
Pass.
F. ITFT
?^Tff, Caus.
100.
P.
II
Pf.
The
their own,
*{\^
Atmanepada
^t^vo/?,
are
to
sow,
2.
forms
3)?4- ^Pi^9
i.
^?^f%,
~"f*rse'
5.
2.
(not
Pt. ^:,
Ger.
^,
Int.
Des. ftnj^flf,
nftr,Aor. ^j^fli(5fffT,
B.
or
I Aor. Atm.
^Hnwt,
(a), ^fi|V| or
i.
P. F.
F.
,
9.
8.
P^, 5. ^H^ii^i,6. '^mnfirii,
7. ^nrBstrf^j
^my
r, F.
II
i.
y"/9 to worship.
will in future
otherwise difficult.
to
^
Pt. -TO
weave,
cjisj,9. "35^:,I A.
u
Atm.
Pass.
of
they have peculiarities
266
much,
107. ^
Certain verbs
beginning
with
*|^[much
take
They
specialtenses.
in the
nasal
to paint,fa1^
cut, f^ vid,to find, fc5^/"p,
khid, to pain,ftsipi"
cut, f^TrJ
P. *hrfffu Pf.
loosen,
to
sich, to
to
If^much, cf^/Hjp,
to
^ff(kritt
VERBS.
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
TUD
*pfN,I
to form.
^ripn^, Atm. ^^
A.
(Pan.
vn.
i,
are,
sprinkle,
59.)
108.
P.
%fw
Pf.
ftR?,II
A.^ft^,
^firvrfk
(f332,
or
1)u
Pt. ft*.
to paint.
fc"^fej",
109.
P. f^ft
Pf.
fo^t?,II
^rfc5^(J367),Atm.
A.
II A. vaifaMW or
I A. ^rfo*
(53*7).'
II.
Parasmaipada
^"nf,
no.
P. f rTflf
(seeNo.
II.
or
2),P.
107)n
Pf. ^FW,
Verbs.
(^ift.)
F. ^fd^fff or
^Toinff^,
to cut,
I A.
Caus. omrfff,
Aor. ^-qohS^
SfifffrTT,
B.funi^UPt. if*: II Pass.^m^,
F.
II.
2),Int. ^T^mTT.
in.
Certain verbs
beginningwith ^7
kut
do
and
the causative,
Vriddhi, except in the reduplicatedperfect,
(Pan. i.
P.
2,
i ;
admit
not
the
of Guna
pada.
Parasmai-
intensive
P.F. ffrinu
f*fw II Pf. i.^pite,
2."3ffH IA."*^fy F.^fradTT,
to
'Z^vrasch,
^jfir(seeNo. 105) u
(f337,
rcfh^
Pf.
i.
1. 2),F. wft^rfif or
OF
113.
P. f%^
or
II
or
112.
P.
cF^flT (J337,
cut,
T9^,
2.
wftr^U
or
I A.
TOr,
or
^d^fl1^
Pt. ^ro:.
to scatter.
(Pan.vii.
"onrhiflf
(f340),B.
"^af^^
B. 'jw^
giv^Pir,
W,
Caus.
4,
Pass.
Pt. -sifhS:
u
F.
n), I A. *"hlOr^
Caus.
-SR^W,
Des.
Note
he
"
cuts, oM'qtaK.
Tlflff,
cF takes
UfTT(VpfHJV
he
i,
142).
initial ^ if it
an
cuts
or
14. ^q^T
he
strikes
spris,to
means
(Pan. vi.
to cut
i, 140,
Pt.
?: II
Des. ftFflT
115.
P.
ifSjfw(seeNo. 105)
,
F.
Int. V
II
Int.
i.
TT^rfw,
B.Tj^nr^n
141).
Also
F.
qO^^rt
H^prachh, to
Pf.
to strike
touch.
I A. ""n^HiBfl'?^or
u Pf. i|44|$i,
"nwiHjTr^or
P.^Sfrfrr
^trM"i^,
B. ^q^li
or
^JFSS,
Pt. yv;
ask.
*TlTfe*ror
2.
trfflF,9'
Caus.
Pass, ipa.q'ff,
MM'-^J(}3^)"
Des.
Trssnrfrr,
"PI
DIV
CLASS, PARA8MAIPADA
1 1
6.
Pt
1 t.
mr
*1
"
let off.
to
*JH*n/,
P. *J"^PiT
u Pf. i. TOrif,2. *mP$"i or TOU
267
VERBS.
\\
nasal before
P. H-njfrt
II Pf.
9.
i.
HH-nJ,
'snPTWcT?
Int. 11*1
P*iH"jPrt,
Des.
1 1
8. ^
i,
60.)
(J345)16. WlifW,
^HJK/1^
Aor.
*n5nrfff,
($438) n
TOT
Caus.
TJ*J
ish9to wish,
No. 31),
I. il^AdII Pf. ^^,
^fMV|,3. ^fa,4. ^f^T,5
$*dPfl
(see
P. F. FFT or ^iMrti (^337"
F. ^fmHffl,
8. ^Tj9. ^H*"^ "^L"
^*^fl"
^j|*,
7. ^^*T,
P.
6.
(Pan. vn.
HH4-VJ, I A. 3.
HHP"|VJor
2.
with
terminations beginning
strengthening
semivowels.
2.
i.
^?n
or
III.
Pass, ^q^,Aor.
Caus. smjfa,Aor.
%ftr,
AtmanepadaVerbs.
the special
P.
I. ftnl u
O. f^t^n,
fa*m*, I.^rftnnr,
I A.
5. *WK?
i.
Caus. HK^frt,Des.
^TTJII Pass, ftnfif,
1 20.
P.
f^
Pf.
^,
I A.
*nrrc, 4. "iUif ,
B. Jpcn?u
*inifw?
Pt.
"jdri,to observe,
P.
^|Tr, F. ^fbRff,
'WT to
to
regard,
It is
F.
^r,
B.
used
chiefly
-^rt?u
with the
Pass.
preposition
consider.
Div
121.
^faifiT
($143)u
IV Class).
(Divddi,
Verbs.
Parasmaipada
f^ div9 to play,(f^J.)
Class
I.
Pf. f^^"I
B. ^1"mj^
n
P. F.^PMHI,
A.^n^ir, F. ^f^uifH,
("431, i)
(J442, 7),Ger.ijr^T
Int"
f^^P"=mPng"*"Pir
(j474)5 ^HliT.
Pt. ^tf: or
F.
3.
Int.
ig^Ori,
Caus.
P.
2.1^,
Pf. i. **"m.,
^K:
or
Des.
u Caus. ^^Prtj
^Pcfrii
or
122.
P.
II Pf. 3.
"Ji"|Prf
II. 2) II Pt.
Final
*T of the
to Pan.
TO:
ffHri, 9.
Caus.
is changed to
to dance, ("Jlft.)
ifl^nrit,
I A. "i!Hrt7^,
F. HPRvjPnor
*T"J3J"
^ifir,Aor.
ft(" no)
in the
^T^TWrT
or
tenses
special
mlddii,
of Tud
Des. Pn^fdNPrior
verbs,likewisebefore the
becomes
and benedictive (Pan.vn.4, 28). Afterwards ftagain
passive
vi.
4,
77.
M
*if^Tn(}337"
according
ft^,
268
DIV
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
VERBS.
old,
r*i to grow
P.
*Mfir*
Pf-s-^nrn:,9.
"fhS: n Caus.
^nro^
or
$ftJo, to sharpen.
P.
A.
or
124.
Verbs
(f328, 2),I
w^:
\\ Pt.
(f367),F. irfbufir ^rcftafir(f340)5B. -sffii^
srcqfcr(J462, 25),Des. firaFoifrf firWlSPir
(J337? II. 3).
II A.
or
snrs:
^rfk, I. SET^, O.
P.
VTQITI,F. srrafiT,
^,
the
do,
finish,"ft
(Pan. vn.
3,
71); e.
B.
Pf.
g.
or
or
Des. f^n^rfrf,
Int.
tylJWffi,
class
to cut.
I. 3115
F. snwr,
Div
of the
*T ya
50, to
^TT^nTff.
("39^)
Pt-
I A.
*rcft,
^mr^,
Pf.
^^
Ger- "^nir
II A.
Pass,
II
F.
^m\9
^r^fw,
^(hm
B.
P. F. *nn,
^mi
^N^fri, Des.
P. frofir
2.
9.
26.
(seeNo. 105) n
^r^rn^ft*,
3.
vyadh, to strike.
tqv
Pf.
4. *i"mr*9,
'^i^uWli^,
5.
(J311),9.
f^qm
3.
B.
^^mi,
6.
%t"m^|i,
7.
Pt. f^t
"
f?nnr^
f%ftv:,I A.
II
i.
-"i"mr9T, 8.
f^m,
Pass,
Caus.
Int. ^f^ziff.
Des. fcj
^4 rH Pff,
'Ull'imfifj
^"Hp?
127.
P.
7nr",2. TTiTf^Tor
i.
(J337,
^HHMTc^^wmflPi^
I A.
F.
q^fn II Pf.
or
in^flT or
-rTfcNrffl1
or
Int.
rnn^r
delight.
rid1^
or
3-
Tnrt54. nqTMHor
(seeNo. 38) or II A.
3) or ^Tdl^lf^
or
^x^fir, P. F. ITf^WT,
WWT
^WT, B. ^Tr^ II Pt.
I.
Aor.
-^w, Caus. irthrfir,
Pass,
to
^snr^tfi^Winh^,Des. frijHtfri
or
or
flOg"Hfl*
128.
P.
u Pf.
g^rfir
i.
mw^,
to be
foolish.
or
yft^, giftfi^
gjftmor yf^, II
2.
A. ^rp^
(J367,^rf^)t,
or
^:
or
Final
The
^,
changed
Sarasvati
forms
admission
Kri class.
lengthened before
the
of different
in the
forms
the
second
OTf^)
Sometimes
given
^TSPfti^
and
337, I. 3,
admit
frequently
of Panini.
^,
gives besides
Wlsfh^
("
(" 3^7),the
to
as
evasion
are
or
in the
optionalwhich
of the
are
strict rules
is wrong
optionalforms
^^
allowed
^.
the
aorist
Atmanepadaonly;
to the
opposed
of Panini
130, where
in the
to
Div
may
Pan.
in.
i, 55
grammatical system
be
explained by
the
Parasmaipada
"f^Pd
ii
Pf.
?T?TO
3.
II A.
%^j:,
9.
Pt.
^rmifffii
Pf.
3.
$TT*nnr
5TTRT
P. ^irfirn
in the
Guna
^^jant
substitutes
P. ^TOW
B.
,
Pf.
5.
Pt.
I A.
^v,
^5:
II
Caus.
vfTtlwIt)
3.
Aor.
^rftr
or
*$Pa*9 t0
3,
79.)
P. F.
(f413),F. irf^rir,
r^HrnMd,
Int. HMIMH
8.
2.
perceive.
wj^rr:,
3.
^3^
^T^, 9. ^RtHf,
or
^fHv,
F. HWff.
5,
see
J 332,
12;
see
also
^p^,
4.
P. F.
^ST,
the Div
Kuhn,
9.
i.
TpfTf,
"T^ nah,
2.
4. ^l^Tr^j
vtrnr^li^?
^nranr,
xsn^i:, 3. ^H^J?
"TT3
5.
4.
to
bind, (^.)
6. viniSl,
^f"Ti^,
wrfr^f^, 5.
F. Hi^fri,P. F. TCT
Des. fHHrHF?
Caus. "fr^rfir,
^fr((r^,
Int.
i.
7. v""llr9Tj 8.^""i!", 9
vvirai^Yy 6.
Pt. TC:,
Ger.
"rfT,"?T?T
B.
class
Beitrage,
Parasmaipadaand AtmanepadaVerbs.
"|^ n Pf.
i.^nrfw? 2.
,
or
g"'
p. 104),Int.
P. TRrfTTor
^Rf
(Pan. vii.
J35-
8.
82.)
2*).
Des.
HITITITT,
*$fw,
i.
intermediate
III.
Atm.
3,
6.^nrwnfff,
P.F.^nrr,
9.^nrwir,F.TTWTr,
3.wnf^(^4i2),
Aor. ^MlM^, Des. fqwir ($471,9), Int.
Caus. in^nfrt,
Pf.
take
never
vol. vi.
2.
D.
^irfng
Caus.
Pt. irnn,
^JrMI^I,6. ^JrWIril,
7. ^Jrwf^,
can
he
(J485).
yz"
^Ert? U
Jinqfif
($462)
Caus.
springup, (*n
to
11
jrftnrr
F.
I A.
Pt. TO
B. Tntfte n
tnrtasra
Pf.^,
P.
^rfTOfir,
(Pan. vii.
in the special
tenses.
IfTj'tf
133-
P.-quir ii
74.)
(fH(H"l.)
be wet,
specialtenses.
(f328,3),I A.
"rf"iMl8 u
Pass. ^TOW,
3,
Verbs.
Atmanepada
II.
132.
F.
*^nn^
aflpi:
(J333,
or
(Pan. vn.
(Dhatupatha19, 70.)
f^midf to
an
A.
II
^rfar^T
or
sees.
131.
f^mtrftakes
specialtenses.
$3:,II
9.
"ftrhe
or
in the
vowel
^rro,
sitm ("429),Ger.
but
quiets,
(313.)
Ip^dam,Vfi($ram,W{bhram,'^^kgham,
IC^tam,
*V^mad,
Jf^klam,
lengthentheir
P.
^T ("438).
Ger. ?Tyi or
Tflir6am, to cease,
130.
Eight Div verbs, fp(4am,
or
(ynfi?)
w^n^ ("366),F.
*R^
HVSflfd(seeNo.
or
?Tf?nqfff
269
VERBS.
perish,(*U3T.)
to
tTJI nas,
129.
P.
ATMANEPADA
CLASS,
DIV
Pass.
270
CHUR
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
Class
Chur
VERBS
(Churddi,X
ONLY.
Class).
(J386) n
Pt.
Ger. ^frrTT
"*ftn;:,
roots
f%
remaining
undergo
roots
treated
are
as
verb, may
Chur
as
I A.
which
changes
same
because,
short
form
P. ^tprfTT
of which
known
mentioned
were
^t^to pound
in
are
marked
i.
folj,
pound
Such
to feed
*HT, if it means
not
as
e.
the causatives.
^TOTr^.
vowel, however,
462, note)u
f*n^($
is said to be
-OHHII^or
as
the
-mmCd,
or
verb, fq
Chur
Hence
verbs.
as
verbs
Chur
Several
"
as
Chur
B.
^Ml^Mr^or 'sreffa^,
Note
"f*rkftrefi
Des.
gather,(fa*r.)
to
137. fa cfo',
The
^"?T,Caus. ^frfr,
Pass.
(f479).
Intensive
No
ll
sf^to know,
are
to make
to live.
^c
to praise.
138. Wi^krit,
P.
qflfafrf
(j 463, 2) II I A.
("377)^NtfTfr^ 'SrfagftS^
or
Class
Su
(Svddi,V Class).
2.
B.
rTT ll
Note
"
The
same
rule
of
^
;
"Jmay
or
be
the Tan
P. f%*ftf7r
U Pf. 3. f^R
3,
58),I
A.
3,
or
preceded by
and
^f^J"J^
tj""Hj,
consonant.
or
*f, and
^TCp^T;
or
and
No.
accordingto Bharadvaja
f^f'O)
or
Atm.
f^Pjt,
^ifiT, P.
(j463, II. 6,
^cT
stri,to
Pf.
riWK.
and
The
^*J*^Vji"^"jHf^^TCprf^.
f^"^ (Pan.vir.
^irr,B. "sffarn^
u
137)9Des. f%^NfiT or
F.
58),Int. ^chrir.
II
not
This explainsthe
and
^TCp^,^TCJ"T*T
(V^nfor,
N chili,
2. "N^^I or
f^oRfrnzTj
or
9. f^^J*
-qm^fn
beginningwith
Int.
141.
P. ""ui fn
"Jis
40,
Des.
^,
verbs.
Atm. ^r%^,F.
vN^fcli^,
Caus. -^r^nrifor
(Pan.vii.
or
^R^fir,Aor.
^nJ^f*"or
^p*l*r?
or
140.
("335) 3)?fM^fMM
case
and
^*^"5 ^J*jTt
'p'^sf
j 53^^
to
applies
if
P. F.
72); F. ^ffrqfif,
2,
^J*J^"and
forms
Atm. tj^^
Pan.vn.
Guna
requiring
double
(but see
also ^raf^^
Sar. allows
the
Atm.
H^CK,
cover,
facT"T.)
v
I A. ^^n^fif
'
Atm.
^Mfl^y
(not
SU
if
wrfty or
($332,
^rwff
5,
rule which
("
Pf.
n
^ftftr
(J337, II.
(a), ^nr*,
TOt
i.
a.
or
4), F. tcfYurPff
qOmPfl,
2,
VH.
P^clOMffror
r"fqRMfrt,
B.
^hrn^n
II
Pf. ftnrR
f^ Az,to
(Pan.vil.
Atm.
ftnrn^,
Caus.
3,
go, to grow.
56), I A.^H^,
^nfi 6ak, to be
144.
Pass. $r^rff
*flwr,B.
or
3,
l^fTT,P.
F.
it
able,(^rf
.)
n
Pt.^r": n
be
can
F.
Int.
56), Des. foiflMfii,
Pf.3.^n^, 9.$^:,
F.^nsnir,P.F.^HRT
lA.^rarn;,
(^rw^T^Tff
($340) or
*rofa
or
Aor. ^nrft,
ftnrif,
^N^ri!,Aor. *H*fl^iix
(Pan.vn.
Caus.
P. F.^ftin
Pass,
II
wfty
6.
TW^,
5.
Parasmaipada Verbs.
143.
f^ft
39)
^r,
4.
Mfrl,Int.
II.
P.
^TT,
3.
*n|:, I A.
Pan.
(not tf'Oiflv,
Des.
Atmanepadaonly),
the
^ vri, to choose,
142.
9.
appliesto
5),P. F.
Pass. ^riffi,Caus.
7. *pp, 8. TO,
271
VERBS.
Atm. *jprfa
*tfr,B. *rfT^,
*rfWfr ("332, 5) u
or
Int.
WKljPri,DCS. PflfefliiPd,
F. T*rfb*fir 332,
P.
PABASMAIPADA
CLASS,
%8(riT,Int. 3!i3("mri.
145. ^ "ru, to hear.
This
verb
is
by
native
grammarians
substitutes
P.
classed
5T sri for
with
the
Bhu
s'ru in the
verbs, though
6. 3ngir:,9. ^TTRfiT
; 4. spg^:
sjwtfw,
^?p:
(?334"8),
3. ^5TR, 4- '^^,
5- UTHP'
6'^^:'
Pf.
or
3.
as
irregular. It
specialtenses.
5j^N (5),
2.
i.
7"
B.
F. -^ft^TfTT,
P. F. -^sftin,
Pass. ^Tfr, Aor. *mifa,
VH^Itfl^,
T^Tr^
Aor.
475),Des. ^*"Mri(Pan. 3, 57),Int.
^IT^Rif ^r%^Ti^(J
I A.
II
I.
or
Caus.
^TntftfTT,
4. ^TTR^I,
9.
O.
I. "snNli^,
VHI"j"ifH,
^i^*iir\,
F.^r^^Pri,P.F.^TTTT
Aor.^TT^,
Des. ^fir.
^rrftrm^,
Aor.
III.
147.
^^,
Pt.^mr:
as, to
Pass.
Verbs.
Atmanepada
^T^
ll
I. 3.
pervade,(^1^.)
^^t,
VMIJgP^,^TCpn:, 3.
O.
6. ^TTg^nff,
9. ^i^c,rt,
7. ^i^nf^,8.^rrgj4,
4. ^Hi^cjP^,
5. ^Hiiycuvjf,
I.
^rwl, ^f"N,
4- '^w^i^tj 5- ^^^i^i,6. "^i
3. ^renri,
P.
3.
6.
xM^mri^
^T^TT,
4.
I.
2.
i.
2.
i.
9.
According
j.
fix
The
to
Pan.
Pf.
i.^r^ir, ^T^R
vii. 2, 13,
we
might
however,
specialrestriction,
"HPi;t|
as
the proper
form
or
2.
of
form
^^
^T"
to
; but Pan.
the Veda
in ordinarySanskrit.
I A.
^rro,
vn.
in Pan.
"
i.
2,
vn.
63, would
sanction
2, 64, is sufficient
272
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
TAN
VERBS.
6. ^rreprrf,
8. ^rr^4,
^nivyfV,
7. ^U4*ii\r,
9. vmsjn
5. ^rrerrcrf,
3.
^rn?,
2.
P. F.
wf^rBK,3. ^rrfifre,
4.
Pt. *re:
ATMANEPADA
AND
Aor.
Pass. ^5R7,
II
^rei
or
i.
or
^rf^i'tfh?
F.^ujirior ^fyWffjB. ^reffa?
u
^tfyrft,
or
^n%,
Cans.
^fRfr,
Des.
^nf$|$li^,
Aor.
Int. ^li^Mn.
Class
Tan
All verbs
(Tanvddi,VIII
this class
belongingto
Class).
Parasmaipadaand
are
Verbs.
Atmanepada
P.
I. ft-jnrn
("3^9),
^TrTiT
Pf. 3. Tnrre, 9.
2.
cT^n
*ftg
; Atm.
^g:,I A. WR^
or
TrfVn^TII Pass.
or
I. vin^n, O.
P. TT^JfT,
("348),Atm.
vriCHl^
3.
'anrftre
or
B.
F. TTf^rfw,P. F. Tif?nrT,
fr^rr^,Atm.
^Trrf^r^T:
or
w*n:,
Pt. cfff:,Ger.
II
if
TTnTff
(J391),Caus.
in?m
or
Int. HTnmf.
Des. fffTfffiMfrf
or
finrf^fiT,
^snftlfrl1^,
Aor.
Note
to go,
of the
Verbs
"
Tan
class may
penultimate short
149.
P.
raise their
T^ftfw n
Pf. ^m,
n.
n,
vowel
by Guna;
3.
kill,(^^.)
(J348*),Atm. 3.^reyftre
^Hjiifl^
I A.
or
^^9
2.
or
vnsjPiyBit
vf"t;x4n.
P.
I
^'iinfrr
u
or
fopsrVfrr
fspn kshin,to
A.
Atm. ^Hfftiiy
or
^ iiil
^rftjw.
H
-^
151.
P. ^nfrfk
11.4,79;
Pf. **R,
II
vi.
A:n before
4,
weak
obtain,(^.)
to
"Q^san,
Atm. %^,
^"M^ (a),Atm.
I A.
to
becomes
kar,
"fi^
and the
Hm,
do,
153. f ^
terminations
^dfa?
^^f"T?
or
^T^rnr
*f y
of the
(sopr.)
but
before
strong terminations
the Vikarana
optative,
7w
is
i.
2.
^^
but
rejected,
kur.
the
lengthened.
wfiftr,3. ^rdfrr,4-
(Pan.
42).
"^vand
Before
kill.
150.
2.
vt
i.
1.
2.
4.
^^
4.
^?^rn%,5.^r^T",
i.
2.
L^rar!, ^oRr^f:,
3
A.
2.
F.
^r^T'fr,
7. ^GFI^,8. ^ToRrf,
9. ^rar^:, 4^^,
f^^TTO, "farer:,
'3.f^^Tf, 4. f^vTrer,
5. f^^nw, 6. f^Miwi, 7
Atmanepada
8.
^"g:,I
f ^,
9.
6.
P.
i.f%",
2.
2.
6.
^Tf^lT:,
tinf,7. "KT^wt,8.
3.
^i4,
^If ^F,
4.
^Tf
trrf u
Pf.
i.
P. F. CRTT, B.
KR!
274:
CLASS,
q^;grah,
157.
Samprasarana
in the
i,
Atm.
I. -M^sig (2.
*J^TO),
Pf.
u
J]^1rti
i.
before other
and
O. '"%i1""if^,
Atm.
^]^"lri,
*t"4's" 4-
3-
"HiJ^H("341
i.
Ger. '"^lr"n
II Pass.
J^ld't,
$ 348 *),
and
Aor.
"^n,
Int. lO'^n,
Des. PuM^fifT,
iJlP^uif)
"c., Caus. ijl^^lPri,
ij^luuior
Fut.
n^P?^
2.
*rarn" (")"
8. "5PT^, 9. 'fjf*i I A.
6.
7. *TJT(Vi,
*fJ1^3*"
*PJ^iJij
weakening terminations.
16.)
P.
VERBS.
to take.
specialtenses
(Pan. vi.
5-
iTMANEPADA
AND
PARASMAIPADA
(not"Tnrfe),
158.*wjyd, to
This
root
takes
in the
Samprasarana
3.
be wrong,
would
participle
of old
and
(Am. Kosha,
vol. vi.
Beitrage,
p.
ed. Loisel. p.
II
Pf.
weakeningterminations.
but
2, 44 ;
vin.
135),and
PITH?,2. P*iPa*"xf
or
Hn-rm^,
i.
?i{l"4iii
II Pt.
F. TMitrMirT, B.
Pan.
see
other
before
157.)
O. ftnffaffi^
I. Pn"iIg
^n"i"in^
I A. ^TTmttlfl
P;I[TMT,
4. f^ffsRT^T,
9
weak.
grow
specialtenses
(See No.
P. P**HIPrt,
I.
Verbs.
Parasmaipada
II.
it
Caus.
in the
occurs
Sanskrit;
in the Vedic
(i lift "S
"n"TJ
sense
Kuhn,
see
^imjfd, Des.
Int. Wiflqri.
1^9.
This
P"
verb
substitutes
^TT jndy to
^Rjd
in the
know.
(Pan. vn.
specialtenses.
I. Vj^flHillTj
O. ^irl^mfl,I. *T1r('t3
" P^'
llllPlI,
15v?
3,
79.)
I A. TBf'^i
I tf I fl 5 F.
P.F. gtifT,B.frnrn^or
u Pt. $rrif!u Pass.^rnWj Aor,^^Tf^, Caus.
IRT??^
(see" 462,
II.
Des. HHsilUrt,
Int. ^I^I^H15)*Aor. ^rPH$m^,
1
^V fiandh,to bind.
60.
P. ^rtrPflj
I. ^ramTTTj O. ^nft^rnijI. ^m^
I A.
9.
T,
i.
^THirtf, 2.
^MTi^t)
^wh":, F. 4wfnr,
161.
^THiiWln,4.
Pf"
^^V,
i.
^n4ir^*r55.
P. F. -snr, B. w"n^
2.
%i"n-s9
^^(V^
6.
or
or
^H^T^ITj 7. ^WTr^?,
11
^^^f
Pass.
AtmanepadaVerbs.
^ vri, to cherish, (f^.)
I. ^rpjifhT,
O. ^ftw,I. ^iftui
n Pf. ^,
^Tjfft,
F. c(^ttTrior
Pass.
3.
ll
III.
P.
$"iwPri("),
P.
^PCtaft,
F. ^ftjH
or
forms
^Rfts
B. ^ft^Nf
^ftlfT,
Contracted
I A.
or
f^OMW,
Int.,^f"fwand
or
or
^^i!t" or
^tF
II
Pt. ^H:
II
?%fff"c.
Int. ^ifl^rf,
^t^jft.
AD
CLASS,
Ad
PARASMAIPADA
Class
I.
(Adddi,II Class).
Verbs.
Parasmaipada
162.
P.
1. i.Wfi*,
2.WT^.
8.
wrw,
9.
7. WI"TR,
8.
wy:,
4.
3,
W^ ad, to
5.
eat.
WTO:,
WW,
^iMf^v,3.
i.
WTO,
W^IJII
9.
*IMI",
WTO:,
4.
3.
Pf.
8.
WTO,
WT*,
5. WTW,
6.
WHlf, 7. WTO,
4.
4,
36) u
Pass. wtHT,
(a),
Ger.
Pt. wrrlf,
Des.
Aor. wrfi^TT,
tll^ilftv,
Caus.
eat.
($322!),
I.WTJ n
O.^rnrn^,
9.w^rr^or w^:
P. F. ^mn,
B. WVTH
wwr,
wwf,
8. "nsr, 9. f^[:, II A.
insrij:,7. HOsi1*,
6.
vid^fd,P. F.
F.
6.
5. ww,
wij" 4. W^PI,
3.
"c., or substituting
wrfi^T
^||, i. WTOI
2.
"iPB|"c,
5. "n^:,
WTOT^,
(Pan.ii.
I A.
7. win,
100)*,3. WT^,
WTS,
i.
9.wi(f7r,
6.ww:,
2. w%t,
WT?^J O. wirn^,I. i.w^rfVf,
2.
2.
(Pan.vii.
276
VERBS.
B.
^m
or
^rnm^
Des. riimi^Prt,
Int. mmm^.
"^i^**rir,
164.
1. 3.
nrfir,
9. WTF^
xi"iif^,
P.
F.
m^rfw,
^1*1
P. F. iTTin, B.
Pt.
Pass,
vmiul^,
Aor.
iftirfr,
P.
P.
in^rfir,
F. wr,
Des.
WT^nT7^"
B.
Int.
rMMitifn,
Pt. inn:
^n
O.
or
Des.
Aor. iBrfa^niT,
I. ^n^
Sampras"ranabefore
Pf.
II
^^Wh
forms
9.
O.
xil^f^,
2.
'W^ inserts ^T
f^ is
t When
(Pan. vi.
4,
1.
N^iifH,
2.
before terminations
7,
3. ^j
consistingof
4.
one
101); "
IF This is formed
321, note
where
wr^ifw,
WWlfo,
6.
WP,
^^n^j
form
reduplicated
N
IT,
wrrf, 7. Wr^"f,
5-
^"
6-
^"
7-
consonant.
of
root, it is
changed to
deficient,
"^is used instead.
to eat, a
Caus.
s.
7. T^n,
I.
^KJ is
from WS
6. TF:,
5-^5
added immediately
to the final consonant
Aor.
F.
generally.
9.
1.
wwi^,
of the special
tenses, and in the
2.
j^i,
Aor.
m^O,
KJIJUJIIM.
strong terminations
the
II A.
Pass. WHW,
i.^fipr, "^rfty
("125, 120),3. "ffV,4-'^w"
I.
"^rftf,
^R$t,
^r^, 3. ^nr^, 4. w?j, 5.
i.
Caus.
to desire.
vas,
weakening
P.
Pm"Ml^fd)Int.
167. "^
This foot takes
Pass, uro,
A:%a, to proclaim.
P. F. OTT7TT, B.
^\m^
I.
Pf. ^Sr,I A.
*"i*4i*4n.
wnn^,
P.
go.
or
imm^
yd, to
"i66.
^nfir, *TPTT^,
I A.
Pf. iw,
I.wr^n
165. m
F.
to measure.
wg:, O. imm^i
or
^n^
md,
ITT
of
"^. (Pan. n.
4,
36.)
276
8.
AD
fv,
n Pf. 3.
-rshj
9.
B. tfli
II
-3^,
Pass. ^qff,
grg:,I
9.
semivowels
or
becomes
^*^ han
3,
54).
^fff"4-
3.
f^Kj
0.
"nrpT,
3.
^^5
ir$n
s.
^ir, 9.
4.
wftR,
5.
P. F. ^m,
^Pnuirrf,
Aor.
Pf.
of this class
B.
ending
i.
^uni^
2.^1^:,
3.^!^,4-
TEff^ghan,
in 7
8-
^9
Iffy !"
9-
8. ^TT,
^T?
6or
2.
Ger.
Pt. ^in,
I A.
^t,
9.
(J449)
^FIT, "^m
2.
F.
^snnrtny
Pass, ^am,
nHiiiufd,Int.
^nrhnn^,Des.
sHfjT.
kills),
yu, to mix.
instead of Guna
beginning with
(Pan. vn.
consonants.
3,
before
89.)
^3^"
Pf. 3.
Pass.
Des.
Aor. ^nnf^, Caus. TU^nrfir,
J-
9.
5-^3^5 6. ^TfiTf,
7-^1^9 8. ^fcT,
8. gw, 9. ^^
Hqifi, gff 3. ing, 4. ITR, 5. $w, 6. girf,
7. irem,
J A- ^^Nlt^,F. ^temPd, P. F. irf^in,
B.
9- Si!*"
"^n^ u Pt. IT:
1.
stituted.
is sub-
2."5^f^,
I. i.
i.Tfrfor,
s.^tfw,
4.3^*? 5-3^*" 6.gm, 7.5^:, s.g^r,9.g^fir,
P.
1.
derived from
4,
4, 30, vart., he
terminations
weak
vowels,
^{vadh
36),3. ^, 4. ^TFT, 5- ^
Hvfaq
"siTrnT (")?(Pan.vu.
3, 55),
169. g
Verbs
benedictive
"~-^l"rfj 7-
5- ^^TJ
8. "nr,
wjrg:9 6. ^rcni:, 7. "rftr"T5
^fHlnd(Pan.vn.
or
with
beginning
7- f*^
^o
-sr^fv(^407),Caus. inw^fir,Aor.
V5nnr"for
^fil^ri
'Wf^Tj
4-
6-
5- ^?
3.
7. "^UT,
except nasals
consonants
strong terminations
^si^f,2. ^rj;,
i.
in the
'^^gJiat.
ffsJT,2. tfa?
f^TTf^,I.
of the special
tenses, and
Before
vn.
P. F.
Int.
terminations
37).
f^ghn (Pan.
The
P.
4,
F.
strong terminations
the
if the
generally,
(Pan. vi.
A.
frj;han, to kill.
68.
VERBS.
413111ft,Des.
Caus.
1
weakening
PAKASMAIPADA
CLASS,
^fcT or ftRf^fff,Int.
(Jtu, ^
verbs
The
ru,
stu
take
may
beginningwith
P.
or
2.
or
I.
THH
i.
^t^n,
^wt
or
or
Pill,
2. ^f^
cm
^Thrf, 7.
or
^r^ff
^Tlf^, 3. TU^
^hf,
9.
tf^in,B. ^n^
T^T^T, 8. ^7T
F. tfrofir,P. F.
^I^1"T,8.
or
or
3,
95.)
"tflfd,
4. ^:
8. ^T
^Tc(lHt,
^flftor
of the specialtenses
all terminations
(Pan. vn.
consonants.
"W"fl'!,
4. ^1^
3. ^Tul^or 41^11^,
or
iH^ptflff,
7. ^T^R
i.
^'"4ldt,
7.
before
^f?Tor
"cflfM,
3.
iXlfa,2. "^faor
6. TETiTJor
"^
or
^Hrt,
or
^fa,
9.
^'^l"^,
5. ^T^ff
I.
^^fw,
5.
i.
6.
-"f^"ilw,
or
O. ^TTf^or
"mgjlti,
9. ^H|v"c|^,
^Thr,
Ijfhj,
4. T^T^, 5. ^TT or
or
or
^5
Pt. ^w:
Pf. 3. ^TT^5
n
I A.
^1*,
9-
6.
?r
or
"
Pass, ^nr,
Int. rt^^nr.
^s^rfifj
Note
"
The
extends the
use
Sarasvati gives
of
to "Jto
and
diTT; but
^t'Slflfj
'STn^l^j
see
" 332,
4.
It likewise
praise.
171. 5 i,to go.
P.
i.
8.
^r,
9.
4fw, I. i.^wrf,
AD
2.
3.,
*TJ, 4. WTR,
3.
^f"
^rnr,
3-
4,45), 2.
6.7l,
5'W"
4-"
5.
4.
5-
1^:"
WTT.*,
3.^nrn^, 4.
P. F. *cn,
*igfiT,
($368),F.
vunfa (J 404), Caus.
But see " 463, II. i,
9.
^?r,9. *nj
(a),2. ^jftroor
^m
i.
^n^
46),
4,
4, with
i.
8.
wrw,
(Pan.n.
f 471,
^rrrnrt,
7.
6.
^BTTFT, 5. vnw,
B.
Pf.
6-
Jmfr
and
8.
277
VERBS.
7. **T, 8. *W,
^?rf,
7. ^in*r,
^TT,6.
t^"
PARA8MAIPADA
CLASS,
"^q
(Pap.n.
wri
WTTW,
9.
ffnrftrefir
(Pan.n.
Des.
this and
regard to
w*j:
Aor.
$irir,
Pass,
4,
47).
cognate verbs if
precededby prepositions.
fo[ vid,to know.
172.
P.
*rfa,2. %fw,
i.
i.*H
2.^:
^ffc,4. "fry:,
5. "faro,6. fVnrr,
7. fr?n, 8.
3.
($ 132^),4.
75),3. ^
6. ^if^nf,
(orf^hi
7. wf^^, 8. ^rf"w,9. "fa"^ or ^f^:,O. fwnj, I. i.^^if*!
"c., Pan. in. i, 41), f^%, 3. ^, 4. ^T^, 5. f^W, 6. ftnrf,7. ^T*" 8.
Pf. f^
n
or
f^f^rn: ("326), I A. ^fh^, F. ^qfir, P. F.
9. f^"
I.
(Pan.vin.
or
2,
2.
B.
fron^u
Another
7.
form
fr?r,8. f^,
9.
of the Present
f^:
$^,2. ^W,
Aor. ^^lfc""^,
Des. fcfc^Hfri
%^qfif,
(Pan.i.
saftn,2. ^srftr,
3. ^ri%, 4.
i.
^utilt,
3.
2.
^TR,
4. ^st^lq, 5. W)
^TCFJ,
4.
6. ^rrcnjt,
^nf^"4,5. ^sTRT^t,
7.
3.
^rw,
4.
5. WIT,
6.
7. 'Sfttiij 8.
Wj
vnftm^, 5. xutu^i,
6.
verb
takes
before
n.
"^pn^
or
^Hl^"
8. ^,
7. HT^i^f,
9.
or
iJafTJ
*nrm,
or
t The
^^t
or
inifgU
2,
requireGuna,
i.
in the
perfect.
periphrastic
'Pf. i. Wre,
Atm.
^rarrftr,
2.
*llftlV|,
2.
i.
i.
^r^,
2.
114);
it may
takeVriddhi
if the terminations
likewise
beginwith
H'l^lfH,
2.
Pf"
6.
5.^?,
^,
3.
vowel
"r
and
4.
ITHTR,
JRHT?, 3.
5.
Jp,
6.
"I"II*T, 4.
or
Pn"i,8.
TTT^gt,7. "i"jn"i"i
#1*11
F.
^HinfT^,
Parasmaipada
9-
^npf, ;.^ip"T, 8.
TTf
i.HHI^,2. *i*iifnMor
or
inf T, B. ij5*TT U
perfectboth
O.
cleanse, (ifSj^.)
(Pan. vn.
6. ^W^'
H*TT^^I,
I A. wn*ff^
jwrif:,
or
II
1.
122).
p.
I.
O. IT"III^,
*i*fifn^,
5. 'T^'f^tor
9.
2.^nrr^,
3. ^HI^,
4.^npf,
or
the
not
*rfk,1.
9.
wref, 9. ^iti^,
^TTO, 9. ^n^: ;
i.HTftS,
2.mft|,3. TrfS ("124),4-^^"
I. i.^Hi"f,
iTTsrfiT,
or
9-
vol.
Guna
w,
^rr^Tif, 7.
of
that would
terminations
(Siddh.-Kaum.
P.
instead
Vriddhi
fan, 8.
^H i
8.
8.
8. **rnr, 9. ^:, 1. 1.
^tT, 9.
to
if^mrij,
174.
This
be.
^rnrf,7. WR,
6.
3.
w^,
6.
"fa*,5. f^T^:,
4.
^ftr.
8),Int.^fWff,
'iti^'if^,
4. "ri*!*"5. ^rrer, 6. ^rrerf,
7. wsr,
^n:5
4.
^,
5. ^r:, 6. ^r:, 7. w,
^:,
2.
3.
2,
to
173. W(as,
P.
3.
Pt.
is,i.
or
mf^rfir
or
Hrafff,P.
F.
or
iffT,"^ST, Adj.JRTPSrt"q:
Atmanepadais chieflyused
at
the end
of
278
AD
"pr:
*rnh
or
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
(Pan.m.
Caus.
Aor.^srorfS,
113) u Pass.iprfr,
i,
Int. *iO*jTqn,
*i*iife.
or
frmP"mPfl,
ftii$|Pri
Des.
175.
P.
i.
^T^,
4.
vach,
speak.
to
5. ^3*r:, 6. ^s,
^^:,
7. T^JH, 8. ^*r,
9.
7. iSHVI,
4H'"^93. Viqe^, 4. 4Hxcf, 5. ?T^N?,6. VSNchl,
1. 1. q-qifri,
2. ^fNr, 3.
-*H"^*,O. ^TaiTt^,
^R, 4. ^TC1, 5. ^Ifi, 6. ^f?
I.
9.
8.
VEEBS.
^",
I.
^3*
9.
2.
Pf. 3- TWTO
Pt. T3":
B. "fxMi^u
Int.
fqms|fWj
Des.
II A.
9. ira:,
rud, to
consistingof 6ne
terminations
others, *"
according to
(Pan. vn.
(^C.)
cry,
consonant,
I is inserted
the terminations
2,
76).
(Pan. vii.
3,
Before
98);
or,
99).
3,
Ttf^fa, dfc(fa,
2.^0"1:or
4. ^P^^:,
3. Or^fn,
9. ^fri,I. i.swO"i,
2.
i.
3.
^T^I^,4. -si^r^,9.
sHCi"{tf^
4.
^[TO, 5- ^^^
or
6-
^-
^"$vi"
^Tfri"7- ^W,
8.
^rf"
!"
^*r"i,2. ^r^r^,3.
Pf.
i"
^fi[Tf,
9. ^[
^d^, I A. ^Ttfefhor
Pass. ^r", Aor.
P. F. df^in,B.
u Pt. ^rr: u
ftf^rfir,
^m^
Aor. -*l^^^, Des. fv"^'r^*4fii
Int.
or
^ttft[^flf,
Clt^fd,
F.
^r^i^,
Caus.
to
?(^jaksh,
177.
to wake,
verbs,^T^jaksh,
'3RT[jdgn,
Seven
$n^
imperative,and
P.
3.
9. *nrw:
^ifw ati
take
instead
^l uh
2.
9.
1. ^nrmt,
"iii|fri,
8.
^i"iiMn5
1.
9.
5. STPTif, 6.
i,
be poor,
of
and
in
3rd
pers.
'Snj
in the
^fi^an
atu
the
called WTCcf
are
3rd
to shine,
1ftft(chakds,
abhyasta
pers.
I. -wn^lf^
O. if^ni^j
I. 3. "lifVS/li^
or
nf"ifPif,
or
9. *icjfn,
^nf^fr^,
F. nfqmfri.
($321 1) " Pf. snrcy, I A. ^^HfT^,
miR,
*ii'i("ij
i.
laugh ||.
daridrd, to
^fX'"l
(Pan.vi.
to wake.
178. *R*lJagrii
P.
eat) to
(reduplicated).They
in.
m^^fri, Aor.
tenses beginningwith
special
of the
weak
P.
*N^
verbs
7.
qiq-oin.
176. ^
The
8.
(J366),F. ^rfif, P. F.
^fir or
2.
3.
ni'jMii^j
"ii'|ni9
7. ni'Ki*i9
38),9.
I A.
mrm^:,
accent.)
in'ifS,
4. "rnpt,5. "n*pn,6. "srpprtj
7.
^rwnr:, 3. ^nrRt?
O.
^^I'l^J?
i, 192,
8.
I.
i.
4.
^""MI"*, 5. w"n'ji
ni'mfiu,
ni'jflj9. '"II"K^H
2.
au^P^,3.
Pf. 3. ^IHNIK
or
(seepreface,p. ix),F.
Wfm'O'i^
"TTT594.
TiiM"i-q"=tiK
(Pan.
P. F.
^TMlft.mPH,
B.
Pt. "ii'iPi.n!
Aor. %i"iHiiP".
Caus.
Mi"i(Vifi9
U Pass, vu'i^kn,
^iHiMit^ U
.
Des. nriHinnC'iPif.No
The
Intensive.
not
occur
(Siddh.-Kaum.
"T^.
||*TSTto eat, from ^;
"STWto
laugh, from ^.
some
no
vol.
n.
ing
p. 120); accord-
daridrd
^(V."l
be poor.
^ft^Tdaridrd, to
179,
In
iTMANEPADA
CLASS,
AD
beginning
with
(Pan. vi.
"
in the
(Pan. vi.
d is lost
the WT
vowels
beginningwith
replacedby ^
consonant
i,
192,
114).
accent.)
before
specialtenses
4,
(Pan. vi.
279
VERBS.
Before
nations
strong termi-
strong terminations
112).
4,
I. 3.
^ftfclfa, e^fVgifti,
3. sfVfcifw,
4. {OJgq:, 9. ^ft^fif,
I- i.^V$if"u"
6.^ftf^?fT,
9. w^fi:, O. ^frf^n^
P.
i.
2.
2.
5.
6.
^jfl,
^cfcfl,
s.
7. qgitf,
^fcd,
^pj
9.
f'
"
5"
"r
^H^
yds
ia
sis
fifl^
changed to
and
P.
i.
(^n^.)(Pan.vi.
to command,
jTT^"fo,
80.
in the second
aorist.
(Pan. vi.
4,
188.)
beginningwith
consonants,
34.)
I. i.
^llfw,3. ^llfw,4. f^T^t,9. ^iitifn,
$11(\W,2.
i,
VIJIIJJ,2. ^T|Tn
or
Vjm^,
6. ^Huei, 7. ^n%^,
8. ^fifTF,
3. ^[\\ ("132),4- *%^5
9. ^n^:,
5- ^ffifTF,
1.
1. ^ntufn) 2. ^iifv
($132),3. ^rraj,4. ^n"iq, 5. %?, 6. fifref,
f^i'Mif^,
7.
8.
f^r?,9.
Pass,
^iitig
II
Pf. 3I3IIU, II A.
181.
The
w"T8jTf, O.
9.
other
(Pan.n.
forms
chaksh, to speak,
^T8J
4, 54,
55):
Atm.
^i|1^,
or
5.
^nfld,I. ^?f
are
Pf.
suppliedfrom
^n
II A.
t^i"take"
root
id
and
^* before
do
IT^jan
the
and
present, [imperfect,]
extend
the
"qtsjiff, 7.
-swti^,
8.
1"^%.
^^
or
"FJTT,the Red.
Perf.
or
"w, F. *nim(ri
or
optionally,
"w, B. ^rnm^
^l"1".
$^",
182.
The
^icn^,6.
^ft a
Pf.
Verbs.
Atmanepada
1. 3. ^n?,
or
F. 511^1^^,B. f^p"ni^
II Pt.
^ff^rm^,
Int.
f^rir,Caus. ^m^ffl,Des. njf^nftmrH,
II.
P.
O.
latter rule to
2nd
the
same,
likewise
imperative(Pan. vn.
$3"
rule.
pers.
and
to
insert
2A
to Pan.
See notes
i before
^
78). The
vn.
2,
the
and
commentators,
i,
pers.
77).
pliur.
however^
78.
P/x.^a.^,3.$M.*(^t3.H^
183. ^TT^ ds, to
P.
2,
*n^,
83),I
I. ^rrer, O.
I. ^rcrt
wrfhr,
5.
^,
^nrr,
Pf.
^nrrN^
^nf^,
(part,
Pan.
A. "*rftre,
F. ^ftr"r".
^^,
!84.
P.
"
sit.
I. ^W,
6.
O.
^nrf,
7.
I.
f^fhr,
^TR|,
i.
8.
to
bear, fa.)
(Pan.vn.
^i4,9. ^irf
3,
"
88), ^,
P"
2.
g^,
3.^TT,
I A. ^wf^"
4-
or
vn.
280
AD
("337"
45)
I-
*)"F- *fo*ft
3,
verb
vii.
7.
6.
takes
Tffts*
in the
Guna
i.
$nr,
2.
i,
6),
I.
tre,3-
3NMI,
7.
lie down,
sleep,(tfH^.)
to
4-
Pass,
Int.
f^rftn^rT,
P.
86.
O.
is alwaysused
6.
imperative.
7.
I A.
$*!,
s.
$d,
9.
$t^ (Pan.
^ff^,
F.
^l^mri,B. ^nftlfII
Caus. tymqPri,
Des.
22),Aor. ^^!Tft?,
(^.) (Pan.vi.
"swmri
^?upfNlT, P.
or
^iqinftl or
of
sense
(Sar.n.
5.
i,
186, accent.)
reading. (Siddh.-Kaum.
5, 8),
9.
n.
p.
18.)
I.
^nrtifhf,
O.
^wnr,
vol.
i.
6. ^?^hrnrf,
8. ^nftt^j
""t*n"4i'qi,
7. ^itq*ti"t^,
^F,
^T^nTTT,9. ^iffi,or
4,
49), IA.
n.
p.
119), 6. ^rapffar?rf,
9. ^UJJ^MH,
F.
(Pan.n.
vol.
^fiflift^(Siddh.-Kaum.
Aor.
4,
in the
with^SrfVa^i,
Pf. ^ftnfit
^!W5fiT
3rd
2.
f^^,
Pf.
^svhsf,3. "t*fl'nfj
4. ^rwm^%,
II
Cond.
1.
^ i, to go,
I. 3. ^^w,
^rifir,
2.
in the
^(i^("^7T,^i^ifn.
1
verb
^r
3.
(Pan.vn.
^i^w
inserts
^njrfa,2. ^fan,
i.
21), and
4,
"5nTTH|,
8. ^?4, 9. ^cTf II
Pt. ^rfinr:n
3.
W,
8. ^r%i4,
-"ii$Hr^,
9. ^ncw,
This
2,
^{JM^(Pan.
Des.
61),Int. ^frTOf.
P.
VERBS.
Aor. "3WJT^,
^rarfa, Caus. ^T^nrfcTj
^TMANEPADA
AND
or
II
vin.
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
B.
WT,
3.
^iWte
6.
'
Pt. ^^TT:
ll
F.
Pass.
^wrifhrrc,
Des.
or
III.
hate.
9.
I.
s-iffe?
i.^rfrT)
2. s f"4f
4. r""f:,
9. rsr^ffl, i.^r^? 2.^5?s7,3. ^r"r, 4.
"
firfr,
2.
^ifir^ or ^rf?"jt
(J321 j), O. (Vmir^,I. i. ir^T'fiir,
3. ^g, 4.
5.
P.
P. F.
Atm. fir^te u
B. "fe'Hrn^,
iter,
P.
I.
4.
I.
feMg
9.
i.
^tftr, vrf%
2.
3.
2. ^Wto^,3.
^n(l'55
"^I'^i^j
5. 3?^)
6.
^VT,
88.
7.
Pf.
Pt. fgr:
f^^r?
Pass,
5.
6.
g7^
^iV^f^jF.
ij,Aor. ^ft,
fem
"{Tf"i*f,
5^5
8.
9-
5^3
"
8.
grv:, 7.5^:,
O. d^llri I.
^fl^SI'j
,
4.
I A.
Caus.
c?w^,to milk.
^ffrv,4.55^9
^ImoFj
I.
|?v,
(fl^lfWj
2.
5^^J
"^^'5^^5 -^A.*^nr^Tf
9.
3'
"c.
(see
^ 363),F. Vl^frt.
189. 5f|stu, to praise,(l^T.)
P.
or
i.
wf*T
^qi^J,
9.
or
""{l("i(seeNo.
^^nfT, I.
r, 9. ^ta^^,
i.
170)?2. ^n(V
^?^rT^T,2. ^Wr.
O. ^tPffif Atm.
,
or
or
^cilPM,3. wfw
vi'tciqlt,
3. ^"wlii
^5^ftw,I.
i.
or
or
^'W
^KNiPtij
2. ^3f^
or
^sNtfrf,
4. ^J^J
"jlTT4. ^t^
,
^ti^r^,9.
or
282
HU
# hri, to
194.
P.
3.
(Pan.vi.
be ashamed.
fnifr,6. ftrrhr:,
9. ftf"fn (Ino),
Pt.
^far^ u
^Nr:
jft: (Pan.vni.
or
2,
i, 192,
accent.)
^fn^, O. ftr^mf, I.
F. jvfo, P.
I A. ^fhffy
I.
or
r^NdiK,
6. ftrfFfij:,
ftfFTO,
9. ftffig:
Pf. 3.
B.
VERBS.
ATMANEPADA
CLASS,
56)
t^^fif,
-g^im,Caus.
Pass,
F. fTTT,
Int. %]ffaiw.
Des. ftrgfafcf,
^(W^ii^,
Aor.
to guard.
195. TJpri,to fill,
This
verb,and
others
"3^ur,except
in which
final
preceded by
Guna
requires
the vowel
where
is
^ri
(Pan. VIT.
Vriddhi.
or
1,
into
102.)
i.fanfS, ftreft,
7. fn^:, 8. ftr^S,
4. ftr$%:,
5. f^":, 6. ftr$w:,
3. ftnift,
P.
2.
9.
i.
i.
Caus. ^R"lOr,
Aor. ^M)^,
"f^ n Pass, ^ffir,
("442, 7),Ger. fjtr,
Int. M^Sn, ^mfS.
y^frr filMf^fri(?),
Des,
to TJT
or
Several
Thus,
I A.
P.
3.
optionalforms
derived
are
I.
6. fmjrit,
faxrfff,
9. Pnufri, 3.
Pass, fma
B. ftnm^
u
^mtff^,
196.
Reduplicatedverbs ending
P.
i.
beginning with
^i (Pan.
also substitute
3.
4. ST^TW,
"TfTiJ,
2.
*if^xfor
,
4,
4,
4,
113).
\ifor
The
^TTa
^T hd,
verb
116).
3.
2.
*nfH
(?)or ir^rf^(Pan.vi.
"ST^,
4- *tf"" B- "5^^""6- '5^*"
Pass. ^hTff,Caus.
Pf. i. ^TR,
(?),
6. '^liii
(f),
(?),
7. "ST^TH,8. '^^Trf
9. "5T^
F. gimfri,P. F. frwr, B.
2. 5^,
^rcrftr,
w*ff n, 3.
2.
3.
^r|,4.
I A.
Pt.
u
^ITT^
Des.
5.
^,
6.
"5Tf, 9.
Pf.
'STK^,9. ^nt^ (1
i.
"T^I,
I
"Tj:,
(Pan.vn.
4,
s.
^f,
9.
B.
P. F. ^rtr,
^^rtaifTT,
Verbs.
Atmanepada
198. HT md,
117),
A.
43),
Int.
fiTfmfff,
s^rif,
7. ^^TH,
3^4),F.
II.
'T^'T,8.
4,
6.
(or^ro^),
3. TO
^^o^,
7-
^nwfrf,Aor. '^"5^^,
1.
i.
("481).
(Pan.vi.
consonants
vi.
5. W^TT
5fin%
2.
P.
^j.
6. "snrfrrf:
"i^ir"i,
(?),
2. "fi"Tftr,
4. ir^N* ("),
5. "5?^^:("),
7. *\%\*:
3. 'STfrfrT,
O.^ni^ (Pan.vi.
1.
short
hd, to leave,(^ft^Tcjr.)
1.
1.
ij,with
root
O. fuTJ^m^
U
^fqM:,6. ^rfrpjlff,
9.^rftnT^t,
("390),Int. ^hm
1. ^r"r^t,
8. "nrfa (z),
(*),
9. "fffff,
II
another
in ^TTa
before strongterminations
however, may
fT
from
to measure,
(TTT.)
HU
9.
1.
f*i*ifl,
1.
PARA8MAIPADA
CLASS,
1*1
1*1,
AND
^rn-nffan;,
3.
2.
*s 1*1*1 in,
ATMANEPADA
4.
283
VERBS.
TtmHlqff
5.
6.
^ti*f*ii*"i,
O. f*i*fliT,
I. i.fira,f*fHl*J,
"i,4
S.^lfinftttf,
9.*i(*i*in,
y.ufHNlnfig,
3. f"i*i1
2.
5.
8. f*i*i1l4,
6. famiii,
("iir^i,
7. ("i*ii*i9"
9. fa*infn
5.
I
8. *rf*ii",
6. *r*rnr,7.*rf*7*i^,
*TOT^,
a. ^nrrwr:,
9. "rf"TT,A. i.^nnftf,
4.
W4l440g, 5. ^HHIWll, 6.
P. F. mwr,
B. inwtY
ml,
xWlwfjg, 8.
7.
xWIUf,
3.
F.
WHI4A,
9.
vi.
69)
4,
Int. ^*T^iri^.
Hm^fd, Des. "ftn^rifr,
Caus.
Parasmaipadaand AtmanepadaVerbs.
III.
(ypr.)
iffim,
3. *TO,
*TO, a.
i.
"*TTO (not.rhr,Pan.
ftrwr,
Ger.
Pt. fair:,
Aor. wnfa,
"frtw,
Pass.
xi *i i"i
Pf.
8. ^p?,
(V"if*i,"ftwf^,
6. fw*jirt,
4. ftnj^t,
3. f%"rfS,
7. ^*prt,
5. fw*pn,
i.
2.
Atm.
L3.^ff*r:,6.^ir*pn,
9.wfir*T^:,
fa*j^,
3.f^T*i7r,
9.
Atm. i.fw,
f^"ifiT,
3.
Atm. ^^ftw,1.
O. f^^^ifl,
6. wf^"jnrf,
^sf"f*jrT,
9. -wfW*j?r,
3.
fwt
Pf.
i.
2.
(5),2. W^,
WR
3-^n:,
4-
fwH^ilVi,
2. fw*jfr"
1.
P^n.
fr*p tf334J
13) or
2,
vn.
Atm. yfa n
I A. ^HT^, Atm. ^ryr, F. HiX^fy,P. F. *Sr,B. f*jnrr^,
fir*Kh"*ii?
if it follows the
Pt. ^jw: u Pass, ftnnr,Caus. HrCTflf,
Des. "yjtrfir,
or fwft^fir,
class
Bhu
(Pan.vn.
49),Int. Twhnfr,^*"f".
2,
The
P.
^rf*r, "^tfa,
4.
3. ^rfff,
i.
i.^,
2.
2.
3.^,
^W,
a.^^r:, 3.^^,
2.
4.
6.
^rf,7. ^T*T,
7.
^Rt,
8.
4-
5-^^"
9.
^f. (Pan.
7. "f?n,8. ^ro, 9.
7.^W%, 8.^|,
9.
^TF,
^[^t, 7- *5*r,
6-
113.)
4, 112,
vi.
8.
^r^,
^fw,
^7T, I.
Atm.
9.^*^5:,
6. SH^^Irtl,
^pgrfl^,
5. ""^|Vj|,
7. VH^r*, S.V^f,
1.
^Tftf,2.^ff(Pan.vi.
1.
Atm.
S.^tT,9. ^,
^,
"VI d to
reduplicated
other
when
strong terminations,
^Sft,5-^T^" 6.
4-^sr,
3.^?^,
vf^fm;,
O.
d before
WT
196)change
(seeNo.
give,(^T^)
^T da, to
200.
?[^n
II
Pf.
i.
i.
""
^,
2.
i.
i.
9.
^T
2.
4,
^TO,
or
3.
^,
4.
^f^,
Atm.
5.
5.
.^,
P. F. ^TTTT,B.
r, Aor.
^T\9Atm.
^nrte
the
verb
is
VT^M,
conjugatedlike
of
aspiration
hence
Pt. ^:
(J436),Ger.
^T,
"^T
Pass.
Int.
Aor. \H^!^M, Des. f^wfir,
^rftr,Caus. ^Ttnrfir,
201.
This
to
place,
It should
^T.
vw:
"c.
be
remembered, however,
be thrown
forward
("118,note). The
O
on
Pt. is
that
the initial ^;
f^in,Ger.
284
verbs
f^T
f"T^wy,
Reduplicatedverbs (abhyasta,"
terminations
P.
7.
i.
Caus.
beginning
9.
in the
I.
^ftnrfcT,
3,
^R^T,
2.
before
87.)
3.
II
Pf.
Atm.
ftrwiTr,
B.
P. F. TPJT,
^rfs,
7. ^ftm,
9.
I.
(Rudhddi,
Class
and
Parasmaipada
O.
^^^,
I A.
^^:,
%"m^, I.
II
mhtfh^or
shut
i.
Pf.
A. W^"T^,
204.
Class).
Verbs.
(^fv^.)
out,
^|
B.
II.
VII
Atmanepada
^^rudh, to
203.
9.
their
Int.
Aor. ^cftftnn, Des. frriiTT^fff,
ifinifiT,
I.
P.
^H(HJT,
i.
2.
wftnr^,F. %^r,
II A.
in
Guna
(Pan. vn.
specialtenses.
i.
or
Guna
do not take
vowel
I.
O. ?rft5*n^,
^fcnnfil, ^Tf*I, 3. %^{
"3Rfa*j:,
Rudh
P.
9.
medial
short
vowels
with
take
75.)
if) having
32
2.
^r%^
I A.
4,
^Rfar*,
to embrace,
f^^vish,
vij,to separate,and
(Pan. vn.
reduplicative
syllable.
weak
VERBS.
"fairnij,to cleanse,
The
iTMANEPADA
AND
PARASMAIPADA
CLASS,
KUDH
^dv,
i.
Atm.
r, "ui
F.
^^,
u
^df"rzr,3
2.
P.
TtwfiT,
Pass,
w,
F.
Aor.
ParasmaipadaVerbs.
f^rs"'s^,to distinguish,
5.
8.
f$s*5 6. f^r?:,7. f^far:,
O. f^T^TTi^,
I.
^rf^F,9. ^rf^fa^,
f^R^rfirr, f^ifj
(orf^fe),3. %"Tf
Pass.
P. F. $FT, B. f^TTr^
fTO^, II A. ^%^, F. ^T^TfTf,
II Pt. %* : n
8.
i.
Caus.
2.
Int- $%^W?
^N^fif,Des. f^rfjfTW^T?
hims,
P.
ff^%, 1.
II
$^rf?.
strike,
to
2.
1.
Pf.
ftrf^r,I
A.
^^,
F.
P.
f^ftnqfir,
f^ftnn,B. f^^nr^u
Pass, f^qw, Caus. f^WrT,
Aor. ^rftff^^,
Des. ftrf^ftRflf,
Int.
206.
P. wrfti, I. ^TVROF,
P. F. H^ir, B. ^5^
Caus. "RPTfw,Des.
o.
u
*nr:
f^l^frr,Int.
or
Pass.
"W^Tff,
^flfif,B. ^^n^TH U
J 438), 0:5r5?Tn
f^ftnr:n
Pf. ^r^nr, I A.
HT^,
"
or
anoint, (^^.)
U
Pf. ^TPTW, I A.
Aor.
F.
"3wreffy
Wftr (J407),
"gwftr
^H%.
^^ anj,to
O. ^5^?
I^Rf?R, I. ^TT1?^,
^R^l
207.
P.
Pt.
45?n^,I. *?rf
Pt.
F.
^RT
or
^TTWfyF.
^TW
(Pan.vi.
^iftmflf
4, 32;
Des.
Caus. 4*T*lTif,
Aor. ^srffinrf,
^rff"r,
RUDH
Tft trih,
208.
This
verb
irr
inserts
ne
ATMANEPADA
CLASS,
instead
i.
if^a,
I.
i.WJ?rt,
O.
ij'Ul^, 1.
or
ff^frf,
2.
yiHVr,
Aor.
J51^if"i,
1.
F.
frftur
Wdrt
ipbfz,
3-'"l^""
2.^5^,
P.
3.
or
2.
or
3.
(or
Pt.
^f:
^,
^,
Pass,
1."^
Pan.
^um,
or"Vv,
i.
2,
Caus.
6),
5.
6.
^TJ7,
inf%,
Pt.
77:
Atmanepada
indh,
to
O.^rhr,
I
A.
nrfff,
VfV*,
Des.
consonants.
A.
^r:,
8.
7.W?pr,
v?nff?^or
Pass,
-^nr,
fdi^frf,
^r,
8.
9.
^Hpf,
v^nn^,
Aor.
9.
F.
^nrff,
Caus.
Int.
Verbs.
kindle,
I.
7.
^TT,
fflflflMfrtor
^n,
6.
37:,
5.
Pf.
ii
with
beginning
92.)
3,
^3f:,
J[m\
Des.
III.
or
"5^
B.
"Wffl"i,
209.
VH.
4-^J3^*
"jfT,
Trtr,
4.
terminations
weak
(Pan.
P.
kill,
to
before
ofHSna
285
VERBS.
(fa^ft.)
i.^A,
F.
^n^T,
3.^f
2.^T,
P.
F.
^ftmr,
or
B.
^nrfr
Pf.
APPENDIX
On
"
in Sanskrit
Although
i.
its
only, yet
importance
generally acknowledged
least
in
the
this
edition
new
of
and
in the
them
his
paradigms
his
attract
tribhih,tribus,
but
tuddmi,
and
or
weakening
rational and
"
of
native
grammarians
opening of
the
vocal
of
there
be
it
was
sign
circumflexed
For
uddtta
and
combined
called
are
on
until
and
cause
if
imdh,
we
we
of
grammatical
look
at
trdyah, tres,
bddhdmi,
at
the
know,
strengthening
rested
weakening
the position
how
once
influences
termination,
selves
them-
accents
in
at
see
the
his grammar
effect
we
go
to be
I have
accent,
still learn
may
accents,
see
but
marks
on
originally
that
it
was
according
the
to
description
It meant
reallymusical.
modulation
musical
the cantilena
or
of
peculiar
the
each
the wideand
word,
also
sentences, may
to
the
it
in
clearlyperceivedin
but
^F=L
ri
and
times, its
Latin, too,
pitch, and
Ma
in later
became
accent
it
very
of
name
ry.
musical,
originally
was
being
drawn
pitch,
meant
of the
up
and
down
in
pronouncing
syllable.
grammatical purposes
the
The
svarita.
raising
and
is sometimes
the
is
uddtta
without
svarita.
have
we
fallingof the
i. e.
anuddtta,
asvarita, without
vowel,
the
whole
Maria!
3.
go,
doubt
singing
perceptible in
that in Greek
shows
"
the
at
single words.
the
Whatever
glance
the
to
so
therefore
it seemed
Ma
to the
about
where
cases
no
oxys,
I determined
student
strengtheningand
this
can
call the
we
most
Ex.
song,
that
emi, I
j at
Sanskrit
chords;
what
languages
the utterance
in
fallingof the
corresponded to
modern
all
unintelligible. Thus
or
syllable
how
is called
accent
rising and
actual
in
now
imperfect without
seem
accentuation.
accent
period
is
intelligible
principle.
The
2.
base, and
grammar
to
the radical
on
of the
vdktum,
at
remain
tertius
tritiya,
I strike ; at
him
would
would
the
Devanagari, unconcerned
otherwise
but
many
only, so
the Vedic
belonging to
words
enable
in works
Sanskrit
mark
to
to
not
notice, and
which
operations
system of
transliterated
in
to
elementary
grammar
Sanskrit.
in
is marked
clue
an
of the
my
Accent
accent
even
in order
useful,but
practically
added
the
that
outlines
general
the
giving
as
II.
to
distinguishin
pronounced
voice.
All
The
which
have
or
sannatara*.
(Pan.
from
sanna,
i. 2,
accent
accents
the
only, the
svarita
of these
neither
by
accents
called anuddttatara
two
vowels
uddtta, though
Sanskrit
an
uddtta
or
svarita
as
if from
29-31.)
sannatatara,
" ;.
THE
ON
In
transliterated words
ACCENT
I mark
the
uddtta
287
SANSKRIT.
IN
by
the
by
the
circumflex.
either the mark
Every syllablewithout
grammaticallyunaccented
; and
anuddttatara.
phonetically
as
can
be
marked
by
the
If the two
anuddtta.
"
In
4.
Sanskrit
uddtta is
The
and
Whenever
the
sign of
by
the
monosyllabicword,
if uddtta, has
word,
monosyllabic
if
word,
monosyllabic
if svarita,is marked
general
rest of the
word
every
syllables
being anuddtta.
is
syllable
followed
dependent
svarita.
marked
as
by
Ex.
anuddtta
need
svarita
"
word
Ex. ^t vah, T
Ex.
"
.
theyhave
syllables,
all to be marked
__.
^^
ag,
at the
changed
ndf
TT
mark;
any
transliteration this
In
may
be
treated
as
in Sanskrit, to be
pronunciation
only.
begins with
sentence
Ex.
anuddttatara.
by the sign of
is called the
into what
Both
anuddttatara.
of
uddtta
if an
anuddtta,is pronounced
originally
their exact
head
svarita,the
or
But
the accent.
accordingly.
scholars
uddtta
is therefore without
the
nor
is
it is svarita.
"
svdh.
have
anuddtta
Here
*"
that
know
nah.
either
syllable
one
standingby itself or
by
by
but
uddtta; if marked
is marked
marked,
be
uddtta
is
anuddttatara, we
the
its
syllable,
svarita, and
not
"
Any syllablemay
VlOtHl agnind.
becomes
trySmbakam.
at all.
by
has
is
anuddtta,
originally
dependent
an
mark
no
anuddtta,is marked
rule
svarita,tf 'vardhanta.
immediately preceding an
sign of
_,
" 5. As
uddtta, a the
the
and
is
next
Hence
words, it
the svarita
marked
syllable
become
i. e. the anuddtta
(sannatara),
syllable.The
t" has
takes the
are
indicated at all,but
find
'vardhanta, then
as
originalstarita,
or
in transliterated
sruch?va;tri+ambakam
the accents
never
we
in tt
into te
considered
be
to
uddtta
an
be marked
must
has
svarita
or
before
syllable
unuddtta
Thus
coalesce
the anuddttatara
svarita
or
If the
become
srucht+\va
Similarly,
unaccented
an
grams.
words
of uddtta
several
anuddtta
'MI^Mi dpnuvdnah;
S"V"i"4l
hridayydyd.
" 7. By observing these simple rules,no
of any
word
in Sanskrit
1.
word
in Sanskrit.
A word
followingis
remain
can
list of the
as
to the
grammaticalaccent
classes
principal
of accented
words
of
consisting
"Jnu, ^
2.
The
doubt
one
has
which
syllable
Ex.
T"
yah,
kdm.
which
on
the last
is called
syllable,
antoddtta.
Ex.
*tT'^: agnty,
^ifarti
janitd.
3. A
word
which
has
the uddtta
on
the
(ndrafi,
^tlft
hdtd.
4.
A word
which
has
the uddtta
on
the middle
is called madhyoddtta.
syllable,
Ex.
*d*nni
agn{nd,^fir*ffil
agnibhih.
5. A
word
Ex.
6. A
word
Ex.
consistingof
1$ kva, ^
which
one
syllablewhich
has
the
originalsvarita, is called
svarita.
svah.
has
cn"q|kanyd.
the
svarita
original
on
the
last
is
syllable,
called antasvarita.
288
ON
which
word
7. A
which
word
Ex.
has
word
without
word
with
uddtta
uddtta
third
and
of
them
has
because
anuddtta
the
syllable,
the
If
svarita,the
anuddtta
in
the
word
we
ending
in
uddtta
that *K
see
it would
uddtta, which
need
to write
*?hhyah
If
be
uddtta
as
svarita,
nothingfollows,
rules
apply to
word
beginningwith
*K +
Thus
on
them
anuddtta
an
i. e.
yah -j-cha,
shows
that *T ya
^,
cha
single
to
as
word
beginningwith
uddtta
an
vt*in*i^
djanayat+ F
or
become
tarn
word
with
such
anuddttatara.
has the
has
uddtta
and
the third
on
the
otherwise,at
As
cha has
to write
the
*T5T
cha
Jft^yds
beginning of
the
sentence,
anuddttatara, we
the next
see
has
syllable
Jfi^tdt
uddtta,we
the
it would
case
svarita
have
that
secondly,
after
say whether
that
the
it cannot
be
we
svarita,
should
that
hydh showing first,
^K
mark, and
no
would
requiresvarita
case
it
final
that
sign
164,4). Only,if
the
dependent
the
marks
an
svarita
originalor
uddtta
would
^^Ijf^HJarunayugbhih,having the
likewise
on
has the
sign, not
under
only under
TO
and
But
ru.
na,
if
the
dependent svarita.
followed after Hi
become
uddtta
kva, its
its anuddttatara
mark
svarita
anuddttatara.
on
yug,
stands
it
by itself,
immediatelyprecedes the
preceded by -stfri:
agnih,which
which
keeps
tat.
anuddttatara.
an
anuddttatara
but
syllable,
have
we
because
anuddttatara,
became
as
that
so
be marked.
(see" 9),while
the
uddtta, because
the
tdt,which
impossibleto
have
must
anuddttatara, because
replacesan
has
preceded by
remain
a
Ex.
anuddttatara,
originalsvarita follows
an
first
followingsyllable
; and
not be
would
by
by
anuddttatara.
the
on
SBHilJIffidtmd+kva(Rv. I.
Ex.
same
dependent svarita
*P3T
cannot
next
is then
is the
^^ii^tflin
indrdbnhaspdti.
svarita.
as
to become
yah
not
If instead of FIT
If
triruddtta
is followed
svarita,which
to be marked
have
the
of the
anuddtta
an
anuddtta, and
originally
could
svarita.
is anuddtta and,
syllable
last
sentence, the
mark
becomes
an
anuddtta,
originally
on
The
having the
have
accordingly.The
djanayattdm.
^I*1"l*m
it was
is marked
uddtta,so
in uddtta is followed
ending
ydscha,where
ending
Here
syllableis
being anuddtta,
syllable,
fourth
is pronounced
syllable
word
word
as
uddtta.
If
The
together in
word
is
syllable
is called
syllables,
uddtta
come
if
syllableis
anuddtta,becomes
last,originally
the
uddtta.
an
second
mark.
three
words
*P5T
But
the
the next
The
at all.
svarita.
anuddttatara, and
becomes
mark.
it follows
with
Thus
become
marked
become
"Tt nah.
brihaspdtih.Here
i^tHPit:
dviruddtta;
is therefore not
second
The
any
is left without
has
called ddisvarita.
^t vah,
Ex.
but becomes
is anuddtta,
mitrdvdrunau,the first syllable
an
word
is called
syllables,
is uddtta, and
syllable
follows.
words.
is
syllable,
first
or
anuddtta
uddtta
" 8. If
the
on
again,the
msfNtjxuT
originalsvarita
uddtta
two
anuddtta,
11.
the
is uddtta,and
syllable
first
In
is called madhyasvarita.
syllable,
the middle
on
" 8-
SANSKRIT.
T3"*!]R svarnare.
9. A
10.
originalsvarita
IN
"J^"i"4i
hridayyayd.
Ex.
8. A
has the
ACCENT
THE
mark
'^Tfri^sTOjJ'foT:
agnirarunayugbhih.
at
all,
290
THE
ON
ACCENT
" II-
SANSKRIT;
IN
If
c.
uddtta
an
W +
Ex.
According
become
or
^raVff
anuddtta, in
originally
is
the termination
all uddtta
is also
This
svarita.
(elided)anuddtta
an
the
in
because
nadydh,
8, 8).
i.
in the former
a, it takes
svarita
(Prat.188).
\ardhanta.
te
vowels
case
hydsya (Rv.
"ffS^Pkhf
te+avardhanta
Mandukeya
to
with
coalesces
evd
certain Brahmanas
anuddtta
another
coalescingwith
Kielhorn, Bhashika-
see
vowel,
sutra, I. 5.
The
produced by the
accents
taken from
the
of the Sandhi
name
rise to them
that gave
1.
the
Praslishta,
accent
of two
vowels
united
2.
of two
vowels
of which
3.
Kshaipra,the
4.
Tairovyanjana,the
of two
accent
the
svarita
precededby
either y
these semivowels
medial
as
(Vaj.Prat.
each
word
words
has
considered
rules
in
when
given,will
the
divided
Ex.
*ftStimg6 'patau.
which
to
noun
at the
these
under
and
an
If
pause
kampa
takes
is not
mentioned
of
place,and
in Sutra
word
is divided
uddtta,and
the second
in the
should
Thus
beginning with
ta
TTrJ^Scflffi^.
is
division,and
the svarita
in the first
In
212.
after that
is marked
is
na,
I.
p.
uddtta,nu
which
is
call the
if
instead
commentary
on
of svasamhitdvat
187.
Weber,
first half
Here
the
words
tairovirdma.
in
ending
uddtta,the
svarita,then
which
dependent
compound
again uddtta.
the peculiaraccent
Pratisakhya,
the
an
accordingly. Though
Padapatha, the
half
Here
of any
grammaticalaccent
we
the
student,by following
every
authorities.
some
restrictions
they have
sentence, when
is the real
vaivritta,which
by
other
some
and
relative
in
beginning of
what
sentence, is
direct
belongs. Only
exceptions,however,
the
mentioned
in
syllable
Unfortunately many
svarita.
or
it
begins a sentence,
except
With
are
tdthdbhdvya.Ex.
or
the
preceded by
described
the
tairovyanjanaand
are
avagraha
fact,be treated
of
peculiarpronunciation
the
uddtta
whether
able to determine
be
svarita,other subdivisions
called
in which
discover which
perfectcertainty
with
can
verb
svarita
we
enclitic of
mere
accent
Besides
It is always
in
It may,
nature.
hiatus
an
historyof Sanskrit
the
where
the
from
indra*.
2/a/
period in
important that
grammaticalaccent,
Vocatives
on
^"
is
conditional sentences, or
are
separatedby
semivowel.
consonants
points to
it is
into
changed
been
125).
I.
the
as
and
v,
a.
anuddtta,if separated by
which
or
By applying these
ii.
of
body
kshaipra; and
different svaritas
"
in the
is the elided
ile.
Ex.
precedinguddtta (Prat.204).
Jdtya, the
6.
anuddtta, if
ft"i*jQa
agnim
(samdvesa,ektbhdva).
one
the second
the svarita,replacingan
(orpadavritta],
5. Vaivritta
from
Ex.
names,
of which
vowels
svarita,replacingan
precedinguddtta.
into
technical
following
have the
of vowels
coalescence
svarita
follows
a
the
kind
it is meant
for is
fully
perhaps
Stud. vol.
p. 137.
Whitney, in Beitragezur
of
tdthdbhdvya
name
(120)it would
Ind.
is
iv.
be
vergleichenden
-J 12.
word
occurringin
svarita
in the
Weber's
ACCENT
THE
ON
IN
291
SANSKRIT.
remarks, and
introductory
the uddtta
from
Professor
from
particularly
and
on
the
Bhashika-sutras.
"
how
Quite
12.
different from
the accents
hymns
Veda
and
the
(in
in/tiff
low
a
of the svarita
one
if
an
This
sinkingdown
is called
this
pronunciationof
We
have
anuddtta
the
case
voice
sinks
All anuddtta
kampa, shaking.
question
followingshort remarks
uddtta
rest
down
like
is
must
high, the
uddtta, except
to the anuddtta
after
following
syllables,
pitch.
svarita
which
pitch(195),
except the last,
uddtta
or
with
syllables
anuddttatara
therefore only three kinds of pitch,(no special
which
Pratis'akhya,)
in the
The
is the
in the
particularly
questionconcerns
either uddtta
againby
sentence, and
point.
or
are
(whetheroriginal
dependent)
pronouncedwith
is followed
grammatical accent
a
(187 seq.),the
Rig-veda-Pratisakhya
follows, in which
svarita
in
This
Vedas.
principal
Accordingto
or
of the
intoned
or
be sufficient.
uddtta
determination
pronounced
of the
Brahmanas
only,and
be
should
the
be
(205).
pitchbeingrecognized
represented
by
^*OT mdddyasva
in *II^M*S
*TT md
svarnare,
is anuddtta,^dais
uddtta,^
ya is
svarita,
^T^svar
is anuddtta,
is
J*3
J
JJJJ*ggj
,
d""
ma
sva
ya
svar
dhaprama
sish is
anuddtta, but
are
pronounced
dha
tir
ma
pra
Much
Pratis'akhyas.
by
particular,
svarita
half
after this
Zeitschrift der D. M.
low,
right,and it will
written
was
G. vol.
the
would
eye.
What
to
listening
saw
svarita,
is uddtta,
be
may
my
seen
by mixing up
systems,and,
with the rules
Rig-veda-Pratis'akhya
uddtta
anuddttas
is
anuddtta
high, the
followingafter svarita
the
last of
Haug's descriptionof
He
is very
(hah.
Dr.
p. 799.
xvn.
be easy to transcribe
it is clearer to the
that in
and
as
while
pronouncedmonotonously (ekafruti),
dependent)
between
ra
rules of the
(i.2, 29 seq.)the
to Panini
high and
are
remark
the
tryingto reconcile
According
is half
Long
is
these different
caused
sish
vd
of Panini.
dab
is uddtta,^W
j j j
dab
Other
like
nare.
""f^*"M*irflMUfrft
ddabdhapramatir vdsishthah,TO
In
in
J*J
own
notation
important,as
rise to
accents
smaller,
so
This
is
or
(original
them, immediately
the
e.
no
in the
that
if
doubt
it because
perceiveany
svara.
difference
292
ON
preceding
the
us
uddtta
new
three
kinds
of
is
lower
This
anuddttatara.
commentators,
only
svarita,
or
ACCENT
THE
than
too,
be
may
"
SANSKRIT.
and
anuddtta,
system,
which
pitch,
musical
IN
though
hence
different
called
from
sannatara
the
represented
approximately
12.
or,
former,
gives
by
P
anuddttara,
Ekafruti
be
is
intended
It
ekasrutiti
described
for
is
mere
commonly
parydyah,
as
anuddtta,
without
Vaj.
as
Prat.
pitch
ekafruti.
svarita,
(traisvarydpavdda),
and
might
therefore
recitative*.
monotonous
used
definite
any
uddtta,
synonymous
iv.
138.
with
prachita;
e.g.
uddttamayam
by
pracJiitam
OF
INDEX
NOTE"
figuresrefer
The
NOUNS.
to
",
the
dpahjwater,
^M
army,
an
dsya,face, 214.
227.
Lakshmi,
"n, 203.
*/,such, 174.
227.
better than
'sfrt,
n,
woman,
reciter of hymns,
3"*^\\*{uktha6ds,
"j
anehas,time,
168.
nom.
y,
211.
name
221.
updnah,shoe, 174.
prop.,
169.
fire,149.
aryaman,
northern, 181.
water, 214.
foe, 189.
181.
TSF^^anvach,following,
^n^o/), water,
";"*
210.
ox,
without
anaroan,
-iyas,206.
m.f.,229.
191.
anadud,
eating,182.
^st n
an.
i, face,214.
157.
w^agnimath, fire-kindling,
fn
149,
is,blessing,
172.
^P
the page.
to
not
of
201.
deity,
priest,161.
ritvij,
horse, 189.
w5i^an?a",
^J^J^*^
ribhukshin,Indra, 195.
vHf^arflaw, hurting,foe,189.
^H"iMi^ avaydj,priest,163.
"lrfw
kati,how
^W"M-"I
(,
"UTiT kdnta,
blood, 214.
xt^
asthi,bone,
vf^
beloved,238.
How
t'yaf,
234.
Tf^-aAan, day,at
much
190.
164.
kir,scattering,
of
compound,
kudhi, m.
kumdri,
197, 198.
vi^'iiijr
ahargana, month, 196.
,
nail,221.
ifHTkdntd,fern, beloved,238.
161, 214.
;, blood,
231.
kavi, poet,230.
many,
soul,self,191, 192.
kri,m.
f.
m.
bad thinker,221.
girlish,
227.
f. buying,220.
i, curlew, 159.
177.
294
INDEX
OF
NOUNS.
kroshtu,jackal,
236.
ddrdh,wife,149.
khanj,lame, .163.
heavier,206.
voice, 164.
iv and
^ dyu, sky,213.
"HpJTdis,showing,174.
guardian,157.
covering,
174.
duh, milking,174.
j^rO,
2l8.
OX,
dis,country,174.
duhitri,
daughter, 235.
cowherd, 174.
iftf^goraksh,
%\miftgrdmani,leader
of
221.
village,
seeing,174.
chakds, splendid,
172.
"*|flmt(
doshan, arm,
desirous of acting,172.
chitralikh,painter,
156.
worshipper,162.
chakdsat,shining,184.
""|o|,|Uj^
,
thunderbolt,221.
172, 214.
arm,
fl^div,
sky,213.
and
^ dyu
eating,184.
WQl^jakshat,
tftdyo,
sky,219.
jaganvas,havinggone, 205.
^ jaghanvas,having killed,205.
*i """!
"f
PH"i *Hjaghnivas,havingkilled,205.
f. a
,
buyer of water,221.
cloud,158.
waking, 184.
*(\"Hi{jdgrat,
dhtjm.f. thinkuig,220.
tf dM,
f.
inteUect,224.
l|)"iOdMvari, wife
many,
nadi, f. river,225.
H^fttantri,f. lute,225.
"T5T nas,
"T^wa5,nose,
181.
turdsdh,Indra, 175.
r?^
"f?rnah,
rish,bold, 174.
danta,tooth,214.
t,poor, 184.
ddtri,giver,
235.
rope,
191.
214.
ninivas,having led,205.
nri,man,
binding,174-
nirjara,ageless,167.
t, giving,184.
"if
214.
ndsikd,nose,
tvish,splendour,1 74.
tooth, 214.
destroying,
174.
ndman, name,
"1l*i"t,
tvach, skin,158.
fisherman,193.
naptri,grandson,235.
"T1|
231.
iryach,tortuous,
of
falling,
173.
-tsfntakshan, carpenter,191.
iffrf
tati,so
194.
hating,174.
paring,174.
'tt^taksh,
n
ropes,
214.
fern.,179, 193.
237.
m.
"ftnau,
f.
dancer,
222.
ship,217.
"**'*fnyacJi,
low, 181.
m.,
ti,lord,233.
m,
m.
path,195.
INDEX
OF
foot, 214.
trflpapt, m.
f.
Your
222.
protector,
TTCRfft
paramanl, m.f.
H
best
being,221.
f.
191.
joint,
earth,224.
f. n. pale,230.
m.
bhtir,
atmosphere, 149.
162.
roasting,
^Jl^bhrijj,
foot,207.
-prfrf,
foot,214.
desirous of
,
n.
and
tree
its
f;',
diving,161.
fruit,230.
u,
maturing,1 74.
w,
ifa$ pilu,m.
bhrdtri,brother, 235.
i,f. brow, 224.
father,235.
187.
thought,230.
matt,
221.
(pums), 212.
man,
town, 164.
191.
Indra, 168.
an
,
pritand,army,
*pT"TT
*rNfmdthsa,
deity,201.
t,
214.
205.
of creatures, 233.
pratidivan,sporting,
192.
,
;,
western, 181.
liver,214.
ri'f,
162.
sacrificing,
sacrificer,
192.
Ufa ya"",as
eastern, 180.
Ttt^prdch,
road,
worshipping,
159.
badi,dark fortnight,149.
knowing, 157.
t,great, 185.
199.
pea-soup,
214.
pea-soup,
,
shining,162.
^^"Tbahurj,very strong,161.
,
222.
young,
kings,194.
bahusreyast,
auspicious,227.
231.
many,
f.
*4^H
soft,230.
liver,214.
quieting,178.
having many
head, 191.
f. n.
m.
an,
fern.,223.
"l ? W
214.
cleaning,162.
mridu,
HVfl"
221.
pradhi, m.f. thinking eminently,
mother, 235.
muh, confounding,174.
having cooked,
lord
prajdpati,
214.
meat, 214.
month,
f, deer,185.
,
meat,
214.
army,
great,186.
176.
offering,
of
name
shining,162.
lump-eater,170.
161.
physician,
*ft/////,
f. fear,224.
162.
leaf-shedding,
173.
Honour, 188.
leader, 221.
(X4 |l^
parivrdj,mendicant,
dut
295
NOUNS.
king, 191.
rajftf,
queen, 193.
,
light,158.
214.
296
OF
INDEX
NOUNS.
"uddhadhi,a
ruj,disease,161.
204.
^^ rurudvas,crying,
^^
rush, anger,
sushki, 222.
174.
"^rai,wealth,217.
^TT
sri,f. happiness,224.
laghu,m.
light,230.
dog, 199.
^rf^T sakthi,thigh,234.
vanij,merchant, 161.
sakhi,friend, 232.
t, 187.
us,
f. wife,225.
friend, 172.
sadhryach,accompanying,181.
191.
J
varshdh,rainyseason,
,
frog,221.
sdnu,ridge,214.
vdch,speech,158.
vdtapramt,antelope,222.
sikatdh,sand, 149.
sukhi,wishingfor pleasure,222.
^T^!vdr,water, 164.
"nftvdri,water, 230.
knowing, 205.
a
suti,wishing for
river,174.
drop
of water, 174.
f^RJT"T
vibhrdj,resplendent,162.
f. having
zs, well-
iviksh,
wishingto enter, 174.
vis,entering,
174.
son,
222.
well-sounding,
170.
sudhi,m.
readyreckoner,154.
Tf sugan,
carrying,208.
,
right,181.
j, sovereign,162.
149.
part,perfect,204.
-vas,
HJrHt^svetavas,209.
149.
year,
f. cutting,220.
and
svetavdh
fro? lih,licking,174.
"g lu,m.
thinker,221.
pure
m.
f.
sumanas,
walking,170.
having good brows, 226.
well-minded, 165.
221.
susri,well-faring,
msvapd, all-preserving,
239.
universal monarch, 162.
visvardj,
creator,162.
visvasrij,
suhimsf well-striking,
172.
*J^
ish,ordure, 174.
181.
vishvach, all-pervading,
suhrid, friendly,
157.
/,creating,162.
somapd,
tree-hewer, 222.
vrikshalu,
risck,cutting,159.
3("h"^sakan, ordure,
214.
it,ordure,214.
stri,woman,
commanding, 184.
suchi, m.
f. n.
bright,
230.
drinker,239.
228.
snih,loving,174.
snu,
ridge,214.
spueing, 174.
sankhadhmd, shell-blower,
239.
,
Soma
is,touching,174.
;,
sras,
garland,161.
falling,
173.
298
INDEX
VERBS,
OF
kri,to scatter,113.
to grow
rft, to praise,138.
*$"jvar, to suffer,
92.
7TEJ1taksh, to hew, 37.
WT
burn,
to
28.
TfT tarn, to
fdHffttitikshate),
fcnrft)',
to forbear,
(fii
75, 63.
f^TArsfo',
to
wane,
diminish,24.
to
fop^fo^m,
to
*w, to grow,
Jf^trih,to
f^
TT
^3TT
to
vex,
107.
tri,to
khya, to proclaim,166.
gad, to speak, 9.
Trf
TFR 0aw,
TT
5-0, to go,
*n^"Mp,
to
*J|guh" to
70.
to delight,
l[*{trip,
127, 38.
]J^tud, to strike,104.
kill,150.
khad" to eat, 8.
languish,130.
83.
kill,208.
61.
cross,
i, to
be
', to
tremble, 30.
ashamed,
"rM", to
c|""?
cut, 30.
r^
hurry,92.
tvar, to
protect,26, 63.
"f$T
dams, to
"^
dad, to give,70.
*t gai,to sing,44.
bite,62, 73.
^fin^T
daridrd, to
?T|#r"A, to
be poor,
"^Tdah,
"5$^w-class,46, 47,
^T rfa,to give,58.
TTT
200.
burn, 42.
to
to
^rafif
diddmsati,
cJiamy to eat, 29
ohah,
to decay,154.
rfl,
pound, 137.
to
iftdtdMy
"
^A,
pound, 137.
to
| dri,to
?T
chyut,to sprinkle,3.
to
to
aw,
to eat, 177,
176.
see,
to
88.
120.
48, 38(Vj(pa4)t
tear, 156.
cut, 124.
;, to
shine, 86.
;, to
know,
to
milk,
i, to
shine, 177.
to cleanse,46.
c?"",
cut, 124.
*t jri,to grow
to
observe,
is,to
2.
chur, to steal,136.
cMo,
to
"^c?n,to
make
straighten,
63.
Trfw, to play,I2i.
179, 177.
"^Tc?a,to give,200.
^r^ra,to smell,54.
^TJT
74.
known, 137.
hate, 187.
',to place,201.
\dhu, to
shake, 156.
i, to warm,
27.
NDEX
$ dhe, to drink,47.
VTT
dhmd,
hum,
to
,
TT
blow, 55.
to
299
VERBS.
OF
md,
nwfcfl
TI"^man,
to search,63.
mtmdriuate,
f*fmi, to throw,
n.
198.
to measure,
154.
bow, 32.
fa^mirf,to
be wet, 131.
to
perish,129, 117.
T*T?T rttiA,
to
sprinkle,
41.
to
bind, 135.
*ftmf,
t, to
ina"
nah,
5T niksh, to
to
ny,
kiss, 15.
^^
cleanse,202.
*^
kill,
154.
to
much,
to
loosen, 107.
128.
wiuA,to be foolish,
win,
die,119.
to
to
"p^nnV,
dance, 122.
fS^wiry,
*nff pan,
to
26.
traffic,
OT mnd, to
study,57.
mJTpan,
to
praise,76.
^^mrwcA,
to go,
fall,
64.
1"^ yaj,to
sacrifice,
99.
to go, 133.
TP(yam,to
to
,
to
praise,26, 76.
to see,
^T
", to
48.
pd, to drink,53.
to
yu, to
*V
bfbhatsate,to loathe,63.
badh, "tflHrUr)
"^V bandh,
to
to
;, to
^j ru,
bind, 160.
^j^rud,to
?S^rudh,
to
^J6Ar",to
be,
"5 M,
199.
^T
6Ara",to shine,30.
6^Z"5,to shine,30.
mad,
to
rejoice,
130.
*T^manth, to
shake, to churn, 5.
to measure,
164.
to
76.
out, 203.
break, 107.
cut, 156.
21.
go,
30, 130.
to sink, 117.
mo;)',
1^
to shut
", to
bhram, to roam,
cry,
to paint,109, 107.
'ip,
206.
^R1^bhrajj,to fry,105.
WT
kill,84.
lash,to desire,30.
i.
cany,
shine, 94.
i,to kill,39.
sport, 91.
to go, to
perceive,134.
j, to break,
10.
speak, 190.
to
165.
mix, 169.
to
ram,
eat, 163.
feed,137.
rad, to trace,
"rT,to fill,
195, 156.
TITT psd, to
19.
to tinge,62.
)',
purify,
156.
to
UC^prachh,
clean,174.
to go,
to
", to sow,
to weave,
100.
to go, 105.
val, to h've,137.
300
INDEX
OF
VERBS.
separate, 202.
"y, to
saw,
sich,to sprinkle,107.
172.
sidh, to
^HTfl/.
;
Parasmaipada.
cherish, 161;
to
*[vri,
r^sw,to
Atmanepada.
1JSM,
to be, 87.
"^H^vrit,
^V
vridh, to grow,
i, to
ve, to
pierce,126,
tO
distil,139.
to
let
TsfiH
finish,125, 124.
skambh,
^H" skumbh,
105.
f^
sad, to wither,51.
^^stumbh,
130.
tyl
44 fri
sisdmsati,to sharpen,63.
in,$()
180, 177.
sish,to distinguish,
204.
$fts%
to lie
to
Sp^ s'ncZA,
to
hold, 155.
JsJstu, to praise,189.
command,
support, 155.
WH
sak, to be able,144.
?, to
to
sku, 155.
^j
22.
i, to cease,
off,116,38, 48.
\j,to go,
to
so, to
102.
?, to
82.
serve,
rij,to
stu, to praise,170.
to
stop, 155.
^5T
to
stri,
^ff
141.
cover,
*"
WT
s^^, to stand,56.
is,to touch, 114.
down, 185.
hurt, 87.
Tfft
s'o,to sharpen, 124.
to flow,4.
^K^schut,
to flow, 4.
TZnj^schyut,
"*5T*T
sram,
to
frSf
s'n,to
go, to serve,
", to
to
,
tire,130.
to
,
98.
hear,145.
?, to
^^^shvashk,
kill,168.
"H?
hi,to
go, to grow,
to
143.
kill,205.
hu, to sacrifice,
192.
hurchh, to
*r^!
to spit,35,
fy^shthiv,
sleep,176.
*TT
hims,
"fi|^
breathe,176.
fats'w,to swell,67.
CT
mand,
com-
87.
choose, 156.
weave,
"ftW sidh, to
and
go,
7.
obtain,151.
to
be
crooked,
29.
"^
to go, 71.
to stick,62, 73.
"afJ/,
f,to perish,52.
N*.o1
20.